EST Automatic Fire Detection and Alarm

AUSTIN CENTRAL LIBRARY O & M MANUALS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 28
28 31 00 – FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LETTER OF WARRANTY
EQUIPMENT LIST
SPARE PARTS LIST
EQUIPMENT DATA SHEETS
EST3 OPERATION MANUAL
EST3 PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EST3 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
RECORD SHOP DRAWINGS (FULL SET)
RECORD SHOP DRAWINGS (11X17)
RECORD SHOP DRAWINGS (11X17 FLOOR PLANS
ONLY)
ADDRESS POINTS LIST
RECORDS OF COMPLETION/ACCEPTANCE TEST
FIRE ALARM INSTALLATION CERTIFICATE
VOLUME |# PAGE |1
NEW FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR:
AUSTIN PUBLIC LIBRARY

710 W. CESAR CHAVEZ BLVD.
AUSTIN, TEXAS
78744
CONTRACTED WITH:
BERG ELECTRIC CORPORATION
4509 FRIEDRICH LN, #105
AUSTIN, TEXAS
78744
PROJECT# 47-000682
PERMIT # 2014-109170 BP
SUBMITTED BY:
Austin, Dallas, Denver, Houston, Lake Charles, Lubbock, Phoenix, Salt

Lake, San Antonio, Tyler , Waco
Fire Alarm System
TABLE OF CONTENTS
I. LETTER OF WARRANTY
II. EQUIPMENT LIST
III. SPARE PARTS LIST
IV. EQUIPMENT DATA SHEETS
V. EST3 OPERATION MANUAL
VI. EST3 PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE MANUAL
VII. EST3 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
VIII. RECORD SHOP DRAWINGS (FULL SET)
IX. RECORD SHOP DRAWINGS (11X17)
X. RECORD SHOP DRAWINGS (11X17 FLOOR PLANS ONLY)
XI. ADDRESS POINTS LIST
Update the table of contents to include the following:

1. Sequence of operation (cause and effects matrix)
2. System record of complete (NFPA72).
3. Fire alarm installation certificate.
WARRANTY LETTER
Project: COA Austin Public Library
Address: 710 W. Cesar Chavez Blvd. – Austin, Texas 78744
Job No.: 47- 000682
Acceptance Date: February 10, 2017 when the System was tested with the
Austin Fire Department and Substantial Completion to the Owner.
The undersigned warrants to the Owner and/or General Contractor that all work,
materials and equipment furnished and/or installed for the Project named above are of
good quality, free of defects and in conformance with the Contract Documents. All work,
materials and /or equipment not conforming to these requirements which are proved to be
defective will be (or caused to be) repaired upon notice to the undersigned as provided
below. Exceptions: ordinary wear and tear, unusual abuse and neglect, detectors caused
made dirty by construction debris or through normal use, modification of the
undersigned’s work (or installed materials or equipment) by others, or prior expiration of
any manufacturer equipment or material warranties provided by the undersigned to the
Owner and/or General Contractor.
THE EXPRESS WARRANTIES CONTAINEDHEREIN ARE FOR A PERIOD OF

ONE YEAR FROM SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION OF THE UNDERSIGNED’S
WORK, AND ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSOR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR USE, AND IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
UNDERSIGNED BE LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
Dated: 8-4-2017
Steven White / Operations Manager

FIRETROL PROTECTION SYSTEMS, INC.
400 Parker Drive, Suite 1130 * Austin, Texas 78728 * (512) 687-0115 * Fax (512) 687-0120
www.Firetrol.net
Fire Alarm System
EQUIPMENT LIST
QTY. VENDOR MODEL # DESCRIPTION

FIRE ALARM/MASS NOTIFICATION CONTROL PANEL
2 EST 3-CPU3 MAIN CPU CONTROLLER
1 EST 3-CPUDR CPU DOORS W/ FILLER PLATE WHEN NO LCD.
1 EST 3-LCDXL1 LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY MODULE
2 EST 3-SDDC 1 DUAL SIGNATURE SERIES CONTROLLER MODULE
1 EST 3-SSDC SINGLE SIGNATURE SERIES CONTROLLER MODULE
2 EST 3-PPS/M PRIMARY POWER SUPPLY – 7AMP CAPACITY
2 EST 3-BPS/M BOOSTER POWER SUPPLY – 120V
1 EST 3-ASU/FT AUDIO SOURCE UNIT W/LOCAL MICROPHONE AND
FIREFIGHTERS TELEPHONE
1 EST 3-RS232 RS-232 COMMUNICATION CARD
2 EST 3-RS485A CLASS ‘A’ NETWORK COMMUNICATION CARD
3 EST 3-12SY 12 SWITCHES, 12 YELLOW LED CONTROL/DISPLAY MODULE
3 EST 3-ZA95 95WATT ZONED AMPLIFIER W/CLASS A/B AUDIO OUTPUT
1 EST 3-MODCOM MODEM/DIALER
1 EST 3-CAB21B BACK BOX W/21 LRM SPACE W/O DOOR
1 EST 3-CAB21D DOOR ASSEMBLY FOR 3-CAB21
3 EST 3-CHAS7 CHASSIS ASSEMBLY FOR 7 LRM’S
3 EST 3-LRMF LOCAL RAIL MODULE FILLER – MOUNT IN BLANK LRM SPACE
15 EST 3-FP FILLER PLATE FOR LRM DOOR
1 EST 3-XFP FILLER PLATE
1 EST PT-1S SYSTEM PRINTER
2 INTERSTATE SLA1165 12V, 55AH BATTERY
2 INTERSTATE SLA1116 12V, 18AH BATTERY
1 SPACE AGE SSU00501 BATTERY CABINET
1 SPACE AGE SSU00672 DOCUMENT CABINET
9 SPACE AGE SSU0635 TERMINAL CABINET
FIRE ALARM ANNUNCIATOR PANEL
1 EST 3-LCDANN ANNUNCIATOR
1 EST RLCM/B FLUSH BOX FOR 3-LCD6ANN
FIRE ALARM SMOKE CONTROL GRAPHIC ANNUNCIATOR
1 Kirkland RSF-L-GR SMOKE CONTROL GRAPHIC ANNUNCIATOR
BOOSTER POWER SUPPLY
16 EST BPS10A BOOSTER POWER SUPPLY – 10 AMP CAPACITY
32 INTERSTATE SLA1075 12V, 7.2AH BATTERY
Fire Alarm System
EQUIPMENT LIST CONTINUED….

NAC CONTROL MODULE
8 EST SIGA-CC1S ADDRESSABLE SYNCHRONIZATION OUTPUT MODULE
AREA SMOKE DETECTORS

183 EST SIGA2-PS ADDRESSABLE PHOTOELECTRIC SMOKE DETECTOR
183 EST SIGA-SB4 SMOKE DETECTOR BASE
AREA HEAT DETECTORS

12 EST SIGA2-HRS ADDRESSABLE PHOTOELECTRIC HEAT DETECTOR
BEAM DETECTORS
5 SPACE AGE FE-5000-103 REFLECTIVE BEAM SMOKE DETECTOR HEAD AND PRISM
DUCT-SMOKE DETECTORS
21 EST SIGA-SD ADDRESSABLE DUCT-SMOKE DETECTOR
21 EST SD-T60 60” SAMPLING TUBES
MANUAL PULL STATIONS

1 EST SIGA-278 ADDRESSABLE DOUBLE-ACTION MANUAL PULL STATION
INPUT MODULE
9 EST SIGA-CT1 ADDRESSABLE SINGLE INPUT MODULE
102 EST SIGA-CT2 ADDRESSABLE DUAL INPUT MODULE
OUTPUT MODULE
29 EST SIGA-CC1/MCC1 ADDRESSABLE SINGLE OUTPUT SIGNAL MODULE
6 EST SIGA-CC2/MCC2 ADDRESSABLE DUAL OUTPUT SIGNAL MODULE
CONTROL RELAY MODULE

95 EST SIGA-CR/MCR ADDRESSABLE CONTROL RELAY MODULE
ISOLATION MODULE
15 EST SIGA-IM ADDRESSABLE ISOLATOR MODULE
Fire Alarm System

RELAYS/MISC
6 EST MR101C MULTI-VOLTAGE RELAY
6 EST PAM-1 MULTI-VOLTAGE RELAY
7 EST UIO-6R UNIVERSAL IN/OUT MOTHERBOARD
3 EST MFC-A MOUNTING CABINET FOR UIO BOARD
SPEAKERS
38 EST GC-S7 CEILING MOUNT, SPEAKER STROBE – WHITE
49 EST G4-S7 WALL MOUNT, SPEAKER STROBE – WHITE
SPEAKER/STROBES
102 EST G4-S7VM 70V WALL MOUNT, MULTI-CANDELA SPEAKER STROBE
- WHITE
140 EST GC-S7VM 70V CEILING MOUNT, MULTI-CANDELA SPEAKER STROBE
- WHITE
1 EST GC-S7VMH 70V WALL MOUNT, MULTI-CANDELA HIGH CANDELA, SPEAKER
STROBE- WHITE
37 EST WG4WF-SVMC 70V WALL MOUNT, WEATHERPROOF MULTI-CANDELA SPEAKER
STROBE- WHITE
28 EST WG4WF-SVMHC 70V WALL MOUNT, WEATHERPROOF MULTI-CANDELA, HIGH
CANDELA, SPEAKER STROBE - WHITE
STROBES
54 EST GC-VM CEILING MOUNT, MULTI-CANDELA STROBE – WHITE
7 EST G1-VM WALL MOUNT, MULTI-CANDELA STROBE – WHITE
FIRE FIGHTER PHONES
58 EST 6833-4 4 STATE TELEPHONE RECEPTACLE
6 EST 6830-3 PORTABLE HANDSET, BLACK W/ 5’ COILED CORD & PLUG
1 EST TCS-6 PORTABLE HANDSET STORAGE CABINET
OTHER
6 EST 592 24 VAC POWER TRANSFORMER
Fire Alarm System

WIRING
Per NEC #760
~ TAPPAN: 1480BB2 “R,Z” TYPE, FPLP CABLE 14AWG 2-CONDUCTOR COPPER WIRE JACKET
COLOR AS INDICATED ON DRAWING LEGEND – NAC, RELAY.
~ TAPPAN: 1680BB2 “A,V,X” TYPE, FPLP CABLE 16AWG 2-CONDUCTOR COPPER WIRE JACKET
COLOR AS INDICATED ON DRAWING LEGEND – SLC, AUX, BEAM MONITOR.
~ TAPPAN: 1680BB2M “P,F” TYPE, FPLP CABLE 16AWG 2-CONDUCTOR COPPER WIRE OVERALL SHIELD
WIRE JACKET COLOR AS INDICATED ON DRAWING LEGEND – SPEAKER, PHONE
RISER.
~TAPPAN: 575614 “D” TYPE, FPLP CABLE 18AWG 2-CONDUCTOR COPPER OVERALL SHIELDED
WIRE W/ORANGE JACKET – RS485 DATA
~COMTRAN: 35787 “F*” TYPE, FPLR- CI CABLE 14AWG 2-CONDUCTOR COPPER WIRE OVERALL
SHIELD W/RED JACKET – FIRE PHONES WHERE INDICATED.
~ WEST PENN: 60995BS ”R*” TYPE, FPLP CABLE 12AWG 2-CONDUCTOR STRANDED COPPER WIRE /RED
JACKET - NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE CIRCUITS PN. 60995BS
SPARE PARTS LIST

Fire Alarm System
SPARE PARTS LIST

AREA SMOKE DETECTORS
4 EST SIGA2-PS ADDRESSABLE PHOTOELECTRIC SMOKE DETECTOR
AREA HEAT DETECTORS

1 EST SIGA2-HRS ADDRESSABLE PHOTOELECTRIC HEAT DETECTOR
BEAM DETECTORS
1 SPACE AGE FE-5000-103 REFLECTIVE BEAM SMOKE DETECTOR HEAD AND PRISM
DUCT-SMOKE DETECTORS
1 EST SIGA-SD ADDRESSABLE DUCT-SMOKE DETECTOR
1 EST SD-T60 60” SAMPLING TUBES
MANUAL PULL STATIONS

1 EST SIGA-278 ADDRESSABLE DOUBLE-ACTION MANUAL PULL STATION
EST Catalog u EST3 Life Safety Platform
EST3 Base Platform

With Signature Series Fire Alarm
Overview Standard Features

EST3 is a modular control platform uniquely designed to meet • Listed for Mass Notification/Emergency Communication, Fire,
the needs of applications ranging from standalone single panel Security, Access Control, and Emergency Voice Alarm
fire alarm systems to multi-panel networks with unified fire alarm,
• 168-character LCD
security, access control and Mass Notification functions. Each
function uses many of the same components, simplifying system • Exceptional alarm response times
layouts. • Network supports copper, multi-mode fiber, single-mode fiber,
Virtually all EST3 operating features are software-controlled. A or a combination of all three
powerful System Definition Utility program helps define system • Total network wiring over 160,000 feet
operations in a fraction of the time required by previous meth-
ods. This gives EST3 great site flexibility and ensures operational • Eight channels of multiplexed digital audio on a single pair of
changes and upgrades will be possible years after the initial instal- wires or fiber filiment
lation. • Zoned, distributed and banked audio amplifier options
EST3 is uniquely designed to meet the life safety needs of any size • Local, Proprietary, and Central Station system operations
facility. The function of each panel can be customized by using an
extensive selection of plug and play local rail modules. • In retrofit applications, existing wiring may be used if code
compliant
With support for 64 nodes of up to 2,500 devices each, this
• Supports Edwards Signature Series detectors and modules
network’s multi-priority peer-to-peer token ring protocol delivers a
fast alarm response time across any size network. Add to that the • Designed in accordance with ISO-9000 quality standards
ability to network panels with fiber or copper connections with an
• UL864 Ninth Edition Listed
overall length of 160000 ft - that’s 30 miles - and you’ve got virtu-
ally unlimited networking options. • UL2572 Listed for Mass Notification
• Optional earthquake hardening: OSHPD seismic pre-approval
The EST3 is modularly listed under the following standards: UL 864 for component Importance Factor 1.5
categories: UOJZ, UOXX, UUKL and SYZV, UL 294 category ALVY, UL
609 category AOTX, UL 636 category ANET, UL 1076 category APOU,
UL 365 category APAW, UL 1610 category AMCX, UL 1635 category
AMCX, UL2572 Mass Notification.
Also listed to ULC-S527, ULC-S303, and ULC/ORD-C1076.
Page 1 of 4 D ATA S H E E T 85010-0145

Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 2
Outstanding Features Digital Audio
EST3 system components are arranged in layers, starting with the EST3 digitized audio can deliver up to eight audio messages
backbox and finishing with inner and outer doors. Cabinets are simultaneously over a single pair of wires! This is plenty of capacity
available with room for up to 20 modules and system batteries up for both live and pre-recorded messages. EST3 easlly supports
to 65 AH. A single 24-volt battery can act as the secondary power the needs of mass notification messaging, and fire alarm messag-
supply for all four internal power supplies. Once the backbox is ing by providing the ability to bring not only pre-recorded messag-
installed, up to four power supplies can be installed in the chassis es but also live voice messaging supporting not only evacuation
assembly. The power supplies use a unique paralleling arrange- announcments but the messaging needed to support the risks
ment that ensures the optimum use of each supply. Each supply that may require shelter-in-place and relocation messaging.
has the capacity to deliver up to 7 amps at 24 Vdc (28 amps All audio messages and live pages originate at the Audio Source
total). Unit (ASU) that can store up to 100 minutes pre-recorded audio
The function of each messages as .wav
life safety network files. These mes-
panel is determined by sages can be auto-
the Local Rail Modules matically directed to
(LRMs) plugged into various areas in a fa-
the panel’s chassis. cility under program
An extensive variety of control. On the
modules are avail- receiving end, zoned
able, including central amplifiers installed
processing units, in remote fire alarm
input/output circuit cabinets receive and
modules, communica- decode the dig-
tion modules, secu- LOCAL CONTROL INNER
ital messages. The
OUTER messages are then
rity/access control CHASSIS RAIL
MODULES
DISPLAY
MODULES
DOOR
COVER DOOR
modules, and audio amplified and sent
BOX
amplifier modules. out to the speakers.
The top layer of the LRMs is referred to as the user interface layer. The availability of eight different channels opens a number of new
This layer is made up of the Main Display Interface module and simultaneous notification possibilities:
a system of generic control/display modules. Any control/dis- 1) Live voice page for MNEC or fire-related instructions;
play module can mount on any LRM. This maximizes flexibility of
2) Emergency floor evacuation/notification message;
design for custom systems. The inner and outer doors finish and
secure the enclosure. 3) Alert message on floors above and below the emergency;
4) Stairwell evacuation reinforcement message;
A single panel can support up to 2,500 addressable points,
provide 28 amps @ 24 Vdc, provide access control for up to 124 5) Elevator cab information messages;
doors, and still have room for future expansion. If a single panel is 6) Lobby message instructing occupants to exit the building;
not large enough or you need to distribute functionality throughout 7) Concourse instructions to occupants not to enter the lobby;
the project, then you can network up to 64 panels together!
8) Other instructions to areas not directly affected by the emer-
gency.
Networking/Communications Any combination of the eight audio channels can be automatically
The EST3 Life Safety Network uses a multi-priority peer-to-peer directed to any or all areas of the building, with total manual over-
token ring protocol. The protocol gives EST3 the exceptionally ride as required. Eight channel capability assures that one mes-
fast alarm response time of less than three seconds across the sage is never interrupted in order to process another, a common
network, virtually independent of the total number of nodes. The fault with two-channel systems. This eliminates any chance of
EST3 token ring network configuration also affords long distances confusing the occupants with conflicting messages.
between panels. The distance between any three panels on #18 Survivability is also an integral part of EST3’s digitized audio
AWG (1.0 mm²) is 5,000 ft (1,523m) for both network control and system. Default audio messages are continuously transmitted to
digital audio signals. Supporting a maximum of 64 panels on a all network amplifiers by the ASU. These messages provide audio
network, the total network length can be in excess of 160000 ft supervision for the digital audio chain, and act as a default signal
(48768m). Network and audio communication are via RS-485 if the network data circuit fails or should message control infor-
serial ports. Each two-wire circuit supports Class A (Style 7) or mation fail to reach the ASU. If the audio data circuit fails, each
Class B (Style 4) wiring configurations. Fiber optic media is also amplifier generates a 1KHz temporal (3-3-3) tone that is transmit-
available. ted during an alarm. In the event of an amplifier failure, a backup
As an indication of the high level of system integration, off-premise audio amplifier is automatically substituted for the failed amplifier
communications is handled by the Modcom modem communica- in the cabinet, restoring audio capability. In the unlikely event of
tor module. This module provides the Digital Alarm Communicator multiple amplifier failures, the backup amp replaces the amplifier
Transmitter (DACT) function, sending system status signals for up actively processing the highest priority message in the cabinet.
to 255 accounts to up to 80 different central monitoring stations When messages are no longer directed to a failed amplifier such
and/or commercial paging carriers. The Modcom also acts as a as when a high priority page message ends, the backup amp is
V.32bis 14.4K-baud modem for uploading and downloading of dynamically reassigned to the next highest priority failed amplifier
system access control data remotely via the telephone network. actively processing messages

The Firefighters Telephone Control unit Typical Wiring
(FTCU) provides two-way communications
between remotely located phones and the To next remote
floor panel
fire command center. The alphanumeric
display makes operation intuitive, and a
single switch permits the phone signals to
be used to issue pages in the facility. 2 Tw. Pr. 3 Pr. 3 Pr.
1 Tw/Sh Pr.
Digitized audio increases notification mes- S I J S SR J S S S F
saging flexibility, reduces wiring and instal- 1 Pr. CR J MM FIRE F WATER
lation costs, provides enhanced supervi- DAMPER S MM LEVEL

MONITOR
HVAC HVAC
sion and survivability, and is easy to use. CONTROL MONITOR
S S J S S F
CC
1 Tw/Sh Pr.
4th FLOOR
3 Pr. 3 Pr.
Enhanced Reliability & Survivability 1 Pr &

2 Tw/Sh Pr.
The EST3 uses distributed technology,

designed to survive expected and un- SI MM J S S S S S J S S F
expected events including earthquakes. Remote 1 Pr.
Simple-to-install kits provide internal hard-

Floor Panel
(Node) CRITICAL PROCESS
MONITOR
J S S S F S
ening that meets ;requirements defined by Primary 1 Pr &
Uniform Building Code (UBC 1997); Inter- Power 2 Tw/Sh Pr. 1 Tw/Sh Pr. S S S S S F
Source
national Building Code (IBC 2006); and, CC
F
Acceptance Criteria for Seismic Qualifica- 3rd FLOOR
3 Pr. 3 Pr.
tion by Shake-Table Testing of Nonstruc-
tural Components and Systems (AC-156). CPU,
power supply
Seismic component importance factor & booster,
dual loop
of 1.5 can be met by adding appropriate module
3 amplifiers, 1 Tw/Sh Pr.
anchorage for local conditions. There is no & batteries CC
1 Pr & 2 Tw/Sh Pr.
need for special installation methods for
EST3 field devices including signals and
1 Pr
2 Tw. Pr.
1 Tw/Sh Pr.
MM HVAC MONITOR
WATERFLOW
SPRINKLER
SUPERVISORY
detection devises. By following standard F
SWITCH SWITCH
CR HVAC CONTROL
mounting methods, along with any local Network
requirements, seismic Importance Fac- control,
audio, SI SI J CR F J CT CT
tor 1.5 may be gained in order to further & telephone
ELEVATOR CAPTURE
enhance system survivability. 2nd FLOOR
On the initiating side, intelligent Signature

Series detectors can make alarm deci-
sions on their own, and do not involve 3 Pr. 3 Pr.
other system components in this important SI J S S SR J

S S S F
decision-making process. Sensor-based 1 Pr. CR J MM WATER
technology must communicate data to a FIRE F MM LEVEL
DAMPER MONITOR
remotely located common panel where HVAC
CONTROL
HVAC
MONITOR
alarm decisions are made. Failure of this CC S S J
S S F
centralized processor can cripple sensor- 1st FLOOR 1 Tw/Sh Pr.
based systems. With EST3, a panel CPU 1 Pr &

3 Pr. 3 Pr.
failure does not disable a panel’s ability to 2 Tw/Sh Pr.
provide protection. In the event of a CPU

failure, the intelligent device controllers can SI J S S S S S J S S F
still receive alarms and distribute the alarm
information to all other modules in the 1 Pr. S S S J S S S F S
panel. Modules in the panel are capable of
responding with a programmed standalone 1 Pr & S S S S S S F
2 Tw/Sh Pr.
alarm response. F
CC
When a network is wired in a Class B 1 Tw/Sh Pr.
configuration, a single break or short on Primary Central

the wiring isolates the system into two Power
Source
TELCO Monitoring
Station
groups of panels. Each group continues CPU w/display, power supply & booster,
dual loop module, audio source module w/master
to function as a peer-to-peer network, firefighter's telephone, 2 amplifiers, & batteries
working with their combined databases. Printer
GROUND FLOOR
When wired using a Class A configuration,
a single break or short on the network
wiring causes the system to isolate the
fault, and network communication con-
tinues uninterrupted – without any loss of

function. Should multiple wiring faults occur, Optional manual control switches and dis-
the network re-configures into many sub- play modules can be arranged on the system
networks and continues to respond to alarm operator layer to suit the application. These
events from every panel that can transmit modules can be used to provide additional
and receive network messages. Survivabil- HVAC controls, manual selection of audio
Detection & alarm since 1872 ity is maximized as responses originating circuits, or other required manual control
and executed by a single panel are always functions.
U.S.
carried out because a copy of the system
T 888-378-2329 The digital audio system uses only five basic
F 866-503-3996 database is stored in the panel’s memory.
controls to direct all paging messages.
Canada Scheduled maintenance improves system
· ALL CALL directs page messages to all
Chubb Edwards availability, and EST3 is designed to make
T 519 376 2430 zones in the facility.
system maintenance easy. System compo-
F 519 376 7258
nents are designed to assist in routine and · Page to EVACUATION automatically
Southeast Asia time-consuming service functions. directs page messages to the fire area.
T : +65 6391 9300 · Page to ALERT automatically directs page
F : +65 6391 9306 · EST3 service groups are defined by loca-
messages to the areas receiving the alert
tion, not by system wiring. There is no
India message.
T : +91 80 4344 2000
need to disable an entire floor to test a
F : +91 80 4344 2050 single device. · All Call Minus automatically directs page
messages to the areas NOT receiving the
· According to their UL listings, Signature
Australia evacuation or alert messages.
T +61 3 9239 1200 Series detectors do not require routine
F +61 3 9239 1299 sensitivity testing – a real timesaver. · Page by Phone selects the firefighters’ tel-
ephone system as the source for paging.
Europe · Comprehensive internal and external mon-
T +32 2 725 11 20 itoring quickly identifies most problems to The Firefighters’ Telephone Control Unit
F +32 2 721 86 13 a component level, including ground faults (FTCU) uses an alphanumeric display to
Latin America
that can be identified down to the module. indicate the source of incoming calls. Opera-
T 305 593 4301 · Parts are easy to replace. Modules plug in tors simply scroll through the list and hit the
F 305 593 4300
and use automatic addressing and plug-in “Connect” button when the desired call is
utcfireandsecurity.com field wiring. No DIP switches are used. highlighted. There is no need to look through
rows of lamps and switches to determine the
· Firmware in system modules and Signa-
© 2010 UTC Fire & Security. source of calls. Up to five remote locations
All rights reserved. ture devices is easily upgraded as new
can be in simultaneous two-way communi-
advances in detection and control technol-
cations with the FTCU.
ogy are made available.
· Advanced system diagnostics are pro-
vided in the EST3 System Definition Utility.
System Configuration
The powerful EST3 System Definition Utility
(SDU) helps define flexible system operations
User Friendly
in a fraction of the time required by other
A comprehensive survey of users resulted in systems. Based on an object-oriented sys-
system features and controls that are easy to tem of rules, virtually all EST3 operating fea-
use. tures are software-controlled. This gives the
The main display interface shows the opera- designer great flexibility in integrating mass
tor the first and most recent system events notification, fire, security, and access control
– without ever touching a single control! All functions into a single seamless design.
system events are sent to one of four mes- A report generator provides a complete
sage queues. Alarm messages are never in- library of system reports that are invaluable
termixed with trouble or supervisory signals, for troubleshooting, including a printout of
eliminating confusion. For more informa- Signature device connections as the devices
tion the Details switch provides additional are actually wired.
information about the highlighted device.
The operator can easily review supervisory, Use of software-based components permits the
trouble, and monitor messages by simply SDU to add new features to the system. Even
selecting the appropriate message queue. the Signature Series devices are capable of
After a few minutes of inactivity, the system upgrading firmware as new detection algorithms
automatically returns to displaying the first become available.
and most recent events.
05-18-11

EST3 Central
Processor Unit
3-CPU3, 3-RS485A, 3-RS485B,
3-RS232 EN54-2:1997+A1
and EN54-
4:1997+A1:2002+A2
pending.

The 3-CPU3 is the Central Processing Unit Module monitoring the • Up to 1,000 history events
status of all modules and providing the link for network commu-
• RS-485 local rail communications
nications. Although each local rail card contains their own micro-
processor, the 3-CPU3 provides all inter-module communication • Multiplexed audio channels
and has the ability to download rail module operating parameters. • Network communication media can consist of twisted copper
Upon power up the 3-CPU3 automatically learns all local rail module RS485, short-haul modems and/or single or multimode fiber
attributes and locations. Site specific software is loaded into the optic cables
3-CPU3 which then downloads data to each local rail module.
Firmware upgrades are also done from the 3-CPU3 eliminating the • RS-232 communication card
need to unplug chips on rail modules. • Form ‘C’ contacts for: Alarm, Supervisory and Trouble
Mounting must be in the first two local rail spaces of the upper • Low voltage memory write protection
3-CHAS7 (module chassis). Options for the 3-CPU3 include the
addition of an LCD display and User Interface, RS-232 Communi- • Non-volatile memory
cation Card, and RS-485 Series Network Communication Cards.
The 3-CPU3 is fully compatible on the same network with the
3-CPU and 3-CPU1 modules.

Application Installation and Mounting
The 3-CPU3 helps make EST3 an extremely powerful and flexible
system. As a single node, stand alone system a single 3-CPU3
controls 1 to 19 additional local rail modules. For larger systems,
up to 64 nodes interconnect on a peer-to-peer multi-priority token
J9
J8
Power Power
J11
J10
ring protocol network.

Supply Supply
The 3-CPU3 controls all local panel responses to automatic, user
initiated, or network reported events. As a network node, it is an J9
equal among peers, there is no master on the network. This gives

J8
J11
J10
Central
exceptional response times over the network, less than three Processor L L L L L
seconds. Unit
R R R R R
Module
Each 3-CPU3 provides slots at the back for mounting Network, 3-CPU3 M M M M M
and RS-232, cards. Removable terminal blocks on the 3-CPU3
support connection of network and audio data wiring. On board
common relays also terminate at the 3-CPU3 terminals. To aid Data
in trouble shooting and service, status LEDs monitor local rail,
Maximum resistance between any 3 panels 90 Ohms
network, RS232 and audio data communications.
Maximum capacitance between any 3 panels 0.3 µF
The Network Communications card mounts to the back of the Maximum distance between any 3 panels
5,000 ft. (1,524 m)
Central Processor Unit. The 3-RS485A card provides a Class A via RS485
(Style 7) or Class B (Style 4) circuit for network communications
Capacitance, entire network
signals and support for a Class B (Style 4) or Class A (Style 7 - Maximum Accumulative Capacitance
dual Style 4) circuit for the digitized audio signals. The 3-RS485B
Wire Size 38.4K Baud 19.2K Baud
card provides a Class B (Style 4) or Class A (Style 7) circuit for
18 AWG 1.4 µF 2.8 µF
network communications signals and a second Class B (Style 4)
16 AWG 1.8 µF 3.6 µF
circuit for the digitized audio signals. Network messages received
14 AWG 2.1 µF 4.2 µF
by the Network Communications card are re-transmitted to the
next network node. Re-transmission maximizes the wire run
lengths between nodes. With 64 nodes miles of network length is Audio
possible. Fail safe mechanisms built into the card direct connect Maximum resistance between any 3 panels 90 Ohms
the data input and output ports should the network card or its Maximum capacitance between any 3 panels 0.09 µF
related Central Processor fail. Network communications may be Maximum distance between any 3 panels
5,000 ft. (1,524 m)
configured via copper or fiber media using the 3-FIBMB. via copper RS485
The 3-RS232 Communication Card mounts to the back of the

3-CPU3. The 3-RS232 has two optically isolated RS-232 ports.
The ports support connection of a printer and/or an external com-
mand center. Entire network downloading from one location (to all
64 nodes) is available through the RS-232 card.
Engineering Specification
It must be possible to support a single stand alone node or up
to 64 nodes communicating on a peer-to-peer token ring proto-
col network. Network and digitized audio wiring shall be run in a
[choose one: Class A (Style 7) or Class B (Style 4)] configuration.
Network alarm response from alarm input to signal activation must
be under 3 seconds. All field wiring must be to removable terminal
blocks. Status LEDs must be provided for communications of net-
work and internal rail communications. Inter-node communication
speed must be programmable. Internal rail communications speed
must be programmable.

Typical Wiring
To external supervisory
input circuit
To external alarm
input circuit
To external trouble
input circuit
Notes
1. Maximum #14 AWG (1.5 mm2) wire;
minimum #18 AWG (0.75 mm2).
3-CPU(1)(3) Module
3-CPU(1)(3) Module
NC C NO NO C N/A NC NO C NC
To/From next panel
TROUBLE ALARM SUP

2. All shields, if used, must be continuous
From next panel
Connect to TB1 on 3-CPU3 Module

and insulated from ground, except at the
originating panel.
Network Audio Riser
CENTRAL 3. Class A network data requires one pair

of wires connecting the last node to the
PROCESSING first node.
Class A only
UNIT MODULE 4. Class A audio data requires two pairs

of wires running in opposite directions,
originating at the node containing the
Connect to TB2 on 3-CPU3 Module ASU.
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DB9 FEMALE
(REAR VIEW)
PIN 9
(5) COM
(3) TXD PORT #2(isolated)
TO PRINTER OR REMOTE
Network Data Riser
(2) RXD
PIN 1
COMMAND SYSTEM,
PLUG PIN #
PIN FUNCTION
OR
DB25 FEMALE
(REAR VIEW)
PIN 13 PIN 25
Network Audio Riser PORT #2(isolated)

(7) COM TO PRINTER OR REMOTE
Class A only COMMAND SYSTEM,
(3) RXD
(2) TXD
PIN 14
PIN 1
To previous panel
3-CPU(1)(3) Module or a
3-ASU
To/From previous
panel 3-CPU(1)(3) or
a 3-ASU
PIN 13 PIN 25
DB25 FEMALE
(REAR VIEW)
PORT #1
(7) COM
ISOLATED PORT
TO PRINTER OR REMOTE
COMMAND SYSTEM.
(3) RXD
(2) TXD
PIN 14
PIN 1

Specifications
3-CPU3
Agency Listings UL, ULC, CSFM, CE, LPCB EN54* pending.
Mounting 2 - Left most local rail spaces
Detection & alarm since 1872 Terminal Size 18-12 AWG (1.0mm² to 2.5mm²)
Standby Current 155 mA
U.S. Alarm Current 165 mA
T 888-378-2329
F 866-503-3996 Contact Ratings Nonbypassable Alarm, Supervisory and Trouble Form ‘C’ 1A at 30 Vdc
Data Down Loading RJ14 Jack
Canada Operating Environment 0°C - 49°C (32° F - 120° F); 93% at 40° C Non-Condensing
Chubb Edwards
*EN54-2:1997+A1 and EN54-4:1997+A1:2002+A2 pending
T 519 376 2430
F 519 376 7258
Note: CPU current includes the main power supply, since the CPU and PPS cannot be measured
separately.
Southeast Asia
T : +65 6391 9300 Option Cards
F : +65 6391 9306
Catalog number 3-RS232 3-RS485A 3-RS485B
India Standby Current 58 mA 98 mA 98 mA
T : +91 80 4344 2000 Alarm Current 58 mA 98 mA 98 mA
F : +91 80 4344 2050 One Class B (Style 4)

or Class A (Style 7)
Australia Two optically isolated Three RS-485 Class A
T +61 3 9239 1200 Communication Ports network data circuit
RS-232 (Style 7)
F +61 3 9239 1299 and one Class B (Style
4) audio data circuit
Europe Agency Listings UL, ULC. CSFM, CE, LPCB. EN54 pending*.
T +32 2 725 11 20
Mounting Back of 3-CPU3
F +32 2 721 86 13
Operating Environment 0° C - 49° C (32° F - 120° F); 93% at 40° C Non-Condensing
Latin America *EN54-2:1997+A1 and EN54-4:1997+A1:2002+A2 pending
T 305 593 4301
F 305 593 4300
utcfireandsecurity.com
Ordering Information
© 2010 UTC Fire & Security.
All rights reserved. Catalog Ship Wt.
Description
Number lb (kg)
3-CPU3 Central Processor Unit Module 0.7lb (0.32kg)
0.33lb
3-RS485A Network Communications Card, Class A (Style 7)
(0.15kg)
One Class A/B network data circuit and one Class B audio data 0.33lb
3-RS485B
circuit (0.15kg)
0.33lb
3-RS232 RS-232 Communication Card
(0.15kg)
CPU doors with filler plates. Order separately, one required per CPU 0.25lb
3-CPUDR
where no LCD display is installed. (0.11kg)
05-18-11

Eight Event Liquid

Crystal Display
Module
3-LCDXL1
Standard Features Application

• Uses simple lights and switches The 3-LCDXL1 module mounts to the 3-CPU and extends over
the first four local rail module slots. The 3-LCDXL1 module is
• Simultaneous display of eight events
optional in any network node. EST3 networks can support any
• Hands free first alarm display combination of 3-LCDXL1 and 3-LCD display modules.
• Last event of highest priority always displays Ensuring information clarity the 3-LCDXL1 uses a backlit high con-
• 24 lines by 40 character graphic LCD display trast supertwist display. 24 lines of 40 characters provide the room
needed to convey emergency information in a useful format.
• Multilingual
The 3-LCDXL1 always displays the last highest priority event even
• Events categorized and displayed in Queues when the user is viewing other message queues. Further message
• Slide-in LED and switch labels flexibility is provided with EST3’s message routing ability. Messag-
es from a node can display at every node on the network or mes-
• Compatible with other 3-LCD and 3-LCDXL(1) displays on the sages can route to specific nodes only. Routing can be initiated at
same network a specific time/shift change. There is no need to have messages
• Listed to latest ULC-S527 Control Panel Standard display in areas that are not affected by an event.
• UL 9th Edition Listed The 3-LCDXL1 can display system messages in either English,
French or Spanish.
The EST3 system configures for Local or Proprietary operation in
Overview compliance with U.S. or Canadian marketplace requirements. The
The 3-LCD series of display modules is the primary user interface mode of operation is selected through the System Definition Utility
for the EST3 Life Safety System. Designed specifically to meet the (SDU) which may adjust the following operations slightly to fit the
latest Control Panel Standard the 3-LCDXL1 provides 8 simulta- system operation selected.
neous events to be displayed. Emergency operator information
shows the first 7 highest priority events in addition to the most
recent event. Simple to understand LEDs and switches help the
emergency user to display information and execute system com-
mands with confidence.

Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 5.1
About LEDs and Switches In the center of the 3-LCDXL1 is the Liquid Crystal Display. In
Further enhancing the 3-LCDXL1 user interface are easy to read the system normal condition the date and time plus a definable
and understand lights and switches. All functions are laid out in a system title are displayed on the LCD. The last line of the display
logical order. At the top of the 3-LCDXL1 are five system status gives an alarm history. This total equals the number of times the
LEDs, indicating the general condition of the system. system has entered the alarm state from the normal state.
When active events are on display, the LCD formats into four logi-
cal windows.
13:35:07 02/17/2003 ACT:0020 DIS:0000
-- SELECTED ALARM --
0001 ZONE ACTIVE
Zone 1 - 40 characters location text
Power LED: Green, on when AC power is on. -- ALARM QUEUE --
0001 ZONE ACTIVE
Zone 1 40 characters location text
Test LED: Yellow, on when any portion of the system (Group) 0002 PULL ACTIVE
is under test. Pull 2 location text
0003 ALARM ACTIVE
Alarm 3 location text
CPU Fail LED: Yellow, on when CPU stops running. 0004 HEAT ACTIVE
Heat 4 location text
Gnd Fault LED: Yellow, on when a ground exists on the sys- 0005 ALARM ACTIVE
Alarm 5 location text
tem (group) 0006 AND ACTIVE
And 6 location text
0007 WATERFLOW ACTIVE
Disable LED: Yellow, on when any point or zone is disabled by Waterflow 7 location text
a user. -- MOST RECENT ALARM --
0020 PULL ACTIVE
Pull 20 - 40 characters location text
ALARM SUPERVISORY TROUBLE MONITOR
0020 0000 0000 0000 ✟
In the system status window (top line), the display shows the time
and the status of active and disabled points.
The “Selected Alarm” window, lines 2, 3, 4 automatically display
Located below the general status LEDs are four, LED / Switch the first active event of the highest priority if the user has not taken
common controls. The versatility of EST3 allows system design- control of the system. Once the emergency user takes control, this
ers to define the features as affecting a domain (defined group of window displays user message selections.
nodes) or as global (affects all nodes) across the network. This The system events window of the display shows system event
feature is very useful when configuring systems with multiple build- information. In the example above, the display shows the alarm
ings on one network. As an example, operating the reset in one queue as indicated by the window header and the reversed text
building may have adverse effect in other buildings. With EST3, on the bottom two lines.
having operational differences between buildings on the same
network is not a problem. The queue shows the chronological number of the event (0001
is the first alarm event) followed by the event type (Zone Active).
Pressing Reset starts the system’s reset operation. The yellow EST3 supports over 60 event type messages from which system
LED has three flash rates during reset. The LED flashes fast during designers choose. The second line of each event is the custom
the smoke power down phase of reset, flashes slow during the re- programmable location message, which has space for 40 char-
start phase, and turns on steady for the restoral phase. The Reset acters.
LED turns off when the system is normal.
Pressing Alarm Silence turns off all Notification Appliance Circuits
defined as audible. The yellow LED turns on when silence is active
via the Alarm Silence switch or via alarm silence software timers.
Pressing Panel Silence turns off the system’s internal audible
signal. The yellow LED turns on when panel silence is active. The Most Recent Event window shows the last highest priority
Pressing Drill turns on the drill LED and all signals sound evacua- event in the system (a pull station in this example). This window is
tion. Drill does not activate city tie connections. Auxiliary relays will always displayed and updated automatically by the system. Here
not activate unless programmed to do so with drill. the emergency user can monitor the progress of a fire.
13:35:07 02/17/2003
When EST3 is configured for a local mode system viewing the
subsequent alarm messages is easy, just press the NEXT key.
The next message scrolls into the selected alarm window. The
One line for event number, type, status
One line (40 characters) for location
last highest priority event always remains in view. No matter what
queue the user selects for viewing, the LCD always displays the
most recent alarm. A new alarm event resounds the panel audible
signal and appears immediately on display without overwriting
information the user selected for view
The last two lines on the display make up the status window. This
window shows the total number of active events by queue type:
Alarm, Supervisory, Trouble, and Monitor. The number below each
event is the number of active events existing in each queue.
Alarm History Count: 0000

Guide Specification
The system shall provide a user interface that displays system
events in a text format, and supports basic common control LEDs
and switches. The Common Control Switches and LEDs provided
as minimum will be; Reset switch and LED, Alarm Silence switch
and LED, Panel Silence switch and LED, Drill switch and LED. It
EST3 breaks down event types into queues and automatically must be possible to add additional common controls as required
displays the first event of the highest priority type. Priority order through the use of modular display units. The user interface must
is alarm, supervisory, trouble, and monitor. By using queues an provide an LCD that will allow custom event messages of up to
emergency user does not waste time scrolling through a mixed 40 characters. The interface must provide a minimum of 24 lines
event list looking for alarms or confusing an alarm message with by 40 characters and provide the emergency user, hands free
other message types. viewing of the first and last highest priority event. The last high-
est priority event must always display and update automatically.
EST3 may be configured for Remote proprietary system opera-
Events shall be automatically placed in easy to access queues. It
tion where every event must be acknowledged by viewing them
shall be possible to view specific event types separately. Having
before the internal buzzer will silence. Alternately the EST3 may be
to scroll through a mixed list of event types is not acceptable. The
configured for Local operation. Here the internal buzzer silences
total number of active events by type must be displayed. Visual
by pressing panel silence. If any events exist in queues that have
indication must be provided of any event type which has not
not been viewed the queue LED continues to flash informing the
been acknowledged or viewed. It must be possible to customize
user of un-seen events.
the designation of all user interface LEDs and Switches for local
When all events in a queue are acknowledged or ‘seen’, the language requirements. It shall be possible to have a custom
LED associated with the queue turns on steady. If a new event is message for each device in addition to zone messages. Custom
added to the queue, the EST3 internal buzzer resounds and the device messages must support a minimum of 40 characters each.
queue LED flashes. Instructional text messages support a maximum of 2,000 charac-
ters each.
EST3 allows device grouping into logical groups or zones. Here
two or more alarm devices (such as detectors or pull stations)
make up the zone. When a device in the zone activates, the LCD Installation and Mounting
displays the zone description. Each zone only displays once,
regardless of the number of devices active within the zone
To display information about devices active within a zone, the user
presses the Details key. N
O
C
TROUBLE
N
C
N
O
C
ALARM
N
-
A
N
C
N
O
SUP
C N
C
TB1
The device with the lowest address displays in the first window.
If multiple devices are active, each one is available for viewing by
using the arrow associated Previous or Next keys and scrolling Ribbon cable
through the device list. J1
The common controls may be easily expanded beyond the Main

Display interface by adding Control Display Modules and assigning Ground cable
features to switch controls. For Maintenance users, the EST3 pro-
vides a smooth operating menu system providing powerful tools
for system management, reports, and trouble shooting. TB2
NETWORK AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO R C R C
OUT IN A IN A OUT B IN B OUT R T T O R T T O
A A B B X X S M X X S M
+ - + - + - + - + - + - 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
13:35:07 02/17/2003 ACT:0020 DIS:0000

Main Menu
>1)Status
2)Enable
3)Disable
4)Activate
5)Restore
6)Reports
7)Program
8)Test
9)Security 3-LCDXL1 3-CPU
ALARM SUPERVISORY TROUBLE MONITOR

0020 0000 0000 0000 ✟

Specifications
Agency Listings UL, ULC
24 lines by 40 characters, (240 x 320 pixels), monochrome
LCD Display
LCD Display
Mounting Mounts over the first 4 local rail module spaces
Detection & alarm since 1872
Reset Switch & LED Alarm Silence Switch & LED Panel
Common Control Switches & LEDs
U.S. Silence Switch & LED Drill Switch & LED
T 888-378-2329 Alarm Current when connected to...
F 866-503-3996 3-CPU 62 mA
3-CPU1 62 mA
Canada
3-CPU3 50 mA
Chubb Edwards
T 519 376 2430 Standby Current when connected
F 519 376 7258 to...
53 mA
3-CPU
Southeast Asia 53 mA
3-CPU1
T : +65 6391 9300 48 mA
3-CPU3
F : +65 6391 9306
32 to 120º F (0 to 49º C) at 93%
Ambient temperature
India relative humidity, non-condensing
T : +91 80 4344 2000 Supported Languages English, French, Spanish
F : +91 80 4344 2050

Australia
T +61 3 9239 1200 Ordering Information
F +61 3 9239 1299
Catalog Number Description Shipping Wt. lb (kg)
Europe 3-LCDXL1 Liquid Crystal Display Module (see note) 2.0 (0.91)
T +32 2 725 11 20 3-LKFXL Language Kit, French 0.25 (0.11)
F +32 2 721 86 13
Note: 3-LCDXL1 requires CPU code version 3.61 or higher.
Latin America
T 305 593 4301
F 305 593 4300

All rights reserved.
05-18-11

Signature Driver
Controller Modules
3-SSDC1, 3-SDDC1, 3-SDC1
EN54-2:1997+A1: 2006
and EN54-4:1997+2002
+A2 : 2006

The 3-SSDC1 and 3-SDDC1 Signature Driver Controller modules • One or two circuit versions
provide an intelligent interface between the 3-CPU3 module and
• Dedicated microprocessor control
Signature Series devices. Each module contains its own micro-
processor used to coordinate, process and interpret information • Full digital communication
received from and sent to Signature devices. Power and commu- • Specialized communication protocol
nications is received directly from the control panel rail assembly. – Less sensitive to cable characteristics
The 3-SSDC1 Single Signature Driver Controller module supports – Utilize existing wiring in most applications
one Signature Data circuit, while the 3-SDDC1 Signature Dual
Driver Controller module supports two Signature circuits. Both • Loop alarm in under 750 milliseconds
modules occupy one rail space in the fire alarm control cabinet • Device location supervision
and provide removable field wiring terminals to aid installation. – Unexpected additional device addresses
Innovative design gives the 3-SSDC1/3-SDDC1 and Signature – Missing device addresses
devices truly “distributed intelligence”. Signature detectors and – Switched device locations
modules have their own on-board microprocessor communicating – Programmed device parameters
with the loop controller in a fully digital communication format. This • Automatic nonvolatile as-built mapping
increases the accuracy of the information coming to and from the – Stores “actual” and “expected” device data
loop controller by reducing the effects of capacitance and noise. – Stores physical connection sequence including “T” taps
With decentralized intelligence much of the decision making moves • Automatic day/night sensitivity
from the loop controller to the devices. Advanced fire detection
algorithms processed within the Signature devices effectively end • Supports up to 250 intelligent Signature detectors
unwanted alarms. Environmental compensation and multiple sens- and 250 Intelligent Signature Modules
ing element decision making operations are resident in the devices. • Up to five 3-SDDC1s per node
Intelligent devices allow the Signature Controllers to execute commu- – Total of 10 Signature circuits
nication and system functions with greater speed and low baud rates,
• Removable field wiring terminal blocks
increasing the accuracy of information transmitted between the loop
controller and devices. • Multiple survival modes — stand alone
• Fully backward compatible with 3-SSDC and 3-SDDC
• Supports the full line of Signature II devices, including carbon
monixide detection

Application
Up to 125 detectors and 125 modules are supported over a single During maintenance, should groups of detector heads be removed
pair of wires by the 3-SDC1 Signature Cards that plug into the for service and returned into the wrong smoke detector base
Signature controller modules. Both Class A wiring (style 6 or style (location), the 3-SSDC1/3-SDDC1 will automatically detect the
7) and Class B (style 4) wiring are supported. Loop distances over problem. If the attributes of the switched devices are the same,
11,000 feet (3300m) are possible. the system will automatically download the correct soft addresses
and algorithms to the devices (maintaining location supervision).
The 3-SSDC1 and 3-SDDC1 use advanced communication for-
mats that provide exceptional response. Using a “BROADCAST If the attributes are not the same the 3-SSDC1/3-SDDC1 will send
POLL” the loop controller checks the entire device circuit for any a map fault indication to the 3-CPU3 and post a trouble indicating
changes of state. Should one or more devices report a change the the specific devices in fault.
3-SSDC1/3-SDDC1 uses “DIRECT ADDRESS SEARCH” to find
reporting device(s). Devices that have entered the alarm state or The 3-SSDC1/3-SDDC1 also monitors the Signature Series
become active are located nearly instantaneously. devices for maintenance and trouble conditions. Each smoke de-
tector contains intelligence to adjust with environmental changes.
The unique use of “BROADCAST POLLING” combined with “DI- This expands the amount of time required between cleaning while
RECT ADDRESS SEARCH” ensures that only new information is maintaining a constant alarm threshold. As the detector begins to
transmitted allowing a reduced baud rate with fast response time. exhaust the environmental compensation, and reaches the 80%
The low baud rate is ideal for retrofit applications since in most level, the 3-SSDC1/3-SDDC1 will indicate a maintenance alert
applications existing wiring can be used. or dirty condition to the 3-CPU and indicate the specific device
requiring cleaning. If cleaning is not performed the detector will
To enhance survivability of the system the 3-SSDC1/3-SDDC1
continue to operate until all of its environmental compensation is
supports a standalone mode for Signature devices. Two cata-
strophic failure modes are supported. If the 3-CPU(1/3) fails,
the loop controller will continue to poll its devices. If an alarm Typical Wiring
is detected it will be sent on the local rail communication bus
and received by other local rail modules. A common alarm 3
condition throughout the panel will result. If the local rail mod-
ule (3-SSDC1/3-SDDC1) fails, and a device (smoke or module) 1 5 SDC #1 Smoke
detects an alarm, specialized circuitry will make the node aware of + Power
6
Circuit #1
the alarm condition. The 3-CPU(1/3) will communicate the alarm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
condition to the rest of the network. Having multiple redundant To TB1 on 3-SDDC1 Module
modes is paramount in a life safety system.

TB1
3-SDDC1
SIGNATURE
Every time the 3-SSDC1/3-SDDC1 communicates with a detector

DUAL
Class B Configuration Shown (Typical)
DRIVER
a green LED on the detector flashes. Normal green LED activity is CONTROLLER
MODULE
not disturbing to building occupants, but can be quickly spotted To TB2 on 3-SDDC1 Module
TB2
by a maintenance technician. A red LED on the detector turns on 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
only in the alarm condition. Circuit #2

+
SDC #2 Smoke
The 3-SSDC1/3-SDDC1 also supervises the device wiring, physi- 1 5 Power
6
cal location of each device and the programmed device charac- 3
teristics. This Edwards/Signature Series unique characteristic is

accomplished by “MAPPING” the Signature circuit and committing
the map to memory. Upon power up the loop controller will scan
device serial numbers and map their physical location sequence
on the loop, including “T” taps. After mapping is complete the
controller automatically addresses each detector and module 1 4
through downloading over the loop. There are no switches or dials Class A Configuration Shown (Typical)
to set. Each device is assigned a unique soft address generated

by the site specific program. 3
The 3-SSDC1/3-SDDC1 then compares the “Actual” physical SDC #1 Smoke
device data to the “Expected” site specific program data. If any Wiring Notes + + Power
6
correlations are different, the loop controller issues a trouble to the 1 2

2
Maximum #12 AWG (1.5 mm ) wire; Circuit #1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CPU identifying the devices which do not match and posting a

minimum #18 AWG (0.75 mm ).
To TB1 on 3-SDDC1 Module
map fault. Through the 3-CPU3’s RS-232 port a graphical map of 2. All wiring supervised and power limited. TB1
3-SDDC1
the loop can be uploaded depicting each device’s location on the 3

Shields (if used) must be continuous and
free from Earth Ground.
SIGNATURE
DUAL
loop, including branches (T-Taps) and all of the physical attributes 4 Class A wiring.
DRIVER
CONTROLLER
associated with the device. This diagnostic information is unparal- 5 Class B wiring.
MODULE
leled in the fire detection industry and vital for keeping accurate
TB2
To TB2 on 3-SDDC1 Module

To Universal Module or MAB module
records on how the system was installed. 6 when 2-wire smokes are powered from
Circuit #2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
the module.
During installation a common problem with analog/ addressable
+ +
SDC #2 Smoke
systems is locating ground faults. The 3-SSDC1 and 3-SDDC1 Power
6
controllers have the ability to locate ground faults by specific mod- 3
ule, speeding up the troubleshooting process. Another significant

advantage of the 3-SSDC1/3-SDDC1 controllers during com-
missioning is electronic addressing and mapping. This eliminates Class A Configuration Shown (Typical)
1 4
duplicate addresses, which are also very difficult for most systems
to locate.

utilized. At this point the 3-SSDC1/3-SDDC1 sends a dirty trouble “End of Life” trouble automatically posts on the panel when the
indication to the 3-CPU and posts a trouble condition. If mainte- CO sensor detection capability is exhausted.
nance is still not performed the Signature detector will automati-
cally remove itself from service once the programmed threshold Remote test capability permits devices to be put in alarm, pre
window has been breached (preventing a false alarm). alarm, supervisory, monitor, or security alarm, or trouble from the
panel menu or controls. This facilitates testing of smoke and heat
When a detector includes carbon monoxide (CO) detection, the detectors as well as monitor and security devices. Fast test is also
detector monitors its CO life remaining for the CO sensor element provided for CO detectors allowing these devices to be tested
and provides this information automatically to the panel. For main- quickly in the field.
tenance of the system the CO life remaining is also available by
simply running a maintenance report at the panel or through the The 3-SSDC1 and 3-SDDC1 local rail modules modules are fully
FireWorks graphical interface. A unique CO maintenance signal is backwards compatible with the 3-SSDC and 3-SDDC local rail
automatically generated by the panel when there is 8% (several modules. 3-SSDC1 and 3-SDDC1 modules provide additional
months) of CO element life remaining. Should the CO sensor ele- onboard memory to facilitate future Synergy functions. To upgrade a
ment not be replaced after the maintenance signal is reported, an 3-SSDC/3-SDDC to a 3-SSDC1/3-SDDC1 respectively, replace the
3-SSDC/3-SDDC Local Rail Module with a 3-SDDC1-MB Local Rail
Module and reuse the 3-SDC Signature Device Cards and filters.
Specifications (Signature Circuits)

Charts assume wire and devices are evenly distributed over length of circuit
Non-twisted, non shielded wire

# of Module #14 AWG (20pf/foot) #16 AWG (20pf/foot) #18 AWG (20pf/foot)
Device type # of Detectors
Addresses (2.53 Ohm/1000ft) (4.02 Ohm/1000ft) (6.38 Ohm/1000ft)
14,752 feet 9,275 feet 5,839 feet
Detectors only 125 0
(4,497 meters) (2,827 meters) (1,780 meters)
12,599 feet (3,840 7,921 feet (2,414 4,986 feet
Modules only 0 125
meters) meters) (1,520 meters)
5,738 feet 3,608 feet 2,271 feet
Detectors and Modules 125 125
(1,749 meters) (1,100 meters) (692 meters)
Detectors and Modules 7,623 feet 4,793 feet 3,017 feet
63 55 + 9 SIGA-UM
with 2-wire smokes (2,324 meters) (1,461 meters) (920 meters)
Modules 3,798 feet 2,388 feet 1,503 feet
0 107 + 9 SIGA-UM
with 2-wire smokes (1,158 meters) (728 meters) (458 meters)
Twisted pair non shielded wire

#14 AWG 1.5mm² #16 AWG 1.0mm² #18 AWG
# of Module (38pf/foot) (36pf/foot) (36pf/foot) (25pf/foot) (25pf/foot)
Device Type # of Detectors
Addresses (2.53 (3.75 (4.02 (5.51 (6.38
Ohm/1000ft) Ohm/1000ft) Ohm/1000ft) Ohm/1000ft) Ohm/1000ft)
13,157 feet 9,933 feet 9,275 feet 6,760 feet 5,839 feet
(4,010 m) (3,028 m) (2,827 m) (2,061 m) (1,780 m)
Modules Only 0 125
(3,840 m) (2,586 m) (2,414 m) (1,760 m) (1,520 m)
Detectors 5,738 feet 3,864 feet 3,608 feet 2,630 feet 2,271 feet
125 125
& Modules (1,749 m) (1,178 m) (1,100 m) (802 m) (692 m)
Detectors and
modules with 63 55 + 9 SIGA-UM
(2,324 m) (1,565 m) (1,461 m) (1,065 m) (920 m)
2-wire smokes
Modules with 107 + 9 SIGA- 3,798 feet 2,558 feet 2,388 feet 1,741 feet 1,503 feet
0
2-wire smokes UM (1,158 m) (780 m) (728 m) (531 m) (458 m)
Twisted pair shielded wire

# of Module #14 AWG (84pf/foot) #16 AWG (82pf/foot) #18 AWG (58pf/foot)
Device Type # of Detectors
Addresses (2.53 Ohm/1,000ft) (4.02 Ohm/1,000ft) (6.38 Ohm/1,000ft)
5,952 feet 6,098 feet 5,839 feet
5,952 feet 6,098 feet 4,986 feet
Modules Only 0 125
5,738 feet 3,608 feet 2,271 feet
Detectors & Modules 125 125
(1,749 meters) (1,100 meters) (692 meters)
Detectors and modules 5,952 feet 4,793 feet 3,017 feet
63 55 + 9 SIGA-UM
with 2-wire smokes (1,814 meters) (1,461 meters) (920 meters)
Modules with 2-wire 2,558 feet 2,388 feet 1,503 feet
0 107 + 9 SIGA-UM
smokes (780 meters) (728 meters) (458 meters)

Engineering Specification It must be possible to wire the circuit as
Class A or Class B with non-shielded, non-
The communication format between the twisted wire. It must be possible to wire
control panel and analog devices shall be branches (T-taps) with Class B wiring.
100% digital.
The driver controller must be manufactured
Detection & alarm since 1872 Loop alarm recognition must be within in accordance with ISO 9001 standards.
750 milliseconds of a device going into the
U.S.
alarm state, with system response time no The system must have tolerance to mul-
T 888 378 2329
greater than 3 seconds. All devices shall tiple failures. There must be a standalone
F 866 503 3996
support remote testing. mode of operation that will ensure the
Canada system is aware of alarms even if the local
Chubb Edwards rail or main CPU fails.
T 519 376 2430
F 519 376 7258 Specifications (controllers)
Southeast Asia Catalog Number 3-SSDC1 3-SDDC1
T : +65 6391 9300 Installation 1 LRM Space 1 LRM Space
F : +65 6391 9306 1 Addressable circuit (3-SDC1 2 Addressable circuits
Module Configuration
Card) expandable to 2 circuits. (3-SDC1 Cards)
India
T : +91 80 4344 2000 Operating Current [Note 2] Standby 144 mA Alarm 204 mA Standby 264 mA Alarm 336 mA
F : +91 80 4344 2050 Operating Voltage 24 Vdc, Nominal
Address Requirements Automatic
Australia
Detectors Supported 125 per 3-SDC1 Card
T +61 3 9239 1200
F +61 3 9239 1299 Modules Supported 125 Module Addresses per 3-SDC1 Card
2-Wire Smoke Power Output 100 mA per 3-SDC1 Card (not included in Operating Current above
Europe Conventional detectors
T +32 2 725 11 20 150 of 100 µA type per circuit.
supported
F +32 2 721 86 13
Signature Circuit Voltage 20 VDC +/- 5%
Latin America Maximum Signature Circuit
100 Ohms
T 305 593 4301 Resistance
F 305 593 4300 Maximum Signature Circuit
0.33 µF
Capacitance
Communications Format 100% Digital
© 2010 UTC Fire & Security. Circuit Wiring Styles Class A or Class B
All rights reserved. Termination Removable plug-in terminal strip(s) on module
Permissable Wire Size 18 to 12 AWG (0.75 to 2.5 mm²)
Agency Listings UL, ULC, CE (see Note 1), LPCB EN54 (see Note 3).
Operating Environment 32 °F (0 °C) to 120 °F (49 °C) 93% RH, non-condensing
Note 1: Other EST3 components are modularly listed under the following standards:
UL 864 categories: UOJZ, UOXX, UUKL and SYZV, UL 294 category ALVY, UL 609 category AOTX, UL 636
category ANET, UL 1076 category APOU, UL 365 category APAW, UL 1610 category AMCX, UL 1635 category
AMCX
ULC-S527, ULC-S301, ULC-S302, ULC-S303, ULC-S306, ULC/ORD-C1076, ULC/ORD-C693
Please refer to EST3 Installation and Service Manual for complete system requirements.
Note 2: Current shown Includes full loop of devices.
Note 3: EN54-2:1997+A1: 2006 and EN54-4:1997+2002 +A2 : 2006 (verify device and loop controller compatibility)
Catalog Shipping
Description
Number Wt. lb (kg)
Single Signature Driver Controller. Comes with one 3-SDC1 Device Card.
3-SSDC1 0.5 (0.23)
Mounts to Local Rail. Add suffex “-E” for EN54 complient versions.
Dual Signature Driver Controller. Comes with two 3-SDC1s.
3-SDDC1 0.5 (0.23)
Mounts to Local Rail. Add suffex “-E” for EN54 complient versions.
3-SDC1 Signature Device Card - upgrades a 3-SSDC1 to a 3-SDDC1 0.25 (0.11)
3-FP Filler Plate, order separately when no LED or LED/Switch module installed. 0.1 (0.05)
05-18-11

Monitor
Module
EST3 Power
Supplies
3-PPS/M series, 3-BPS/M series,
3-BBC/M series Power
Supply
EN54-2:1997+A1
and EN54-4:1997+A1:2002+A2
pending

EST3 Power supplies consist of two assemblies, a high efficiency • High efficiency switch mode
switch mode power supply card and a power supply monitor
• Increased power distribution efficiency
module. The monitor module mounts to the local rail and distrib-
- power supplies parallel allowing up to 28 amps in a single
utes the power from its supply to the local rail. The local rail dis-
node
tributes power from all power supplies to other local rail modules
and user interface cards resulting in “Shared Power” throughout • 120 or 230 Vac operation
the system. By paralleling the power supplies on a rail maximum • 7 AMP filtered and regulated
utilization of available power is possible, resulting in fewer power
supplies. Up to four power supplies combine in a single enclosure • Two 3.5 AMP outputs
providing up to 28 amps of available power. Battery backup is • Temperature compensated, dual rated battery charger
provided using from one to four sets of batteries, depending on
standby power requirements. • Electronic power limiting
Power supplies mount to the back of the chassis units or wall- • Automatic load testing of batteries
boxes. The associated power supply monitor module mounts on
the local rail providing system power distribution and mounting
space for any control display module. Access to auxiliary power is
via easily accessible terminal blocks located on the power sup-
ply monitor module. Each power supply produces 7 Amps of
filtered and regulated power. With four power supplies located in
an enclosure (one primary and three booster power supplies) 28
amps of current is available for local rail modules, control display
modules and the eight auxiliary 3.5 amp power outputs (two per
supply).

Application Engineering Specification
The primary power supply provides the system with battery The fire alarm power supplies must be capable of being paralleled
charging and voltage regulation. Software configures the charger and to load share. Multiple power supplies must be capable of be-
to either 10-24 AH batteries or 30-65 AH batteries and controls ing backed up with a single 24 volt battery set. Each power supply
the high/low charge rates. Batteries mounted in the same en- shall be capable of charging up to 65 AH batteries. The power
closure as the power supply, have their charge rate monitored supply must be able to perform an automatic load test of batteries
and adjusted based on the local enclosure temperature, keeping and return a trouble if the batteries fall outside a predetermined
charging rates within battery specification. For remote batteries a range. Power supplies must incorporate the ability to adjust the
temperature probe is monitored in the remote battery cabinet and charge rate of batteries based on ambient temperatures. It shall
charge rates are adjusted automatically. Battery damage is unlikely be possible to adjust for ambient temperature changes in local
to occur when environmental short term conditions are outside of cabinets as well as remote cabinets.
normal operating ranges.
The EST3 power supplies automatically load test batteries by
shutting down the battery charger and placing a load across the Installation and Mounting
battery. If the battery voltage is outside the specification range the
power supply reports a trouble. The trouble clears if the battery is J8
J9
able to recover and pass future load tests.

J11
J10
L
Battery leads are electronically short circuit protected. If a short
R
occurs in the battery leads the charger automatically disables itself
and causes a trouble. The system will constantly look to see if
M
J9
the short has cleared. If the short clears the system automatically
J8
J11
J10
restores.
During operation on standby batteries, battery voltage is constant-
ly monitored. A trouble is reported if the battery voltage falls below
a specified value. J8
J9
J11
J10
EST3 power supplies provide specific information back to the Power

L shooting of system
3-CPU(1) designed to help speed trouble Distribution
Power Powe
R a fault, specific diagnos-
functions. Should a power supply detect Module
Supply (EN-54 only) Supp
M shooting. The 3-LCD will
tic codes are available to speed trouble
display the power supplies address, a specific trouble code, and J8
J10
J9
J11
a text message describing the specific trouble. Text messages are

easy to understand and include items like: Battery Trouble, Aux
Power Overload Circuit 1, Aux Power Overload Circuit 2.
J9
J8
J11
Power
J10
Power Distribution
Module
PowerL
Supply (EN-54 only) SupplyR
M
J9
J8
J11
J10
Power Supply Rules

1. Each battery set needs one charger, either a 3-PPS/M or a 3-BBC/M.
2. Each power supply must be connected to a battery set using an identical length and gauge of wire to keep voltage drops identical.
3. Distribute power supplies and loads evenly across rails.
4. All battery sets for a panel must be the same capacity (AH), same manufacturer, and same manufacturing date code.
The Table below illustrates the combinations of power supplies and batteries that meet all the power supply rules.
24 VDC Power Supply Output Current

7A 14A 21A 28A
Two Identical Three Identical Four Identical
Battery One Set, One Set, One Set, One Set,
Sets, 65 AH Sets, 65 AH Sets, 65 AH
Requirements 65 AH max 65 AH max 65 AH max 65 AH max
max max max
Required 1 3-PPS/M 1 3-PPS/M 1 3-PPS/M 2 1 3-PPS/M 1 3-PPS/M 1 3-PPS/M
1 3-PPS/M
Modules 1 3-BPS/M 1 3-BBC/M 3-BPS/M 2 3-BBC/M 3 3-BPS/M 3 3-BBC/M

Typical Wiring
Utility
Power
Primary Booster Booster Booster

Power Power Power Power
Supply Supply Supply Supply
[1] [2] [2] [2]
Power
24Vdc * 24Vdc * 24Vdc * 24Vdc *
Supply
2 x 3.5A 2 x 3.5A 2 x 3.5A 2 x 3.5A
Monitoring
Primary Rails Rails Booster

Power Supply Power Power Supply
Monitor Module To Rail Monitor Module
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
Auxillary Auxillary Auxillary Auxillary

Power Power Power Power
Takeoff Takeoff Takeoff Takeoff
2 x 3.5A 2 x 3.5A 2 x 3.5A 2 x 3.5A
[1] From battery temperature probe terminals.
[2] From battery and from temperature probe terminals if 3-BTSEN-E used.
* Nominal Voltage
Specifications
3-PPS/M & 3-PPS/M-230 & 3-PPS/M-230-E &
Catalog Number 3-BPS/M 3-BPS/M-230 3-BPS/M-230-E
3-BBC/M 3-BBC/M-230 3-BBC/M-230-E
Agency Approvals UL, ULC U L, ULC UL, ULC UL, ULC LPCB EN54*, CE EN54*
Input Voltage 120 Vac (+10%, -15%), 50-60 Hz 230 Vac (+10%, -15%), 50-60 Hz
Brownout Level < or = 102 Vac 96 Vac < or = 195 Vac 184 Vac < or = 195 Vac 188 Vac
3-PPS/M-230 3-PPS/M-230-E
3-PPS/M included
included with included with
with 3-CPU3 current
3-CPU3 current 3-CPU3 current
Current Alarm 50mA Alarm: 50 mA Alarm: 50 mA
Requirements 3-BBC/M Standby 50mA Standby: 50 mA Standby: 50 mA
3-BBC/M-230 3-BBC/M-230-E
Alarm: 70 mA
Alarm: 70 mA Alarm: 70 mA
Standby: 70 mA
Standby: 70 mA Standby: 70 mA
Input Current 3.0 A 1.5 A
Total Output Current Special Applications: 7.0 Amps
Battery Charging 65 AH Sealed 65 AH Sealed 30 AH Sealed
None None None
Capacity Lead-Acid Lead-Acid Lead-Acid
Low Battery Trouble 24 Vdc 22.5 Vdc
Deep Discharge
19.5 Vdc 20.0 Vdc
Cutoff
1 LRM Space +
Mounting 1 LRM space, 1 LRM space,
3-PPS: 2 footprints
Requirements 1 chassis footprint 1 chassis footprint
3-BBC: 1 footprint
Output Voltage 24 Vdc Nominal
Auxiliary Output
Two sources of 3.5 Amps each taken from total output current
Current
Auxiliary Output
18 AWG to 12 AWG (1 mm² to 2.5 mm²)
Terminal Capacity
Output Protection Electronic power limiting & heat sink temperature
Ground Fault
< 10K Ohms
Detection
*EN54-2:1997+A1 and EN54-4:1997+A1:2002+A2 pending

Catalog Ship Wt., lb.
Description
Number (kg)
3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply w/ local rail module 120V 50/60 Hz 5 (2.3)
Detection & alarm since 1872 3-BPS/M Booster Power Supply w/ local rail module 120V 50/60 Hz 5 (2.3)
3-PPS/M-230 Primary Power Supply w/ local rail module 230V 50/60 Hz 5 (2.3)
U.S. 3-BPS/M-230 Booster Power Supply w/ local rail module 230V 50/60 Hz 5 (2.3)
T 888-378-2329 Primary Power Supply w/local rail module 230V 50 Hz,
F 866-503-3996 3-PPS/ M-230-E 5 (2.3)
EN54* Certified, CE
Canada Booster Power Supply w/local rail module 230V 50 Hz,
3-BPS/ M-230-E 5 (2.3)
Chubb Edwards EN54* Certified, CE
T 519 376 2430 3-BBC/M Booster/Charger Supply w/local rail module 120V 50/60Hz 5 (2.3)
F 519 376 7258
3-BBC/M-230 Booster/Charger Supply w/local rail module 230V 50/60Hz 5 (2.3)
Southeast Asia Booster/Charger Supply w/local rail module, 230V 50/60Hz,
3-BBC/ M-230-E 5 (2.3)
T : +65 6391 9300 EN54* Certified, CE
F : +65 6391 9306 Booster/Charger Monitor Module with charger capability
3-BBCMON(-E) 5 (2.3)
(upgrade 3-BPS/M(-230)(-E) to 3-BBC/M-(230)(-E))
India
T : +91 80 4344 2000 Distribution Module required when battery installed
3-BTSEN .5 (.22)
F : +91 80 4344 2050 in remote cabinet
Distribution and Temperature Sensor Module. Required in
Australia 3-BTSEN-E .5 (.22)
EN54* Markets when battery installed in a remote cabinet.
T +61 3 9239 1200
Filler Plate, order separately when no LED or LED/Switch
F +61 3 9239 1299 3-FP 0.1 (0.05)
module installed.
Europe *EN54-2:1997+A1 and EN54-4:1997+A1:2002+A2 pending
T +32 2 725 11 20
F +32 2 721 86 13
Latin America
T 305 593 4301
F 305 593 4300

05-18-11

Audio and
Telephone
Masters
3-ASU series

The efficient EST3 audio system provides for intuitive local and • Eight channels for audio source selection
remote audio control for Mass Notification/Emergency Com-
• Audio data to remote EST3 panels with amplifiers can be
munications (MNEC), Life Safety and other approved uses. EST3
transmitted over twisted copper wires or fiber optic cables (see
audio builds from standard modules that fit together easily. Audio
Data Sheet 85010-0131 for details on EST3 fiber optic com-
components use standard EST3 cabinets and power supplies.
munications)
Taking full advantage of digital technology, up to eight channels • Listed for Mass Notification/Emergency Communications
of audio sources transmit over a single twisted pair of wires or
fiber optic cables between nodes. Coupling the inherent reliability • UL2572 as CCS or ACU or LOC.
and performance of zoned amplifiers with EST3 simplified user • Auxiliary audio input interface for campus paging, telephone
interfaces makes audio system design and operation easy and interface, etc.
dependable.
• Single fiber optic filament or one twisted pair of wires between
The 3-ASU is seamlessly integrated into an EST3 system to pro- nodes
vide for a rugged and reliable communications package that can
be configured for Mass Notification/Emergency Communication • VU display shows paging output level
(MNEC), as well as fire alarm and other emergency functions. The • Ready-to-page LED
3-ASU audio source unit supports eight channels of clear digital
audio that is easily distributed to panels containing 3-ZA rail ampli- • Digital transmission of audio signals
fiers. The 3-ASU supports digital storage and playback of pre- - greater noise immunity
recorded messages as well as live paging. The optional 3-FTCU - high quality signal transmission
provides a unique, space-saving and easy-to-operate control point • On board storage of programmed messages and tones
for dedicated emergency/firefighter two-way telephones.
• Optional LCD display of fire phone calls
for component Importance Factor 1.5

Application All Call Minus selects all amplifiers not programmed for alarm
signaling for page delivery (typically stairwells).
EST3 audio is accomplished by selecting modular components for
installation in standard fire alarm cabinet assemblies. At the main Page by Phone selects the telephone voice line as the paging
control panel location mounting audio control equipment provides source.
an emergency user interface for “Paging” and optionally a “Fire-
Operating the Microphone Talk Key stops alarm signaling to se-
fighters Master Telephone”. Zoned amplifiers mount in the main
lected zones and starts pre-announce tone delivery.
control panel and/or in remote nodes. By mounting amplifiers in
remote nodes, wire runs and space requirements are reduced at When the pre-announce tone finishes, the Ready to Page LED turns
the main control panel. on.
The heart of the EST3 audio package is the Audio Source Unit When system design calls for paging with Firefighters telephone
(ASU). The Audio Source unit converts analog signals to digital the 3-ASU/FT provides all the paging features of the 3-ASU series
signals. On board audio memory stores signal tones and/or alarm- with the added benefit of a master handset assembly. The 3-ASU/
alert verbal messages. FT brings to the emergency user easy to understand switches
and text messages displaying on a backlit 8 x 20 character LCD
These digitally-stored messages can be recorded onsite using
display.
standard PC audio components or downloaded from a library
of pre-recorded messages and tones. Messages can be in any
language or combination of languages. The ASU comes standard
with two minutes of memory for tone and message storage. Avail- Firefighters telephone
able message memory expands easily to 100 minutes with the CONNECT switch selects phone
optional 3-ASUMX/100 memory expansion card. circuits shown in the Calls Pending
Audio Source units support connection of a local microphone, Window.
remote microphone, telephone voice line , and Mass Notification/ REVIEW PENDING stops auto-
Emergency Communication (MNEC) audio feed. With eight audio matic display of pending calls and
channels to choose from combinations of paging, alert, evacuation allows the operator to step through
signaling and automatic messages are available for simultaneous each message at his own pace.
delivery to different parts of a building or to different buildings.
ACK (acknowledge) silences the
There are two main audio user interface modules: the paging telephone systems audible signal.
microphone, and the firefighter’s telephone, which supports three- The signal resounds for any new
state and four-state firefighter telephones. Available individually or call.
in a set, EST3 audio modules open system design possibilities.
DISCONNECT disconnects the highlighted call in the calls con-
When the Life Safety system requires paging only the 3-ASU or nected list.
3-ASU/4 Audio Source Units provides a Master Paging micro-
phone with common controls. Switch labeling makes the opera- REVIEW CONNECTED scrolls a reverse highlight through the
tion intuitive. Six LEDs and five switches cover paging operations. calls connected list.
Three of the five paging switches, All Call, Page to Evacuation,
and Page to Alert, cover most paging operations. A VU display
shows the user the output level of the page in process. The 3-ASU 0 Calls Pending
The Firefighters telephone LCD is very
series mount in one chassis space of a EST3 Lobby enclosure. similar to the 3-LCD. When there is no
In addition to the paging microphone the 3-ASU/4 has mounting emergency telephone
active telephone calls the LCD shows
space for up to four local rail modules, including 20, 40, and 95 a title screen. Active calls display a text
watt zone amplifiers and up to four Control Display modules allow- message referenc-ing the remote
ing layout flexibility. The 3-ASU provides the same functionality as unit: OK phone location.
the 3-ASU/4 but is supplied with an inner door filler plate and no 1 calls pending
When a remote handset is lifted the
First Basement Level
local rail module spaces. 0 calls connected
LCD display updates to show the calls
pending and the call-in signal sounds
to alert the user of a pending call.
Paging Microphone
0 calls pending The user answers the call by press-
Ready-to-Page LED turns on after the ing the Connect switch. The location
1 calls connected
pre-announce tone has finished indicating the First Basement Level message moves from the pending
system is ready to page. line to the connected line. The call in
READY TO
signal silences. The user simply uses

PAGE
ALL CALL All Call selects all amplifiers for page

PAGE TO delivery. 1 calls pending
the master telephone to talk with the
connected telephone.
EVAC
PAGE TO
engineering office
Page to EVAC selects all amplifiers cur- 1 calls connected
ALERT
First Basement Level

If another call comes in the location
ALL CALL
rently delivering evacuation signaling for

MINUS
message appears in the calls pending

PAGE BY
page delivery.
PHONE
line and audible signal resounds. The

Page to ALERT selects all amplifiers user can silence the signal by answer-
currently delivering alert signaling for page ing the call or by pressing the ACK (acknowledge) switch.
delivery.
Up to five remote telephone handset assemblies connect to the
system simultaneously without any degradation of audio quality.

Installation and Mounting Typical Wiring Typical Fire Fighter's Telephone Circuit
ULI/ULC Listed
47K ohm EOL Resistor
J2 J3 J4
BIN
AIN CIN
J6
AOUT
DIN
J5 J7
BOUT
J9
J8
10 9
J1
J10
J11
Twisted Shielded Pair

READY TO if run with other wiring CC1
PAGE
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
ALL CALL
Page to
Evac
Page to
To Signature
Alert
Data Circuit
All Call
Minus
COUT DOUT
To Phones
Page by
Phone
J8 J9 J9
J8
J11
J10
10 9
NC C NO NO C N/A NC NO C NC
CC1
TROUBLE ALARM SUP 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Connect to TB1 on 3-CPU3 Module
3-ASU/4 has Chassis, Audio Source Unit, To next panel MAIN PROCESSOR MODULE To Signature
3-CPU Module Data Circuit
Paging Common Control and rail space 3-CPU3
Telephone Riser
for four Local Rail Modules. Mounts in Connect to TB2 on 3-CPU Module
Twisted Shielded Pair
lobby enclosure.
Network Audio Riser

20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Connect Shield to
Earth Ground only
at the panel. Maintain
shield continuity.
Network Data Riser

AUDIO DATA REMOTE MIC
TR RX TX PRIMARY
PAGE
KEY AUDIO AUX
RX TX
SECONDARY TELEPHONE OUT
1 14 TB1
TX RX
J1
TB1
J2 J3 J4 Dashed Wires Required
BIN
AIN CIN
AOUT
J5
J6
DIN
J7
BOUT
for Class 'A' Wiring Only
J2 J1 J2 J1
Audio Source Unit
Audio Fire 3-ASU

or
Source Phone RAIL
EXP
3-ASUFT
Card Card J3
CARD
COUT DOUT
J8 J9
Control Panel
From previous panel
3-CPU Module
J4
1234
Mass Notification
Key-Out
3-REMICA
or
READY TO
PAGE
CONNECT REVIEW PENDING
0 call(s) pending
ACK
Audio-Out 3-3REMICP
ALL CALL EMERGENCY TELEPHONE
(Shielded)
To CPU Module
Page to
Evac
DISCONNECT REVIEW CONNECTED
TB2 - Audio A IN
Page to
Alert
All Call
To MN-FVPN or AUX
Minus
Page by
Phone
Input (1V) for Remote

Paging from UL listed
compatible Fire or MNEC
system.
3-ASU/FT has Chassis Assembly /w 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Audio Source Unit, Paging Common ASU TB1

Audio Data Telephone Page Remote Mic Aux
Control and Fire Phone Controls Primary Secondary Out Key Audio
The audio system shall provide eight simultaneous and distinct System amplifiers must be distributed zoned type. Centrally banked
audio channels. These shall consist of a minimum of: Local Page, systems are not acceptable. The circuit must carry a minimum rating
Emergency Communication, Multiple Evacuation, Alert, Auxiliary, of 3.5 Amps for operating 24 Vdc signals.
and General Signaling. Channels shall support hierarchical opera- The system shall provide fully integrated fire fighters’ telephone
tion and be controllable from system programming. The audio system that shall provide 2-way communication between the fire
system also provides Elevator, Stairwell and Auxiliary signaling. alarm control panel and any fire fighters’ telephone station. <<The
Systems that cause signaling devices to go silent while performing Audio Source Unit and Firefighters Telephone shall be installed so
any signaling functions will not be accepted. that a seismic component Importance Factor of 1.5 is achieved.>>
The system must provide operation to 25Vrms or 70.7Vrms speak- The system shall include an alphanumeric user display and controls.
ers. The system must provide as a minimum the following paging When a telephone is activated, a call-in buzzer shall sound, and the
common controls and indicators: Ready to page LED, VU display of location of the phone shall be shown on the alphanumeric display.
paging output level, single switch function for paging to all — Alert The display shall be capable of bilingual operation, displaying Eng-
zones, Evacuation zones, and areas not programmed for signaling. lish, Dutch, Finnish, French, German, Italian, Portuguese or Spanish
The system must provide high quality analog to digital conversion messages.
of paging sources. Digital transmission of paging must be provided The incoming call shall be selected by activating a single button. All
between system nodes. The analog sources must be sampled and subsequent telephone call locations shall be displayed in full text.
converted to digital with a sampling rate no less than 9600 samples The system shall display all incoming calls, all connected phone(s)
per second. It must be possible to transmit signal sources (Alert, on the alphanumeric display. The system shall be configured so that
Alarm, Page, etc.) together over a single pair of wires between nodes. page messages may be issued from any firefighter’s telephone con-
nected to the system, as directed by the emergency operator.

Specifications
Catalog
3-ASU 3-ASU/4 3-ASU/FT 3-FTCU
Number
Agency Listings UL, ULC, CE
Detection & alarm since 1872 Ambient Temp. 0°C-49°C (32°F-120°F)
Ambient Humidity 93% Non-condensing @ 32°C
U.S. Mounting One Chassis Space
T 888-378-2329
F 866-503-3996
Network Data Riser- 18-12AWG
(1.0-2.5mm²)(3-ASU/FT only)
Canada Network Data Riser - One pair twisted
Chubb Edwards 18-12AWG (1.0mm²-2.5mm²) Network Audio Riser- 18-12AWG
T 519 376 2430 Wire Size (1.0-2.5mm²)(3-ASU/FT only)
F 519 376 7258 Network Audio Riser - One pair
twisted 18-12AWG (1.0mm²-2.5mm²) Telephone Riser - One pair twisted
Southeast Asia shielded 18 -14 AWG
T : +65 6391 9300 (1.0mm² to 1.5mm²)
F : +65 6391 9306 112 mA 32 mA
Current Rating 80 mA in Alarm and Supervisory Supervisory and Supervisory and
India Alarm Alarm
T : +91 80 4344 2000
F : +91 80 4344 2050 Local microphone (isolated and
Local Microphone (isolated and
supervised); Remote microphone
supervised); Remote Microphone
Australia Audio Inputs (isolated and supervised); Firefighters’
(isolated and supervised);
T +61 3 9239 1200 telephone (isolated and supervised;
F +61 3 9239 1299 One MNEC audio input.
One MNEC audio input.
Two minutes standard expandable to 100 minutes
Europe Pre-recorded
T +32 2 725 11 20 with optional 3-ASUMX/100. Max. message length 40 N/A
Message Storage
F +32 2 721 86 13 seconds.
Supported
Latin America 255 N/A
Message Count
T 305 593 4301
Auxiliary Input
F 305 593 4300 1K Ohm N/A
impedance
utcfireandsecurity.com Bilingual Support English, Dutch, Finnish, French, German, Italian, Portuguese, Spanish

Telephone Riser
Active
N/A Five Maximum
Telephones
One pair twisted shielded 18 -14 AWG
Wire size vN/A
(1.0mm² to1.5mm²)
Line Resistance N/A 50 Ohm
EOL Resistance N/A 15K Ohm
Ship
Catalog
Description Wt. lb.
Number
(kg)
3-ASU/FT 1 Audio Source Unit with Local Microphone and Firefighters Telephone. 20 (9.1)
3-ASU/4 1 Audio Source Unit w/Local Microphone. Provides four local rail spaces. 15 (6.8)
3-ASU 1 Audio Source Unit w/Local Microphone. Inner door filler plate 15 (6.8)
3-FTCU 1 Firefighters Telephone Control Unit inner door filler plate. 15 (6.8)
Audio Source Unit Memory Expansion. Provides 100 minutes of
3-ASUMX/100 0.5 (.23)
message time.
3-FTEQ Seismic hardening kit for 3-ASU/FT or 3-FTCU telephone handset 2
RFK1 Ferrite Clamp Kit required for EN-54 compliance .25 (.11)
3-LKE UK English Label Kit .25 (.11)
3-LKF French Label Kit .25 (.11)
3-LKR Russian Label Kit .25 (.11)
3-LKS Spanish Label Kit .25 (.11)
1. Add “-CC” for City of Chicago
2. For earthquake anchorage, including detailed mounting weights and center of gravity detail, please refer to
Seismic Application Guide 3101676. Approval of panel anchorage to site structure may require local AHJ,
structural, or civil engineer review.
05-18-11

Control Display
Modules
3-LDSM, 3-24x series, 3-12xx series,
3-6/3S1xxx series

The EST3 Control Display modules provide the emergency user • Programmable LED flash rates
with the simplest of interfaces, lights and switch control. The Con-
• Membrane style tactile pushbuttons
trol Display modules install over local rail modules. The local rail
modules supply the power and drivers via a ribbon cable connec- • Software supported for toggle, and latching interlock switch action
tion to the control display modules. The displays mount over any • Slide in labels
local rail module maximizing the flexibility of design layout. When
a display module is required where no local rail module exists, • Lamp test
an LED Display Support Module 3-LDSM mounts to the local rail
providing support for one Control Display Module.
Surface mount technology used to minimize space, also reduces
the power requirements of display modules. Slide-in labels keep
the control display modules flexible and allow labeling for local
languages.
Module lamp test can be programmed to any spare control switch
or a local node lamp test is initiated by simultaneously operating
the Alarm Silence and Trouble Silence switches on the 3-CPU.

Application Notes or “Off.” Programming of the switches to multiple relays keeps
operational design choices open. The user returns the system
Control Display Modules come in a variety of types providing op- control of the remote device to the Life Safety system by simply
erational flexibility. There are five types of display modules available pressing Auto. The Auto LED programs to its related switch and
with EST3. gives positive feed back to the user by turning on yellow when the
Typically alarm zone annunciation appears on any of the first four system has active control of remote devices.
module types shown. The first module supports simple zone Individual switch LEDs are also programmable. As an example the
annunciation; the second, zone annunciation with zone disable; “Open” or “On” LED (green) could program to follow its related
the third, alarm and trouble zone annunciation, the fourth alarm switch or, program to follow a remote monitor input and provide
and trouble zone annunciation with zone disable. From a simple positive feedback of the remote devices control status. If budget
one LED annunciation point to higher functionality, EST3 fills the restrictions prevent “sail type” positive feedback, EST’s unique
requirements. command processing satisfy requirements for positive feedback of
Simple Control Examples The fifth module is very adaptable HVAC control systems. Any switch command will send a signal to
to system requirements for audio the 3-CPU for processing. While in this state the LED associated
ON F or remote equipment control. with the switch will flash. Once the command has been received
a Each module contains 18 LEDs by a remote Signature Series Module, the module (since it is
n and 18 switches. Each group of intelligent with its own microprocessor) will issue a “Processed”
AUTO three switches has a latching- command back to the 3-CPU which will latch the LED associ-
# interlock to support operations ated with the switch “ON” steady. This same process is used for
5 that must be kept separated. The all audio speaker selections ensuring the circuit is connected. A
OFF variety of switch and associated LED colors are available to meet
interlock is under software control
so only one switch is active at a the demands of the specifiers application.
given time. EST3 software makes Life Safety Systems are generally passive requiring only occasional
meeting the wide variety of ap- operation. Yet, in an emergency the user must be able to identify
OPEN
plications needed with today’s system operation and status quickly and easily. LCD displays are
codes and building system opera- excellent for identifying specific information, but even a large LCD
Damper tions easy.
AUTO 5th Flr can not display overall “system” status as effectively as LEDs and
Switches. The EST3 Control Display modules are designed to pro-
vide simple identification and operation of system functions for the
CLOSE For fan control the emergency emergency user. They provide positive feedback of control activity
user assumes control of the with unrivaled selection of display configurations and mounting
remote device by selecting “On” location options.
Installation and Mounting Engineering Specification

The Life Safety system shall incorporate annunciation of Alarm,
Supervisory, Trouble and Monitor operations. Annunciation must
be through the use of LED display strips complete with a means to
custom label each LED as to its function. Where applicable control
of remote smoke control devices must be made available at the
control center. Switches with LEDs must provide positive feed
back to the operator of remote equipment status. Where voice au-
dio is required a means of paging individual zones must be made.
The status of each paging zone must be annunciated. It must be
possible to selectively page into specific zones. It shall be possible
to manipulate the evacuation of the building from the main control
center. It must be possible for the emergency operator to put
specific zones into evacuation manually.

Technical Specifications
Catalog Number of Alarm
LED Colors Switches Applications
Number LEDs Current
3-LDSM N/A N/A N/A Provides interface for one Control Display Module 5 mA
Alarm Main
Electrical
Electrical Room Trouble Room
3-24R red Alarm Annunciation

3-24Y yellow Supervisory and Trouble Annunciation 2 mA base
3-24G 24 green 0 Monitor Annunciation + 1.5 mA per
12 red over 12 Red LEDs Alarm Annunciation Yellow LEDs Supervisory active LED
3-12RY
yellow pairs Annunciation
EVAC SHELTER
5th Floor Message Message
3-12SR red Alarm Annunciation with enable/disable operation 2 mA base

3-12SY 12 yellow 12 Supervisory Annunciation with enable/disable operation + 1.5 mA per
3-12SG green Monitor Annunciation, Page select active LED
EVAC AMBER
5th Floor Strobe Strobe
3-12/S1GY 12 groups green/ yellow Zone Page select with Trouble Annunciation 2 mA base
3-12/S1RY of two w/ red/yellow 12 Alarm and Trouble Annunciation with enable/disable + 1.5 mA per
3-12/S2Y switch yellow/ yellow Supervisory and Trouble Annunciation with enable/disable active LED
ON OPEN D
A
AUTO AUTO M
P
E
OFF CLOSE R
2mA base
Green /Yellow 123 On-Auto-Off fan and Open-Auto-Close Damper Control with
3-4/3SGYWR 4 LEDs + 1.5mA
and White/Red switches Trouble and Normal LED indicators
per active LED
ALERT 5th ON A OPEN D

A
F H M
PAGE L AUTO AUTO
O U P
O E
EVAC R OFF #4 CLOSE R
green/yellow /
3-6/3S1G2Y Six On-Auto-Off fan and Open-Auto-Close Damper Control 2 mA base
6 groups of yellow
groups of + 1.5 mA per
3 w/switch green/yellow /
3-6/3S1GYR three Page and Evacuation select with zone trouble active LED
red
Notes:
1) All Control Display Modules are UL and ULC listed.
2) All Control Display Modules mount over one Local Rail Module.
If no local rail module exists the 3-LDSM mounts to local rail
and supports one control display module.

Catalog Shipping
Description
Number Weight
0.45lb
3-LDSM LED Display Support Module
(.2kg)
3-24R 24 Red LED Display Module
U.S. 3-24Y 24 Yellow LED Display Module
T 888-378-2329 3-24G 24 Green LED Display Module
F 866-503-3996
3-12SR 12 switches with 12 Red LED Display/Control Module
Canada 3-12SY 12 switches with 12 Yellow LED Display/Control Module
Chubb Edwards 3-12SG 12 switches with 12 Green LED Display/Control Module
T 519 376 2430 3-12RY 12 Red LED and 12 Yellow LED Display Module
F 519 376 7258
12 switches with one Green and one Yellow LED per switch Display/
3-12/S1GY
Southeast Asia Control Module
T : +65 6391 9300 12 switches with one Red and one Yellow LED per switch Display/ 0.35lb
F : +65 6391 9306 3-12/S1RY (.12kg)
Control Module
12 switches with two Yellow LEDs per switch Display/Control
India 3-12/S2Y
T : +91 80 4344 2000 Module
F : +91 80 4344 2050 Six groups of three switches. Each switch with one LED. LEDs
3-6/3S1G2Y
provided Green, Yellow, Yellow.
Australia 12 switches in four groups of three switches, switch one with a green
T +61 3 9239 1200
3-4/3SGYWR LED, switch two with yellow and white LEDs and switch three with a
F +61 3 9239 1299
red LED
Europe Six groups of three switches. Each switch with one LED. LEDs
3-6/3S1GYR
T +32 2 725 11 20 provided Green, Yellow, Red
F +32 2 721 86 13
Latin America
T 305 593 4301
F 305 593 4300

05-18-11

Zoned Audio
Amplifiers
3-ZA20A, 3-ZA20B,
3-ZA40A, 3-ZA40B, 3-ZA95
3-ZA95 shown

The EST3 audio amplifiers take full advantage of proven digital • Three Sizes Available
technology to deliver highly intelligible voice audio for evacua- -20 Watts
tion and Mass Notification/Emergency Communication (MNEC) -40 Watts
purposes. Digital messages generated by the Audio Source -95 Watts
Unit (ASU) and live paging messages are multiplexed into eight
• Simultaneous eight channel digital audio
separate channels transmitted over fiber optic cable or a single
- Superior sound quality
twisted pair of wires. Each zoned amplifier contains integrated de-
- Each amplifier does it’s own decoding
multiplexing circuitry that allows any one of the eight digital audio
channels to place messages or signals on the amplifier’s built-in • Speaker circuit built into amplifier
speaker circuit. - Selectable for 70 or 25 VRMS output
- Class A (Style Z) or Class B (Style Y) output models available
Audio channel selection is network software controlled, and - Power limited
audio amplifiers mount in the same enclosures as other EST3
equipment. Power for the amplifiers comes from standard sys- • 3.5 amp 24 Vdc notification appliance circuit
tem power supplies through the local rail. Field wiring connects on 20 and 40 watt amplifiers
to removable terminal blocks on the amplifier module. Amplifiers - Class A (Style Z) or Class B (Style Y) output models available
support either 25 VRMS or 70 VRMS power limited speaker circuits. - Power limited
For visual signaling, each 20 or 40 watt amplifier comes standard • Network software control of channel selection
with one 24 Vdc power limited Notification Appliance Circuit.
• Integral backup tone generator
- 1 KHz temporal (3-3-3) tone evac

Application
EST3 zoned amplifier configurations offer improved reliability and
performance. Configuration provides improved survivability in the Dual Distributed
Bank Zoned
event of wiring faults that result in a loss of signaling. In the exam- Central Amplifiers
ple shown in the diagram, a fault on the system using a central
backed-up amplifier disables multiple signal/page circuits, and the
standby amplifier is not able to bypass the fault. With EST3, the
same fault removes the Audio Source Unit riser.
Central Zoned Page
Amplifier Amplifiers Alert
Evacuation
Short on Riser Short on Riser
disables all disables signal
Auxiliary
circuits source Stairwell
Page
Alert Elevator
Standby Amplifiers Evacuation Environmental
are local in nodes Emergency
Standby Evacuation
Tone at each Amplifier For example, with an alarm on Floor Eight, the following automatic
message instructions could be given concurrently. Note: A Page
could also be sent to any other location in the building – without
interrupting any of the messages below.
FLOOR 9 HEARS: “A fire alarm has been reported on the floor
Because all EST3 zoned amplifiers have an integrated backup below. Please evacuate using the stairwell.”
1000 Hz temporal tone generator, the locally-generated alarm FLOOR 8 HEARS: “A fire alarm has been reported on this floor.
tones notify occupants of a hazard – even with the primary riser Please evacuate using the stairwell.”
out of commission. The backup tone also operates if the ASU
or the audio distribution system fails. To further enhance system OTHER FLOORS HEAR: “An emergency has been reported on
survivability, a single standby amplifier can backup any zoned floor 8. Please remain in the building and await further instruc-
amplifier in the same cabinet. tions.”
Zoned amplifiers can be housed in remote cabinets close to the ELEVATOR: “A fire alarm has been reported in the building. The
speakers. This minimizes the voltage drop between the amplifier elevator is being returned to the ground floor for emergency use.
and the load, and permits the use of a smaller wire size than is Please evacuate the building.”
possible with centrally-located amplification systems.
STAIRWELLS: “Please remain calm and walk down the stairs to
EST3 easily outperforms banked audio systems with its ability to evacuate the building in a safe manner.”
simultaneously deliver up to eight different signals. When using
In addition to robust paging, EST3 provides UL-listed Mass
centrally-banked amplifiers, paging and alert channels typically
Notification/Emergency Communication (MNEC), which overrides
share a common amplifier. Consequently, when paging, the alert
fire alarm functions. This capability allows emergency response
signal goes silent in all alerted areas when a Page is issued. At
commanders to advise building occupants of the safest action to
the end of the Page, the alert signal resumes in the alert area,
take while an emergency is unfolding. Occupants can be in-
which could cause confusion because occupants did not receive
structed to leave, relocate, or seek immediate shelter, depending
the page message and do not know why the Page stopped and
on the situation. This provides the flexibility for communications to
restarted.
mesh with the facility’s risk analysis needs — without the risk of an
With EST3, simultaneous page, alert, and evacuation signal capa- unexpected fire alarm or general evacuation signal interfering with
bility is engineered into the system. With eight channels to choose established emergency response protocols.
from, dedicated messages can be delivered to stairwells, elevator
cabs, etc. while alert, evacuation, and page instructions are simul-
taneously being sent to the rest of the building. The eight audio
channels allow messages to be automatically routed, and provide
specific instructions based on the alarm’s location.

Engineering Specification Typical Wiring
The audio system shall provide eight simultaneous and distinct VISUAL NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE CIRCUIT
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
UL/ULC Listed 15KW EOL
For Class B circuits only
audio channels. These shall consist of a minimum of: Local Page, Not available on 3-ZA95
Class A circuits only
Emergency Communication, Multiple Evacuation, Alert, Auxiliary, COMMON ENCLOSURE

15KW EOL Field wiring identical Field wiring identical
and General Signaling. Channels shall support hierarchical opera-

to amplifier #1 to amplifier #1
tion and be controllable from system programming. The audio

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
system also provides Elevator, Stairwell and Auxiliary signaling.

To TB1 on Audio Amplifier To TB1 on Audio Amplifier To TB1 on Audio Amplifier To TB1 on Audio Amplifier
TB1 TB1
Systems that cause signaling devices to go silent while performing AUDIO

AMPLIFIER
AUDIO
AMPLIFIER
AUDIO
AMPLIFIER
AUDIO
AMPLIFIER
any signaling functions will not be accepted. MODULE
(Backup)
MODULE
(ZONE #1)
MODULE
(Zone #2)
MODULE
(Zone #3)
The audio system zoned amplifiers must be able to operate 25

TB2 TB2
To TB2 on Audio Amplifier To TB2 on Audio Amplifier To TB2 on Audio Amplifier
VRMS or 70 VRMS speakers. The amplifier output must be power 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
limited, and wired in a <Class A (Style Z)> <Class B (Style Y)> Field wiring identical
to amplifier #1
Field wiring
identical to
configuration. The amplifiers shall provide an integral backup 1000

amplifier #1
Connection for Shield when used
KHz temporal tone generator which shall operate in the event Legend
signal primary audio signals are lost and the amplifier is instructed
UL/ULC Listed 15KW EOL
- - For Class B circuits only
+ +
to broadcast alarm information. It shall be possible to backup Speaker Visual Notification

Appliance
EOL Resistor
Class A circuits only
multiple zoned amplifiers with a common backup amplifier. AUDIO NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE CIRCUIT
Specifications
3-ZA20A 3-ZA20B 3-ZA40A 3-ZA40B 3-ZA95
Agency Listing UL, ULC, CE
Environmental 0°C - 49°C (32°F - 120°F) 93% RH, Non-condensing
Frequency Response 400Hz to 4KHz @ +/- 3dB
Output Voltage 25 VRMS or 70 VRMS
THD (distortion) < 7%
Wire Size 18 to 12 AWG (1.0 to 2.5 mm²)
Internal Tone
1KHz Temporal (3-3-3) Tone (evacuation); 20 PPM (alert)
Generator
SIGA-CC1/2 Support 10 Units, Maximum
62mA for 20 and 40 watt amps;
Standby Current
64mA for the 3-ZA95 watt amp
Alarm Current 1120mA 1120mA 2480mA 2480mA 5540mA
Pwr. Ltd. Audio Output Class A or B Class A or B Class A or B
Class B (Style Y) Class B (Style Y)
Wiring Configuration (Style Z or Y) (Style Z or Y) (Style Z or Y)
15K Ohms 15K Ohms
EOL Resistor 15K Ohms in Class B 15K Ohms in Class B 15K Ohms in Class B
Pwr. Ltd. 24 Vdc NAC Class A or B Class B Class A or B Class B
Wiring Configuration (Style Z or Y) (Style Y) (Style Z or Y) (Style Y)
Line Resistance, Max.* 50 Ohms, Max. 50 Ohms, Max. 50 Ohms, Max. 50 Ohms, Max. N/A
EOL Resistor Line N/A 15 K Ohms N/A 15K Ohms
Capacitance, Max 0.33µF 0.33µF 0.33µF 0.33µF
Space Requirements 1 LRM Space 2 LRM Spaces
Maximum Speaker Circuit Distance at 0.5 dB loss*

70 VRMS Output 3-ZA20A 3-ZA20B 3-ZA40A 3-ZA40B 3-ZA95
#12 AWG
4,536 ft (1,382 m) 2,268 ft (691 m) 955 ft (290 m)
(3.2 Ohm/1000 ft pair)
#14 AWG
2,792 ft (850 m) 1,396 ft (425 m) 588 ft (179 m)
#16 AWG
1,815 ft (553 m) 907 ft (276 m) 382 ft (116 m)
#18 AWG
1,117 ft (340 m) 558 ft (170 m) 235 ft (71 m)
(13 Ohm/1000 ft pair)
25 VRMS Output 3-ZA20A 3-ZA20B 3-ZA40A 3-ZA40B 3-ZA95

#12 AWG
579 ft (176 m) 289 ft (88 m) 122 ft (37 m)
#14 AWG
356 ft (108 m) 178 ft (54 m) 75 ft (22 m)
#16 AWG
231 ft (70 m) 116 ft (35 m) 49 ft (14 m)
#18 AWG Not supported
142 ft (43 m) 71 ft (21 m)
(13 Ohm/1000 ft pair) by 18 AWG
* Refer to product manual for wire run calculations.

Catalog Ship Wt., lb.
Description
Number (kg)
20 Watt Zoned Amplifier w/Class A/B (Style Z/Y)
3-ZA20A 1.55 (0.7)
Detection & alarm since 1872 Audio & Class A/B (Style Z/Y) 24 VDC outputs
20 Watt Zoned Amplifier w/Class B (Style Y)
3-ZA20B 1.55 (0.7)
U.S. Audio & Class B (Style Y) 24 VDC outputs
T 888-378-2329 40 Watt Zoned Amplifier w/Class A/B (Style Z/Y)
F 866-503-3996 3-ZA40A 1.55 (0.7)
Audio & Class A/B (Style Z/Y) 24 VDC outputs
Canada 40 Watt Zoned Amplifier w/Class B (Style Y)
3-ZA40B 1.55 (0.7)
Chubb Edwards Audio & Class B (Style Y) 24 VDC outputs
T 519 376 2430 95 Watt Zoned Amplifier w/Class A/B (Style Z/Y) Audio
F 519 376 7258 3-ZA95 3.0 (1.5)
output
Filler Plate, order separately one required per amplifier when
Southeast Asia 3-FP 0.1 (0.05)
T : +65 6391 9300 no LED or LED/Switch module installed on operator layer.
F : +65 6391 9306
India
T : +91 80 4344 2000
F : +91 80 4344 2050

Australia
T +61 3 9239 1200
F +61 3 9239 1299
Europe
T +32 2 725 11 20
F +32 2 721 86 13
Latin America
T 305 593 4301
F 305 593 4300

05-18-11

Hinged Bracket
Filler plate
(ordered separately)
Module
Modem
Communicator
3-MODCOM, 3-MODCOMP

The Modem Communicator is a two-way local rail module that • Listed for fire, security and access control
performs a variety of off-premise communications functions for the
• V.32bis 14.4K full duplex modem
EST3 system.
• Digital alarm communicator transmitter supporting: SIA DCS
Using the latest in digital signal processing (DSP) techniques, the protocol, Contact ID protocol, 3/1 and 4/2 pulse format proto-
Modcom provides off premise communication features unavailable col
on any other system.
• Supports “tap” alphanumeric pager protocol
The module has provisions for supervising two loop-start tele-
phone lines. The module features a modular jack for telephone line • Fully programmable messages
connections. The Modcom’s configuration and firmware can also • Alarm override of upload/download
be updated from any network node.
• Two phone line capability
Modcom series modules occupy a single local rail space and
• Field upgradable firmware
can be mounted in any node on the network. Any EST3 Control/
Display module can be mounted on the face of a Modcom series • Split and multiple reporting to as many as 80 different receivers
module. Power for the Modcom is supplied by the EST3 system
• 255 subscriber accounts
supply.
• Supports control/display modules
The Modcom provides an enhanced level of survivability in the
event of a network CPU failure by notifying the Central Monitoring • Supervised by the network controller
Station of the failure and entering a degraded mode of operation.
In degraded mode, the Modcom can transmit a default fire alarm
message during a fire alarm condition.

Application multi-dial reporting capability permits an individual event to be
transmitted to multiple receivers, including pagers.
Two versions of the Modcom are available:
Remote Data Upload/Download
3-MODCOM - Has an internal V.32bis 14.4K baud full duplex The modem permits data to be downloaded into the memories
modem. The modem permits upload and download of system of the various components making up an EST3 system. Data can
data remotely via a telephone line. In addition, the 3-MODCOM be remotely uploaded and downloaded for use with the Edwards
has a Digital Alarm Communications Transmitter (DACT) or dialer Access Control Database Program. In the event that an alarm is
function that transmits network status information to Central received during upload/download activity, the Modcom automati-
Monitoring Stations (CMS) via telephone. Four DACT protocols are cally terminates the call and transmits the alarm events to the
available: appropriate receivers. When completed sending the events, the
1. Digital Communicator Standard (DCS) “SIA forma” Dialer download will continue where it left off.
– 300 baud format, which transmits alphanumeric system
status data to the CMS;
2. Contact ID;
3. SIA 3/1 dialer; and,
The system shall provided an off premise communications module
4. SIA 4/2 dialer. capable of transmitting system events to multiple Central Monitor-
Alarm code content is determined by system rules. ing Station (CMS) receivers. The module shall provide the CMS
with point identification of system events via 4/2, Contact ID or
3-MODCOMP – In addition to all modem and dialer (DACT) func- SIA DCS protocols. <The module shall also be capable of trans-
tions of the 3-MODCOM, the 3-MODCOMP can dial directly into mitting alphanumeric system activity by event to a commercial
paging systems using Telelocator Alphanumeric Protocol (TAP). Al- paging system using TAP Pager protocol.> The dialer shall have
phanumeric system data can be sent to a single pager or group(s) the capability to support up to 255 individual accounts and to
of pagers. Some pager services can forward messages via e-mail send account information to eighty (80) different receivers, each
and Fax. having a primary and secondary telephone access number.
System events shall be capable of being directed to one or more
Multiple Priority
receivers depending on event type or location as specified by the
Each Modcom can buffer up to 500 events in its event queue. It re-
system designer. The module shall have a degrade mode capable
views all active events in the queue and identifies the highest priority
of transmitting fire alarm signals to the CMS in the event of system
event and dials the associated receiver. When the receiver is con-
CPU failure. The module shall provide a high speed (V.32bis or
tacted, the MODCOM will transmit the highest priority message for
greater) modem function in order to upload and download system
that receiver. If the message is successfully received, the MODCOM
data to/from a remote location.
identifies the next highest priority message and the process repeats.
Phone Line Friendly
The Modcom series has been designed for installation on the
same phone lines with other devices such as phones and faxes. Typical Wiring
The module makes its first dial out attempt on either of the two
SURGE
PROTECTOR RING
phone lines that is not in use. This prevents unnecessary interrup-

(RED)
tion of calls in progress by the line seizure relays. In the event that
both lines are busy, the module seizes line one. GREEN
TIP
4 5 (GREEN)
3 6
A fixed DACT testing time can be set at an off-hour, e.g. 2:00am, RJ31X
8 PIN MODULAR
TO PHONE LINE #2
(WIRED SAME AS
again minimizing interruptions and phone line costs. The call time RED 2
1 8
7 CONNECTOR FOR
PHONE LINE #1
PHONE LINE #1)
is programmable, and allows testing of the DACT with the central PREMISES
PHONES 3
4 5
6
RJ31X
8 PIN MODULAR
station. 2 7
CONNECTOR FOR
PHONE LINE #2
1 8
The Modcom series also has the ability to detect Type 1, Type
2 and Type 3 distinctive ringing patterns, permitting it to share 1
its phone lines with other devices and still have a unique phone NO T-TAPS
PERMITTED
number for incoming modem calls. 7 Ft.
(2.13 M) 2
Multiple Modcoms per Network Notes:
Multiple Modcoms can be installed in a single cabinet or located 1 Connect Line 1 and Line 2 to RJ31X or RJ38X
LINE 1 LINE 2
MODCOM (CA31A or CA38A in Canada) telephone jacks

in nodes throughout the network to provide added availability and (front view)
installed by an authorized telephone company
enhanced redundancy of off premise communications. representative. Jacks (not supplied) must be
installed within 5 ft. (1.5 m) of the panel.
Multiple Receiver Capability 2 Phone Cord (P/N 360137) supplied) is

supervised and non-power limited.
In large system applications the EST3 system may be partitioned
such that it supports a number of different customers, each using
different Central Monitoring Stations and/or paging companies.
The Modcom can accommodate up to 255 different accounts us-
ing up to 80 different receivers.
The Modcom supports split reporting, a process where the system
directs the Modcom to send some events or event types to one
receiver, and different events to alternate receivers. The module’s

Specifications
Agency Listings UL, FCC Part 68 / CFR 47, ULC. See Note 1.
Installation Takes up one LRM space in 3-CHAS7
Input Power 24 Vdc @ 60mA standby, 95 mA active
Modem Protocol ITU - V.32bis 14.4K baud full duplex using standard PC modem compatible data
SIA 3/1 (format P2) and 4/2 (format P3): 20 pulses per second, double round Contact ID (DTMF format)
Dialer Protocol
Digital Communications Standard (DCS) “SIA format”: Level 2 (300 baud, Bell 103)
Pager Protocol (3-MODCOMP only) Telocator Alphanumeric Protocol (TAP), Version 1.8, 300 baud, Bell 103
Telephone
Dialing Pulse or Tone (DTMF)
Connector Two 8-position modular phone jacks
CMS Telephone Numbers
Quantity Two per receiver - 160 max.
Available Digits Up to 24 digits per number
Receivers Supports up to 80 individual receivers.
Event Buffer 500 events
Operating Environment 32°F (0°C) to 120°F (49°C), 93% RH Non-condensing
Receivers Tested
Format Manufacturer Model Receiver Card
4/2 and 3/1 Ademco 685 685-1 or 685-8
FBI (Fire Burglary Instruments) CP220
Osborne-Hoffman OH2000
Radionics D6600
Silent Knight 9000 9032
Sur-Gard MLR2, SG-SLR
MCDI TLR, TLR+
Contact ID Ademco 685 685-8
Osborne-Hoffman OH2000
Sur-Gard MLR2, SG-SLR
Radionics D6600
Silent Knight 9000 9032
MCDI TLR, TLR+
SIA DCS Sur-Gard MLR2, SG-SLR
Note 1:
The EST3 is modularly listed under the following standards:
UL 864 categories: UOJZ, UOXX, UUKL and SYZV, UL 294 category ALVY, UL 609 category AOTX, UL 636 category ANET, UL 1076 category APOU, UL 365 category
APAW, UL 1610 category AMCX, UL 1635 category AMCX
ULC-S527, ULC-S301, ULC-S302, ULC-S303, ULC-S306, ULC/ORD-C1076 and ULC/ORD-C693
Please refer to EST3 Installation and Service Manual for complete system requirements.
Catalog Ship Wt.
Description
Number lb (kg)
3-MODCOM Modem/Dialer (DACT) version 0.5 (0.23)
Modem/Dialer (DACT) w/TAP Pager
3-MODCOMP 0.5 (0.23)
Protocol
Filler Plate, order separately when no LED
3-FP 0.1 (0.05)
or LED/Switch module installed.

U.S.
T 888-378-2329
F 866-503-3996
Canada
Chubb Edwards
T 519 376 2430
F 519 376 7258
Southeast Asia
T : +65 6391 9300
F : +65 6391 9306
India
T : +91 80 4344 2000
F : +91 80 4344 2050

Australia
T +61 3 9239 1200
F +61 3 9239 1299
Europe
T +32 2 725 11 20
F +32 2 721 86 13
Latin America
T 305 593 4301
F 305 593 4300

05-18-11

EST3
Cabinets and
Chassis
3-CAB series, 3-RCC Series
3-RCC series, EN54-2:1997+A1 and

EN54-4:1997+A1:2002+A2 pending
3-CHAS7 series, BC-1 3-CAB Series

EST3 has a wide selection of cabinet arrangements allowing the • Right or left hand hinging of doors
greatest use of EST3’s flexible modular design. Lobby enclosure
• Lag and Keyway holes for quick mounting
wallboxes are manufactured from #14 AWG cold rolled steel with
a gray baked enamel finish. Lobby enclosure doors are manu- • Attack rated door for security applications
factured from #14 AWG cold rolled steel and have a modern • Knockouts for 3/4 inch conduit
contoured door design with integral viewing window. The excep-
tion is the small lobby enclosure 3-CAB5. The 3-CAB5 wallbox • Attractive contour door design on lobby enclosures
and non-contoured door are #16 AWG cold rolled steel. Lobby • Combination flush or surface mounting lobby enclosure design
enclosure doors come with gray baked enamel or optional red
baked enamel finishes. The EST3 lobby enclosures back boxes, • Remote closet cabinets for electrical closet mounting support
doors and chassis units are ordered and shipped separately. The up to 65 AMP hour batteries
3-CAB5 lobby enclosure comes complete with door and back box • Optional earthquake hardening: OSHPD seismic pre-approval
providing space to mount five local rail modules. for component Importance Factor 1.5
The EST3 remote closet cabinet design allows the installation of
control panel electronics in electrical closets. The remote closet
cabinets have left hand hinged doors and are available with red
finish only. Optional display modules used for system diagnostics
display, mount behind the closet cabinet door and are not visible
with the door closed.

Application
Lobby Enclosures
EST3 lobby enclosures provide space for control, monitoring and
display modules where they remain visible even with the door
closed and secure. Ideal for mounting in lobby’s where appear-
ance is important, maximum mounting flexibility is provided with
doors that will mount for right or left hand opening. Lobby enclo-
sures come in several sizes to match individual project require-
ments.
The 3-CAB5 series semi-flush or surface mounts. A built in rail
assembly provides space for up to five local rail modules, no
chassis assembly needed. Back space for 1-1/2 footprints gives
room for a power supply and a 1/2 footprint module and 10 AH
batteries. The local rail module spaces provide room for amplifiers,
common control and annunciation modules.
The 3-CAB7 semi-flush or surface mounts and has a contoured
front door with viewing window. Space is provided for two 17
AH batteries and one chassis assembly providing seven local rail *
module spaces.
The 3-CAB14 semi-flush or surface mounting and has a con-
toured front door with viewing window. Space is provided for two
17AH batteries and two chassis assemblies each providing seven
local rail module spaces.
The 3-CAB21 semi-flush or surface mounts and has a contoured
front door with viewing window. Space is provided for two 17AH
batteries and three chassis assemblies each providing seven local
rail module spaces. 25.0 in (63.5 cm) Surface Mounted
23.25 in (59.03 cm)
3.55 in
(9.01 cm)
21.44 in (54.46 cm) Remote Closet Cabinets
3-RCC7R
Remote Closet Cabinets 1.75 in
(4.45 cm)
1.25 in (3.18 cm)
3-RCC14R
Remote closet cabinets provide an economical way of installing 6 in
3-RCC21R
equipment in locations where esthetics are not paramount, like ALL KNOCKOUTS
FOR 3/4" CONDUIT
(15.2 cm)
electrical closets. You can have optional display modules used for
(1.9 cm)
system diagnostics display mounted behind the front door. These OUTER DOOR
2 in
21 in (53.3 cm) 5.64 in
(14.3 cm)
4.4 in
(11.2 cm)
(5.1 cm)
display modules will not be visible with the door closed. Remote
closet cabinets are surface mounting and come in sizes providing
space for one to three chassis with room for standby batteries. A
14.175 in (36 cm)

3-RCC7 23.875 in (60.64 cm)
3-RCC7 23.25 in (59.10 cm)

UL Listed attack rated door having a 2-minute rating is available for Chassis
23.95 in (60.83 cm)

the 3-RCC7R cabinet. This door is required for security applications.
Installation and Mounting

3-RCC14 36.125 in (91.76 cm)
3-RCC14 35.47 in (90.10 cm)
36.2 in (91.95 cm)

Lobby Enclosure Chassis
3-cab5B
3-RCC21 48.375 in (122.87 cm)
3-RCC21 47.72 in (121.21 cm)
Chassis *
1.3 in
(3.3 cm)
BATTERY AREA
DO NOT INSTALL CONDUIT
[3RCC.CDR]
.625 in
(1.6 cm)
* The lower mounting space can be used for an MN-BRKT1

bracket, which holds MNEC interface equipment including an MN-
NETSW1 Ethernet network switch, an MN-ABPM Audio bridge,
an MN-FVPN VoIP module, and an MN-COM1S Communications
module.

BC-1 Dimensions
Catalog Equipment Ship Wt.
Description Battery Space
Number Mounting Space lb. (Kg)
Lobby Enclosures — Outer doors with viewing window

Five local rail modules
3-CAB5 Cabinet w/Wallbox, door and chassis One footprint and Two - 12V10A 30 (13.6)
½ footprint module
3-CAB7B Wallbox only One Chassis Four - 6V8A Two - 12V10A Two - 30 (13.6)
3-CAB7B-E Wallbox only, EN54* certified CE 1 Chassis 12V17A 30 (13.6)
3-CAB7D(R) Inner and outer doors for 3-CAB7B 10 (4.5)
N/A
3-CAB7D(R)-E Inner & outer doors for 3-CAB7B, EN54*, CE 10 (4.5)
3-CAB14B Wallbox only Two Chassis Four - 6V8A Two - 12V10A Two - 42 (19.1)
3-CAB14B-E Wallbox only, EN54* certified CE 2 Chassis 12V17A 42 (19.1)
N/A
3-CAB21B Wallbox only Three Chassis Four - 6V8A Two - 12V10A Two - 55 (25)
3-CAB21B-E Wallbox only, EN54* certified CE 3 Chassis 12V17A 55 (25)
N/A
Remote Closet Enclosure — No viewing window

3-RCC7R Red wallbox and door Four - 6V8A, Two - 12V10A 37.5 (17)
One Chassis
3-RCC7R-E Red wallbox and door, EN54* certified CE Two - 12V17A, Two - 12V50A 37.5 (17)
ATCK Attack rated door for 3-RCC7R N/A 26 (11.8)
3-RCC14R Red wallbox and door 53 (24)
Two Chassis Four - 6V8A
3-RCC14R-E Red wallbox and door, EN54* certified CE 53(24)
Two - 12V10A, Two - 12V17A
3-RCC21R Red wallbox and door 70 (31.8)
Three Chassis Two - 12V50A, Two - 12V65²
3-RCC21R-E Red wallbox and door, EN54* certified CE 70 (31.8)
Chassis Assemblies
Takes one chassis space in wallbox, provides space for 7 local rail modules, up to two power supplies, and a ½ footprint
3-CHAS7 8.4 (3.8)
module.
3-ASU** Takes one chassis space in wallbox, provides an audio source unit /w microphone and an inner door filler plate. 15 (6.8)
3-ASU/4** Takes one chassis space in wallbox, provides an audio source unit /w microphone and four local rail module spaces. 15 (6.8)
3-ASU/FT** Takes one chassis space in wallbox, provides an audio source unit /w microphone and Firefighters Telephone 20 (9.1)
3-FTCU** Takes one chassis space in wallbox, provides Firefighters Telephone Control unit and inner door filler plate. 15 (6.8)
MN-BRKT1 Takes one chassis space in wallbox, provides mounting for MNEC interface equipment 4.0 (1.8)
FSB-BRKT Mounting bracket for FSB-PC communications bridge. Allows FSB-PC to mount on the side of a Chass7 1.0 (0.45)
more...
Notes:
1. All lobby enclosures, wallboxes and doors have a textured gray enamel finish; UL 365 category APAW, UL 1610 category AMCX, UL 1635 category AMCX
outer doors are available in red by adding the suffix “R” to the catalog number, i.e. ULC-S527, ULC-S301, ULC-S302, ULC-S303, ULC-S306, ULC/ORD-C1076,
3-CAB7DR. ULC/ORD-C693
2. Remote closet cabinets will support 65 AH batteries with the use of the 3-BATS Please refer to EST3 Installation and Service Manual for complete system require-
Battery Shelf, which reduces the enclosure’s chassis capacity by one chassis. ments.
3. The EST3 is modularly listed under the following standards: * EN54-2:1997+A1 and EN54-4:1997+A1:2002+A2 pending
UL 864 categories: UOJZ, UOXX, UUKL and SYZV, UL 2572, UL 294 category
ALVY, UL 609 category AOTX, UL 636 category ANET, UL 1076 category APOU, ** Add “-CC” for City of Chicago.

Accessories
Battery Shelf for RCC Enclosures. Takes one chassis space. Room for
3-BATS 3 (1.36)
up to one 65 AH or two 50 AH batteries.
BC-1 Battery Cabinet - supports up to two 40 amp hour batteries.
3-BTSEN Battery sensor/distribution module 0.5 (.2)
Detection & alarm since 1872 BC-1 - Seismic Battery hold down for BC-1. Supports up to two 40
BC-1EQ
Ahr batteries. Order BC-1 Separately.
U.S. 3-CAB - Seismic Battery hold-down for 3-CAB 7, 14 or 21. Supports two 1 2V
T 888-378-2329
3-CABEQ batteries from 10 Ah up to 18 Ah. Comes with EST3 Chassis hardening hardware
F 866-503-3996
and instructions. Order 3-CAB7, 3-CAB14 or 3-CAB21 separately. See note 1.
Canada 3-RCC series - Seismic Battery hold-down. Supports one set of two 50 Ah
Chubb Edwards 3-RCCEQ50 batteries. Comes with EST3 Chassis hardening hardware and instructions. Order
T 519 376 2430 3-RCCxxR separately. See note 1.
F 519 376 7258
3-RCC series cabinet - Seismic Battery hold-down. Supports one set of two 65
Southeast Asia 3-RCCEQ65 Ah batteries (one battery in bottom of cabinet, one battery mounted on 3-BATS).
T : +65 6391 9300 Order 3-RCCxxR cabinet and 3-BATS separately. See note 1.
F : +65 6391 9306 Tamper switch for 3-CAB7, 3-CAB14 and 3-CAB21 cabinets. Mounts
3-TAMP 0.5 (.2)
to side of cabinet.
India
3-TAMP5 Tamper switch for 3-CAB5. Mounts to side of cabinet. 0.5 (.2)
T : +91 80 4344 2000
F : +91 80 4344 2050 3-TAMPRCC Tamper Switch for RCC series cabinets. Mounts to side
3-TAMPRCC 0.5 (.2)
of cabinet.
Australia 1. For earthquake anchorage, including detailed mounting weights and center of gravity detail, please refer to
T +61 3 9239 1200 Seismic Application Guide 3101676. Approval of panel anchorage to site structure may require local AHJ,
F +61 3 9239 1299 structural, or civil engineer review.
Europe
T +32 2 725 11 20
F +32 2 721 86 13
Latin America
T 305 593 4301
F 305 593 4300

05-18-11

EST Catalog u Annunciation
System Event Printer

PT-1S, PT-1P
Overview Application
The PT-1 series printers are high speed, 9-pin dot matrix type The PT-1S (serial, RS-232 interface) is used when connecting to
which use standard, continuous tractor feed computer paper. The the CM1(N), CM2N, FCCD, 2-MCM or 3-CPU1. The PT-1P (Paral-
PT-1 series printers are used to permanently record Life Safety lel interface) is used when the printer is connected to the VDU-3,
System changes of state. All printed entries contain the date, time, CCA-1/4/8 or the CGP-1/4/8.
event type and a user defined message for each printed event.
The printer is required in proprietary type systems. In local, auxilia-
ry or remote station systems the printer is ancillary and is optional.
The printer must be backed up by a UPS in a proprietary system. Installation
Printer paper may be fed from the rear or bottom of the printer. The printer comes from the factory with all DIP switches and oper-
ating modes setup for proper operation with the system. The baud
rate in some instances may have to be adjusted to provide reliable
transmission over long distances. When configuring a system to
Standard Features meet the requirements of proprietary, the printer must be located
• High speed, bi-directional printing adjacent to the Fire Command Center.
• Serial (model PT-1S) or parallel (model PT-1P) interface When the printer is located greater than 50 ft (15.2 m) from the
• Front panel setup Fire Command Center, Short Haul Modems (model SHM-M1 or
SHM-F1) may be used. Short Haul Modems will allow distances
• Supports modems for remote installation up to 5 miles (8 km) @ 2400 Baud. When Short Haul Modems are
• Supports fiber optics module used the printer is considered ancillary and the connection is not
supervised.
• LED Status indicators
When the SHM modules are used with the CM1(N) or CM2N an
• RS-232 direct cable IOP3A module must be used to properly power the modules. The
• Printer self-test mode IOP3A may be located on the inside of the Fire Command Center
enclosure.
Page 1 of 2 D ATA S H E E T 270020

Engineering Specifications
The event and status printer shall be a 9-pin, impact, dot matrix printer with a minimum
print speed of 232 characters per second. Print parameters shall be set up with a menu
drive program in the printer. The printer shall be capable of serial or parallel communica-
tions protocol. The communications speed for RS-232 communications protocol shall be
adjustable from 300 to 9600 Baud. The serial or parallel cable shall be supervised. The
U.S. serial printer shall support Short Haul Modems. The printer shall list the time, date, type
T 888-378-2329 and user defined message for each event printed.
F 866-503-3996
Canada
Chubb Edwards
T 519 376 2430
Connection Diagram
F 519 376 7258
Southeast Asia
T : +65 6391 9300
F : +65 6391 9306
India
T : +91 80 4344 2000
F : +91 80 4344 2050

Australia
T +61 3 9239 1200
F +61 3 9239 1299
Europe
T +32 2 725 11 20
F +32 2 721 86 13
Latin America
T 305 593 4301
F 305 593 4300 Specifications
utcfireandsecurity.com Print Speed 232 cps
Voltage 120 Vac, ±10% 220/240 Vac, ±10%
© 2010 UTC Fire & Security. Power rating 48VA
Frequency 50/60 Hz
MTBF 4000 Hrs @ 25% duty cycle
Size 14.2 x 10.8 x 3.2 inches 36.1 x 27.4 x 8.1 cm
Weight 9.9 lbs (4.5 kg)
Agency Listings UL, ULC, MEA, CSFM
Operating Environment Temperature: 32° - 120°F (0° - 49°C). Humidity: 85% non-condensing
Model P/N Description
PT-1S 360038 Serial Printer
PT-1P 360039 Parallel Printer
PT-1S/220 360070 Serial Printer-220/240 Vac
PT-1P/220 360071 Parallel Printer-220/240 Vac
Related Parts Ordering Information

SHM-M1 360024 Short Haul Modem with male DB-25 connector
SHM-F1 360025 Short Haul Modem with female DB-25 connector
IOP3A 130117 Isolated I/O port card
05-18-11

EST3 Remote
Annunciators
3-ANNCPU3, 3-LCDANN, 3-6ANN,
3-10ANN, 3-EVxxx, 3-4ANN
EN54-2:1997+A1 and
EN54-4:1997+A1:2002+A2
pending
Overview Application Display

EST3 supports a full range of annunciator options for Mass Use EST3 remote annunciators when a
Notification/Emergency Communication (MNEC), Life Safety and compact system status display is need-
other purposes. Annunciator cabinets are constructed from 16 ed. Annunciator configurations include:
gauge cold rolled steel. The gray textured enamel finish of the LCD only display, LED only displays or
annunciators complements any decor. Both surface and semi- combination LED and LCD display in a
flush mounting cabinet configurations maximize mounting flexibility single enclosure.
and esthetic appeal. Cabinet arrangements allow both LED and
The LCD display uses either the 3-LCD
LCD annunciation to easily combine in a single enclosure. Slide in
or 3-LCDXL1 Liquid crystal display mod- Label
labeling for LEDs and switches provides designation flexibility for
ule. The 3-LCD has a 128 x 64 graphi-
labeling in local languages. For graphic annunciation EST3 offers Annunciator Support
cal display typically used to display eight
LED driver boards perfectly suited to operate in most graphic an- Module
lines of 21 characters on its LCD display
nunciators.
while the 3-LCDXL1 has a larger 240 x 320 pixel backlit display
EST3 annunciators are perfect for MNEC applications. They can that supports 24 lines of 40 characters. Both LDC displays pro-
be used in Central Control Stations (CCS), Autonomous Control vide the room needed to convey emergency information in a useful
Units (ACU), Local Operating Console (LOC) and combination format.
units. In these applications, annunciators are configured to oper-
The 3-LCD always displays the last highest priority event even
ate as Local Operation Consoles, or even Central Command Sta-
when the user is viewing other message queues. To give the
tions, from which MNEC is initiated and controlled.
greatest message flexibility EST3 event messages can route to
specific annunciators. Routing can be initiated at a specific time/
Standard Features shift change. Messages need only display in areas having to
• Standard 3-LCD (168 characters) and large-format 3-LCDXL1 respond to an event.
(960 character) display options For LED display, the full line of EST3 Control/Display Modules
• LCD uses queues to sort events support event display. Control/Display modules install over any an-
nunciator support module maximizing annunciator design flexibility.
• Variety of wallbox configurations
A Lamptest feature can program to any spare control switch. If
• Programmable LED flash rates an LCD display is installed in the annunciator, simply operate the
Alarm Silence and Trouble Silence switches simultaneously to
• Slide-in labels
lamptest all LEDs.
Makes customization for regional language easy
• Full line of driver boards for graphic annunciators

Typical Wiring Graphic Annunciator Field Wiring
Rear view 3-ANNCPU3 Field Wiring RS-485 NETWORK DATA
1
RS-485 NETWORK DATA
3-6ANN Shown FROM PREVIOUS PANEL TO NEXT PANEL
24VDC FROM 3-PPS/M OR 3-BPS/M 24VDC TO NEXT
Ground Lead POWER RISER POWER MODULE
To Backbox
EARTH GROUND
NETWORK A
NETWORK B
24 VDC
24 VDC
SPARE
1 Power limited
circuit Graphic Annunciator
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
To TB1 on 3-ANNCPU3
NOTES:
1. All wiring except earth Wire Specifications
TX RX
RX TX
TX RX
RX TX
TX RX
RX TX
TX RX
RX TX ground supervised and power Network Data Communications - RS485 Format

limited.
2. 24 VDC available from Minimum Twisted Pair 18 AWG (0.75 mm²).
Primary or Booster Power Maximum Circuit Resistance 90 Ohms
supply. Maximum Circuit Capacitance 0.3 µF
3. Uses RS-485 Network Maximum Distance
communication format between any 3 panels 5,000 ft. (1,524 m).
4. Network wiring Twisted Pair
Maximum Accumulative Capacitance
Power Riser
Calculate wire size for a maximum 3.4 Vdc total line loss from the 24 Vdc Wire Size 38.4K Baud 19.2K Baud
nominal voltage. 18 AWG 1.4 µF 2.8 µF
16 AWG 1.8 µF 3.6 µF
14 AWG 2.1 µF 4.2 µF
Distance limits are determined using the maximum allowable circuit
resistance and capacitance, and manufacturer’s cable specifications.
Specifications
Catalog Number 3-ANNCPU3 3-ANNSM 3-LCD 3-LCDXL1
Agency Listings UL, ULC, FM, CE, LPCB EN54* pending.
Mounts over 3-ANNCPU
Mounting Space Two Spaces One Space Mounts over 3-ANNCPU
plus two spaces.
Communication Format RS-485 N/A N/A N/A
Current @ 24 Vdc
Standby 144 mA 10mA 40mA 48mA
Alarm 144 mA 10mA 42mA 50mA
Wiring Termination Plug in terminal strip
Twisted Pair 18-14 AWG
Wiring Size
(0.75-1.5 mm²) N/A
5000 ft (1524m)
Max. Wire Distance
between any 3 panels
Relative Humidity 93% non condensing at 90° F (32° C)
Temperature Rating 0-49° C (32 - 120° F)
Wiring Styles Class A or Class B
Note: For a complete list of EST3 annunciator display and control modules please refer to Edwards literature sheet part number 85010-
0055.
* EN54-2:1997+A1 and EN54-4:1997+A1:2002+A2 pending
The Life Safety system shall incorporate annunciation of Alarm, units. The LCD interface must provide the ability to display custom
Supervisory, Trouble and Monitor operations. Annunciation must event messages of a minimum of 40 characters. The LCD must
be through the use of both LED display strips complete with a provide the emergency user, hands free viewing of the first and
means to custom label each LED as to its function. Where ap- last highest priority event. The last highest priority event must
plicable control switches must be provided. Switches with LEDs always display and update automatically. System events must
must provide positive feed back to the operator of remote equip- automatically be placed in queues. It shall be possible to view
ment status. An LCD display with basic common control LEDs specific event types separately. Having to scroll through a mixed
and switches shall be provided. The Common Control Switches list of events types is not acceptable. The total number of active
and LEDs provided as minimum will be: Reset switch and LED, events by type must be displayed. It must be possible to custom-
Alarm Silence switch and LED, Panel Silence switch and LED, Drill ize the designations of all user interface LEDs and switches for
switch and LED. It must be possible to add additional common local language requirements. It must be possible to route system
controls as required though the use of modular display / control event messages to specific annunciator locations.
Dimensions
6.12 in
Semiflush Mount (15.55 cm) Surface Mount
2.75 in 2.75 in
(6.99 cm) (6.99 cm)
0.46 in (1.17 cm)
7.60 in 7.60 in
(19.31 cm) (19.31 cm)
TOP TOP
Earth ground stud located Earth ground stud located

on inside upper left corner on inside upper left corner
next to knockout next to knockout
RCLM/B(-S) 12.07 in 12.95 in 12.95 in
(30.66 cm) (32.9 cm) (32.9 cm)
Semiflush Surface mount

10.1 in. (25.7 cm) 11.6 in. (29.4 cm)
2.75 in. (7.0 cm) 2.75 in. (7.0 cm)
11.6 in. (29.4 cm)
4ANN/B(-S)
13.19 in. 12.1 in. 13.19 in.
(33.5 cm) (30.7 cm) (33.5 cm)

14.5 in. (36.8 cm) 16.1 in. (40.9 cm)
2.75 in. (7.0 cm) 2.75 in. (7.0 cm)
16.1 in. (40.9 cm)
6ANN/B(-S)
13.19 in. 12.1 in. 13.19 in.
(33.5 cm) (30.7 cm) (33.5 cm)

23.86 in. (60.60 cm) 25.47 in. (64.7 cm)
2.75 in. (7.0 cm)
25.47 in. (64.7 cm)
10ANN/B(-S)
12.1 in. 13.19 in. 12.1 in.
(30.7 cm) (33.5 cm) (30.7 cm)

Catalog Ship Wt.
Description
Number lb (kg)
Command Module Annunciators (Come with CPU, LCD display and doors. Order wallbox
separately.)
3-LCDANN Remote LCD Command Module Annunciator. 3.8 (1.7)
3-LCDANN-E Remote LCD Command Module Annunciator. For EN54* market only, CE. 3.8 (1.7)
Base Annunciators (Come with two 3-ANNSM annunciator support modules, a CPU, and doors.
Order Display/Control modules, additional support modules & wallbox separately.)
3-4ANN Four Position Base Annunciator.
Detection & alarm since 1872 3-4ANN-E Four Position Base Annunciator. For EN54* market only, CE.
U.S.
6.28
3-6ANN Six Position Base Annunciator.
T 888-378-2329 (2.85)
F 866-503-3996 6.28
3-6ANN-E Six Position Base Annunciator. For EN54* market only, CE.
(2.85)
Canada 3-10ANN 10 Position Base Annunciator. 10.5 (4.8)
Chubb Edwards
T 519 376 2430 3-10ANN-E 10 Position Base Annunciator. For EN54* market only, CE. 10.5 (4.8)
F 519 376 7258 *EN54-2:1997+A1 and EN54-4:1997+A1:2002+A2 pending
CPU, Support Module, & LCD Displays
Southeast Asia
3-ANNCPU3 Annunciator CPU 1 (.45)
T : +65 6391 9300
F : +65 6391 9306 CPU doors with filler plates. Order separately, one required per CPU
3-CPUDR 0.25 (.11)
where no LCD display is installed.
India 3-ANNSM Annunciator Support Module .45 (.2)
T : +91 80 4344 2000 3-LCD Liquid Crystal Display Module, eight lines. .8 (.36)
F : +91 80 4344 2050
Liquid Crystal Display Module, 40 lines mounts in 3-4ANN, 3-6ANN or 3-10ANN
Australia 3-LCDXL1 anunciators. Note one 3-LCDXL1KBL, (ordered separately) is required for each
T +61 3 9239 1200 3-LCDXL1 mounting into 3-6ANN or 3-10ANN annunicator boxes.
F +61 3 9239 1299 Cable for 3-LCDXL1 (Use to connect from 3-ANNCPU3 to the first annuciator
3-LCDXL1KBL
support model. Not required with 3-4ANN and 3-LCDXL1 applications.)
Europe
T +32 2 725 11 20 Control/Display Modules
F +32 2 721 86 13 3-CPUDR Two blank filler plates suitable for any annunciator blank space. .5 (.22)
3-24R 24 Red LED Display Module .35 (.12)
Latin America
3-24Y 24 Yellow LED Display Module .35 (.12)
T 305 593 4301
F 305 593 4300 3-24G 24 Green LED Display Module .35 (.12)
3-12SR 12 switches with 12 Red LED Display/Control Module .35 (.12)
utcfireandsecurity.com 3-12SY 12 switches with 12 Yellow LED Display/Control Module .35 (.12)
3-12SG 12 switches with 12 Green LED Display/Control Module .35 (.12)
All rights reserved. 3-12RY 12 Red LED and 12 Yellow LED Display Module .35 (.12)
3-12/S1GY 12 switches with one Green and one Yellow LED per switch .35 (.12)
3-12/S1RY 12 switches with one Red and one Yellow LED per switch .35 (.12)
3-12/S2Y 12 switches with two Yellow LEDs per switch .35 (.12)
Six groups of three switches. Each switch with one LED: Green, Yellow,
3-6/3S1G2Y .35 (.12)
Yellow.
Six groups of three switches. Each switch with one LED: Green, Yellow,
3-6/3S1GYR .35 (.12)
Red.
3-REMICA Remote microphone for use in 3-ANN series annunciator cabinets 15 (6.8)
Filler Plate, order separately one required per 3-ANNSM when no
3-FP 0.1 (0.05)
LED or LED/Switch module installed on operator layer.
Driver Modules, Power Supplies
3-EVDVR LED/SWITCH Driver Module, For Edwards Graphics .35 (.12)
3-EVDVRA LED/SWITCH Driver Module Assembly for Third-party Graphics .35 (.12)
3-EVPWR Power Supply for Edwards Graphics .5 (.22)
Power Supply Assembly c/w 19 inch rail mounting chassis assembly
3-EVPWRA 2.5 (1.2)
space for one 3-ANNCPU3 for Third-party Graphics
Plastic mounting extrusion 19 inch mounting - Space for up to three
3-EVDVRX .35 (.12)
3-EVDVRA modules.
Enclosures
RLCM/B Remote Command module flush mount LCD wallbox 2.5 (1.2)
RLCM/B-S Remote Command module surface mount LCD wallbox 2.5 (1.2)
3-RLCM/D Inner & outer doors for RLCM/B(-S) 2.0 (0.9)
4ANN/B Four Position LED/LCD flush mount wallbox. 6.0 (2.7)
4ANN/B-S Four position LED/LCD surface mount wallbox. 6.0 (2.7)
6ANN/B Six position LED/LCD flush mount wallbox 7.0 (3.2)
6ANN/B-S Six position LED/LCD surface mount wallbox 7.0 (3.2)
10ANN/B Ten position LED/LCD flush mount wallbox 9.0 (4.1)
10ANN/B-S Ten position LED/LCD surface mount wallbox 9.0 (4.1)
05-18-11

Specification Sheet
Sealed Rechargeable Lead-Acid Batteries SLA1165

Specifications
NO MI N A L V O L T A G E : 1 2 V CHARGE R ETE N TION (shelf life)
NO MI N A L C A P A C I T Y :
a t 6 8 o ( 2 0 o C ):
1 m o n th 97%
Terminal
20 hr. r a t e o f 2 . 7 5 A t o 1 0.5 V 5 5 Ah 3 m o n ths 91% Standard Optional
10 hr. r a t e o f 5 . 1 4 A t o 1 0.5 V 5 1 .4 Ah 6 m o n ths 85%
5 hr. r a t e o f 9 . 5 2 A t o 1 0.2 V 4 8 .1 Ah
Ø .600" (15.2)
Ø .600" (15.2)
Ø .695" (17.6)
5/16" Stud 5/16" Stud
1 hr. r a t e o f 3 7 . 8 A t o 9 . 6 0 V 3 7 .8 Ah LIF E EXPEC TA N C Y : .5" (12.7) Ø .327" (8.3) Ø .695" (17.6) Ø .630" (16.0)
Ø .750" (19.0)
ST ANDBY U SE 3 to 5 years
W E I G H T ( a p p r o x . ) : 3 9 p o u n d s ( 1 7 .7 kg s) CYCL E U S E (approx.):
1 0 0 % d e pth of di scharge 250 cycl es U Positive MG Negative
MG Positive
E NE RGY D E N S I T Y ( 2 0 h r. ra t e ) : 5 0 % d e pth of di scharge 550 cycl es Terminal
1. 45 W H / c u b i c i n c h ( 9 0 WH/lite r ) 3 0 % d e pth of di scharge 1200 cycl es
Ø .630" (16.0)
Ø .327" (8.3)
S P E CI F I C E N E R G Y ( 2 0 h r ra t e ) : SEAL ED C ON STR U C TION : .5" (12.7) Ø .695" (17.6) Ø .630" (16.0)
Ø .750" (19.0)
17 WH / p o u n d ( 3 8 W H / kg ) Ca n b e o perated i n any posi ti on
with o u t leakage.
I NTE R N A L R E S I S T A N C E OF CHARGED U Negative Automotive Type Automotive Type
BATTE R Y : ST ANDARD TE R MIN A L: Terminal AP Positive AP Negative
7. 8 m i l l i o h m s ( a p p r o x .) Un ive r sal or opti ons i n termi nal
d ia g r a m .375
" (9
) .5)
M AX I M U M D I S C H A R G E CURRENT Terminal height
.74
" (1
8.7
Ø .770" (19.5)
Ø .327" (8.3)
W I TH ST A N D A R D T E R MINAL S: HOUSING MA TE R IA L: above cover M6
150 a m p e r e s PP Re si n Terminal
Type
NP55-12
mm ins
B 3.3 0.13 NB Terminal B Terminal
M AX I M U M S H O R T - D U RAT ION OPT IONA L: NB
MJ
21.1
26.9
0.83
1.06
DI S CH A R G E C U R R E N T : Co n ta iner and cover made from AP 21.1 0.83
Ø .600" (15.2)
MG 36.3 1.43 5/16" Stud
500 a m p e r e s F la m e R etardent PP U 21.1 0.83 Ø .770" (19.5)
( UL 9 4 - V0/L.O.I.>28%)
O P E RA T I N G T E M P E R AT URE RANGE: Note:
Dimensions are in inches (mm)
CHAR G E 5 o F to 1 2 2 o F Tolerances are ± 0.04 in. (± 1mm)
and ± 0.08 in. (± 2mm) for height MJ Terminal
( - 1 5 o C to 5 0 o C) dimensions
DI S C H A R G E - 4 o F to 1 4 0 o F
( - 2 0 o C to 6 0 o C)
c
Interstate Battery System of America, Inc. 03/05
interstatebatteries.com
Specification Sheet
Sealed Lead-Acid Batteries SLA1116

Technical Specifications
Nominal Voltage 12V Unit: mm(±1mm)
Nominal Capacity 18.0 Ah (20 Hr Rate)

Dimensions Length: 180 mm (7.20 in)
_
Width: 76 mm (3.00 in) +
Height: 167 mm (6.60 in) 160 76
Total Height w/ Teminal: 167 mm (6.60 in)

Weight Approx 6.2 Kg (13.85 Lbs.)
Terminal Type Nut & Bolt (w/faston adapter)
167
Capacity Characteristics
Cut Off Voltage 20 Hr Rate (0.90A) 18.0AH
1.75 v/c @ 25ºC 10 Hr Rate (1.60A) 16.0AH
1.70 v/c 5 Hr Rate (2.9A) 14.5AH
1.55 v/c 1 Hr Rate (9.8A) 9.8AH
Charge Voltage (constant)
Bloc Per Cell
Float 13.5~13.8 2.25~2.30
Cycle 14.4~14.7 2.40~2.45
Discharge Current Amps 250
(5 seconds maximum)

(maximum continuous)
Max. Charge Current 5.1A

Approx Final Charge Current 0.03 (30 mA)
(2.25 v/c Float)
Approx Final Charge Current 0.15 (150 mA)

(2.45 v/c Cycle)
Self Discharge 9 months@21ºC

Case Material ABS - *Gray or Black
Due to changes in the manufacturing process, specifications may change without notice.
*Gray option is Flame Retardent ABS.
Actual Wattage / Ampere Capacity at Various Discharge Times (Volt per Cell @ 25º C)
Time
Cut Off Wattage 5 Min 10 Min 15 Min 30 Min 45 Min 60 Min
1.75 v/c W 107.4 72.33 55.6 33.79 24.68 19.78
25ºC A 61.37 41.33 31.77 19.31 14.1 11.3
1.67 v/c W 104.79 72.16 55.31 33.48 25.05 20.04
25ºC A 62.75 43.21 33.12 20.05 15.0 12.0
1.60 v/c W 116.8 73.76 54.72 32.19 24.37 19.33
25ºC A 73.0 46.1 34.2 20.12 15.23 12.08
interstatebatteries.com Interstate Battery System of America, Inc. 07/05
Battery Cabinet Accessory
BCA
The BCA Battery Cabinet Accessory is designed for the pro-
fessional installation of systems requiring battery storage and
meets the requirement of NFPA 72 (1-5.2.9) standby battery
storage for battery backup. The BCA allows for easy access
and maintenance of the batteries while also assisting against
unnecessary power drain, interference or degeneration of the
battery. The unit can be mounted securely to a wall, preventing
mechanical injury or damage to other equipment.
Constructed from heavy duty 16 gauge steel with a full length

piano hinged door to allow optimum access to your equipment
within the cabinet. Other features include a high security CAT
30 keyed door lock and vented sides. Complete interior and
exterior finish is accomplished by a phosphate treatment fol-
lowed by a durable baked-on textured polyester coating.
Vented Sides to
reduce corrosion
Standard Features:
• 16 Gauge (.062 thk.) cold rolled steel
• Stainless steel piano hinge
• Red or black textured finish
• CAT 30 keyed door lock
• Dimensions:
22” wide x 10” high x 8 1/2” deep
• Four 1/2” and 3/4” EMT conduit High Security CAT 30 lock set.
knockouts located on both sides and
back
• Wall mounting holes
Space Age Electronics, Inc.

www.1sae.com
800.486.1723 Toll Free
NFPA ®
Made In U.S.A. 508.485.0966 Local
508.485.4740 Fax
Space Age Electronics, Inc. 2007
ED0089 LT10011 Rev.D 1/2
Specifications:
The BCA Battery Cabinet Accessory is constructed of 16 gauge (.062 thk.) cold rolled steel and
finished with a complete interior and exterior durable red or black textured, heat-resistant baked-on
enamel finish. The front cover features a full length stainless steel piano hinge and includes a high
security CAT 30 keyed door lock. Overall dimensions measure 22” wide by 10” high by 8 1/2” deep.
Four 1/2” and 3/4” EMT conduit knockouts are located on the sides and back. The battery cabinet
meets NFPA 72 (1-5.2.9) and the National Electric Code requirements. Batteries not included.
1/2”
8
10”
22 Stainless steel
”
piano hinge
Agency Approvals:
UOXX.S2580 UL Listed Control Unit Accessories
Ordering Information:
Part # Description
SSU00500 BCA Battery Cabinet, Red

SSU00501 BCA Battery Cabinet, Black
www.1sae.com
800.486.1723 Toll Free
508.485.0966 Local
508.485.4740 Fax
This document is subject to change without notice,
Space seeAge
doc #Electronics,
ED0479 for legal
Inc.disclaimer
2007
ED0089 LT10011 Rev.D 2/2
FIRE DOCUMENT BOX
FDB ACE-11
The FDB is the perfect fit to meet the demanding

code requirements today. SAE's number one goal is
to manufacture code compliant solutions and this
product allows you to do just that. NFPA 72 2007
section 6.2.2.1 states, "A record of installed software
and firmware version numbers shall be maintained at
the location of the fire alarm control unit."
This durable 16 gauge steel enclosure with a solid

piano hinge and key lock will keep all of your code
required documents in one safe place. Along with
your fire alarm software you can store your test &
inspection documents, service records, manuals &
AS built drawings for the system.
The FDB is designed to hold critical manuals and

documents with a durable steel retainer. It has
Standard Features: designated hooks to organize key rings and hold
important business cards for easy access and
• 2 Key ring hooks to hold system keys
reference. Inside the cover it has a organized note
• Business card holder for key contacts
• Overall Dimensions are 12” x 13” tall and
table that allows for documentation for passwords
2 ¼ deep and other critical system information.
• 16 gauge steel box and cover for security
• Durable powercoat baked on
other colors available
• Standard ¾”cat 30 key lock other lock as-
semblies available
• Solid stainless steel piano hinge
• Permanently screened white ink 1” high
“Fire Alarm Documents”
• Legend sheet for passwords and system
information

www.1sae.com
800.486.1723 Toll Free
NFPA ®
MEMBER Made In U.S.A. 508.485.0966 Local

508.485.4740 Fax
ED0447 LT10505 Rev.C 1/2
The fire alarm documents box (FDB) shall be constructed of 18 gauge cold rolled steel. It shall have a red powder
coat epoxy finish. The cover shall be permanently screened with 1" high lettering "FIRE ALARM DOCUMENTS "
with white indelible ink. The access door shall be locked with a 3/4" barrel lock and the hinge shall be a solid
width 12" stainless steel piano hinge. The enclosure will supply 4 mounting holes. Inside the enclosure will
accommodate standard 8 1/2 x 11 manuals and loose document records that will be protected within the
enclosure. A legend sheet will be permanently attached to the door for system required documentation, key
contacts and system information. The enclosure shall also provide 2 key ring holders with a location to mount
standard business type cards for key contact personnel.
For replacement forms order P/N: EA0316 (Qty. 10)
Property Information Minimum Required Documentation (SIG-FUN)

Key Ring Name of property: ________________________
Address: ________________________________
(Reference NFPA-72 2013 Section 7.2.1)
1 Written narrative providing intent and system description
□ N/A □ Enclosed Or Alt. Location _____________________________________________
Description of property:_____________________
Hooks Occupancy type:__________________________ 2 Riser diagram

Certifications and Approvals
3 Floor plan layout showing location of all devices and control equipment
16.1 System Installation Contractor: □ N/A □ Enclosed Or Alt. Location _____________________________________________
This system, as specified herein, has been installed and
tested according to all NFPA standards cited herein. 4 Sequence of operation in either an input/ output matrix or narrative form
Signed:_______________________
Printed name:__________________ 5 Equipment technical data sheets
Date: ____ / ____ / ____ □ N/A □ Enclosed Or Alt. Location _____________________________________________
Business Organization:__________________
Title:_________________________
Phone: _______________________
6 Manufacturers published instructions, including operation and maintenance instruction
Card Holder 16.5 Authority Having Jurisdiction:

I have witnessed a satisfactory acceptance test of this
7 Battery calculations (where batteries are provided)
system and find it to be installed and operating properly 8 Voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits
in accordance with its approved plans and specifications, □ N/A □ Enclosed Or Alt. Location _____________________________________________
with its approved sequence of operations, and with all
NFPA standards cited herein. 9 Completed record of inspection and testing in accordance with 7.6.6 and 7.8.2
Signed:_______________________
Printed name:__________________ 10 Completed record of completion in accordance with 7.5.6 and 7.8.2
Date: ____ / ____ / ____ □ N/A □ Enclosed Or Alt. Location _____________________________________________
Organization:__________________
Title:_________________________ 11 Copy of site specific software, where applicable
Phone: _______________________ □ N/A □ Enclosed Or Alt. Location _____________________________________________
Equipment Information 12 Record (as-built) drawings

ID No 1: ________________________
Serial: __________________________ 13 Periodic inspection, testing, and maintenance documentation in accordance with Section 7.6
Access code:_____________________ □ N/A □ Enclosed Or Alt. Location _____________________________________________
ID No 2: ________________________ 14 Records, record retention, and record maintenance in accordance with 7.7
Serial: __________________________ □ N/A □ Enclosed Or Alt. Location _____________________________________________
Access code:_____________________
Signed:_______________________ Date: ____ / ____ / ____
Space Age Electronics, Inc. 58 Chocksett Road Sterling, MA 01564 800-486-1723 www.1sae.com LT10644 Rev. 1
Legend sheet for storing system information

including contacts, sign-off , maintenance &
test information, and alternate locations
of additional records.
Part # Description
SSU00672 Fire Document Box RED
Space Age Electronics, Inc. SSU00673 Custom screening with your Logo
www.1sae.com
800.486.1723 Toll Free EA0315 10 pack door legend sheet
508.485.0966 Local
508.485.4740 Fax
Space seeAge
doc #Electronics,
ED0479 for legal
Inc.disclaimer
2008
ED0447 LT10505 Rev.C 2/2
18 Point Terminal Cabinet
TC1
The TC1 18 point “FIRE ALARM TERMINAL CABINET” is
designed to enhance your fire alarm systems. Ideally suited
for maintenance and troubleshooting with easy identification of
system wiring.
White 7/8” highly visible lettering and a “lift-a-way” hinged door

with captive fastener or high security Cam Lock makes this an
ideal “quick and easy” termination point. This surface mount
cabinet is fabricated from 16 gauge steel with a durable red
textured, baked-on powder coat finish.
The TC1 is UL listed for life safety.
Standard Features:
• Dimensions:
6 1/2” wide x 8 1/2” high x 2 1/2” deep
• 16 gauge cold rolled steel construction
• Captive Screw or Cam Lock securing
devices
• Wall mounting holes
• Durable red textured finish
• White 7/8” indelible lettering The TC1 door can be
• “FIRE ALARM TERMINAL CABINET” equipped with a friction
• Lift-a-way hinge catch or a high security
• Interior labeling of terminal strip CAT 30 key and lock set.
• Field identification label inside cover
• Standard 1/2” & 3/4” EMT knockouts
• Single 18 point high barrier terminal strip
• Terminal points rated for 12 gauge wire
• Terminal strip rated for 20 amp max
250V Uses UL Recognized Components
• (Class B/UL) 300V (CSA)
www.1sae.com
800.486.1723 Toll Free
NFPA ®
Made In U.S.A. 508.485.0966 Local
508.485.4740 Fax
ED0150 LT10221 Rev.B 1/2
Specifications:
The TC1 18 Point Terminal Cabinet is constructed of 16 gauge (.062 thk.) cold rolled steel and fin-
ished with a durable red textured, heat-resistant baked-on enamel finish. The front cover displays
“FIRE ALARM TERMINAL CABINET” in 7/8” white screened indelible lettering, and is engineered with
a removable formed lift-a-way hinge. The choice of a captive fastener or CAT-30 Cam Lock secures
the front cover. The interior of the box has a field identification label on the inside cover, correspond-
ing to the terminal strip’s labeling inside the back box. Overall dimensions measure 6 1/2” wide by 8
1/2” high by 2 1/2” deep. The cabinet includes standard 1/2” and 3/4” EMT knockouts on the top and
bottom. A single 18 point high barrier terminal strip is rated for 12 gauge wire and 20 amp max 250V
(Class B/UL) 300V (CSA).
1/4” mounting screw

Back Plate clearance from back
Detail plate to back box.
2”
6 1/
drill screw
back (self-tapping)
plate
1/4”
1/2”
Removable formed
lift-a-way hinge 2”
8 1/
2”
2 1/
Terminal Point Identification Part # Description
SSU00635 TC1 18 Point Terminal Cabinet w/Caaptive Fastener

SSU00536 TC1 18 Point Terminal Cabinet w/CAT30 Lock*
Agency Approvals:
www.1sae.com UOXX.S2580 UL Listed Control Unit Accessories
800.486.1723 Toll Free
508.485.0966 Local
508.485.4740 Fax * TC1 w/CAT30 Lock is not UL Listed
Space seeAge
doc #Electronics,
ED0479 for legal
Inc.disclaimer
2007
ED0150 LT10221 Rev.B 2/2
EST3 Remote S3424
Annunciators 7120-1657:
0193
3-ANNCPU3, 3-LCDANN, 3-6ANN, COA 6086
3-10ANN, 3-EVxxx, 3-4ANN
EN54-16:(2008),
EN54-2:1997+A1
and EN54-4:1997+A1:2002+A2
Overview Application Display

EST3 supports a full range of annunciator options for Mass Use EST3 remote annunciators when a
Notification/Emergency Communication (MNEC), Life Safety and compact system status display is need-
other purposes. Annunciator cabinets are constructed from 16 ed. Annunciator configurations include:
gauge cold rolled steel. The gray textured enamel finish of the LCD only display, LED only displays or
annunciators complements any decor. Both surface and semi- combination LED and LCD display in a
flush mounting cabinet configurations maximize mounting flexibility single enclosure.
and esthetic appeal. Cabinet arrangements allow both LED and
The LCD display uses either the 3-LCD
LCD annunciation to easily combine in a single enclosure. Slide in
or 3-LCDXL1 Liquid crystal display mod- Label
labeling for LEDs and switches provides designation flexibility for
ule. The 3-LCD has a 128 x 64 graphi-
labeling in local languages. For graphic annunciation EST3 offers Annunciator Support
cal display typically used to display eight
LED driver boards perfectly suited to operate in most graphic an- Module
lines of 21 characters on its LCD display
nunciators.
while the 3-LCDXL1 has a larger 240 x 320 pixel backlit display
EST3 annunciators are perfect for MNEC applications. They can that supports 24 lines of 40 characters. Both LDC displays pro-
be used in Central Control Stations (CCS), Autonomous Control vide the room needed to convey emergency information in a useful
Units (ACU), Local Operating Console (LOC) and combination format.
units. In these applications, annunciators are configured to oper-
The 3-LCD always displays the last highest priority event even
ate as Local Operation Consoles, or even Central Command Sta-
when the user is viewing other message queues. To give the
tions, from which MNEC is initiated and controlled.
greatest message flexibility EST3 event messages can route to
specific annunciators. Routing can be initiated at a specific time/
Standard Features shift change. Messages need only display in areas having to
• Standard 3-LCD (168 characters) and large-format 3-LCDXL1 respond to an event.
(960 character) display options For LED display, the full line of EST3 Control/Display Modules
• LCD uses queues to sort events support event display. Control/Display modules install over any an-
nunciator support module maximizing annunciator design flexibility.
• Variety of wallbox configurations
A Lamptest feature can program to any spare control switch. If
• Programmable LED flash rates an LCD display is installed in the annunciator, simply operate the
Alarm Silence and Trouble Silence switches simultaneously to
• Slide-in labels
lamptest all LEDs.
Makes customization for regional language easy
• Full line of driver boards for graphic annunciators

Typical Wiring Graphic Annunciator Field Wiring
Rear view 3-ANNCPU3 Field Wiring RS-485 NETWORK DATA
1
RS-485 NETWORK DATA
3-6ANN Shown FROM PREVIOUS PANEL TO NEXT PANEL
24VDC FROM 3-PPS/M OR 3-BPS/M 24VDC TO NEXT
Ground Lead POWER RISER POWER MODULE
To Backbox
EARTH GROUND
NETWORK A
NETWORK B
24 VDC
24 VDC
SPARE
1 Power limited
circuit Graphic Annunciator
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
To TB1 on 3-ANNCPU3
NOTES:
1. All wiring except earth Wire Specifications
TX RX
RX TX
TX RX
RX TX
TX RX
RX TX
TX RX
RX TX ground supervised and power Network Data Communications - RS485 Format

limited.
2. 24 VDC available from Minimum Twisted Pair 18 AWG (0.75 mm²).
Primary or Booster Power Maximum Circuit Resistance 90 Ohms
supply. Maximum Circuit Capacitance 0.3 µF
3. Uses RS-485 Network Maximum Distance
communication format between any 3 panels 5,000 ft. (1,524 m).
4. Network wiring Twisted Pair
Maximum Accumulative Capacitance
Power Riser
Calculate wire size for a maximum 3.4 Vdc total line loss from the 24 Vdc Wire Size 38.4K Baud 19.2K Baud
nominal voltage. 18 AWG 1.4 µF 2.8 µF
16 AWG 1.8 µF 3.6 µF
14 AWG 2.1 µF 4.2 µF
Distance limits are determined using the maximum allowable circuit
resistance and capacitance, and manufacturer’s cable specifications.
Specifications
Catalog Number 3-ANNCPU3 3-ANNSM 3-LCD 3-LCDXL1
Agency Listings UL, ULC, FM, CE, LPCB EN54* UL, ULC, FM
Mounts over 3-ANNCPU
Mounting Space Two Spaces One Space Mounts over 3-ANNCPU
plus two spaces.
Communication Format RS-485 N/A N/A N/A
Current @ 24 Vdc
Standby 144 mA 10mA 40mA 48mA
Alarm 144 mA 10mA 42mA 50mA
Wiring Termination Plug in terminal strip
Twisted Pair 18-14 AWG
Wiring Size
(0.75-1.5 mm²) N/A
5000 ft (1524m)
Max. Wire Distance
between any 3 panels
Relative Humidity 93% non condensing at 90° F (32° C)
Temperature Rating 0-49° C (32 - 120° F)
Wiring Styles Class A or Class B
Note: For a complete list of EST3 annunciator display and control modules please refer to Edwards literature sheet part number 85010-
0055.
* EN54-16:(2008), EN54-2:1997+A1 and EN54-4:1997+A1:2002+A2
The Life Safety system shall incorporate annunciation of Alarm, units. The LCD interface must provide the ability to display custom
Supervisory, Trouble and Monitor operations. Annunciation must event messages of a minimum of 40 characters. The LCD must
be through the use of both LED display strips complete with a provide the emergency user, hands free viewing of the first and
means to custom label each LED as to its function. Where ap- last highest priority event. The last highest priority event must
plicable control switches must be provided. Switches with LEDs always display and update automatically. System events must
must provide positive feed back to the operator of remote equip- automatically be placed in queues. It shall be possible to view
ment status. An LCD display with basic common control LEDs specific event types separately. Having to scroll through a mixed
and switches shall be provided. The Common Control Switches list of events types is not acceptable. The total number of active
and LEDs provided as minimum will be: Reset switch and LED, events by type must be displayed. It must be possible to custom-
Alarm Silence switch and LED, Panel Silence switch and LED, Drill ize the designations of all user interface LEDs and switches for
switch and LED. It must be possible to add additional common local language requirements. It must be possible to route system
controls as required though the use of modular display / control event messages to specific annunciator locations.
Dimensions
6.12 in
Semiflush Mount (15.55 cm) Surface Mount
2.75 in 2.75 in
(6.99 cm) (6.99 cm)
0.46 in (1.17 cm)
7.60 in 7.60 in
(19.31 cm) (19.31 cm)
TOP TOP
Earth ground stud located Earth ground stud located

on inside upper left corner on inside upper left corner
next to knockout next to knockout
RLCM/B(-S) 12.07 in 12.95 in 12.95 in
(30.66 cm) (32.9 cm) (32.9 cm)

10.1 in. (25.7 cm) 11.6 in. (29.4 cm)
2.75 in. (7.0 cm) 2.75 in. (7.0 cm)
11.6 in. (29.4 cm)
4ANN/B(-S)
13.19 in. 12.1 in. 13.19 in.
(33.5 cm) (30.7 cm) (33.5 cm)

14.5 in. (36.8 cm) 16.1 in. (40.9 cm)
2.75 in. (7.0 cm) 2.75 in. (7.0 cm)
16.1 in. (40.9 cm)
6ANN/B(-S)
13.19 in. 12.1 in. 13.19 in.
(33.5 cm) (30.7 cm) (33.5 cm)

23.86 in. (60.60 cm) 25.47 in. (64.7 cm)
2.75 in. (7.0 cm)
25.47 in. (64.7 cm)
10ANN/B(-S)
12.1 in. 13.19 in. 12.1 in.
(30.7 cm) (33.5 cm) (30.7 cm)

Catalog Ship Wt.
Description
Number lb (kg)
Command Module Annunciators (c/w CPU, LCD display and doors. Order wallbox separately.)
3-LCDANN Remote LCD Command Module Annunciator. 3.8 (1.7)
3-LCDANN-E Remote LCD Command Module Annunciator. For EN54* market only, CE. 3.8 (1.7)
Base Annunciators (Come with two 3-ANNSM annunciator support modules, a CPU, and doors.
Order Display/Control modules, additional support modules & wallbox separately.)
Contact us...
3-4ANN Four Position Base Annunciator.
Email: edwards.fire@fs.utc.com 3-4ANN-E Four Position Base Annunciator. For EN54* market only, CE.
Web: www.est-fire.com
3-6ANN Six Position Base Annunciator. 6.28 (2.85)
EST is an EDWARDS brand. 3-6ANN-E Six Position Base Annunciator. For EN54* market only, CE. 6.28 (2.85)
1016 Corporate Park Drive 3-10ANN 10 Position Base Annunciator. 10.5 (4.8)
Mebane, NC 27302 3-10ANN-E 10 Position Base Annunciator. For EN54* market only, CE. 10.5 (4.8)
In Canada, contact Chubb Edwards... * EN54-16:(2008), EN54-2:1997+A1 and EN54-4:1997+A1:2002+A2
Email: inquiries@chubbedwards.com CPU, Support Module, & LCD Displays
Web: www.chubbedwards.com 3-ANNCPU3 Annunciator CPU (See Note 1) 1 (.45)
© 2014 UTC Fire & Security Americas CPU doors with filler plates. Order separately, one required per CPU where
3-CPUDR 0.25 (.11)
Corporation, Inc. All rights reserved. no LCD display is installed.
Specifications subject to change 3-ANNSM Annunciator Support Module .45 (.2)
without notice. Edwards is part of UTC 3-LCD Liquid Crystal Display Module, eight lines. (See Note 1) .8 (.36)
Climate, Controls & Security, a unit of
Liquid Crystal Display Module, 40 lines mounts in 3-4ANN, 3-6ANN or 3-10ANN
United Technologies Corporation.
3-LCDXL1 anunciators. Note one 3-LCDXL1KBL, (ordered separately) is required for each
3-LCDXL1 mounting into 3-6ANN or 3-10ANN annunicator boxes.
3-LCDXL Cable for 3-LCDXL1 (Use to connect from 3-ANNCPU3 to the first annuciator support
1KBL model. Not required with 3-4ANN and 3-LCDXL1 applications.)
Control/Display Modules
3-CPUDR Two blank filler plates suitable for any annunciator blank space. .5 (.22)
3-24R 24 Red LED Display Module (See Note 1) .35 (.12)
3-24Y 24 Yellow LED Display Module (See Note 1) .35 (.12)
3-24G 24 Green LED Display Module (See Note 1) .35 (.12)
3-12SR 12 switches with 12 Red LED Display/Control Module (See Note 1) .35 (.12)
3-12SY 12 switches with 12 Yellow LED Display/Control Module (See Note 1) .35 (.12)
3-12SG 12 switches with 12 Green LED Display/Control Module (See Note 1) .35 (.12)
3-12RY 12 Red LED and 12 Yellow LED Display Module (See Note 1) .35 (.12)
3-12/S1GY 12 switches with one Green and one Yellow LED per switch (See Note 1) .35 (.12)
3-12/S1RY 12 switches with one Red and one Yellow LED per switch (See Note 1) .35 (.12)
3-12/S2Y 12 switches with two Yellow LEDs per switch .35 (.12)
3-6/3S1G2Y 6 groups of 3 switches. Each switch with one LED: Green, Yellow, Yellow. (See Note 1) .35 (.12)
3-6/3S1GYR 6 groups of 3 switches. Each switch with one LED: Green, Yellow, Red. (See Note 1) .35 (.12)
3-REMICA Remote microphone for use in 3-ANN series annunciator cabinets (See Note 1) 15 (6.8)
Filler Plate, order separately one required per 3-ANNSM when no LED or
3-FP 0.1 (0.05)
LED/Switch module installed on operator layer.
Driver Modules, Power Supplies
3-EVDVR LED/SWITCH Driver Module, For Edwards Graphics .35 (.12)
3-EVDVRA LED/SWITCH Driver Module Assembly for Third-party Graphics .35 (.12)
3-EVPWR Power Supply for Edwards Graphics .5 (.22)
Power Supply Assembly c/w 19 inch rail mounting chassis assembly space
3-EVPWRA 2.5 (1.2)
for one 3-ANNCPU3 for Third-party Graphics
3-EVDVRX Plastic mounting extrusion 19" mounting - for up to 3 3-EVDVRAs .35 (.12)
Enclosures
RLCM/B Remote Command module flush mount LCD wallbox 2.5 (1.2)
RLCM/B-S Remote Command module surface mount LCD wallbox 2.5 (1.2)
3-RLCM/D Inner and outer doors for RLCM/B(-S) 2.0 (0.9)
4ANN/B Four Position LED/LCD flush mount wallbox. 6.0 (2.7)
4ANN/B-S Four position LED/LCD surface mount wallbox. 6.0 (2.7)
6ANN/B Six position LED/LCD flush mount wallbox 7.0 (3.2)
6ANN/B-S Six position LED/LCD surface mount wallbox 7.0 (3.2)
10ANN/B Ten position LED/LCD flush mount wallbox 9.0 (4.1)
10ANN/B-S Ten position LED/LCD surface mount wallbox 9.0 (4.1)
3-4ANN/D Inner and outer doors for four position wallboxes 2.0 (0.9)
3-6ANN/D Inner and outer doors for six position wallboxes 2.0 (0.9)
3-10ANN/D Inner and outer doors for ten position wallboxes 2.5 (1.2)
Note 1: Add suffix “-E” for EN54 compliant versions
08-22-14

GRAPHIC
Material: Boxes: #16 Gauge Steel with a

Black Textured Finish
(Standard).
Door: #16 Gauge Steel with a

Black Textured Finish
(Standard), or #16 Gauge
Stainless Steel with a #4
Horizontal Brush upon
request.
Hinge: Concealed Stainless Steel

located on the left side.
Fastener: #2171 Key change lock.
Backbox Depth:
Semi-Flush: 3.50”
Surface: 4.75”
Visible Display Semi-Flush Surface Overall

Model
BGRA-GR 4.35 8.85 7.50 12.75 8.85 14.25 9.30 14.50
BGRB-GR 8.85 8.60 12.00 12.75 13.35 14.25 13.80 14.50
RSB-GR 7.80 9.80 12.00 14.25 13.50 15.75 14.00 16.00
RSC-GR 15.80 12.80 20.00 17.25 21.50 18.75 22.00 19.00

Hinged on
RSC-L-GR 12.80 15.80 17.25 20.00 18.75 21.50 19.25 21.75 Long Side
RSD-GR 17.80 17.80 22.00 22.25 23.50 23.75 24.00 24.00

RSE-GR 23.80 17.80 28.00 22.25 29.50 23.75 30.00 24.00
Hinged on
RSE-L-GR 17.80 23.80 22.25 28.00 23.75 29.50 24.25 29.75 Long Side
RSF-GR 35.60 23.60 39.88 28.00 41.18 29.38 41.63 30.00

Hinged on
RSF-L-GR 23.60 35.60 28.00 39.88 29.38 41.18 30.00 41.63 Long Side
RSG-GR 46.60 34.60 50.80 39.00 52.20 40.40 52.75 41.00

Hinged on
RSG-L-GR 34.60 46.60 39.00 50.80 40.40 52.20 41.00 52.75 Long Side
RSH-GR 73.00 34.00 n/a n/a 79.00 40.00 79.50 40.50
02080504
The H. R. Kirkland Co., Inc / 4935 Allison St. #13 / Arvada, Colorado 80002 / (303) 422-6670 / (800) 247-2303 / Fax (303) 420-1856 / www.hrkirkland.com
EST Catalog u Power Supplies and Accessories
Remote Booster
Power Supplies
BPS6A, BPS10A
MEA
476-91-E
Vol.13

The Booster Power Supply (BPS) is a UL 864, 9th Edition listed • Allows for reliable filtered and regulated power to be installed
power supply. It is a 24 Vdc filtered-regulated, and supervised where needed
unit that can easily be configured to provide additional notification • Cost effective system expansion
appliance circuits (NACs) or auxiliary power for Mass Notification/
• Provides for Genesis and Enhanced Integrity notification ap-
Emergency Communication (MNEC), as well as life safety, security,
pliance synchronization
and access control applications.
• Supports coded output operation
The BPS contains the circuitry to monitor and charge internal
• Self-restoring overcurrent protection
or external batteries. Its steel enclosure has room for up to two
10 ampere-hour batteries. For access control-only applications, • Multiple signal rates
the BPS can support batteries totaling up to 65 ampere-hours in • Can be cascaded or controlled independently
an external enclosure. The BPS has four Class B (convertible to • Easy field configuration
two Class A) NACs. These can be activated in one or two groups
from the BPS’s unique dual input circuits. • On-board diagnostic LEDs identify wiring or internal faults
• Standard Edwards keyed lockable steel cabinet with remov-
The BPS is available in 6.5 or 10 ampere models. Each output able door
circuit has a capacity of three amperes; total current draw cannot
exceed the unit’s rating. • 110 and 230 Vac models available
• Accommodates 18 to 12 AWG wire sizes
The BPS meets current UL requirements and is listed under the
following standards: • Optional tamper switch
Standard (CCN) Description • Dual battery charging rates
UL864 9th ed.ition (UOXX)Fire Alarm Systems
UL636 (ANET, UEHX7) Holdup Alarm Units and Systems
UL609 (AOTX, AOTX7) Local Burglar Alarm Units and Systems for component Importance Factor 1.5
UL294 (ALVY, UEHX7) Access Control Systems
UL365 (APAW, APAW7) Police Station Connected Burglar Alarm Units and Systems
UL1076 (APOU, APOU7) Proprietary Burglar Alarm System Units
UL1610 (AMCX) Central Station Alarm Unit
ULC-S527 (UOXXC) Control Units, Fire Alarm (Canada)
ULC-S303 (AOTX7) Local Burglar Alarm Units and Systems (Canada)
C22.2 No. 205 Signaling Equipment (Canada)

Application Dimensions
The BPS provides additional power and circuits for notification ap-
pliances and other 24 Vdc loads. It is listed for indoor dry locations
and can easily be installed where needed. D5
Top View
Fault conditions are indicated on the on-board diagnostic LEDs,
opening the BPS input sense circuit and the trouble relay (if D2 D3
programmed). While this provides indication to the host system,
the BPS can still be activated upon command. A separate AC
Fail contact is available on the BPS circuit board, which can be D4
programmed for trouble or AC Fail. There are seven on-board
Side View
diagnostic LEDs: one for each NAC fault, one for battery fault, one Front View
for ground fault, and one for AC power.
The unique dual-input activation circuits of the BPS can be acti-
vated by any voltage from 6 to 45 VDC (filtered-regulated) or 11
D1 D6
to 33 Vdc (full-wave rectified, unfiltered). The first input circuit can
Side View
be configured to activate 1-4 of the four possible outputs. The
second input circuit can be configured to control circuits 3 and 4. All knockouts
When outputs are configured for auxiliary operation, these circuits for 3/4 in conduit
can be configured to stay on or automatically deactivate 30 sec- (1.9 cm)
onds after AC power is lost. This feature makes these circuits ideal
for door holder applications. The BPS also has a separate 200
mA 24 Vdc output that can be used to power internal activation
modules.
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6
BPS NACs can be configured for a 3-3-3 temporal or continuous
output. California temporal rate outputs are also available on cer- 17.0 in 3.5 in 13.0 in 6.5 in 3.375 in 12.0 in
tain models. This makes the BPS ideal for applications requiring (43.2 cm) (8.9 cm) (33.0 cm) (16.5 cm) (8.6 cm) (30.4 cm)
signaling rates that are not available from the main system.
In addition to the internally generated signal rates, the BPS can
also be configured to follow the coded signal rate of the main Wire routing
system NACs. This allows for the seamless expansion of existing
NACs.
The BPS enclosure has mounting brackets for up to three Signa-
ture modules to the right of the circuit board.
Supply, where needed, Edwards BPS Series Booster Power Sup-
plies (BPS) that are interconnected to and supervised by the main
system. The BPS shall function as a stand-alone auxiliary power
supply with its own fully-supervised battery compliment. The BPS
battery compliment shall be sized to match the requirements of
the main system. The BPS shall be capable of supervising and
charging batteries having the capacity of 24 ampere-hours for
Mass Notification/Emergency Communication (MNEC), life safety
and security applications, and the capacity of 65 ampere-hours for
access control applications.
<<The BPS shall be capable of installation for a seismic com-
ponent Importance Factor of 1.5.>> The BPS shall provide a
minimum of four independent, fully supervised Class B circuits
that can be field configurable for notification appliance circuits or
auxiliary 24 Vdc power circuits. BPS NACs shall be convertible to
a minimum of two Class A NACs. Each BPS output circuit shall Notes
be rated at 3 amperes at 24 Vdc. Each output circuit shall be 1. Maintain 1/4-inch (6 mm) spacing between power-limited and nonpower-limited
wiring or use type FPL, FPLR, or FPLP cable per NEC.
provided with automatically restoring overcurrent protection. The [2] Power-limited and supervised when not configured as auxiliary power. Non-
BPS shall be operable from the main system NAC and/or Edwards supervised when configured as auxiliary power.
Signature Series control modules. BPS NACs shall be configurable [3] Source must be power-limited. Source determines supervision.
for continuous, 3-3-3 temporal or optionally, California rate. Fault 4. When using larger batteries, make sure to position the battery terminals towards
conditions on the BPS shall not impede operation of main sys- the door.
tem NAC. The BPS shall be provided with ground fault detection
circuitry and a separate AC fail relay.

Typical Wiring
To next signaling
Single or cascaded booster NAC Circuit
NAC Circuit
device, booster, or
anywhere on a notification appliance circuit EOL resistor
Sense 1 Input
Sense 2 Input
NAC output #1
Existing NAC end-of-line resistors are not required to be Fire Alarm NAC output #2
installed at the booster’s terminals. This allows multiple Control Panel NAC output #3
boosters to be driven from a single NAC circuit without the NAC output #4
need for special configurations.
Booster Power
Supply
Configuring the Booster for Multiple CC1(S) modules using the

AC Power Fail delay operation* BPS’s sense inputs
Notification appliance circuit (NAC) Notification appliance circuit (NAC)

TB1 TB1
+
+
NAC1/ UL listed NAC1/ UL listed
AUX1 EOL 15 kÙ AUX1 EOL 15 KW
NAC2/
+
+
NAC2/
Notification appliance circuit (NAC) AUX2 Notification appliance circuit (NAC)
AUX2
UL listed
+
UL listed
+
NAC3/ NAC3/
AUX3 EOL 15 kÙ AUX3 EOL 15 KW
+
+
NAC4/ NAC4/
AUX4 AUX4
+
200 mA AUX 200 mA AUX

TB5
TB5
Continuous Continuous
+
+
IN IN
Sense 1 COM Sense 1 COM
OUT + OUT EOL 47 K
+
IN IN
Sense 2 COM EOL 47 kÙ 10 9 Sense 2 COM
OUT OUT EOL 47 K
CC1(S) module [1][3]
NO NO + +
Trouble COM 8765 4 321 Trouble COM
10 9 10 9
NC NC
TB2
+ + +
TB2 CC1(S) module CC1(S) module
Data in from Data out to 8765 4 321 8765 4 321
CT1 previous device
module [4] next device
or Signature [1] [1]
+ + + +
controller
Data in from previous + + *The Booster supports AC Power fail delay [3]
Data out to of three hours via its trouble contact when
device or Signature
next device dip switch SW2-6 is on. All other troubles
controller
are reported to supervising module or panel
without delay via Sense inputs.
Security and access

BPS
TB1 24 V 12 V
EOL
+
NAC1/ Security Security

AUX1
24DC12 monitoring
device device
device
+
NAC2/
AUX2
+
NAC3/
AUX3
+
NAC4/
AUX4
Control panel BPS [1]
Card reader Card reader Card reader
controller controller controller
+ + + + +
To next
device
[1] Disable the BPS’s ground fault jumper (JP3) or end

Specifications
Model 6.5 amp Booster 10 amp Booster
AC Line Voltage 120VAC or 220-240VAC 50/60Hz 120VAC or 220-240VAC 50/60Hz
390 watts 580 watts
Notification Appliance 3.0A max. per circuit @ 24Vdc 3.0A max. per circuit @ 24Vdc
Circuit Ratings nominal 6.5A max total all NACs nominal 10A max total all NACs
U.S. Trouble Relay 2 Amps @ 30Vdc
T 888-378-2329 Four configurable outputs replace NACs 1, 2, 3 or 4. as auxiliary
Auxiliary Outputs
F 866-503-3996
outputs and 200 mA dedicated auxiliary. (See note 2.)
Canada Input Current 3mA @ 12Vdc, 6mA @ 24Vdc
Chubb Edwards (from an existing NAC)
T 519 376 2430 70mA + 35 mA for each circuit set to AUX
Booster Internal
F 519 376 7258
Supervisory Current
Southeast Asia Booster Internal Alarm 270mA
T : +65 6391 9300 Current
F : +65 6391 9306 Accomodates three two-gang modules.
Signature Mounting
India Space
T : +91 80 4344 2000 Maximum Battery Size 10 Amp Hours (2 of 12V10A) in cabinet up to 24 Amp hours with ex-
F : +91 80 4344 2050 ternal battery cabinet for fire and security applications; up to 65 Amp
hours for access control applications in external battery box.
Australia
T +61 3 9239 1200 Terminal Wire Gauge 18-12 AWG
F +61 3 9239 1299 Relative Humidity 0 to 93% non condensing @ 32°C
Temperature Rating 32° to 120°F (0° to 49°C)
Europe
T +32 2 725 11 20 NAC Wiring Styles Class A or Class B
F +32 2 721 86 13 Output Signal Rates Continuous, California rate, 3-3-3 temporal,
or follow installed panel’s NAC. (See note 1.)
Latin America
T 305 593 4301 Ground Fault Detection Enable or Disable via jumper
F 305 593 4300 Agency Listings UL, ULC, CSFM
utcfireandsecurity.com 1. Model BPS*CAA provides selection for California rate, in place of temporal.
2. Maximum of 8 Amps can be used for auxiliary output.
Catalog Description Shipping
Number Wt. lb (kg)
BPS6A 6.5 Amp Booster Power Supply 13 ( 5.9)
BPS6AC 6.5 Amp Booster Power Supply (ULC) 13 ( 5.9)
BPS6A/230 6.5 Amp Booster Power Supply (220V) 13 ( 5.9)
BPS6CAA 6.5 Amp Booster Power Supply with California rate 13 ( 5.9)
BPS10A 10 Amp Booster Power Supply 13 ( 5.9)
BPS10AC 10 Amp Booster Power Supply (ULC) 13 ( 5.9)
BPS10A/230 10 Amp Booster Power Supply (220V) 13 ( 5.9)
BPS10CAA 10 Amp Booster Power Supply with California rate 13 ( 5.9)
1. Requires installation of sepa-
rate battery cabinet. Related Equipment
2. BPS supports batteries greater 12V6A5 7.2 Amp Hour Battery, two required 3.4 (1.6)
than 24 Amp hours for access
control applications only.
12V10A 10 Amp Hour Battery, two required 9.5 (4.3)
3. For earthquake anchorage, 3-TAMP Tamper switch
including detailed mounting BC-1EQ Seismic Kit for BC-1. Order BC-1 separately. See note 3.
weights and center of gravity BPSEQ Seismic kit for BPS6A or BPS10 Booster Power Supplies. See
detail, refer to Seismic Applica- note 3
tion Guide 3101676. Approval
of panel anchorage to site BC-1 Battery Cabinet (up to 2 - 40 Amp Hour Batteries) 58 (26.4)
structure may require local BC-2 Battery Cabinet (up to 2 - 17 Amp Hour Batteries) 19 (8.6)
AHJ, structural or civil engineer 12V17A 18 Amp Hour Battery, two required (see note 1) 13 ( 5.9)
review.
12V24A 24 Amp Hour Battery, two required (see note 1) 20 (9.07)
12V40A 40 Amp Hour Battery, two required (see notes 1, 2) 32 (14.5)
04-05-12

Specification Sheet
Sealed Lead-Acid Batteries SLA1075

Technical Specifications Unit: mm(±0.50)
Nominal Voltage 12V

Nominal Capacity 7.5 Ah (20 Hr Rate)
Dimensions Length: 151 mm
Width: 65 mm
Height: 96 mm
Total Height w/ Teminal: 103 mm
Weight Approx 2.51 Kg(5.53 lbs)
Capacity Characteristics
Cut-off Voltage 20 Hr Rate (.37 A) 7.5 Ah
1.75 v/c @ 10 Hr Rate (.69 A) 6.98 Ah
1.70 v/c 5 Hr Rate (1.27 A) 6.37 Ah
1.55 v/c 1 Hr Rate (4.5 A) 4.5 Ah
Bloc Per Cell

Charge Voltage(constant) Float 13.5~13.8 2.25~2.30
Cycle 14.4~14.7 2.40~2.45
(5 seconds maximum)
(maximumcontinuous)
Max. Charge Current 2.16 A

Approx. Final Charge
0.014 (14 mA)
Current
Approx. Final Charge 0.07 (70 mA)
Current
Terminal Type Type A/ (Goptional)
Self Discharge 9 Months @ 21°C
Case Material ABS - Gray* or Black
Due to changes in the manufacturingprocesses, specifications may change without notice.
*Gray option is Flame Retardant ABS.
interstatebatteries.com
EST Catalog u Intelligent Input-Output
Synchronization
Output Module
SIGA-CC1S, MCC1S
MEA
Patented

SIGA-CC1S and MCC1S Synchronization Output Modules are • Provides UL 1971-compliant auto-sync output for visual
intelligent analog addressable devices that form part of EST’s signals
Signature line of products. The actual operation of the SIGA-CC1S Use for connecting a supervised output circuit to a supervised
and MCC1S is determined by the “personality code” selected by 24 Vdc riser input and synchronizing multiple notification appli-
the installer, which is downloaded to the module from the Signa- ance circuits.
ture loop controller during system configuration.
• Functions as an audible signal riser selector
Depending on their assigned personality, Synchronization Output Use as a synch module or for connecting supervised 24 Vdc
Modules may be used as a signal power riser selector to provide Audible/Visible signal circuits, or 25 and 70 VRMS Audio
synchronization of fire alarm signals across multiple zones, or for Evacuation and Telephone circuits to their power inputs.
connecting, upon command from the loop controller, supervised • Built-in ring-tone generator
Class B signal or telephone circuits to their respective power When configured for telephone circuits, the SIGA-CC1S gener-
inputs. The power inputs may be polarized 24 Vdc to operate au- ates its own ring-tone signal, eliminating the need for a sepa-
dible and visible signal appliances or 25 and 70 VRMS to operate rate ring-tone circuit.
audio evacuation speakers and firefighter’s telephones.
• Automatic device mapping
Signature modules transmit information to the loop controller
regarding their circuit locations with respect to other Signature
devices on the wire loop.
• Electronic addressing
Programmable addresses are downloaded from the loop con-
troller, a PC, or the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool;
there are no switches or dials to set.
• Intelligent device with microprocessor
All decisions are made at the module to allow lower com-
munication speed with substantially improved control panel
response time and less sensitivity to line noise and loop wiring
properties; twisted or shielded wire is not required.

Application Installation
The SIGA-CC1S mounts to a standard North American two-gang The SIGA-CC1S: mounts to North American 2-1/2 inch (64 mm)
electrical box, making it ideal for locations where only one module deep 2-gang boxes and 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) deep 4 inch square
is required. Separate I/O and data loop connections are made to boxes with 2-gang covers and SIGA-MP mounting plates. The
each module. terminals are suited for #12 to #18 AWG (2.5 mm2 to 0.75 mm2)
wire size.
The SIGA-MCC1S is part of the UIO family of plug-in Signature
Series modules. It functions identically to the SIGA-CC1S, but
takes advantage of the modular flexibility and easy installation that
characterize all UIO modules. Two- and six-module UIO mother-
boards are available. These can accommodate individual risers for
each on-board module, or risers that are shared by any combina-
tion of its UIO modules. All wiring connections are made to termi-
nal blocks on the motherboard. UIO assemblies may be mounted
in Edwards enclosures.
Personality Codes
The operation of the SIGA-CC1S is determined by their sub-type
code or “Personality Code”. The code is selected by the installer SIGA-MCC1S: mount the UIOxR motherboard inside a suitable
depending upon the desired application and is downloaded from Edwards enclosure with screws and washers provided. Plug the
the loop controller. module into any available position on the motherboard and secure
Personality Code 5: Signal Power or Audio Evacuation (sin- the module to the motherboard with the captive screws. Wiring
gle riser). Configures the module for use as a Class B Audible/ connections are made to the terminals on the motherboard (see
Visible Signal power (24 Vdc polarized) or Audio Evacuation (25 wiring diagram). UIOxR motherboard terminals are suited for #12
or 70 VRMS) power selector. The ring-tone generator is disabled. to #18 AWG (2.5 mm2 to 0.75 mm2) wire size.
The output circuit is monitored for open or shorted wiring. If a UIO Motherboard
short exists, the control panel inhibits the activation of the audible/ 6-32
visible signal circuit to prevent connection to the power circuit. Self-tapping
screws
Personality Code 6: Telephone with ring-tone (single riser).
Configures the module for use as a Telephone power selector.
When a telephone handset is plugged into its jack or lifted from its Plug-in (UIO) Captive
Module screws
hook, the module generates its own Ring-Tone signal. A separate
ring-tone circuit is not needed. The module sends this signal to
the control panel to indicate that an off-hook condition is present.
When the system operator responds to the call, the ring-tone #6 Flat washers
signal is disabled.
Cabinet or electrical enclosure
Personality Code 25: Visual Signal Synchronization. This
personality code configures the module to provide synchronization
of fire alarm signals across multiple zones. It functions as a signal
power (24 Vdc) riser selector. The output wiring is monitored for Electronic Addressing
open circuits and short circuits. A short circuit will cause the fire
The loop controller electronically addresses each module saving
alarm control panel to inhibit the activation of the audible/visual
valuable time during system commissioning. Setting complicated
signal circuit so the riser is not connected to the wiring fault.
switches or dials is not required. Each module has its own unique
serial number stored in its “on-board memory”. The loop control-
ler identifies each device on the loop and assigns a “soft” address
Warnings & Cautions to each serial number. If desired, the modules can be addressed
using the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool.
This module will not operate without electrical power. As fires fre-
quently cause power interruption, we suggest you discuss further
safeguards with your fire protection specialist.
Testing & Maintenance
Edwards recommends that these modules be installed according The module’s automatic self-diagnosis identifies when it is defec-
to latest recognized edition of national and local fire alarm codes. tive and causes a trouble message. The user-friendly maintenance
program shows the current state of each module and other perti-
nent messages. Single modules may be turned off (de-activated)
Compatibility temporarily, from the control panel.
The Synchronization Output Module is compatible with EST’s Sig- Scheduled maintenance (Regular or Selected) for proper system
nature Loop Controller operating under EST3 version 2.0 or higher, operation should be planned to meet the requirements of the
and QuickStart Signature Loop Intelligent Controller. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Refer to current NFPA 72 and
ULC CAN/ULC 536 standards.

Typical Wiring
SIGA-CC1S (Standard Mount) SIGA-MCC1S (UIO Mount)

Personality Typical Speaker Circuit Personality Typical Speaker Circuit
Code 5 Code 5
UL/ULC Listed UL/ULC Listed
47KW EOL 47KW EOL
Personality Typical Telephone Circuit Personality Typical Telephone Circuit

Code 6 Code 6
47KW EOL 47KW EOL
Personality Enhanced Integrity and Genesis Devices Personality Enhanced Integrity and Genesis Devices
Code 25 Code 25
47KW EOL 47KW EOL
1 23 4
UIO(R) series motherboard
10 9 Data In+ 4 - Riser 1 Out

- 3
2
+-
Riser 1 In
Signature 4 1 +
CC1S Data 3 TB14
2
Circuit 1
TB7
473387352
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Data Out
+
MCC1S
-
CAT NO.
4
TB1 3
2
1
Green LED (Normal) TB15
Riser out (+) Red LED (Active)
To next device
Riser out (-) 1 23 4
Riser in (+) -
From control panel Data out (+) Riser 1 In +
- Riser 1 Out
To next device or EOL resistor. +
Riser in (-) Data out (-)
Data in (+)
From Signature Controller
or Previous Device
Data in (-)
Multiple CC1(S) modules using the BPS’s sense inputs
Notification appliance circuit (NAC)

TB1
+
NAC1/ UL listed
AUX1 EOL 15 KW
NAC2/
+
AUX2 Notification appliance circuit (NAC)

UL listed
+
NAC3/
AUX3 EOL 15 KW
+
NAC4/
AUX4
200 mA AUX
TB5
Continuous
+
IN
Sense 1 COM
OUT EOL 47 K
+
IN
Sense 2 COM
OUT EOL 47 K
NO + +
Trouble COM
10 9 10 9
NC
TB2 CC1(S) module CC1(S) module
8765 4 321 8765 4 321
[1] [1]
+ + + +
[3]

Specifications
Catalog Number SIGA-CC1S SIGA-MCC1S
North American 2½ inch (64 mm)
deep two-gang boxes and 1½
Plugs into UIO2R, UIO6R or UIO6
Detection & alarm since 1872 Mounting inch (38 mm) deep 4 inch square
Motherboards
boxes with 2-gang covers and
U.S. SIGA-MP mounting plates
T 888-378-2329
Description Synchronization Output Module
F 866-503-3996
Type Code 50 (factory set)
Canada Address Requirements Uses one module address
Chubb Edwards
T 519 376 2430 Wiring Terminations Suitable for #12 to #18 AWG (2.5 mm² to 0.75mm²)
F 519 376 7258 Standby = 223µA
Operating Current
Activated = 100µA
Southeast Asia
Operating Voltage 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc (19 Vdc nominal)
T : +65 6391 9300
F : +65 6391 9306 24 Vdc = 2 amps
Output Rating 25 V Audio = 50 watts
India 70 V Audio = 35 watts
T : +91 80 4344 2000
Construction High Impact Engineering Polymer
F : +91 80 4344 2050
Operating: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C)
Storage and Operating
Australia Storage: -4°F to 140°F (-20°C to 60°C)
Environment
T +61 3 9239 1200 Humidity: 0 to 93% RH
F +61 3 9239 1299 Green LED - Flashes when polled Red LED - Flashes when in alarm/
LED Operation
active
Europe
T +32 2 725 11 20 Compatibility Use with: Signature Loop Controller under EST3 version 2.0 or higher
F +32 2 721 86 13 Agency Listings UL, ULC, CSFM, MEA
Latin America
T 305 593 4301
F 305 593 4300
Catalog Shipping Wt.
Description
© 2010 UTC Fire & Security. Number lbs (kg)
All rights reserved. SIGA-CC1S Synchronization Output Module (Standard Mount) - UL/ULC Listed 0.5 (0.23)
SIGA-
Synchronization Output Module (UIO Mount) - UL/ULC Listed 0.18 (0.08)
MCC1S
Related Equipment
27193-21 Surface Mount Box - Red, 2-gang 2 (1.2)
27193-26 Surface Mount Box - White, 2-gang 2 (1.2)
Universal Input-Output Module Board w/Riser Inputs
SIGA-UIO2R 0.32 (0.15)
- Two Module Positions
SIGA-UIO6R 0.62 (0.28)
- Six Module Positions
SIGA-UIO6 Universal Input-Output Module Board - Six Module Positions 0.56 (0.25)
235196P Bi-polar Transient Protector 0.01 (0.05)
Multifunction Fire Cabinet - Red,
MFC-A 7.0 (3.1)
supports Signature Module Mounting Plates
SIGA-MP1 Signature Module Mounting Plate, 1 footprint 1.5 (0.70)
SIGA-MP2 Signature Module Mounting Plate, 1/2 footprint 0.5 (0.23)
SIGA-MP2L Signature Module Mounting Plate, 1/2 extended footprint 1.02 (0.46)
05-20-11

EST Catalog  Intelligent Initiating Devices
Intelligent Smoke
Detector with
Optional
CO Sensor
SIGA2-PS, SIGA2-PCOS

Signature Series SIGA2-P(CO)S photoelectric detectors bring ad- • Optical smoke sensing technology with optional carbon mon-
vanced sensing technology to a practical design that increases ef- oxide sensor
ficiency, saves installation time, cuts costs, and extends life safety
• Field-replacable smoke chamber
and property protection capabilities. Continuous self-diagnostics
ensure reliability over the long-haul, while innovative field-replaca- • Field-replacable carbon monoxide sensor/daughterboard
ble smoke chambers make detector maintenance literally a snap. module
With its modular CO sensor, this detector pulls double-duty — • Uses existing wiring
continually monitoring the environment for signs of smoke, as well
as its invisible yet deadly companion, carbon monoxide. • Automatic device mapping
Like all Signature Series detectors, the SIGA2-P(CO)S is an intel- • Ground fault detection by module
ligent device that gathers analog information from its smoke and • Up to 250 devices per loop
CO sensor (if present), converting this data into digital signals. To
make an alarm decision, the detector’s on-board microprocessor • Two levels of environmental compensation
measures and analyzes sensor readings and compares this infor- • Two levels of dirty detector warning
mation to historical data. Digital filters remove signal patterns that
are not typical of fires, thus virtually eliminating unwanted alarms. • Twenty pre-alarm settings
• Five sensitivity settings
The SIGA2-PCOS includes an advanced carbon monoxide sensor
and daughterboard. When the electrochemical cell reaches its end • Non-volatile memory
of life after approximately six years, the detector signals a trouble
condition to the control panel. The sensor/daughterboard module
is field-replaceable. • Environmental compensation
• Identification of dirty or defective detectors
• Automatic day/night sensitivity adjustment
• Bicolor (green/red) status LED
• Standard, relay, fault isolator, and audible mounting bases

Application Sensing and reporting technology
Smoke detection The microprocessor in each detector provides four additional ben-
The SIGA2-PS detects extremely small particles of combustion efits - Self-diagnostics and History Log, Automatic Device Map-
and triggers an alarm at the first sign of smoke. Thanks to its high- ping, Stand-alone Operation and Fast, Stable Communication.
performance forward scattering reflective response technology, Self-diagnostics and History Log - Each Signature Series
the photoelectric smoke sensor responds quickly and reliably to detector constantly runs self-checks to provide important mainte-
a wide range of fire types, especially slow burning fires fuelled by nance information. The results of the self-check are automatically
combustibles typically found in modern multi-use buildings. updated and permanently stored in the detector’s non-volatile
memory
Carbon monoxide detection
CO detection has rapidly become a standard part of life safety Automatic Device Mapping - The loop controller learns where
strategies everywhere. Monitored CO detection is becoming each device’s serial number address is installed relative to other
mandated with increasing frequency in all types of commercial devices on the circuit. The mapping feature provides supervision
applications, but particularly in occupancies such as hotels, room- of each device’s installed location to prevent a detector from being
ing houses, dormitories, day care facilities, schools, hospitals, reinstalled (after cleaning etc.) in a different location from where it
assisted living facilities, and nursing homes. In fact, more than half was originally.
of the U.S. population already lives in states requiring the instal- Stand-alone Operation - A decentralized alarm decision by the
lation of CO detectors in some commercial occupancies. This detector is guaranteed. On-board intelligence permits the detector
is because carbon monoxide is the leading cause of accidental to operate in stand-alone mode. If loop controller CPU communi-
poisoning deaths in America. Known as the “Silent Killer,” CO is cations fail for more than four seconds, all devices on that circuit
odorless, tasteless, and colorless. It claims nearly 500 lives, and go into stand-alone mode. The circuit acts like a conventional
results in more than 15,000 hospital visits annually. alarm receiving circuit.
Fast Stable Communication - On-board intelligence means less
information needs to be sent between the detector and the loop
Installation controller. Other than regular supervisory polling response, the
Signature Series detectors mount to North American 1-gang detector only needs to communicate with the loop controller when
boxes, 3-1/2 inch or 4 inch octagon boxes, and to 4 inch square it has something new to report.
electrical boxes 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) deep. They mount to Euro-
pean BESA and 1-gang boxes with 60.3 mm fixing centers. See
mounting base installation and wiring for more information.
Accessories
Detector mounting bases have wiring terminals that are acces-
sible from the “room-side” after mounting the base to the electrical
Testing & Maintenance box. The bases mount to North American 1-gang boxes and to
Each detector automatically identifies when it is dirty or defective 3½ inch or 4 inch octagon boxes, 1½ inches (38 mm) deep. They
also mount to European BESA and 1-gang boxes with 60.3 mm
and causes a “dirty detector” message. The detector’s sensitiv-
fixing centers. The SIGA-SB4, SIGA-RB4, and SIGA-IB4 mount to
ity measurement can also be transmitted to the loop controller. A North American 4 inch sq. electrical boxes in addition to the above
sensitivity report can be printed to satisfy NFPA sensitivity mea- boxes. They include the SIGA-TS4 Trim Skirt which is used to
surements which must be conducted at the end of the first year cover the “mounting ears” on the base. The SIGA-AB4G mounts
and every two years thereafter. to a 4” square box only.
The user-friendly maintenance program shows the current state
of each detector and other pertinent messages. Single detectors
may be turned off temporarily from the control panel. Availability
of maintenance features is dependent on the fire alarm system
used. When the CO sensor’s electrochemical cell reaches its end
SIGA-AB4G/T SIGA-SB SIGA-IB SIGA-RB SIGA-LED
of life, the detector signals a trouble condition to the control panel. Audible Base Standard Base Isolator Base Relay Base Remote LED
The sensor/daughterboard module is field-replaceable. Scheduled
maintenance (Regular or Selected) for proper detector operation Remote LED SIGA-LED - The remote LED connects to the
should be planned to meet the requirements of the Authority Hav- SIGA-SB or SIGA-SB4 Standard Base only. It features a North
ing Jurisdiction (AHJ). Refer to current NFPA 72, NFPA 720, and American size 1-gang plastic faceplate with a white finish and red
ULC CAN/ULC 536 standards. alarm LED.
SIGA-TS4 Trim Skirt - Supplied with 4 inch bases, it can also
be ordered separately to use with the other bases to help hide
This detector will NOT sense fires that start in areas where smoke surface imperfections not covered by the smaller bases.
cannot reach the detector. Smoke from fires in walls, roofs, or on
the opposite side of closed doors may not reach the detector to SIGA-AB4G and SIGA-AB4GT - These sounder bases are de-
signed for use where localized or group alarm signaling is required.
alarm it.
The SIGA-AB4G is compatible with Signature Series smoke and
heat detectors. The SIGA-AB4GT sounder base, when used with
the SIGA-TCDR Temporal Pattern Generator module, adds an
audible output function to any Signature Series detector, including
fire and CO detectors.

Typical Wiring Audible Detector Base for CO
and Fire Detectors, SIGA-AB4GT
The detector mounting bases accept #18 AWG (0.75mm2), #16
(1.0mm2), #14 AWG (1.5mm2), and #12 AWG (2.5mm²) wire sizes. The Signature Series AB4GT sounder base, when used with the
SIGA-TCDR Temporal Pattern Generator, adds an audible output
Note: Sizes #16 AWG (1.0mm ) and #18 AWG (0.75mm ) are
2 2
function to any Signature Series detector. For more information on
preferred for ease of installation. See Signature Loop Controller this device, refer to Data Sheet 85001-0623 -- Sounder Base for
catalog sheet for detailed wiring requirement specifications. CO and Fire Detectors.
Standard Detector Base, SIGA-SB, SIGA-SB4

4
This is the basic mounting base Remote LED
for Edwards Signature Series de- Max resistance
per wire
tectors. The SIGA-LED Remote must not exceed
LED is supported by the Stan- 10 Ohms
dard Base.
Term Description
1 Not Used
2 DATA IN/OUT (+)
3 Not Used
4 DATA IN (-)
5 Remote LED (-) DATA IN (-) DATA OUT (-)
6 Remote LED (+) TCDR Riser + TCDR Riser +
7 Not Used TCDR Riser - TCDR Riser -
8 DATA OUT (-) DATA IN (+) DATA OUT (+)
From Signature Controller To Next Device SLC + SLC +
or Previous Device SLC -
SLC -
Isolator Detector Base, SIGA-IB, SIGA-IB4

This base includes a built-in line fault isolator for use on Class A 1. Volume setting. Default is high volume. For low volume, cut trace per item 4.
circuits. A detector must be installed for it to operate. The isolator 2. Reserved for future use. Do not cut.
base does not support the SIGA-LED Remote LED. 3. Reserved for future use. Do not cut.
The isolator operates as follows: 4. To configure output volume, cut trace as shown.
- a short on the line causes all iso- 5. To next SIGA-AB4GT sounder base or EOL relay.
lators to open within 23 msec 6. SLC_OUT to next intelligent addressable device.
- at 10 msec intervals, 7. SLC_IN from intelligent addressable controller or previous device.
beginning on one side 8. From SIGA-TCDR Temporal Pattern Generator or previous SIGA-AB4GT
of the Class A sounder base.
circuit nearest the loop
controller, the isolators
close to provide the
next isolator down the
line with power Term Description Audible Detector Base, SIGA-AB4G
1 Not Used
- when the isolator next to 2 DATA IN/OUT (+) This base is designed for use where localized or group alarm sig-
the short closes, reopens within 10 msec.

3 DATA IN (-)
4 Not Used
naling is required. When the detector senses an alarm condition,
5 Not Used the audible base emits a local alarm signal. The optional SIGA-CRR
The process repeats beginning on the 6 DATA OUT (-) Polarity Reversal Relay can be used for sounding to other audible
other side of the loop controller. 7 Not Used
bases on the same 24 Vdc circuit.
Relay Detector Base, SIGA-RB, SIGA-RB4 Volume setting Tone setting

Default = High volume
This base includes a relay. Nor- Cut for low volume
Default = Temporal pattern
Cut for steady tone
mally open or closed operation DATA- DATA- DATA+
is selected during installation. SIG+ SIG- OUT IN IN/OUT
The dry contact is rated for 1 amp To configure output volume

(pilot duty) @ 30 Vdc. The relay’s or tone, cut the circuit board
as shown.
position is supervised to avoid ac-
cidentally jarring it out of position. 24 Vdc in - -
24 Vdc out
From power supply or +
The SIGA-RB can be operated as previous base
+ To next base or EOL relay
a control relay if programmed to Data in

-
do so at the control panel (EST3

- Data out
From Signature controller or
+ To next Signature device
previous device +
V.2 only). The relay base does not
Term Description
support the SIGA-LED Remote 1 Normally Open Relay and Audible Bases operate as follows:
LED. CONTACT RATING 2 DATA IN/OUT (+)
- at system power-up or reset, the relay is de-energized
1.0 Amp @ 30 VDC 3 Common
(Pilot Duty) 4 DATA IN (-)
5 Not Used
- when a detector is installed in the base with the power
6 Normally-Closed on, the relay energizes for four seconds, then de-energizes
7 DATA OUT (-)
- when a detector is removed from a base with the power on,
the relay is de-energized
- when the detector enters the alarm state, the relay is energized.

Compatibility
SIGA2-P(CO)S detectors are compatible only with the Signature Loop Controller.
Detection & alarm since 1872 Warnings & Cautions

U.S. This detector will not operate without electrical power. As fires frequently cause power
T 888 378 2329 interruption, we suggest you discuss further safeguards with your fire protection specialist.
F 866 503 3996
This detector will NOT sense fires that start in areas where smoke cannot reach the detec-
Canada tor. Smoke from fires in walls, roofs, or on the opposite side of closed doors may not reach
Chubb Edwards
T 519 376 2430
the detector to alarm it.
F 519 376 7258
Southeast Asia
T : +65 6391 9300
F : +65 6391 9306 Specifications

India SIGA2-PS SIGA2-PCOS
T : +91 80 4344 2000 Normal operating current 45 µA 70 µA
F : +91 80 4344 2050 Alarm current 18 mA 18 mA

Australia
Standalone alarm current 45 µA 70 µA
T +61 3 9239 1200 Operating voltage 15.20 to 19.95 VDC
F +61 3 9239 1299 Air velocity 0 to 4,000 ft./min (0 to 20 m/s).
Construction High impact engineering polymer
Europe
T +32 2 725 11 20 Wall mounting Maximum 12 in (305 mm) from ceiling
F +32 2 721 86 13 Mounting Plug-in
Shipping weight 0.44 lb. (164 g)
Latin America
Compatible bases See Ordering Information
T 305 593 4301
F 305 593 4300 Operating environment 32 to 120°F (0 to 49°C), 0 to 93% RH, noncondensing
Storage temperature −4 to 140°F (−20 to 60°C)
utcfireandsecurity.com Environmental compensation Automatic
Catalog Ship Wt.
Description
Number lbs (kg)
SIGA2-PS Intelligent Photoelectric Detector 0.4 (0.16)
SIGA2-PCOS Intelligent Photoelectric Detector with carbon monoxide sensor 0.4 (0.16)
Intelligent Photoelectric Detector with carbon monoxide sensor
SIGA2-PCOS-CA 0.4 (0.16)
(for use in Canadian markets only).
Accessories
SIGA-SB Detector Mounting Base - Standard
SIGA-SB4 4-inch Detector Mounting Base c/w Trim Skirt
SIGA-RB Detector Mounting Base w/Relay
SIGA-RB4 4-inch Detector Mounting Base w/Relay, c/w Trim Skirt 0.2 (.09)
SIGA-IB Detector Mounting Base w/Fault Isolator
SIGA-IB4 4-inch Detector Mounting Base w/ Fault Isolator, c/w Trim Skirt
SIGA-LED Remote Alarm LED (not for EN54 applications)
SIGA-AB4G Audible (Sounder) Base for Fire Detectors 0.3 (0.15)
SIGA-AB4GT Audible (Sounder) Base for CO and Fire Detectors 0.3 (0.15)
SIGA-TCDR Temporal Pattern Generator 0.3 (0.15)
SIGA-TS4 Trim Skirt (supplied with 4-inch bases) 0.1 (.04)
2-SPRC1* Replacement Smoke Chamber (for SIGA2-PS detectors) 0.1 (.04)
2-SPRC2* Replacement Smoke Chamber (for SIGA2-PCOS detectors) 0.1 (.04)
2-CORPL* Replacement CO Sensor 0.1 (.04)
*Release pending.
05-18-11

EST Catalog  Intelligent Initiating Devices
Intelligent Heat
Detectors with
Optional
CO Sensors
SIGA2-HFS, SIGA2-HRS, SIGA2-HCOS

Signature Series fixed temperature and rate-of-rise heat detec- Note: Some features described here may not be supported by
tors bring advanced sensing technology to a practical design all control systems. Check your control panel’s Installation and
that increases efficiency, saves installation time, cuts costs, and Operation Guide for details.
extends property protection capabilities. Continuous self-diagnos-
• Fixed temperature or rate-of-rise heat detection with optional
tics ensure reliability over the long-haul, while the latest thermister
carbon monoxide sensor
technology makes these detectors ideal whereever dependable
heat detection is required. With their modular CO sensor, these • Field-replacable carbon monoxide sensor/daughterboard
devices pull double-duty — continually monitoring the environ- module
ment for heat from combustion, as well as its invisible yet deadly
• Uses existing wiring
companion, carbon monoxide.
Like all Signature Series detectors, these are intelligent device
that gather analog information from their heat and CO sensor (if • Ground fault detection by module
present), converting this data into digital signals. To make an alarm • Up to 250 devices per loop
decision, the detector’s on-board microprocessor measures and
analyzes sensor readings and compares this information to histori- • Non-volatile memory
cal data. Digital filters remove signal patterns that are not typical of • Electronic addressing
fires, thus virtually eliminating unwanted alarms.
• Bicolor (green/red) status LED
The SIGA2-HCOS is a fixed temperature heat detector that
includes an advanced carbon monoxide sensor and daughter- • Standard, relay, fault isolator, and audible mounting bases
board. When the electrochemical cell reaches its end of life after • 50 foot (15.2 meter) spacing
approximately six years, the detector signals a trouble condition
• 15 °F (8 °C) per minute rate-of-rise alarm point (HRS)
to the control panel. The sensor/daughterboard module is field-
replaceable. • 135 °F (57 °C) fixed temperature alarm point (HFS/HCOS)

Application Sensing and reporting technology
Heat detection The microprocessor in each detector provides four additional ben-
SIGA2-HRS rate-of-rise heat detectors provide a 15 °F (9 °C) per efits - Self-diagnostics and History Log, Automatic Device Map-
minute rate-of-rise heat sensor for the detection of heat due to fire. ping, Stand-alone Operation and Fast, Stable Communication.
The heat sensor monitors the temperature of the air and deter- Self-diagnostics and History Log - Each Signature Series
mines whether an alarm should be initiated. detector constantly runs self-checks to provide important mainte-
SIGA2-HFS and SIGA2-HCOS fixed temperature heat detec- nance information. The results of the self-check are automatically
tors provide a 135°F (57°C) fixed-temperature heat sensor for updated and permanently stored in the detector’s non-volatile
the detection of heat due to fire. The heat sensor monitors the memory
temperature of the air and determines whether an alarm should be Automatic Device Mapping - The loop controller learns where
initiated. each device’s serial number address is installed relative to other
devices on the circuit. The mapping feature provides supervision
Carbon monoxide detection of each device’s installed location to prevent a detector from being
The SIGA2-HCOS includes a replaceable chemical cell for the reinstalled (after cleaning etc.) in a different location from where it
detection of carbon monoxide (CO). CO detection has rapidly was originally.
become a standard part of life safety strategies everywhere. Stand-alone Operation - A decentralized alarm decision by the
Monitored CO detection is becoming mandated with increasing detector is guaranteed. On-board intelligence permits the detector
frequency in all types of commercial applications, but particularly to operate in stand-alone mode. If loop controller CPU communi-
in occupancies such as hotels, rooming houses, dormitories, day cations fail for more than four seconds, all devices on that circuit
care facilities, schools, hospitals, assisted living facilities, and nurs- go into stand-alone mode. The circuit acts like a conventional
ing homes. In fact, more than half of the U.S. population already alarm receiving circuit.
lives in states requiring the installation of CO detectors in some
commercial occupancies. This is because carbon monoxide is the Fast Stable Communication - On-board intelligence means less
leading cause of accidental poisoning deaths in America. Known information needs to be sent between the detector and the loop
as the “Silent Killer,” CO is odorless, tasteless, and colorless. It controller. Other than regular supervisory polling response, the
claims nearly 500 lives, and results in more than 15,000 hospital detector only needs to communicate with the loop controller when
visits annually. it has something new to report.
Installation Accessories
Installation Detector mounting bases have wiring terminals that are acces-
Signature Series detectors
mount to North American sible from the “room-side” after mounting the base to the electrical
1 box. The bases mount to North American 1-gang boxes and to
1-gang boxes, 3-1/2 inch
3½ inch or 4 inch octagon boxes, 1½ inches (38 mm) deep. They
or 4 inch octagon boxes, 2 also mount to European BESA and 1-gang boxes with 60.3 mm
and to 4 inch square electri- fixing centers. The SIGA-SB4, SIGA-RB4, and SIGA-IB4 mount to
cal boxes 1-1/2 inches (38 North American 4 inch sq. electrical boxes in addition to the above
mm) deep. They mount to boxes. They include the SIGA-TS4 Trim Skirt which is used to
European BESA and 1-gang cover the “mounting ears” on the base. The SIGA-AB4G mounts
boxes with 60.3 mm fixing 1. Tamper-resist lever arm on base to a 4” square box only.
centers. See mounting base (Break off to disable.)
installation and wiring for 2. Access slot for tamper-resist mechanism
more information.
SIGA-AB4G/T SIGA-SB SIGA-IB SIGA-RB SIGA-LED

Testing & Maintenance Audible Base Standard Base Isolator Base Relay Base Remote LED
The user-friendly maintenance program shows the current state Remote LED SIGA-LED - The remote LED connects to the
of each detector and other pertinent messages. Single detectors SIGA-SB or SIGA-SB4 Standard Base only. It features a North
may be turned off temporarily from the control panel. Availability American size 1-gang plastic faceplate with a white finish and red
of maintenance features is dependent on the fire alarm system alarm LED.
used. When the CO sensor’s electrochemical cell reaches its end SIGA-TS4 Trim Skirt - Supplied with 4 inch bases, it can also
of life, the detector signals a trouble condition to the control panel. be ordered separately to use with the other bases to help hide
The sensor/daughterboard module is field-replaceable. Scheduled surface imperfections not covered by the smaller bases.
maintenance (Regular or Selected) for proper detector operation
SIGA-AB4G and SIGA-AB4GT - These sounder bases are de-
should be planned to meet the requirements of the Authority Hav- signed for use where localized or group alarm signaling is required.
ing Jurisdiction (AHJ). Refer to current NFPA 72, NFPA 720, and The SIGA-AB4G is compatible with Signature Series smoke and
ULC CAN/ULC 536 standards. heat detectors. The SIGA-AB4GT sounder base, when used with
the SIGA-TCDR Temporal Pattern Generator module, adds an
audible output function to any Signature Series detector, including
Compatibility fire and CO detectors.
SIGA2-PS detectors are compatible only with the Signature Loop
Controller.

Typical Wiring Audible Detector Base for CO
and Fire Detectors, SIGA-AB4GT
The detector mounting bases accept #18 AWG (0.75mm2), #16
(1.0mm2), #14 AWG (1.5mm2), and #12 AWG (2.5mm²) wire sizes. The Signature Series AB4GT sounder base, when used with the
SIGA-TCDR Temporal Pattern Generator, adds an audible output
Note: Sizes #16 AWG (1.0mm ) and #18 AWG (0.75mm ) are
2 2
function to any Signature Series detector. For more information on
preferred for ease of installation. See Signature Loop Controller this device, refer to Data Sheet 85001-0623 -- Sounder Base for
catalog sheet for detailed wiring requirement specifications. CO and Fire Detectors.
Standard Detector Base, SIGA-SB, SIGA-SB4

4
This is the basic mounting base Remote LED
for Edwards Signature Series de- Max resistance
per wire
tectors. The SIGA-LED Remote must not exceed
LED is supported by the Stan- 10 Ohms
dard Base.
Term Description
1 Not Used
2 DATA IN/OUT (+)
3 Not Used
4 DATA IN (-)
5 Remote LED (-) DATA IN (-) DATA OUT (-)
6 Remote LED (+) TCDR Riser + TCDR Riser +
7 Not Used TCDR Riser - TCDR Riser -
8 DATA OUT (-) DATA IN (+) DATA OUT (+)
From Signature Controller To Next Device SLC + SLC +
or Previous Device SLC -
SLC -
Isolator Detector Base, SIGA-IB, SIGA-IB4

This base includes a built-in line fault isolator for use on Class A 1. Volume setting. Default is high volume. For low volume, cut trace per item 4.
circuits. A detector must be installed for it to operate. The isolator 2. Reserved for future use. Do not cut.
base does not support the SIGA-LED Remote LED.
3. Reserved for future use. Do not cut.
The isolator operates as follows: 4. To configure output volume, cut trace as shown.
- a short on the line causes all iso- 5. To next SIGA-AB4GT sounder base or EOL relay.
lators to open within 23 msec 6. SLC_OUT to next intelligent addressable device.
- at 10 msec intervals, 7. SLC_IN from intelligent addressable controller or previous device.
beginning on one side 8. From SIGA-TCDR Temporal Pattern Generator or previous SIGA-AB4GT
of the Class A sounder base.
circuit nearest the loop
controller, the isolators
close to provide the
next isolator down the Audible Detector Base, SIGA-AB4G
line with power Term Description
1 Not Used This base is designed for use where localized or group alarm sig-
- when the isolator next to 2 DATA IN/OUT (+) naling is required. When the detector senses an alarm condition,
3 DATA IN (-)
the short closes, reopens within 10 msec. 4 Not Used the audible base emits a local alarm signal. The optional SIGA-CRR
The process repeats beginning on the 5 Not Used Polarity Reversal Relay can be used for sounding to other audible
6 DATA OUT (-)
other side of the loop controller. 7 Not Used bases on the same 24 Vdc circuit.
Volume setting
Relay Detector Base, SIGA-RB, SIGA-RB4
Tone setting
Default = High volume Default = Temporal pattern
Cut for low volume Cut for steady tone
This base includes a relay. Nor-
mally open or closed operation
DATA- DATA- DATA+
SIG+ SIG- OUT IN IN/OUT
is selected during installation.

The dry contact is rated for 1 amp
To configure output volume
or tone, cut the circuit board
(pilot duty) @ 30 Vdc. The relay’s

as shown.
position is supervised to avoid ac- 24 Vdc in - -

24 Vdc out
cidentally jarring it out of position. From power supply or +
previous base
+ To next base or EOL relay
The SIGA-RB can be operated as -

Data in
a control relay if programmed to From Signature controller or
- Data out
+ To next Signature device
do so at the control panel (EST3 previous device +
V.2 only). The relay base does not Relay and Audible Bases operate as follows:
Term Description
support the SIGA-LED Remote 1 Normally Open
LED. CONTACT RATING 2 DATA IN/OUT (+) - at system power-up or reset, the relay is de-energized
1.0 Amp @ 30 VDC 3 Common - when a detector is installed in the base with the power
(Pilot Duty) 4 DATA IN (-)
5 Not Used on, the relay energizes for four seconds, then de-energizes
6 Normally-Closed
7 DATA OUT (-)
- when a detector is removed from a base with the power on,
the relay is de-energized
- when the detector enters the alarm state, the relay is energized.

Warnings & Cautions
• This detector does not operate without electrical power. As fires frequently cause
power interruption, discuss further safeguards with the local fire protection specialist.
• This detector does not sense fires in areas where heat cannot reach the detector.
Detection & alarm since 1872 Heat from fires in walls, roofs, or on the opposite side of closed doors may not reach
the detector.
U.S.
T 888 378 2329 • This heat detector by itself does not provide life safety protection Use this detector
F 866 503 3996 with ionization and/or photoelectric smoke detectors.
Canada • This detector does not detect oxygen levels, smoke, toxic gases, or flames. Use this
Chubb Edwards device as part of a broad-based life safety program which includes a variety of infor-
T 519 376 2430
F 519 376 7258
mation sources pertaining to heat and smoke levels, extinguishment systems, visual
and audible devices, and other safety measures.
Southeast Asia
T : +65 6391 9300 • Independent studies indicate that heat detectors should only be used when property
F : +65 6391 9306 protection alone is involved. Never rely on heat detectors as the sole means of fire
protection.
India
T : +91 80 4344 2000
F : +91 80 4344 2050

Australia
Specifications
T +61 3 9239 1200
F +61 3 9239 1299
SIGA2-HRS SIGA2-HFS SIGA2-HCOS
Normal operating current 45 µA 45 µA 45 µA
Europe Standalone alarm current 18 mA 18 mA 18 mA
T +32 2 725 11 20 Alarm Current 45 µA 45 µA 45 µA
F +32 2 721 86 13
Actual alarm point 15°F (8°C)/min. 130 to 140°F (54 to 60°C)
Latin America Operating voltage 15.20 to 19.95 VDC
T 305 593 4301 Maximum spacing 50 ft. (15.2 m) centers*
F 305 593 4300
Construction High impact engineering polymer
utcfireandsecurity.com Mounting Plug-in
Shipping weight 0.44 lb. (164 g)
© 2010 UTC Fire & Security. Compatible bases See Ordering Information
Operating environment 32 °F to 100 °F (0 °C to 38 °C), 0 to 93% RH, noncondensing
Storage temperature − 4 °F to 140 °F (− 20 °C to 60 °C)
*When replacing SIGA-HRS/HFS ensure spacing is 50ft or less.
Catalog Ship Wt.
Description
Number lbs (kg)
SIGA2-HRS Intelligent rate-of-rise heat detector 0.4 (0.16)
SIGA2-HFS Intelligent fixed temperature heat detector 0.4 (0.16)
SIGA2-HCOS Intelligent fixed temperature heat detector with CO sensor 0.4 (0.16)
Intelligent fixed temperature heat detector with CO sensor
SIGA2-HCOS-CA 0.4 (0.16)
(for use in Canadian markets only)
Accessories
SIGA-SB Detector Mounting Base - Standard
SIGA-SB4 4-inch Detector Mounting Base c/w Trim Skirt
SIGA-RB Detector Mounting Base w/Relay
SIGA-RB4 4-inch Detector Mounting Base w/Relay, c/w Trim Skirt 0.2 (.09)
SIGA-IB Detector Mounting Base w/Fault Isolator
SIGA-IB4 4-inch Detector Mounting Base w/ Fault Isolator, c/w Trim Skirt
SIGA-LED Remote Alarm LED (not for EN54 applications)
SIGA-AB4G Audible (Sounder) Base for Fire Detectors 0.3 (0.15)
SIGA-AB4GT Audible (Sounder) Base for CO and Fire Detectors 0.3 (0.15)
SIGA-TCDR Temporal Pattern Generator 0.3 (0.15)
SIGA-TS4 Trim Skirt (supplied with 4-inch bases) 0.1 (.04)
2-CORPL* Replacement CO Sensor 0.1 (.04)
*Release pending.
05-18-11

EST Catalog u Conventional Initiating
Reflective Beam Beam Smoke
Smoke Detector Detector
EC-50R/-100R Reflector
MEA
Test Station
Overview Operation
The EC-50R/-100R comprises a transmitter and receiver in a Alarm Threshold: Alarm thresholds of 25%, 35% and 50%
single enclosure and is usually installed between 19 inches and obscuration can be selected to suit the environment, with 25%
24 inches below the ceiling. The transmitter emits an invisible the most sensitive setting. The factory default setting is 35 percent
infrared light beam that is reflected via a prism mounted directly and is used for most typical applications. If the received infrared
opposite and with a clear line of sight. The reflected infrared light signal reduces to below the selected threshold for approximately
is detected by the receiver and analyzed. Smoke in the beam path 10 seconds, the fire relay is activated.
will reduce the received infrared light proportionally to the density
Fire Alarm: There are two modes to the operation of the fire
of the smoke. The detector analyzes this attenuation or obscura-
relay. Auto reset mode will reset the fire relay 5 seconds after the
tion of light and acts accordingly. Detectors are typically mounted
received infrared signal has recovered to a level above the Alarm
within ±30 feet (9.14 m) of a potential fire source. Consult your
threshold. Latching mode holds the fire relay active indefinitely
Authority Having Jurisdiction for spacing requirements specific to
after an Alarm condition has occurred. To clear the latched mode,
your locality.
power must be removed from the Detector for a minimum of 5
seconds.
Trouble Alarm: If the infrared beam is obscured rapidly to a level
Standard Features of 90% or greater for approximately 10 seconds, the Trouble relay
• Coverage: 50R range 15 -160 ft (4.6 - 48.8 m); is activated. Typical causes of trouble include an object being
100R range 160- 330 ft (48.8 - 100 m) placed in the beam path, transmitter failure, loss of the prism, or
• Microprocessor controlled sudden misalignment of the detector. The Trouble relay will reset
within 2 seconds of the trouble being cleared.
• Automatic drift compensation
Automatic Gain Control (AGC): The Detector monitors long
• Simple alignment term degradation of signal strength caused by component aging
• Selectable alarm thresholds or build up of dirt on optical surfaces. By comparing the received
infrared signal against a standard every 15 minutes, the detec-
• 24 Vdc operating voltage tor automatically compensates for signal differences of less than
• Latching or non-latching operation 0.7dB/hour. When the detector is showing AGC fault, detector is
still capable of generating an alarm, and will display both Alarm
• Low current consumption
and Trouble indications.
• Optional Ground Level Test Station

Test Stations The ideal location and spacing of the Detector is critical in a prop-
erly installed and operating fire alarm system. It is recommended
The optional Ground Level Test Station facilitates testing of a connect- that the detectors be located and spaced in accordance with the
ed detector from safe and convenient location. The unit is key-oper- National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standard 72 "The
ated with a two-position Test/Run switch and includes two dedicated National Fire Code". No liability will be accepted for applications
LEDs: one for Alarm indication and one for Power indication. not conforming to NFPA regulations.
When the test station key is inserted and turned to the Test The recommended installation height is approximately 19 to 24
position, the Power LED flashes to indicate that power is con- inches (483 to 610 mm) below the ceiling. However, in all instal-
nected and that the 2-wire data link cable is correctly installed. lations the National Fire Standards for that country/state must be
After several seconds in the test position, the test station initiates consulted.
an alarm at the detector head, which is indicated by the red
LED on the detector and the Alarm LED on the test station. Test Because of the reflecting properties of the beam, all objects must
mode automatically times out after 20 seconds at which time the be kept a minimum of 19 inches (483 mm) away from the centre
detector returns to standby mode, regardless of the test station of the beam path down the entire beam length. If highly reflective
keyswitch position. surfaces are close to the beam, then greater clearances should be
applied.
Connection between the test station and the detector is made
by means of a 2-wire data link cable. The test station requires a
10.2 - 30 Vdc power connection.
Test Filter: A test filter is supplied with the detector, which is used
Reflector Positioning
to verify the alarm threshold. See the installation sheet for details Mount the reflector(s) on a secure surface directly opposite the
on testing and calibration. detector. Ensure that there is a clear line of sight between the
detector and the reflector(s), and that no moving objects such as
doors or mechanical equipment interfere with the beam path. All
Application objects should be kept a minimum of 19 inches (483 mm) away
from the center of the detector beam down the entire length of the
Reflective beam smoke detectors are ideal for large open areas beam path. Reflectors should not be mounted on glass or reflec-
such as warehouses, hotel atriums, industrial plants and school tive surfaces. 4" (102 mm)
gymnasiums.
0.34"
(10 mm)
EC-50R detectors should be mounted between
4" (102 mm)

An infrared signal is projected out of the transmitter optics to the
15 and 160 feet (4.6 and 48.8m) from a single
(102 mm)
reflector placed at the opposite end of the detection zone. The
4”
reflector.
signal is reflected back to the receiver where it is analyzed for fire
and trouble. The EC-50R/-100R must be positioned correctly to
4"
Single
(102 mm)
minimize the detection time. The maximum lateral distance either reflector
side of the beam is found to be typically 30 feet (9.1 m) for satis-
factory detection under flat ceilings, providing a total area cover- 8" (204 mm) 0.34"
(10 mm)
0.34"
(10 mm)
age of 19,800 square feet (60 feet x 330 feet), or 1844 square EC-100R detectors should be
metres (18.3 x 100.6 m). mounted between 160 and 330 feet
(102 mm)
(102 mm)
4”
4”
Smoke stratification may be overcome by mounting multiple beam (48.8 and 100.6 m) from a group of
8" (204 mm)

four reflectors.
0.34" 0.34"
detectors at different heights, one of which will project an infrared

(10 mm) (10 mm)
4" 4"
(102 mm) (102 mm)
beam below the heat layer and into the smoke layer. (102 mm)
(102 mm)
4”
4”
Detection time will be longer in a building with a peaked roof if a
fire occurs at the fringes of the protected area. If in doubt conduct 4"
(102 mm)
4"
(102 mm)
appropriate smoke tests. Group of four reflectors
Detector Spacing
Single Detector Ceiling Multiple Detectors
Detector Detector Detector
19 to 24 inches L
C L
C
(483 to 610 mm)
60 ft. (18.3 m) max. 19 in. to 30 ft. 60 Ft max. 19 in. to 30 ft.

(483 mm to 9.14 m) (18.3 m) (483 mm to 9.14 m)
Detector positioning shown here is recommended for protected In some cases potential smoke layering may be overcome by
areas with flat ceilings. Spacing may vary for areas with high or installing multiple beam detectors at different heights.
sloped ceilings. In such cases, verify operation with smoke tests.

Typical Wiring Dimensions
The field wiring interface is accessed through the back plate of the
Detector
detector head. The 8-pin connector is the interface to the field and
is numbered left to right. This diagram is an example for a single
reflective beam unit installed as the only device on a zone. The
correct operation for Fire and Trouble should always be verified.
Relays are shown in quiescent (standby) condition. Alarm and
End of Line resistor values are determined by the fire alarm control
panel and market standard practices.
(209.55 mm)
8.25"
Zone Wiring
POWER
SUPPLY
Zone Wiring
10.2 to 30 Volts DC (RED)
EC-50R/-100R 0V (BLACK)
Fire Relay Alarm Resistor

NO (YELLOW)
(Not required for

COM (BLUE)
North American Markets)
Trouble Relay
COM (WHITE)
4.5"
End of Line Resistor (114.3 mm)
NC (GREEN)
Test Station
Ground Level Test Station 2.75" (69.85 mm) 1.5" (38.1 mm)
COMMON
CONN. 8-WAY CONNECTOR
8 CONNECTIONS
WHITE
7
3.25" (82.55 mm) FIXING CENTERS

GREEN
6
BLACK
5 -VE
RED
4 +VE
YELLOW
3
4.5" (114.3 mm)
BLUE
2 JUNCTION ALARM POWER
1 BOX (JB)
2-WAY
BLUE TEST
B
YELLOW
A
YELLOW
RUN
BLACK
EC-50R / EC-100R
BLUE
CABLE ASSY.
RED
APPROX 3 FT.
GROUND LEVEL C B A
TEST STATION Ø 0.2
TO BE LOCATED D FIXING HOLES
0.5" (12.7 mm)
WITHIN 330 FT. OF GROUND LEVEL
THE JUNCTION BOX. TEST STATION (LLT)
0.34"
Reflector (10 mm)
Detector Installation
Install the detector to a secure surface not subject to movement or
vibration. Use the template provided to mark and install four fixing
points. Secure the rear mounting plate to the four fixing points
through the keyholes on the plate.
When installing the detector on a wall supported with wood studs,
(102 mm)
ensure the fixing points are secured directly to the supporting

4”
stud. When installing the detector on a wall supported with metal

studs, mount a metal plate at least 1/8" (3.2 mm) thick across two
studs and secure the detector to the plate.
4"
(102 mm)

Engineering Specifications Technical Specifications
EC-50R Beam Detector
The projected beam type smoke detector
Power 10.2 Vdc to 30 Vdc (continu-
shall be a 4-wire 12/24 Vdc device to be
Supply ous power)
used with UL listed 4-wire control panels.
Detection & alarm since 1872 Current Standby: Less than 4 mA
The unit shall be listed to UL 268 and shall
U.S. consist of an integrated transmitter and Alarm/Trouble: Less than 14
T 888-378-2329 mA
receiver. The beam detector shall operate
F 866-503-3996 Contacts Alarm: Normally Open, rated
between a range of 15 and 160 feet (4.57
and 48.77 m). It shall feature automatic 2A, 30 Vdc, resistive
Canada
Trouble: Normally Closed,
Chubb Edwards gain control, which will compensate for
T 519 376 2430 rated 2A, 30 Vdc, resistive
gradual signal deterioration due to dirt
F 519 376 7258 Signal Delay Alarm and trouble: 10 seconds
accumulation on the lenses. The unit shall
Southeast Asia include a wall mounting bracket. Testing Reset Time >5 seconds (power down)
T : +65 6391 9300 shall be carried out using a calibrated test
F : +65 6391 9306 Dimensions 8.25 in x 5.1 in x 4.7 in
filter. It shall be possible to test the detec- (HxWxD) (21 cm x 13 cm x 12 cm)
India tor without direct access to it by means
Weight 1.5 lb (0.68 kg)
T : +91 80 4344 2000 of a remotely installed key-operated test
F : +91 80 4344 2050 station. Operating Temperature: 32° F to 100° F
Environ- (0° C to 37° C)
Australia ment Humidity: 93%RH, Non-con-
T +61 3 9239 1200
EC-100R densing
F +61 3 9239 1299
The projected beam type smoke detector Beam Width: 30 ft (9.14 m) either side
Europe shall be a 4-wire 12/24 Vdc device to be Coverage of beam
T +32 2 725 11 20 Length, EC-50R: 15 ft to 160 ft
F +32 2 721 86 13
used with UL listed 4-wire control panels.
The unit shall be listed to UL 268 and shall (4.57 m to 48.77 m)
Latin America consist of an integrated transmitter and Length, EC-100R: 160 ft to
T 305 593 4301 330 ft (48.77 m to 100 m)
receiver. The beam detector shall oper-
F 305 593 4300
ate between a range of 160 and 330 feet Alarm 2.50dB (25%), 3.74dB (35%),
utcfireandsecurity.com (48.77 and 100 m). It shall feature auto- Thresholds 6.02dB (50%) obscuration
matic gain control, which will compensate Optical 880nm
© 2010 UTC Fire & Security. Wavelength
for gradual signal deterioration due to dirt
accumulation on the lenses. The unit shall Agency UL, ULC, CE
include a wall mounting bracket. Testing Listings
shall be carried out using a calibrated test
filter. It shall be possible to test the detec- Test Station
tor without direct access to it by means Operating 10.2 to 30 Vdc
of a remotely installed key-operated test voltage
station. Off current 0 mA
On current 8 mA max (alarm)
Ordering Information Wiring Ter- Suitable for #12 to #18 AWG
Ship minations (2.5 mm² to 0.75 mm²) wire
Wt lb size. Shielded twisted pair
P/N Description (kg) recommended.
EC-50R EC-50R Reflective 2.0 Operating 32 °F to 100 °F

Beam Smoke Detector (0.90) temperature
c/w test filter and one Key refer- A126
reflector ence
EC-100R EC-100R Reflective 2.0 Humidity max 93% RH (non condensing)
Beam Smoke Detector (0.90)
Agency UL, MEA, CSFM
c/w test filter and four
Listings
reflectors
EC-LLT Ground Level 1.0
Test Station (0.45)
23901- Replacement Reflector 1.0
01 for EC-50R/-100R (0.45)
05-18-11

EST Catalog u Intelligent Initiating
Intelligent Duct
Smoke Detector
SIGA-SD
MEA

The Edwards SuperDuct Signature Series smoke detector is the • Less than 2" deep for easy installation and applications where
most advanced and most reliable device in its class. Designed for space is tight
easy installation and superb reliability, SuperDuct represents the
• -4°F to 158°F (-20°C to 70°C) operating range with 100 ft/min.
perfect balance of practical design and advanced technology.
to 4,000 ft/min air velocity rating assures reliability under harsh
SuperDuct detectors feature a unique design that speeds instal- environmental conditions
lation and simplifies maintenance. Removable dust filters, confor- • Status LEDs remain visible through clear assembly cover
mally coated circuit boards, and optional water-resistant gaskets
keep contaminants away from components, ensuring years of • Cover monitor switch for added security
trouble-free service. When cleaning is required, the assemblies • Standard sampling tube spacing for easy drop-in migration
come apart easily and snap back together in seconds. from other detectors
A Signature Series photoelectric sensor is incorporated into • Sampling tube can be installed with or without the cover in
the design of each SIGA-SD duct smoke detector. This sensor place and can be rotated in 45-degree increments to ensure
inherits the power and benefits of this exceptional line of intelligent proper alignment with duct airflow
devices.
• 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc operation
Signature Series sensors gather analog information from their
• Magnet-activated test switch
smoke sensing elements and convert it into digital signals. The
sensor measures and analyses these signals and compares the • One Form C auxiliary alarm relay for controlling ancillary equip-
information to historical readings and time patterns to make an ment (e.g., HVAC controls)
alarm decision. Digital filters remove signal patterns that are not
• No special tools required for easy access to field connections
typical of fires, which virtually eliminates unwanted alarms.
• Signature Series intelligence
WARNING: Duct detectors have specific limitations. Duct detectors are not a • Environmental compensation with differential sensing for reli-
substitute for an open area smoke detector. Duct detectors are not a substitute able, stable, and drift-free sensitivity
for early warning detection or a replacement for a building’s regular fire detection
system. Smoke detectors are not designed to detect toxic gases which can build up • Wide 0.79% to 2.46% obscuration/ft. smoke sensitivity
to hazardous levels in some fires. These devices will not operate without electrical
power. As fires frequently cause power interruptions, Edwards suggests you discuss • Identification of dirty or defective detectors
further safeguards with your local fire protection specialist.

Application The sampling tube may be installed from either the duct side of
the assembly or from inside the sensor compartment, as preferred
SuperDuct detectors are ideally suited to duct smoke detection by the installer. (The exhaust tube must be installed from the duct
applications where early indication of combustion is required within side.) Sampling tubes may be rotated in 45-degree increments so
the confined space of ventilation ductwork. Its primary purpose that air-holes can be aligned to allow the unit to be mounted at
is to provide early warning of an impending fire and to prevent virtually any angle relative to the air flow.
smoke from circulating throughout the building. It is typically used
to detect smoke in the supply side of the HVAC system but can In installations where the duct smoke detector’s controls and indica-
provide supervision of the return side as well. tors are hidden from view, a remote test station or an LED indicator
can be connected to the detector to provide these functions.
Protected premises
Remote Remote Test Stations
Alarm relay test
output station Labor-saving Remote Test/Reset stations provide
alarm testing from the convenience of a remote
location. Tests can be performed quickly and safely
Duct smoke
detector
Return – without having to climb to the roof. Magnetically-
air
HVAC
operated and key-operated one-gang models are
unit available. Signature SuperDuct detectors are also
Duct smoke Supply compatible with SIGA-LED remote alarm LED.
detector air
Air velocity in the duct as low as 100 ft/min. maintains adequate
Alarm relay
air flow into the sensor smoke chamber through air holes in the air
output
Remote
test
sampling tube and discharges through the exhaust tube. Su-
FACP
station perDuct air sampling tubes must be installed with the inlet holes
facing the airstream. Sampling tubes may be rotated in 45-degree
increments so that air-holes can be aligned to allow the unit to be
mounted in virtually any angle relative to the airflow.
SuperDuct detectors continually sample air flow in the HVAC duct
and initiate an alarm condition whenever smoke is detected. An SuperDuct sensors are engineered to operate optimally under the
alarm is activated when the quantity (percent obscuration) of harsh environmental conditions frequently found in HVAC duc-
combustion products in that air sample exceeds the detector’s twork. Nonetheless, before installing the detector, test the duct
sensitivity setting. air velocity, temperature, and humidity to verify that it is within the
operating range of the SuperDuct detector. Consult the SuperDuct
Signature Series Intelligence installation sheet for details.
Like all Signature detectors, the SIGA-SD features electronic
addressing and issues a dirty sensor warning when it reaches its
preset limit. The dirty sensor warning indicates the sensor is op- Dimensions
erating within its specified limits but is in need of servicing. When 8.70 in (22.1 cm)
8.15 in (20.7 cm)
the detector’s ability to compensate for environmental changes 7.75 in (19.7 cm)
has reached its limit, the duct smoke detector signals a trouble 3.08 in (7.82 cm)
1.60 in
(4.06 cm)
condition.
The SIGA-SD also uses differential sensing to prevent gradual
environmental changes from triggering unwanted alarms. A rapid
change in environmental conditions, such as smoke from a fire,
causes the detector to signal an alarm state, but dust and debris
accumulated over time does not change alarm sensitivity.
Each Signature Series SuperDuct detector contains a microproc-
essor that performs comprehensive self-diagnostics and stores
the results in nonvolatile memory. Stored results include details 2.28 in
(5.78 cm)
such as hours of operation, last maintenance date, and number
of alarms and troubles. This information can be retrieved and
reviewed when desired.
Detector Configuration 5.45 in
The detector assembly cover provides easy access to the smoke

(13.84 cm)
sensor, its wiring connections, sample and exhaust tubes, and the
smoke chamber itself.
Air enters the detector’s sensing chamber through a sampling
tube (ordered separately) that extends into the duct and is directed
back into the ventilation system through an exhaust tube (in- 1.90 in
(4.83 cm)
cluded). The difference in air pressure between the two tubes pulls
the sampled air through the sensing chamber. When a sufficient
amount of smoke is detected in the sensing chamber, the detector
initiates an alarm.
1.38 in 5.40 in
(3.51 cm) (13.72 cm)

Assembly High-humidity environments
Sampling tube
socket
Detector Use the SD-PH Protective Housing when installing SuperDuct
detectors in high-humidity environments. The SD-PH is a weather-
Exhaust tube
socket ized housing that prevents condensation on the device by insulat-
ing the detectors and providing circulated air from the monitored
HVAC duct. The SD-PH also adds a layer of protection against
physical damage to the unit.
Exhaust tube
Thin
gasket
Thick
gasket
Coupling
Duct Detector
SD-PH
Sampling tube Protective
(ordered separately) Housing
Plug
Mounting
Rear View
HVAC duct
Airflow
Hinged
Detector Cover
Housing
air tube
Housing Detector
air tube conduit holes
Sampling
tube
The SD-PH is easy to install and service. The hinged and transpar-
ent cover provides ready access to the detector, while keeping its
status indicators visible at all times.
#10 sheet metal screw (2X) Note: The SD-PH Protective Housing is weatherized against out-
door air, but it is not intended for direct outdoor exposure.
Wiring
Auxiliary
equipment

SIGA-LED [1]
Alarm

[1] No more than one remote test station
or LED indicator can be connected to or
the detector at the same time. Wiring 1
17 16 15 is unsupervised. Maximum wire Alarm
resistance is 10 ohms per wire. 2 SD-TRK
Test or
SD-TRM [1]
3
Data Out ()

Data Out ()
Data In ()
Data In ()
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7
Power indicator
Alarm indicator

Specifications, detector Specifications, test stations
8.70 x 5.45 x 1.90 inches Remote Test/Reset Stations provide alarm test, trouble
Dimensions indication, and reset capability from a remote loca-
(221 x 138 x 48 mm)
tion. They include a one-gang plate, momentary SPST
Wire size 14 to 22 AWG switch, red alarm LED, and terminal block. Magnetically-
Detection Photoelectric operated models (TRM) or key-operated models (TRK)
Detection & alarm since 1872 method (light scattering principle) are available.
North American 1-gang box
100 to 4,000 ft/min and Compatible
U.S. Air velocity Standard 4-in square box,
meets the required minimum electrical
T 888 378 2329 rating 1-1/2 inches deep, with
F 866 503 3996 air pressure differential boxes
1-gang cover
Air pressure 0.005 to 1.00 inches of LED indicators Alarm (red)
Canada differential water
Chubb Edwards LED type Clear lens
T 519 376 2430 0.79 to 2.46 %/ft Wire size 14 to 22 AWG
Sensitivity
F 519 376 7258 obscuration
Resistance per
Alarm test 10 Ohms, max.
5 seconds wire
Southeast Asia response time
T : +65 6391 9300 Current
LED indicators Alarm (red), Power (green) See controller specifications
F : +65 6391 9306 requirements
Unsupervised and power- LED circuit Voltage: 3 Vdc, max.
India limited ratings Current: 30 mA, max.
T : +91 80 4344 2000 Common Quantity: 1
F : +91 80 4344 2050 Switch ratings Voltage: 125 Vdc, max.
alarm relay Type: Form C
(SD-TRK) Current: 4 A, max.
Ratings: 2.0 A at 30 Vdc
Australia
(resistive) Switch ratings Voltage: 200 Vdc, max.
T +61 3 9239 1200 (SD-TRM) Current: 0.5 A, max.
F +61 3 9239 1299 Operating
15.2 to 19.95 Vdc SuperDuct conventional
voltage Compatible
Europe two-wire and Signature duct
Standby: 45 µA Alarm: 45 detectors
T +32 2 725 11 20 Operating smoke detectors
µA Inrush: 1 mA Standalone
F +32 2 721 86 13 current -4°F to 158°F (-20°C to
alarm: 18 mA Operating
Temperature (UL): -4 to 158 environment 70°C) Humidity: 93% RH,
Latin America
T 305 593 4301 °F (-29 to 70 °C). noncondensing
F 305 593 4300 Operating Temperature (ULC): -4 to Storage
-4 to 140 °F (-20 to 60 °C)
environment 120 °F (-29 to 49 °C) temperature
utcfireandsecurity.com Relative humidity: 10 to Agency listings UL, ULC, MEA, CSFM
93%, noncondensing
All rights reserved. Agency
UL, ULC, CSFM, FM, MEA
listings
Catalog Number Description Ship Wt., lb. (kg)
SIGA-SD Intelligent SuperDuct Detector 2.4 (1.1)
Accessories
SD-T8 8-inch sampling tube 0.5 (0.2)
SD-PH Protective housing for high humidity environments 5.5 (2.5)
SIGA-LED Remote alarm LED 1.0 (0.5)
SD-TRM Remote test station, magnetic 1.0 (0.5)
SD-TRK Remote test station, keyed 1.0 (0.5)
SD-VTK Air velocity test kit (stoppers only, etc) 1.0 (0.5)
SD-GSK Cover gasket kit 0.5 (0.2)
SD-MAG Test magnet kit 0.5 (0.2)
SIGA-SDPCB Replacement PCB/Signature sensor kit 1.0 (0.5)
05-18-11

EST Catalog u Intelligent Initiating
Manual Pull
Stations
SIGA-270, SIGA-270P,
SIGA-278 MEA
Patented
SIGA-270 SERIES
SIGA-278
Overview • Break glass operation

An up-front visible glass rod on the SIGA-270 discourages
The SIGA-270 and SIGA-278 series Manual Pull Stations are tampering.
part of EST’s Signature Series system. The SIGA-270 Fire Alarm
Manual Pull Stations feature our very familiar teardrop shape. They • Intelligent device with integral microprocessor
are made from die-cast zinc and finished with red epoxy powder- All decisions are made at the station allowing lower com-
coat paint complemented by aluminum colored stripes and mark- munication speed while substantially improving control panel
ings. With positive pull-lever operation, one pull on the station response time. Less sensitive to line noise and loop wiring
handle breaks the glass rod and turns in a positive alarm, ensuring properties; twisted or shielded wire is not required.
protection plus fool-proof operation. Presignal models (SIGA-270P) • ADA Compliant
are equipped with a general alarm (GA) keyswitch for applications Meets ADA requirements for manual pull stations.
where two stage operation is required. The up-front highly visible
glass rod discourages tampering, but is not required for proper • Electronic Addressing with Non-volatile memory
operation. Permanently stores programmable address, serial number,
type of device, and job number. Automatically updates historic
EST’s double action single stage SIGA-278 station is a contempo- information including hours of operation, last maintenance
rary style manual station made from durable red colored lexan. To date, number of alarms and troubles, and time and date of last
initiate an alarm, first lift the upper door marked “LIFT THEN PULL alarm.
HANDLE”, then pull the alarm handle.
Each station transmits wiring information to the loop control-
Standard Features ler regarding its location with respect to other devices on the
Note: Some features described here may not be supported by all control sys-
circuit.
tems. Check your control panel’s Installation and Operation Guide for details. • Stand-alone operation
The station inputs an alarm even if the loop controller’s polling
• Traditional familiar appearance
interrogation stops.
SIGA-270 models feature our familiar teardrop design with
simple positive pull action and sturdy die-cast metal body. • Diagnostic LEDs
Status LEDs; flashing GREEN shows normal polling; flashing
• One stage (GA), two stage (pre-signal), and double action
RED shows alarm state.
models
SIGA-270 models are available for one or two stage alarm • Designed for high ambient temperature operation
systems. The single stage double action SIGA-278 features a Install in ambient temperatures up to 120 °F (49 °C).
rugged Lexan housing with keyed reset mechanism.

Application Typical Wiring
The operating characteristics of the fire alarm stations are deter- The fire alarm station’s terminal block accepts #18 AWG (0.75mm2)
mined by their sub-type code or “Personality Code”. NORMALLY- to #12 AWG (2.5mm2) wire sizes. See Signature Loop Controller
OPEN ALARM - LATCHING (Pesonality Code 1) is assigned by the catalog sheet for detailed wiring requirement specifications.
factory; no user configuration is required. The device is configured
for Class B IDC operation. An ALARM signal is sent to the loop Wiring Notes
controller when the station’s pull lever is operated. The alarm con-
1 Refer to Signature Loop Controller manual for maximum
dition is latched at the station.
wire distance.
2. All wiring is power limited and supervised.
Compatibility
Signature Series manual stations are compatible only with EST’s
Signature Loop Controller.
Warnings & Cautions

This device will not operate without electrical power. As fires fre-
safeguards with your local fire protection specialist.

To test (or reset) the station simply open the station and operate
the exposed switch. The SIGA-270 series are opened with a tool;
the SIGA-278 requires the key which is supplied with that station.
The station’s automatic self-diagnosis identifies when it is defec-
tive and causes a trouble message. The user-friendly maintenance Figure 4. Single Stage Systems
program shows the current state of each Signature series device
and other pertinent messages. Single devices may be deactivated
temporarily, from the control panel. Availability of maintenance
features is dependent on the fire alarm system used.
Scheduled maintenance (Regular or Selected) for proper system
operation should be planned to meet the requirements of the
Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Refer to current NFPA 72 and
Figure 5. Two Stage Systems

Installation
Single-stage Signature Series fire alarm manual pull stations mount to North American 2½ inch (64 mm) deep 1-gang boxes.
Two stage presignal (270P) models require 1½ inch (38 mm) deep 4-inch square boxes with 1-gang, ½-inch raised covers. Openings
must be angular. Rounded openings are not acceptable. Recommended box: Steel City Model 52-C-13; in Canada, use Iberville Model CI-
52-C-49-1/2.
All models include terminals are suited for #12 to #18 AWG (2.5 mm2 to 0.75 mm2) wire size. Edwards recommends that these fire alarm
stations be installed according to latest recognized edition of national and local fire alarm codes.
Electronic Addressing: The loop controller electronically addresses each manual station, saving valuable time during system com-
missioning. Setting complicated switches or dials is not required. Each station has its own unique serial number stored in its on-board
memory. The loop controller identifies each device on the loop and assigns a “soft” address to each serial number. If desired, the stations
can be addressed using the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool.
Figure 1. SIGA-278 installation Figure 2. SIGA-270, SIGC-270F, SIGC-270B installation
Cover Release
Screw
Comp atible
Electrical Box
with ½-inch
raised covers
Back
Plate
Toggle
Switch
MAL
NOR
LIFT Glass Rod

Release Lever
Do not use
boxes with
rounded
openings.
Figure 3. SIGA-270P, SIGC-270PB installation

Specifications
SIGA-270, SIGC- SIGA-270P,
Catalog Number 270F, SIGC-270B SIGC-270PB SIGA-278
Single Action Single Action -Two Double Action
Description
- One Stage Stage (Presignal) - One Stage
Addressing Uses 1 Module Uses 2 Module Uses 1 Module
U.S. Requirements Address Addresses Address
T 888-378-2329 Standby = 250µA Standby = 396µA Standby = 250µA
F 866-503-3996 Operating Current
Activated = 400µA Activated = 680µA Activated = 400µA
Canada Diecast Zinc - Red Epoxy Lexan - Red with
Construction & Finish
Chubb Edwards with aluminum markings white markings
T 519 376 2430
Type Code Factory Set
F 519 376 7258
Southeast Asia Operating Temperature: 32ºF to 120ºF (0ºC to 49ºC)
T : +65 6391 9300 Storage and Operating
Storage Temperature: -4ºF to 140ºF (-20ºC to 60ºC) Humidity: 0 to 93%
F : +65 6391 9306 Environment
RH
India On-board Green LED - Flashes when polled
T : +91 80 4344 2000 LED Operation On-board Red LED - Flashes w hen in alarm
F : +91 80 4344 2050 Both LEDs - Glow steady when in alarm (stand-alone)
Compatibility Use With: Signature Loop Controller
Australia
T +61 3 9239 1200 Agency Listings UL, ULC (note 1), MEA, CSFM
F +61 3 9239 1299 Note: SIGC-270F, SIGC-270B and SIGC-270PB are ULC listed only. Suffix “F” indicates French markings.
Suffix “B” indicates English/French biling ual markings.
Europe
T +32 2 725 11 20
F +32 2 721 86 13
Latin America
T 305 593 4301
F 305 593 4300 Ship
Catalog Wt. lbs
utcfireandsecurity.com Number Description (kg)
SIGA-270 One Stage Fire Alarm Station, English Markings - UL/ULC Listed
SIGC-270F One Stage Fire Alarm Station, French Markings - ULC Listed
SIGC-270B One Stage Fire Alarm Station, French/English Markings - ULC Listed
Two Stage (Presignal) Fire Alarm Station, English Markings - UL/ULC
SIGA-270P
Listed 1 (0.5)
SIGC- Two Stage (Presignal) Fire Alarm Station, French/English Markings
270PB - ULC Listed
Double Action (One Stage) Fire Alarm Station, English Markings
SIGA-278
- UL/ULC Listed
Accessories
32997 GA Key w/Tag - for pre-signal station (CANADA ONLY)
276-K2 GA Key - for pre-signal station (USA ONLY)
276-K1 Station Reset Key, Supplied with all Key Reset Stations
0.1 (.05)
27165 12 Glass Rods - for SIGA-270 series (CANADA ONLY)
270-GLR 20 Glass Rods - for SIGA-270 series (USA ONLY)
276-GLR 20 Glass Rods - for SIGA-278 series
276B-RSB Surface Mount Box, Red - for SIGA pull stations 1 (0.6)
05-18-11

Input Modules
SIGA-CT1, SIGA-CT1HT,
SIGA-CT2, SIGA-MCT2
SIGA-CT1/2
SIGA-MCT2
MEA
S
CHINA
Application Notes
Available

The SIGA-CT1 Single Input Module, SIGA-CT1HT High Tem- • Multiple applications
perature Single Input Module and SIGA-CT2/SIGA-MCT2 Dual Including Alarm, Alarm with delayed latching (retard) for water-
Input Modules are intelligent analog addressable devices used to flow applications, Supervisory, and Monitor. The installer selects
connect one or two Class B normally-open Alarm, Supervisory, or one of four “personality codes” to be downloaded to the mod-
Monitor type dry contact Initiating Device Circuits (IDC). ule through the loop controller.
The actual function of these modules is determined by the “personal- • SIGA-CT1HT rated for high temperature environments
ity code” selected by the installer. This code is downloaded to the Suitable for attic installation and monitoring high temperature
module from the Signature loop controller during system configura- heat detectors.
tion. • Plug-in (UIO) or standard 1-gang mount
UIO versions allow quick installation where multiple modules are
The input modules gather analog information from the initiating
required. The 1-gang mount version is ideal for remote loca-
devices connected to them and convert it into digital signals.
tions that require a single module.
The module’s on-board microprocessor analyzes the signal and
decides whether or not to input an alarm. • Automatic device mapping
Signature modules transmit information to the loop controller
The SIGA-CT1, SIGA-CT1HT and SIGA-CT2 mount to standard regarding their circuit locations with respect to other Signature
North American 1-gang electrical boxes, making them ideal for lo- devices on the wire loop.
cations where only one module is required. Separate I/O and data
loop connections are made to each module.
Programmable addresses are downloaded from the loop con-
The SIGA-CT1HT module operates at an expanded temperature troller, a PC, or the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool.
range of 32 ºF to 158 ºF (0 ºC to 70 ºC) for those applications There are no switches or dials to set.
requiring more extreme environmental temperature variation. • Stand-alone operation
The SIGA-MCT2 is part of the UIO family of plug-in Signature The module makes decisions and inputs an alarm from initiat-
Series modules. It functions identically to the SIGA-CT2, but ing devices connected to it even if the loop controller’s polling
takes advantage of the modular flexibility and easy installation that interrogation stops. (Function availability dependent upon control
characterizes all UIO modules. Two- and six-module UIO mother- panel.)
boards are available. All wiring connections are made to terminal • Ground fault detection by address
blocks on the motherboard. UIO assemblies may be mounted in Detects ground faults right down to the device level.
Edwards enclosures.

Signature Series Overview UIO Motherboard
6-32
The Signature Series intelligent analog-addressable system from Self-tapping
Edwards Security is an entire family of multi-sensor detectors and screws
mounting bases, multiple-function input and output modules,

network and non-network control panels, and user-friendly main-
Plug-in (UIO) Captive
tenance and service tools. Analog information from equipment Module screws
connected to Signature devices is gathered and converted into
digital signals. An onboard microprocessor in each Signature de-
vice measures and analyzes the signal and decides whether or not #6 Flat washers
to input an alarm. The microprocessor in each Signature device
provides four additional benefits – Self-diagnostics and History Cabinet or electrical enclosure
Log, Automatic Device Mapping, Stand-alone Operation and Fast,

Stable Communication.
Electronic Addressing - The loop controller electronically ad-
Self-diagnostics and History Log – Each Signature Series dresses each module, saving valuable time during system com-
device constantly runs self-checks to provide important mainte- missioning. Setting complicated switches or dials is not required.
nance information. The results of the self-check are automatically Each module has its own unique serial number stored in its
updated and permanently stored in its non-volatile memory. This on-board memory. The loop controller identifies each device on
information is accessible for review any time at the control panel, the loop and assigns a “soft” address to each serial number. If
PC, or using the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool. desired, the modules can be addressed using the SIGA-PRO
Automatic Device Mapping –The Signature Data Control- Signature Program/Service Tool.
ler (SDC) learns where each device’s serial number address is Edwards recommends that this module be installed according to
installed relative to other devices on the circuit. The SDC keeps a latest recognized edition of national and local fire alarm codes.
map of all Signature Series devices connected to it. The Signature
Series Data Entry Program also uses the mapping feature. With
interactive menus and graphic support, the wired circuits be-
tween each device can be examined. Layout or “as-built” drawing Application
information showing branch wiring (T-taps), device types and their The duty performed by the SIGA-CT1 and SIGA-CT2/MCT2 is de-
address are stored on disk for printing hard copy. termined by their sub-type code or “Personality Code”. The code
is selected by the installer depending upon the desired application
and is downloaded from the loop controller.
Installation
SIGA-CT1, SIGA-CT1HT and SIGA-CT2: modules mount to One personality code can be assigned to the SIGA-CT1. Two per-
North American 2½ inch(64 mm) deep 1-gang boxes and 1½ inch sonality codes can be assigned to the SIGA-CT2/MCT2. Codes
(38 mm) deep 4 inch square boxes with 1-gang covers and SIGA- 1, 2, 3 and 4 can be mixed on SIGA-CT2/MCT2 modules only. For
MP mounting plates. The terminals are suited for #12 to #18 AWG example, personality code 1 can be assigned to the first address
(2.5 mm2 to 0.75 mm2) wire size. (circuit A) and code 4 can be assigned to the second address
(circuit B).
NORMALLY-OPEN ALARM - LATCHING (Personality Code 1)
Compatible electrical box
- Assign to one or both circuits. Configures either circuit A or B or
both for Class B normally open dry contact initiating devices such
as Pull Stations, Heat Detectors, etc. An ALARM signal is sent to
the loop controller when the input contact is closed. The alarm
condition is latched at the module.
Wall plate, white
(1-gang) NORMALLY-OPEN ALARM - DELAYED LATCHING (Person-
ality Code 2) - Assign to one or both circuits. Configures either
circuit A or B or both for Class B normally-open dry contact initiat-
ing devices such as Waterflow Alarm Switches. An ALARM signal
is sent to the loop controller when the input contact is closed for
approximately 16 seconds. The alarm condition is latched at the
ALAR
FIRE DULE
MO
M
module.
Status LEDs
NORMALLY-OPEN ACTIVE - NON-LATCHING (Personality
Code 3) - Assign to one or both circuits. Configures either circuit
LED viewing ports
A or B or both for Class B normally-open dry contact monitoring
input such as from Fans, Dampers, Doors, etc. An ACTIVE signal
is sent to the loop controller when the input contact is closed. The
active condition is not latched at the module.
SIGA-MCT2: mount the UIO motherboard inside a suitable NORMALLY-OPEN ACTIVE - LATCHING (Personality Code
Edwards enclosure with screws and washers provided. Plug the 4) - Assign to one or both circuits. Configures either circuit A or
SIGA-MCT2 into any available position on the motherboard and B or both for Class B normally open dry contact monitoring input
secure the module to the motherboard with the captive screws. such as from Supervisory and Tamper Switches. An ACTIVE signal
Wiring connections are made to the terminals on the motherboard is sent to the loop controller when the input contact is closed. The
(see wiring diagram). UIO motherboard terminals are suited for #12 active condition is latched at the module.
to #18 AWG (2.5 mm2 to 0.75 mm2) wire size.

Typical Wiring
Modules will accept #18 AWG (0.75mm2), #16 (1.0mm2), and #14AWG (1.50mm2), and #12 AWG (2.50mm2) wire sizes.
Note: Sizes #16 AWG (1.0mm2) and #18 AWG (0.75mm2) are preferred for ease of installation. See Signature Loop Controller catalog
sheet for detailed wiring requirement specifications.
Initiating (Slave) Device Circuit Wire Specifications
Maximum Allowable Wire Resistance 50 ohms (25 ohms per wire) per Circuit
Maximum Allowable Wire Capacitance 0.1µF per Circuit
For Design Reference: Wire Size Maximum Distance to EOLR
#18 AWG (0.75 mm²)
#16 AWG (1.00 mm²)
4,000 ft (1,219 m)
#14 AWG (1.50 mm²)
#12 AWG (1.50 mm²)
SIGA-CT1, SIGA-CT1HT SIGA-CT2
Typical NO Initiating Device
NOTES
47KW EOL Input 2 Input 1
47KW EOL
1 Maximum 25 Ohm resistance per wire.

2 Maximum #12 AWG (2.5 mm² ) wire; Minimum #18 AWG (0.75 mm2). 1 2 4
3 Refer to Signature controller installation sheet for wiring specifications.
4 Maximum 10 Vdc @ 350 µA

MCT2
1 23 4
5 The SIGA-UIO6R and the SIGA-UIO2R do not come with TB14. 3
6 All wiring is supervised and power-limited. 4

Data In
3
7 These modules will not support 2-wire smoke detectors. 4
2
1
5
Signature 3 TB14 No connections required for

Data 2
MCT2
1
Circuit
TB7
473387351
Other modules may require

Data Out connections.
Warnings & Cautions

CAT NO.
MCT2
4
3
2
1
Green LED (Normal)
This module will not operate without electrical power. As fires fre- Red LED (Active)
TB15

1 2 3 4
safeguards with your local fire protection specialist. No connections or jumper settings
required for MCT2.
SIGA-MCT2
Compatibility
The Signature Series modules are compatible only with EST’s

Specifications
Catalog Number SIGA-CT1HT SIGA-CT1 SIGA-CT2 SIGA-MCT2
Description Single Input Module Dual Input Module
Type Code 48 (factory set) Four sub-types 49 (factory set) Four sub-types
Detection & alarm since 1872 (personality codes) are available (personality codes) are available
Address Requirements Uses One Module Address Uses Two Module Addresses
U.S.
Operating Current Standby = 250µA; Standby = 396µA;
T 888-378-2329
F 866-503-3996 Activated = 400µA Activated = 680µA
Canada High Impact Engineering Polymer
Construction
Chubb Edwards
T 519 376 2430 Mounting North American 2½ inch (64 mm) deep one-gang box- UIO2R/6R/6
F 519 376 7258 es and 1½ inch (38 mm) deep 4 inch square boxes Motherboard
with one-gang covers and SIGA-MP mounting plates
Southeast Asia
Operating Environment 32°F to 158°F
T : +65 6391 9300 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C)
F : +65 6391 9306 (0°C to 70°C)
Storage Environment -4°F to 140°F (-20°C to 60°C); Humidity: 0 to 93% RH
India LED Operation On-board Green LED - Flashes when polled; On-board Red LED -
T : +91 80 4344 2000 Flashes when in alarm/active.
F : +91 80 4344 2050

Both LEDs - Glow steady when in alarm (stand-alone)
Australia Compatibility Use with Signature Loop Controller
T +61 3 9239 1200 Agency Listings UL, ULC, MEA, CSFM
F +61 3 9239 1299
Europe
T +32 2 725 11 20
F +32 2 721 86 13
Catalog Ship Wt.
Latin America Description
Number lbs (kg)
T 305 593 4301
F 305 593 4300 SIGA-CT1 Single Input Module — UL/ULC Listed 0.4 (0.15)
SIGA-CT1HT Single Input Module High Temperature Operation UL/ULC Listed 0.4 (0.15)
utcfireandsecurity.com SIGA-CT2 Dual Input Module — UL/ULC Listed 0.4 (0.15)
SIGA-MCT2 Dual Input Plug-in (UIO) Module — UL, ULC Listed 0.1 (0.05)
Related Equipment
27193-11 Surface Mount Box - Red, 1-gang 1.0 (0.6)
27193-16 Surface Mount Box - White, 1-gang 1.0 (0.6)
SIGA-UIO2R 0.32 (0.15)
— Two Module Positions
SIGA-UIO6R 0.62 (0.28)
— Six Module Positions
SIGA-UIO6 Universal Input-Output Module Board — Six Module Positions 0.56 (0.25)
Multifunction Fire Cabinet — Red, supports Signature Module
MFC-A 7.0 (3.1)
Mounting Plates
Transponder Mounting Bracket (allows for mounting
SIGA-MB4 0.4 (0.15)
two 1-gang modules in a 2-gang box)
05-18-11

EST Catalog u Intelligent Input/Output
Signal Modules
SIGA-CC1, SIGA-MCC1,
MEA
SIGA-CC2 & SIGA-MCC2 S
CHINA
Application Notes
Available
SIGA-CC
SIGA-MCC

SIGA-CC1/MCC1 Single Input Signal Modules and SIGA-CC2/ • Single and Dual input (riser) select
MCC2 Dual Input Signal Modules are part of EST's Signature Use for connecting supervised 24 Vdc Audible/Visible signal
Series system. They are intelligent analog addressable devices circuits, or 25 and 70 VRMS Audio Evacuation and Telephone
used for connecting, upon command from the loop controller, circuits to their power inputs.
supervised Class B signal or telephone circuits to their respective
• Ring-tone generator
power inputs. The power inputs may be polarized 24 Vdc to oper-
When configured for telephone circuits, the SIGA-CC1 gener-
ate audible and visible signal appliances or 25 and 70 VRMS to
ates its own ring-tone signal eliminating the need for a separate
operate audio evacuation speakers and firefighter’s telephones.
ring-tone circuit.
The actual operation of the SIGA-CC1/MCC1 and SIGA-CC2/ • Plug-in (UIO) or standard 2-gang mount
MCC2 is determined by the “personality code” selected by the UIO versions allow quick installation where multiple modules
installer. It is downloaded to the module from the Signature loop are required. The 2-gang mount version is ideal for remote
controller during system configuration. locations that require a single module.
The SIGA-CC1 and SIGA-CC2 mount to standard North Ameri- • Automatic device mapping
can two-gang electrical boxes, making them ideal for locations Signature modules transmit information to the loop controller
where only one module is required. Separate I/O and data loop regarding their circuit locations with respect to other Signature
connections are made to each module. devices on the wire loop.
The SIGA-MCC1 and SIGA-MCC2 are part of the UIO family of • Electronic addressing
plug-in Signature Series modules. They function identically to the Programmable addresses are downloaded from the loop con-
SIGA-CC1 and SIGA-CC2, but take advantage of the modular troller, a PC, or the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool;
flexibility and easy installation that characterize all UIO modules. there are no switches or dials to set.
Two- and six-module UIO motherboards are available. These can
accommodate individual risers for each on-board module, or risers • Intelligent device with microprocessor
that are shared by any combination of its UIO modules. All wiring All decisions are made at the module to allow lower com-
connections are made to terminal blocks on the motherboard. UIO munication speed with substantially improved control panel
assemblies may be mounted in Edwards enclosures. response time and less sensitivity to line noise and loop wiring
• Ground fault detection by address
Detects ground faults right down to the device level.

Installation Application
The SIGA-CC1 and SIGA-CC2: mount to North American The operation of the SIGA-CC1/MCC1 and SIGA-CC2/MCC2
2-1/2 inch (64 mm) deep two-gang boxes and 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) is determined by their sub-type code or “Personality Code”. The
deep 4-inch square boxes with two-gang covers and SIGA-MP code is selected by the installer depending upon the desired ap-
mounting plates. The terminals are suited for #12 to #18 AWG (2.5 plication and is down-loaded from the loop controller. Codes 5 and
mm2 to 0.75 mm2) wire size. 6 apply to the SIGA-CC1/MCC1 only. Code 7 is assigned to the
SIGA-CC2/MCC2 only and automatically applies to both circuits (A
and B).
Personality Code 5: SIGNAL POWER or AUDIO EVACU-
ATION (SINGLE RISER). Valid for the SIGA-CC1/MCC1 only.
Configures the module for use as a Class B Audible/Visible Signal
power (24 Vdc polarized) or Audio Evacuation (25 or 70 VRMS)
power selector. The ring-tone generator is disabled. The output
circuit is monitored for open or shorted wiring. If a short exists,
the control panel inhibits the activation of the audible/visible signal
circuit to prevent connection to the power circuit.
Personality Code 6: TELEPHONE w/RING-TONE (SINGLE
RISER). Valid for the SIGA-CC1/MCC1 only. Configures the
module for use as a Telephone power selector. When a telephone
handset is plugged into its jack or lifted from its hook, the module
generates its own Ring-Tone signal. A separate ring-tone circuit is
not needed. The module sends this signal to the control panel to
SIGA-MCC1 and SIGA-MCC2: mount the UIO motherboard indicate that an off-hook condition is present. When the system
inside a suitable Edwards enclosure with screws and washers operator responds to the call, the ring-tone signal is disabled.
provided. Plug the SIGA-MCC1 or SIGA-MCC2 into any available
Personality Code 7: SIGNAL POWER or AUDIO EVACUA-
position on the motherboard and secure the module to the moth-
TION (DUAL RISER). Valid for the SIGA-CC2/MCC2 only. Con-
erboard with the captive screws. Wiring connections are made
figures the module for use as a two circuit Class B Audible/Visible
to the terminals on the motherboard (see wiring diagram). UIO
Signal power (24 Vdc polarized) or Audio Evacuation (25 or 70
motherboard terminals are suited for #12 to #18 AWG (2.5 mm2 to
VRMS) power selector. The single output circuit is monitored for
open or shorted wiring. If a short exists, the control panel inhibits
UIO Motherboard
the activation of the audible/visible signal circuit to prevent con-
6-32 nection to the power circuit.
Self-tapping
screws
Warnings & Cautions

Plug-in (UIO) Captive
Module screws This module will not operate without electrical power. As fires fre-
safeguards with your fire protection specialist.
#6 Flat washers

Compatibility
The Signature Series modules are compatible only with EST's
0.75 mm2) wire size. Signature Loop Controller.
Edwards recommends that this module be installed according to
latest recognized edition of national and local fire alarm codes.
The module’s automatic self-diagnosis identifies when it is defec-
dresses each module saving valuable time during system com-
tive and causes a trouble message. The user-friendly maintenance
missioning. Setting complicated switches or dials is not required.
program shows the current state of each module and other perti-
Each module has its own unique serial number stored in its on-
nent messages. Single modules may be turned off (de-activated)
board memory. The loop controller identifies each device on the
temporarily, from the control panel.
loop and assigns a “soft” address to each serial number. If desired,
the modules can be addressed using the SIGA-PRO Signature Scheduled maintenance (Regular or Selected) for proper system
Program/Service Tool. operation should be planned to meet the requirements of the
Personality Codes 5 and 6 apply to the SIGA-CC1/MCC1 only and
are assigned by the installer. Code 7 applies to the SIGA-CC2/
MCC2 only. It is factory assigned; no user configuration is required.

Typical Wiring (SIGA-CC2/MCC2)
Modules will accept #18 AWG (0.75mm2), #16 (1.0mm2), #14 AWG (1.50mm2) and #12 AWG (2.5mm2) wire sizes.
Typical Speaker Circuit

Personality
Code 7 UL/ULC Listed
47K EOL
Personality Typical Notification Appliance Circuit

Bi-polar Transient Protector Code 7
(P/N 235196P) + + + + + +
UL/ULC Listed
_ _ _ _ _ _ 47K EOL
Personality Typical Speaker Circuit

Code 7
UL/ULC Listed
47K EOL

SIGA-CC2 Code 7
+ + + + + +
Bi-polar Transient Protector UL/ULC Listed
(P/N 235196P) _ _ _ _ _ _ 47K EOL
1 2
Notes 4 8 UIO(R) series motherboard
1 For maximum wire resistance and maximum wire distances, 1 23 4 MCC2

refer to IOMC Manual (P/N 270144).
7 3 8 9
2
Maximum #12 AWG (2.5mm ) wire. Min. #18 (0.75mm ).
2 2
4
Riser 1 Out
Data In 3
2
3 Refer to Signature Loop Controller Installation Sheet for 4
1 Riser 1 In
Signature
wiring specifications. Data
3
2
TB14
Circuit 1
473387353
4 These modules will NOT support two-wire smoke detectors. TB7

CAT NO.
8 9
MCC2
Data Out
5 All wiring power limited and supervised. If the input source 4
3 Riser 2 Out
is non-power limited, then maintain spacing of 1/4 inch or 2
1 Riser 2 In
use FPL, FPLP, FPLR or equivalent in accordance with NEC. Green LED (Normal) TB15
Red LED (Active)
6 The SIGA-UIO6 does not come with TB8 through TB13. UIOR series motherboard individual
Riser 1 connection. Install the
8
jumpers between adjacent modules
7 Supervised and power-limited. 1 23 4 that use the same riser.
Riser 1 In Riser 1 Out
8 Supervised and power-limited when connected to a power-
limited source. If the source is nonpower-limited, maintain
a space of 1/4 inch from power-limited wiring or use FPL,
SIGA-MCC2
FPLP, FPLR, or an equivalent in accordance with the Na-
tional Electrical Code. Maximum Output Load
9 The input for this riser is common to all modules. 24Vdc 25V 70V
Signals Audio Audio
2A 50W 35W

Typical Wiring (SIGA-CC1/MCC1)
Modules will accept #18 AWG (0.75mm2), #16 (1.0mm2), #14 AWG (1.50mm2) and #12 (2.5mm2) wire sizes.

Code 5
UL/ULC Listed
47K EOL
Personality Typical Telephone Circuit

Code 6 Maximum Output Load
UL/ULC Listed 24Vdc 25V 70V
47K EOL
Signals Audio Audio
2A 50W 35W
Code 5
+ + + + + +
UL/ULC Listed
_ _ _ _ _ _ 47K EOL
Install the Bi-Polar Transient Protector (P/N 235196P) here.

4 5

Code 5
UL/ULC Listed
47K EOL
Personality Typical Telephone Circuit

Code 6
UL/ULC Listed
47K EOL
SIGA-CC1 Personality Typical Notification Appliance Circuit

Code 5
+ + + + + +
Notes UL/ULC Listed
_ _ _ _ _ _ 47K EOL
2
Maximum #12 AWG (2.5mm ) wire. Min. #18 (0.75mm ).
2 2
Install the Bi-Polar Transient Protector (P/N 235196P) here.

3 Refer to Signature Loop Controller Installation Sheet 1 2 4 5
for wiring specifications. 1 23 4
MCC1
4 These modules will NOT support two-wire smoke detec-
tors. Data In 7 3 4
3 Riser 1 Out
5 All wiring power limited and supervised. If the input Signature 4

2
1 Riser 1 In
source is non-power limited, then maintain spacing Data 3 TB14
2 5 8 9
of 1/4 inch or use FPL, FPLP, FPLR or equivalent in ac- Circuit
1
cordance with NEC.
473387352
TB7
CAT NO.
MCC1
Data Out
6 The SIGA-UIO6 does not come with TB8 through TB13. 4 No connections required for
3
2 MCC1. Other modules may
7 Supervised and power-limited. 1 require connections.
Green LED (Normal) TB15
8 If the source is nonpower-limited, maintain a space of Red LED (Active)
UIOR series motherboard individual
1/4 inch from power-limited wiring or use FPL, FPLP, 1 23 4 Riser 1 connection. Install the
FPLR, or an equivalent in accordance with the National 6 8 jumpers between adjacent
modules that use the same riser.
Electrical Code. Riser 1 In Riser 1 Out
9 The input for this riser is common to all modules. SIGA-MCC1

Signature Series Overview
The Signature Series intelligent analog-addressable system from Automatic Device Mapping –The Signature Data Control-
Edwards is an entire family of multi-sensor detectors and mount- ler (SDC) learns where each device’s serial number address is
ing bases, multiple-function input and output modules, network installed relative to other devices on the circuit. The SDC keeps a
and non-network control panels, and user-friendly maintenance map of all Signature Series devices connected to it. The Signature
and service tools. Analog information from equipment connected Series Data Entry Program also uses the mapping feature. With
to Signature devices is gathered and converted into digital signals. interactive menus and graphic support, the wired circuits between
An onboard microprocessor in each Signature device measures each device can be examined. Layout or “as-built” drawing
and analyzes the signal and decides whether or not to input an information showing branch wiring (T-taps), device types and their
alarm. The microprocessor in each Signature device provides four address are stored on disk for printing hard copy. This takes the
additional benefits – Self-diagnostics and History Log, Automatic mystery out of the installation. The preparation of as-built drawings
Device Mapping, Stand-alone Operation and Fast, Stable Com- is fast and efficient.
munication.
Device mapping allows the Signature Data Controller to discover:
Self-diagnostics and History Log – Each Signature Series • Unexpected additional device addresses
device constantly runs self-checks to provide important mainte-
• Missing device addresses
nance information. The results of the self-check are automatically
updated and permanently stored in its non-volatile memory. This • Changes to the wiring in the circuit.
information is accessible for review any time at the control panel, Most Signature modules use a personality code selected by the
PC, or using the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool. The installer to determine their actual function. Personality codes are
information stored in device memory includes: downloaded from the SDC during system configuration and are
• Device serial number, address, and type indicated during device mapping.
• Time and date of last alarm (EST3 V 2 only.)
• Most recent trouble code logged by the detector — 32 possible
trouble codes may be used to diagnose faults.

Specifications
Catalog Num-
SIGA-CC1 SIGA-MCC1 SIGA-CC2 SIGA-MCC2
ber
Description Single Input (Riser) Signal Module Dual Input (Riser) Signal Module
Detection & alarm since 1872 51 (factory set) One sub-type
50 (factory set) Two sub-types
Type Code (personality code) is available (factory
(personality codes) are available
U.S. set)
T 888-378-2329 Address Require-
F 866-503-3996 Uses one module address Uses two module addresses
ments
Canada Wiring Termina-
Suitable for #12 to #18 AWG (2.5 mm² to 0.75mm²)
Chubb Edwards tions
T 519 376 2430 North American
F 519 376 7258 North American
2½ inch (64 mm)
2½ inch (64 mm)
deep two-gang
Southeast Asia deep two-gang
boxes and 1½
T : +65 6391 9300 boxes and 1½
F : +65 6391 9306 inch (38 mm) Plugs into UIO2R, Plugs into UIO2R,
inch (38 mm)
Mounting deep 4 inch UIO6R or UIO6 UIO6R or UIO6
deep 4 inch
India square boxes Motherboards Motherboards
square boxes
T : +91 80 4344 2000 with 2-gang cov-
F : +91 80 4344 2050 with 2-gang cov-
ers and SIGA-
ers and SIGA-MP
MP mounting
Australia mounting plates
T +61 3 9239 1200
plates
F +61 3 9239 1299 Operating Current Standby = 223µA Activated = 100µA
Europe Output Rating 24 Vdc = 2 amps 25 V Audio = 50 watts 70 V Audio = 35 watts
T +32 2 725 11 20
F +32 2 721 86 13 Construction High Impact Engineering Polymer
Storage & Oper- Operating Temperature: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C)
Latin America ating Environment Storage Temperature: -4°F to 140°F (-20°C to 60°C) Humidity: 0 to 93% RH
T 305 593 4301 On-board Green LED - Flashes when polled On-board Red LED - Flashes
F 305 593 4300 LED Operation
when in alarm/active
utcfireandsecurity.com Compatibility Use with: Signature Loop Controller
Agency Listings UL, ULC, CSFM, MEA
Catalog Ship Wt.
Description
Number lbs (kg)
SIGA-CC1 Single Input Signal Module (Standard Mount) - UL/ULC Listed 0.5 (0.23)
SIGA-MCC1 Single Input Signal Module (UIO Mount) - UL/ULC Listed 0.18 (0.08)
SIGA-CC2 Dual Input Signal Module (Standard Mount) - UL/ULC Listed 0.5 (0.23)
SIGA-MCC2 Dual Input Signal Module (UIO Mount) - UL/ULC Listed 0.18 (0.08)
Related Equipment
Universal Input-Output Module Board w/Riser Inputs - Two Module
SIGA-UIO2R 0.32 (0.15)
Positions
Universal Input-Output Module Board w/Riser Inputs - Six Module
SIGA-UIO6R 0.62 (0.28)
Positions
235196P Bi-polar Transient Protector 0.01 (0.05)
Accessories
Multifunction Fire Cabinet - Red, supports Signature
MFC-A 7.0 (3.1)
Module Mounting Plates
05-18-11

EST Catalog u Intelligent Input/Output
Control Relay
Modules
SIGA-CR, SIGA-MCR, SIGA-
CRR, SIGA-MCRR
MEA
SIGA-CR
SIGA-MCR

The Control Relay Module and the Polarity Reversal Relay Module • Provides one no/nc contact (SIGA-CR/MCR)
are part of the Signature Series system. They are intelligent analog Form “C” dry relay contact can be used to control external ap-
addressable devices available in either plug-in (UIO) versions, or pliances such as door closers, fans, dampers etc.
standard 1-gang mount versions. • Allows group operation of sounder bases
The SIGA-CR/MCR Control Relay Module provides a Form “C” The SIGA-CRR/MCRR reverses the polarity of its 24 Vdc out-
dry relay contact to control external appliances such as door clos- put, thus activating all Sounder Bases on the data loop.
ers, fans, dampers etc. This device does not provide supervision • Plug-in (UIO) or standard 1-gang mount
of the state of the relay contact. Instead, the on-board micro- UIO versions allow quick installation where multiple modules
processor ensures that the relay is in the proper ON/OFF state. are required. The 1-gang mount version is ideal for remote
Upon command from the loop controller, the SIGA-CR/MCR relay locations that require a single module.
activates the normally open or normally-closed contact. • Automatic device mapping
The SIGA-CRR/MCRR Polarity Reversal Relay Module provides Signature modules transmit information to the loop controller
a Form “C” dry relay contact to power and activate a series of regarding their circuit locations with respect to other Signature
SIGA-AB4G Audible Sounder Bases. Upon command from the devices on the wire loop.
Signature loop controller, the SIGA-CRR reverses the polarity of its • Electronic addressing
24 Vdc output, thus activating all Sounder Bases on the data loop. Programmable addresses are downloaded from the loop con-
Standard-mount versions (SIGA-CR and SIGA-CRR) are troller, a PC, or the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool;
installed to standard North American 1-gang electrical boxes, there are no switches or dials to set.
making them ideal for locations where only one module is re- • Intelligent device with microprocessor
quired. Separate I/O and data loop connections are made to each All decisions are made at the module to allow lower com-
module. munication speed with substantially improved control panel
response time and less sensitivity to line noise and loop wiring
Plug-in UIO versions (SIGA-MCR and SIGA-MCRR) are part
of the UIO family of plug-in Signature Series modules. They func-
tion identically to the standard mount versions, but take advantage • Ground fault detection by address
of the modular flexibility and easy installation that characterizes Detects ground faults right down to the device level.
all UIO modules. Two- and six-module UIO motherboards are
available. All wiring connections are made to terminal blocks on
the motherboard. UIO assemblies may be mounted in Edwards
enclosures.

Installation Application
SIGA-CR and SIGA-CRR: modules mount to North American The operation of Signature Series control relays is determined by
2½ inch (64 mm) deep 1-gang boxes and 1½ inch (38 mm) deep their sub-type code or “Personality Code.”
4 inch square boxes with 1-gang covers and SIGA-MP mounting
Personality Code 8: CONTROL RELAY (SIGA-CR/MCR) - Dry
plates. The terminals are suited for #12 to #18 AWG (2.5 mm2 to
Contact Output. This setting configures the module to provide
0.75 mm2) wire size.
one Form “C” DRY RELAY CONTACT to control Door Closers,
Fans, Dampers, etc. Contact rating is 2.0 amp @ 24 Vdc; 0.5
Compatible electrical box amp @ 120 Vac (or 220 Vac for non-UL applications). Personality
Code 8 is assigned at the factory. No user configuration is re-
quired.
Personality Code 8: POLARITY REVERSAL RELAY MODULE
(SIGA-CRR/MCRR). This setting configures the module to re-
Wall plate, white verse the polarity of its 24 Vdc output. Contact rating is 2.0 amp @
(1-gang)
24 Vdc (pilot duty). Personality Code 8 is assigned at the factory.
No user configuration is required.
M
Compatibility
The Signature Series modules are compatible only with EST's
ALAR
FIRE DULE
MO
Status LEDs
LED viewing ports
Warnings & Cautions

This module will not operate without electrical power. As fires fre-
SIGA-MCR and SIGA-MCRR: mount the UIO motherboard safeguards with your local fire protection specialist.
inside a suitable Edwards enclosure with screws and wash-
ers provided. Plug the module into any available position on the
motherboard and secure the module to the motherboard with the
captive screws. Wiring connections are made to the terminals on Testing & Maintenance
the motherboard (see wiring diagram). UIO motherboard terminals The module’s automatic self-diagnosis identifies when it is defec-
are suited for #12 to #18 AWG (2.5 mm2 to 0.75 mm2) wire size. tive and causes a trouble message. The user-friendly maintenance
program shows the current state of each module and other per-
UIO Motherboard
tinent messages. Single modules may be turned off (deactivated)
6-32 temporarily, from the control panel. Availability of maintenance
Self-tapping
screws
features is dependent on the fire alarm system used. Scheduled
maintenance (Regular or Selected) for proper system operation
should be planned to meet the requirements of the Authority Hav-
Plug-in (UIO) Captive ing Jurisdiction (AHJ). Refer to current NFPA 72 and ULC CAN/
Module screws
ULC 536 standards.
#6 Flat washers

dresses each module, saving valuable time during system com-
missioning. Setting complicated switches or dials is not required.
Each module has its own unique serial number stored in its on-
board memory. The loop controller identifies each device on the
loop and assigns a “soft” address to each serial number. If desired,
the modules can be addressed using the SIGA-PRO Signature
Program/Service Tool.

Typical Wiring
Notes

1 Refer to Signature Loop Controller Installation Sheet
for wiring specifications.
2 NFPA 72 requires that the SIGA-CR/SIGA-MCR be
installed in the same room as the device it is control-
ling. This requirement may not apply in all markets.
Check with your local AHJ for details.
3 The SIGA-UIO6R and the SIGA-UIO2R do not come
SIGA-CR Control Relay with TB14.
4 The SIGA-UIO6 does not come with TB8 through
TB13.
Normally Open Common Normally Closed 5

Supervised and power-limited.
6 If the source is nonpower-limited, maintain a space
of 1/4 inch from power-limited wiring or use FPL,
FPLP, FPLR, or an equivalent in accordance with the
National Electrical Code.
2 7) Maximum #12 AWG (2.5mm2) wire.
1 23 4 Min. #18 (0.75mm2).
1

Data In
3
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
TB7 TB14
No connections required for
Data Out MCR. Other modules may
require connections.
473387358
CAT NO.
MCR
4
3
2
Green LED (Normal) 1
Red LED (Active) TB15
1 23 4
4
No connections required for
MCR. Other modules may
require connections.
SIGA-MCR Control Relay

Typical Wiring
AB4G AB4G AB4G

Audible Base Audible Base Audible Base
6254A-003
EOL Relay
Listed 24 VDC + 1
Nominal Power 2
Supply
- 1
2 2 2
2
1 2
3 3
CT1
CR CRR 3
SIGA-CRR
Signature +
DATA
Controller
- 3
3 Optional CR
for disabling/disconnecting
sounder base
SIGA-MCRR
SIGA-CRR Schematic SIGA-MCRR Schematic
SIGA-CRR Schematic
DATA (+) IN/OUT

Power In Power Out
Polarity reverses 6254A-003
DATA (-) OUT

when activated. EOL Relay
11
1
DATA (-) IN
Audible required for
10
2
Bases supevision
SIG +
SIG -
9
4
8
7
6
5
7 8 7
Signature
Notes Data Data Out
Circuit
1 Refer to the Signature controller installation sheet for For normal operation CT1
wiring. 8
For General Fire
Alarm Operation
2 One Pair of Wires (24 Vdc power). UL/ULC Listed 4 3 2 1
24 Vdc power
or
3 One Pair of Wires (Signature Data). supply
4 Single Wire (24 Vdc power). 1 23 4 1 23 4

5 The SIGA-UIO6R and the SIGA-UIO2R do not come MCRR
with TB14. 7 1 UIO(R) series motherboard
Data Out 4
6 The SIGA-UIO6 does not come with TB8 through 3
TB13. 2
1 No connections required for
Signature 4 5
3 TB14 MCRR. Other modules may
7 Supervised and power-limited. Data 2 require connections.
Circuit 1
8 If the source is nonpower-limited, maintain a space TB7
473387360
473387359
of 1/4 inch from power-limited wiring or use FPL,

Data In
CAT NO.
CAT NO.
MCRR
MCRR
FPLP, FPLR, or an equivalent in accordance with the 4 Green LED (Normal)

National Electrical Code. 3
2
Red LED (Active)
9 Maximum #12 AWG (2.5 mm² ) wire; Minimum #18 1 No connections required for
TB15
AWG (0.75 mm² ). Green LED (Normal) MCRR. Other modules may
Red LED (Active) 1 23 4 1 23 4 require connections.
10 End-of-Line Relay must monitor and report power
supply trouble to control panel. 6 6
Optional MCRR
11 Class B Data wiring may be “T-tapped.” or MCR for
No connections required for MCRR. Other
disabling/disconnecting
an audible base. modules may require connections.

Specifications
Catalog Number SIGA-CR SIGA-MCR SIGA-CRR SIGA-MCRR
Description Control Relay Polarity Reversal Relay
Type Code Personality Code 8 (Factory Set) Personality Code 8 (Factory Set)
Address Requirements Uses 1 Module Address
Operating Current Standby = 100µA Activated = 100µA
Relay Type and Rating Form “C” 24 VDC = 2 amps (pilot duty) 120 Vac = 0.5 amps 220 Vac (non-UL) = 0.5 amps
Mounting North American 2½ inch Plugs into UIO2R, UIO6R or North American 2½ inch Plugs into UIO2R, UIO6R or
(64 mm) deep 1-gang boxes UIO6 Motherboards (64 mm) deep 1-gang boxes UIO6 Motherboards
and 1½ inch (38 mm) deep and 1½ inch (38 mm) deep
4 inch square boxes with 4 inch square boxes with
1-gang covers and SIGA- 1-gang covers and SIGA-
MP mounting plates MP mounting plates
Construction & Finish High Impact Engineering Polymer
Storage and Operating Operating Temperature: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C)
Environment Storage Temperature: -4°F to 140°F (-20°C to 60°C) Humidity: 0 to 93% RH
LED Operation On-board Green LED - Flashes when polled On-board Red LED - Flashes when in alarm/active
Compatibility Use With: Signature Loop Controller
Ship Weight - lbs
Catalog Number Description
(kg)
SIGA-CR Control Relay Module (Standard Mount) 0.4 (0.15)
SIGA-MCR Control Relay Module (UIO Mount) 0.18 (0.08)
SIGA-CRR Polarity Reversal Relay Module (Standard Mount) 0.4 (0.15)
SIGA-MCRR Polarity Reversal Relay Module (UIO Mount) 0.18 (0.08)
Related Equipment
SIGA-UIO2R Universal Input-Output Module Board w/Riser Inputs - Two Module Positions 0.32 (0.15)
SIGA-UIO6R Universal Input-Output Module Board w/Riser Inputs - Six Module Positions 0.62 (0.28)
SIGA-AB4G Audible (Sounder) Detector Base 0.3 (0.15)
Accessories
MFC-A Multifunction Fire Cabinet - Red, supports Signature Module Mounting Plates 7.0 (3.1)
SIGA-MB4 Transponder Mounting Bracket (allows for mounting two 1-gang modules in a 2-gang box) 0.4 (0.15)

Signature Series Overview
The Signature Series intelligent analog-addressable system from Edwards is an entire
family of multi-sensor detectors and mounting bases, multiple-function input and output
modules, network and non-network control panels, and user-friendly maintenance and
service tools. Analog information from equipment connected to Signature devices is
gathered and converted into digital signals. An onboard microprocessor in each Signature
U.S. device measures and analyzes the signal and decides whether or not to input an alarm.
T 888-378-2329 The microprocessor in each Signature device provides four additional benefits – Self-di-
F 866-503-3996
agnostics and History Log, Automatic Device Mapping, Stand-alone Operation and Fast,
Canada Stable Communication.
Chubb Edwards
T 519 376 2430 Self-diagnostics and History Log – Each Signature Series device constantly runs self-
F 519 376 7258 checks to provide important maintenance information. The results of the self-check are
automatically updated and permanently stored in its non-volatile memory. This information
Southeast Asia
T : +65 6391 9300 is accessible for review any time at the control panel, PC, or using the SIGA-PRO Signa-
F : +65 6391 9306 ture Program/Service Tool. The information stored in device memory includes:
India • Device serial number, address, and type
T : +91 80 4344 2000 • Time and date of last alarm
F : +91 80 4344 2050
• Most recent trouble code logged by the detector — 32 possible trouble codes may be
Australia used to diagnose faults.
T +61 3 9239 1200
F +61 3 9239 1299 Automatic Device Mapping –The Signature Data Controller (SDC) learns where each
Europe
device’s serial number address is installed relative to other devices on the circuit. The
T +32 2 725 11 20 SDC keeps a map of all Signature Series devices connected to it. The Signature Series
F +32 2 721 86 13 Data Entry Program also uses the mapping feature. With interactive menus and graphic
support, the wired circuits between each device can be examined. Layout or “as-built”
Latin America
T 305 593 4301 drawing information showing branch wiring (T-taps), device types and their address are
F 305 593 4300 stored on disk for printing hard copy. This takes the mystery out of the installation. The
preparation of as-built drawings is fast and efficient.
Device mapping allows the Signature Data Controller to discover:
All rights reserved. • Unexpected additional device addresses
• Missing device addresses
• Changes to the wiring in the circuit.
Most Signature modules use a personality code selected by the installer to determine their
actual function. Personality codes are downloaded from the SDC during system configu-
ration and are indicated during device mapping.
Standalone Operation – A decentralized alarm decision by the device is guaranteed.
Onboard intelligence permits the device to operate in standalone (degrade) mode. If Sig-
nature loop controller CPU communications fail for more than four seconds, all devices on
that circuit go into standalone mode. The circuit acts like a conventional alarm receiving
circuit. Each Signature device on the circuit continues to collect and analyze information
from its slave devices. When connected to a panel utilizing standalone operation, modules
with their “personality” set as alarm devices (IDC) will alarm should their slave alarm-initiat-
ing device activate.
05-18-11

Isolator Module
SIGA-IM
MEA
S
CHINA
Application Notes
Patented Available
Overview Automatic Device Mapping - The Signature loop controller

learns keeps a map where each device’s serial number address is
The SIGA-IM Isolator Module is part of EST’s Signature Series sys- installed relative to other devices on the data circuit.
tem. This intelligent device enables part of the Signature data loop
to continue operating should a short circuit occur. The module Fast Stable Communication - Built-in intelligence means less
can be wired into a Class A data loop at any point. information needs to be sent between the module and the loop
controller. Other than regular supervisory polling response, the
If a fault occurs, the isolator cuts power to all devices beyond the module only needs to communicate with the loop controller when
isolator on the loop as follows: it has something new to report.
• a short on the line causes all isolators to open within 23 msec.
• at 10 msec intervals, beginning on one side of the Class A cir-
cuit nearest the loop controller, the isolators close to provide the Standard Features
next isolator down the line with power. • Automatic device mapping
• when the isolator next to the short closes, it reopens within 10 Each module transmits wiring information to the loop control-
msec. ler regarding its location with respect to other devices on the
circuit.
Once activated, the line fault isolator continuously checks the
faulted side of the loop to determine if the short still exists. When
Addresses are downloaded and permanently stored from a PC,
the fault is removed, the module automatically restores the entire
or the SIGA-PRO Signature Program / Service Tool. There are
data loop to the normal condition.
no switches or dials to set.
The microprocessor in every Signature module provides at least
• Ground fault detection by address
three important benefits — Self-diagnostics and History Log, Auto-
Detects ground faults right down to the device level.
matic Device Mapping, and Fast, Stable Communication.
• Self-restoring
Self-diagnostics and History Log - Each Signature Series mod-
ule constantly runs self-checks to provide important maintenance • 2-gang mounting
information. This information is automatically updated and perma- • Designed to ISO 9001 standards
nently stored in the module’s non-volatile memory and is acces-
sible for review any time using the SIGA-PRO Signature Program /
Service Tool.

Testing & Maintenance Typical Wiring
The module’s automatic self-diagnosis identifies when it is defec- IM IM
tive and causes a trouble message. The user-friendly maintenance
program shows the current state of each module and other pertinent SHORT
CIRCUIT
messages. Single modules may be turned off (deactivated) tempo-
rarily, from the control panel. Availability of maintenance features is This part is removed
from circuit
dependent on the fire alarm system used. Scheduled maintenance
(Regular or Selected) for proper system operation should be planned
to meet the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
Typical Class A Configuration
Refer to current NFPA 72 and ULC CAN/ ULC 536 standards.
Data Out Data Return
Warnings & Cautions Signature Loop Controller
This module will not operate without electrical power. As fires frequently cause
power interruption, we suggest you discuss further safeguardwith your fire
IM IM
protection specialist.
SHORT
CIRCUIT
This part is removed
Typical Wiring and Installation from the circuit
The SIGA-IM module mounts to North American 2-1/2 inch (64 mm)
deep 2-gang boxes and 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) deep 4 inch square
boxes with 2 gang covers and SIGA-MP mounting plates. The
module will accept #18 AWG (0.75mm2), #16 (1.0mm2), #14 AWG
Typical Class A Configuration
(1.50mm2), and #12 AWG (2.50mm2) wire sizes. Note: Sizes #16 Data Out Data Return with Class B T-Taps
AWG (1.0mm2) and #18 AWG (0.75mm2) are preferred for ease Signature Loop Controller
of installation. See Signature Loop Controller catalog sheet for
detailed wiring requirement specifications.
Application & Compatibility

This module should only be used on Class A circuits. The
operation of the SIGA-IM is determined by its hardware type code
and is assigned at the factory. No user configuration is required.
The Signature Series modules are compatible only with EST’s
Green LED
(normal - flashing)
TB1
From Signature Loop To Next Device or EOL

Controller or Previous Resistor supplied with
Device UL/ULC Listed Control Panel
DATA IN (+) DATA OUT (+)
DATA IN (-) DATA OUT (-)
4 3 5
1
For maximum wire resistance, refer to the appropriate
manufacturer’s documentation.
2 Max. #12 AWG (2.5mm²)wire.
3
Refer to Signature Loop Controller Installation Sheet for
wiring specifications.
4 This module should be used only with Class A wiring.
5 Maximum circuit resistance between isolators is 6 ohms.
6 All wiring is power-limited and supervised.

Specifications Ordering Information
Isolator Module - factory set hardware type Catalog Description Ship Wt.
Description
code Number lb (kg)
Address Requirements Uses One Detector Address SIGA-IM Fault Isolator Module - UL/ULC Listed .5 (.23)
Circuit Resistance Six ohms maximum between isolators
Operating Current Standby = 45µA; Activated = 45µA Accessories
Operating Voltage 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc (19 Vdc nominal) 27193-21 Surface Mount Box - 2-gang RED 1 (.4)
High Impact Engineering Polymer 2-gang 27193-26 Surface Mount Box - 2-gang WHITE
Construction & Finish
front plate - White Finish Multifunction Fire Cabinet - Red, supports
MFC-A 7.0 (3.1)
Storage Environment Temperature: -4°F to 140°F (-20°C to 60°C) Signature Module Mounting Plates
Temperature: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C); SIGA-MP1 Signature Module Mounting Plate, 1 footprint 1.5 (0.70)
Operating Environment
Humidity: 0 to 93% RH SIGA-MP2 Signature Module Mounting Plate, 1/2 footprint 0.5 (0.23)
On-board Green LED - Flashes when polled SIGA- Signature Module Mounting Plate, 1/2 ex- 1.02
LED Operation
(normal) MP2L tended footprint (0.46)
Compatibility Use with: Signature Loop Controller

U.S.
T 888-378-2329
F 866-503-3996
Canada
Chubb Edwards
T 519 376 2430
F 519 376 7258
Southeast Asia
T : +65 6391 9300
F : +65 6391 9306
India
T : +91 80 4344 2000
F : +91 80 4344 2050

Australia
T +61 3 9239 1200
F +61 3 9239 1299
Europe
T +32 2 725 11 20
F +32 2 721 86 13
Latin America
T 305 593 4301
F 305 593 4300

05-18-11

“RELAY ON” LED

LED VIEWING
HOLE
‘SNAP
APART”
Multi-Voltage
SEAMS MR-101/C, MR-201/C
Control Relays
MR-100 & MR-200 Series MR-104/T
LED
VIEWING
HOLES
MR-101/T
MR-104/C, MR-204/C

The MR-Series Multi-Voltage Control Relays offer SPDT or DPDT • Each relay position may be energized from one of four input
10 Amp contacts which may be operated by one of four input voltages
control voltages. A single relay may be energized from a voltage
• Each relay position contains a red LED which illuminates when
source of 24 Vdc, 24 Vac, 115 Vac or 230 Vac by wiring to ap-
the coil is energized. This provides a timesaving convenience
propriate input terminals.
when checking an installed system; no metering is required.
Each relay position contains a red light emitting diode (LED) which • Single, dual or triple relay modules may be “snapped apart”
indicates the relay coil is energized. Relays may be “snapped from a standard four-position master
apart” from a standard four-module assembly and used independ-
ently. • SPDT or DPDT relays available
These devices are ideal for applications where local contacts are • Available in dustproof metal enclosures with LED viewing port
required for system status, remote contacts for control of electri- • Track mounting hardware to facilitate installation in standard
cal loads and general purpose switching. They are suitable for cabinets
use with HVAC Temperature Control, Fire Alarm, Security, Energy
Management, and Lighting Control Systems. • UL recognized relays rated at 10 million mechanical operations
• ULI listed as control unit accessory

Installation Wiring
(TYPICAL FOR ONE MODULE POSITION)
U.S.
T 888-378-2329
F 866-503-3996
Canada
Chubb Edwards
T 519 376 2430
F 519 376 7258
Southeast Asia
T : +65 6391 9300
F : +65 6391 9306
India
T : +91 80 4344 2000
F : +91 80 4344 2050

Australia
T +61 3 9239 1200
F +61 3 9239 1299
Europe
T +32 2 725 11 20 MR-101 (MR-104) MR-201 (MR-204)
F +32 2 721 86 13
Latin America
T 305 593 4301
Specifications
F 305 593 4300 Power Requirements
utcfireandsecurity.com MR-101 Position 15 mA @ 24 Vac, 24 Vdc, 115 Vac, 230 Vac
MR-201 Position 35 mA @ 24 Vac, 24 Vdc, 115 Vac, 230 Vac
© 2010 UTC Fire & Security. Relays
MR-101 UL Recognized SPDT
MR-201 UL Recognized SPDT
Enclosure 18 ga. CRS, plated with 1/2 in conduit knockouts (top and bottom)
Contact Rating 10 Amps @ 115 Vac
Ambient Temperature -58°F to 185°F (-50°C to 85°C)
Approvals UL Listed control unit accessory
Dimensions
MR-101/T and MR-201/T 3.0 H x 2.125 W x 1.5 D in (76 H x 54 W x 38 D mm)
MR-104/T and MR-204/T 3.0 H x 8.5 W x 1.5 D in (76 H x 216 W x 38 D mm)
MR-101/C and MR-
6.125 H x 3.25 W x 2.5 D in (156mm H x 83mm W x 64 D mm)
201/C
MR-104/C and MR-
6.125 H x 9.5 W x 2.5 D in (156 H x 241 W x 64 D mm)
204/C
Model Description
MR-101/T Single SPDT relay with LED and track mounting hardware
MR-101/C Single SPDT relay with LED mounted in metal enclosure
MR-104/T Four-position SPDT relay with LEDs and track mounting hardware
MR-104/C Four-position SPDT relay with LEDs mounted in metal enclosure
MR-201/T Single DPDT relay with LED and track mounting hardware
MR-201/C Single DPDT relay with LED mounted in metal enclosure
MR-204/T Four-position DPDT realy with LEDs and track mounting hardware
MR-204/C Four-position DPDT relay with LEDs mounted in metal enclosure
05-18-11

Multi-Voltage
Control Relay
Model PAM-1

The PAM-1 Relay is encapsulated multi-voltage device providing • Completely encapsulated 10 Amp relay
10 Amp Form C contacts. The relay may be energized by one of
• Relay may be energized by one of three input voltages
three input voltages: 24 Vac, 24 Vdc, or 115 Vac.
• Contains a red LED which illuminates when relay coil is ener-
A red LED is provided which, when illuminated, indicates the relay gized
coil is energized.
• May be mounted by double-sided adhesive tape, self-drilling
The PAM-1 may be mounted by using the double-sided adhesive screw or placed in back box
tape, the self-drilling screw, or loosely placed in a back box.
• Convenient 6 in (150mm) wire leads for electrical connections
The PAM-1 is ideal for applications where remote relays are
required for control or status feedback. They are suitable for use
with HVAC, Temperature Control, Fire Alarm, Security, Energy
Management, and Lighting Control Systems. Wiring

Specifications
Power Requirments 15 mA per position @ 24 Vdc, 24 Vac, 115 Vac
Relay UL Recognized SPDT
Contact Rating 10 Amps @ 115 Vac
Detection & alarm since 1872 Ambient Temperature -58°F to 185°F (-50°C to 85°C)
Approvals UL Recognized components
U.S. 1.5 H x 1 W .875 D inches (38.1 x 24.5 x 22.2 mm)
T 888-378-2329 Dimensions
with 6 inch (150mm) wire leads 18 AWG (1.00mm²)
F 866-503-3996
Canada
Chubb Edwards
T 519 376 2430 Ordering Information
F 519 376 7258
Model Description
Southeast Asia Single SPDT relay with LED double-sided adhesive tape, mounting screw and 6 in (150 mm)
T : +65 6391 9300 PAM-1
leads.
F : +65 6391 9306
India
T : +91 80 4344 2000
F : +91 80 4344 2050

Australia
T +61 3 9239 1200
F +61 3 9239 1299
Europe
T +32 2 725 11 20
F +32 2 721 86 13
Latin America
T 305 593 4301
F 305 593 4300

05-18-11

Universal Input/ SIGA-UIO6R
Output Module
Motherboards
SIGA-UIO2R, SIGA-UIO6R,
SIGA-UIO2R

Signature Series Universal Input-Output Module Motherboards • Modular flexibility
provide mounting and wiring terminations for up to six Signature Wide assortment of multi-function plug-in modules provides
Series plug-in UIO (SIGA-“M” series) modules. UIO motherboards total flexibility.
slide into a rigid extruded track (included) with mounting pads
• Minimum wiring requirements
for convenient mounting into a variety of equipment enclosures.
Integral jumpers between modules allow sharing of risers to
UIO modules plug into the board and are held securely in place
reduce installation wiring.
with captive machine screws. All field wiring connects to terminal
blocks on the motherboard, which permits rapid removal and • Easy installation
replacement of modules for troubleshooting. #12 AWG (2.5 mm2) terminal blocks and sturdy mounting pads
The SIGA-UIO2R provides mounting and wiring terminations for ensure quick installation into Edwards enclosures.
up to two UIO modules, and the SIGA-UIO6R provides mounting • Supports automatic device mapping
and wiring terminations for up to six UIO modules. Both mother- All compatible UIO modules transmit information to the loop
boards feature a riser #1 input and a riser #2 input bus. Jumpers controller regarding their circuit locations with respect to other
on riser #1 input, between modules, facilitate sharing a single riser Signature devices on the wire loop.
among more than one module. This significantly reduces wiring
• Supports intelligent devices
requirements. Removing the jumpers provide separate riser inputs
On-board modules make decisions and input an alarm from
to each adjacent module. Riser #2 input is fixed to each module
initiating devices connected to them even if the loop controller’s
position and cannot be split.
polling interrogation stops.
The SIGA-UIO6 provides mounting and wiring terminations for up
to six UIO modules. This motherboard provides two riser inputs • Twisted or shielded wire not required
that are common to all modules. Because all decisions are made at the on-board modules,
lower communication speeds are possible. This results in
substantially improved control panel response time and less
sensitivity to line noise and loop wiring properties.
• Supports electronic addressing
Programmable addresses are downloaded to compatible UIO
modules from the loop controller, a PC, or the SIGA-PRO
Signature Program/Service Tool. There are no switches or dials
to set.

Mounting and Installation
Mount the UIO motherboard inside a Edwards MFC-A cabinet
or other suitable electrical enclosure with screws and washers
provided. Each MFC-A will hold one UIO2R motherboard or one
UIO6 or UIO6R motherboard complete with their full complement
of modules.
Plug a Signature Series UIO module into any available position on
the motherboard and secure the module to the motherboard with
the captive screws. Wiring connections are made to the termi- The MFC-A cabinet is UL listed for use with UIO moth-
erboards and meets requirements for spacing and
nals on the motherboard (see wiring diagram). UIO motherboard
clearance around the components.
terminals are suited for #12 to #18 AWG (2.5 mm2 to 0.75 mm2)
wire size.
UIO Motherboard
Edwards recommends that all boards and modules be installed
according to latest recognized edition of national and local fire 6-32
alarm codes. Self-tapping
screws
Testing & Maintenance Plug-in (UIO) Captive

The module’s automatic self-diagnosis identifies when it is defec- Module screws
tive and causes a trouble message. The user-friendly mainte-
nance program shows the current state of each module and other
pertinent messages. Single modules may be turned off (de-acti-
vated) temporarily, from the control panel. #6 Flat washers
Scheduled maintenance (Regular or Selected) for proper system

operation should be planned to meet the requirements of the Cabinet or electrical enclosure
Compatibility
Signature Series Universal Input/Output Module Boards are com-
patible only with SIGA-“M” Series I/O Modules, which require a
Signature Data Controller.
Warnings & Cautions

Signature devices will not operate without electrical power. As
fires frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you discuss
further safeguards with your fire protection specialist.

Typical Wiring
Signature Series Universal Input/Output Motherboards have terminal blocks to accept #18 AWG (0.75mm2 ), #16 AWG (1.0mm2), #14 AWG
(1.5mm2 ), and #12 AWG (2.5mm2) wire sizes. See Signature Data Controller catalog sheets for detailed wiring requirements and specifica-
tions.
SIGA-UIO2R SIGA-UIO6R
3 Module Input/Output Wiring
Refer to individual module installation sheet for wiring details.
Module Input/Output Wiring UIO2R
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 UIO6R
TB1 TB2
TB1
TB2
TB3
TB6
TB4
TB5
Data In
TB7 Data In
Signature 4 TB15 TB7
3
Data 4 Signature
4
2 Common input/output 3
Circuit 1 3
Data TB15
2 bus for M series 2 Input/Output Bus 2
1 Circuit 4
Data Out modules 1 3 Common to all
5 2
1 M series
Data Out modules (maximum
TB8 TB9 current is 8 Amps)
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Jumpers connect common
TB11
TB8
TB9
TB10
TB13
TB12
inputs/outputs between 1
Module Input/Output Wiring modules Jumpers connect 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
common inputs
3 5 outputs between
Notes modules. Module Input/Output Wiring (maximum current is 8 Amps)
1 Jumpers may be used to make the inputs/outputs between

modules common.
2) Not all modules use the SIGA-UIO2R terminals for the same
SIGA-UIO6
functions. Module Input/Output Wiring
3 Refer to individual SIGA-M series installation sheets for jumper
settings and wiring information. Installations with multiple 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 UIO6
SIGA-UIO motherboards or enclosures (which include other
TB1
TB2
TB3
TB6
TB4
TB5
TB14 Input/Output Bus 1
wiring) require FPL, FPLR, FPLP, or equivalent NEC-approved Data In 4 Common to all
3
wire for all power limited wiring. Observe the details of supervi- 2
1
M series
modules (maximum
4
sion and power limited versus non-power limited circuits. Refer Signature
Data
3 current is 8 Amps)
2 TB15
to the SIGA-M series installation sheets. Circuit 1 4 Input/Output Bus 2
TB7 3 Common to all
2 M series
4) Do not mix incompatible signals. Data Out 1
modules (maximum
current is 8 Amps)
5 Maximum current is 8 Amps.
7) Refer to Signature Data Controller Installation Sheets for wiring

specifications.

Specifications
Catalog Number SIGA-UIO2R SIGA-UIO6R SIGA-UIO6
Module Capacity Two Six Six
5.4 inch L (across
Dimensions (with 9.56 inch L (across mounting feet) x 4.3 inch W
Detection & alarm since 1872 mounting feet) x 4.3
module installed) x 3.2 inch H
inch W x 3.2 inch H
U.S. Address Requirements no address required
T 888-378-2329
Type Code none
F 866-503-3996
Compatible Modules All SIGA-Mxxx Signature Series
Canada Operating Voltage 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc (19 Vdc nominal)
Chubb Edwards Mounting (cabinets) Directly into suitable enclosures (e.g.: MFC-A) - Notes 1, 2, 3.
T 519 376 2430
Wiring Terminals #12 AWG (2.5mm²) to #18 AWG (0.75mm²)
F 519 376 7258
Operating Temperature: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C)
Storage and Operating
Southeast Asia Storage Temperature: -4°F to 140°F (-20°C to 60°C)
Environment
T : +65 6391 9300 Operating and Storage Humidity: 0 to 93% RH
F : +65 6391 9306 Agency Listing UL, ULC, MEA, CSFM
India
Notes:
T : +91 80 4344 2000
F : +91 80 4344 2050 1. Allow a minimum clearance of one inch around all sides of the UIO motherboard.
2. On-site drilling of mounting holes may be required. Self-tapping mounting screws are provided.
Australia 3. Suitable cabinets: MFC-A, 2-WB, 2-WB3, 2-WB7, CAB2, 3-CAB5, 3-CAB7, 3-CAB14, 3-CAB21,
T +61 3 9239 1200 3-RCC series, RACC series.
F +61 3 9239 1299
Europe
T +32 2 725 11 20 Ordering Information
F +32 2 721 86 13
Catalog Ship Wt. - lb
Description
Latin America Number (kg)
T 305 593 4301 Universal Input-Output Module Board w/Riser Inputs
F 305 593 4300 SIGA-UIO2R 0.32 (0.15)
- Two Module Positions
utcfireandsecurity.com Universal Input-Output Module Board w/Riser Inputs
SIGA-UIO6R 0.62 (0.28)
© 2010 UTC Fire & Security. Universal Input-Output Module Board
All rights reserved. SIGA-UIO6 0.56 (0.25)
UL listed cabinet for mounting UIO motherboards, red with
MFC-A white “FIRE” 8 inch H X 14 inch W X 3.5 inch D (203 mmH 7.0 (3.1)
X 356 mm W X 89 mm D)
05-18-11

EST Catalog u Speakers, Telephones
MEA
Field Configurable
pending
Ceiling Speaker
One or more patents pending.
Genesis Series

Genesis life safety and mass notification/emergency communica- • Unique low-profile design
tions (MNEC) ceiling speakers are small, compact, and attractive – Attractive appearance
audible emergency signaling devices. Protruding no more than – No visible mounting screws
one inch from the ceiling, Genesis speakers blend with any decor. – Available with white or red housings
Genesis notification appliances feature textured housings in archi- • Field configurable – no need to remove the device!
tecturally neutral white or eye-catching fire alarm red. – Select ¼, ½, 1, or 2 watt operation
– Switch setting remains visible even after the unit is installed
Genesis MNEC appliances offer emergency signaling with white
housings and optional ALERT housing labels. They are ideal for • Unparalleled performance
applications that require differentiation between life safety and – Loud 90 dBA output ensures clear, crisp audio
mass notification alerts. – 25 Vrms and 70 Vrms models available, all supplied with a
DC
Genesis ceiling speakers feature ¼ W to 2 W operation, which is blocking capacitor for audio circuit supervision
selectable with a conveniently-located switch. The wattage tap
setting remains clearly visible even after final installation, yet it is • Easy to install
locked in place to prevent movement after installation. – Fits all standard 4” square electrical boxes with plenty of
room behind the signal for extra wire – no extension ring or
All Genesis ceiling speakers include a DC blocking capacitor to trim plate needed
allow electrical supervision of the audio distribution circuit. Models – #18 - #12 AWG terminals – ideal for long runs, existing wiring
for 25 VRMS and 70 VRMS audio circuits are available. The speaker
with its sealed back construction is extra durable, is impervious to • Approved for public and private mode applications
moisture and provides improved audibility. – UL 1480-listed as life safety speaker
– UL/ULC listed for ceiling or wall use
• MNEC models available

Standards generally require that notification systems produce All models are intended for indoor ceiling or wall applications only.
signals a minimum of 15 dBA above the ambient sound pressure Speakers are flush mounted to a North-American 4” square elec-
level, or 5 dBA above the maximum sound pressure level having a trical box, 21/8” (54 mm) deep or a European 100 mm square box.
duration of 60 seconds, whichever is greater. This is measured 5
Genesis ceiling speakers simply unlatch and twist to open. This
feet (1.5 m) above the floor.
gains access to mounting screws. The shallow depth of Genesis
Doubling the distance from the signal to the ear will theoretically devices leaves ample room behind the signal for extra wiring.
cause a 6 dB reduction in the received sound pressure level. The Once installed with the cover in place, no mounting screws are
actual effect depends on the acoustic properties of materials in visible.
the space. Doubling the power output of a device (e.g.: a speaker
from 1 W to 2 W) will increase the sound pressure level by 3
dBA. A 3 dBA difference represents a barely noticeable change in
volume.
1 2
1/2
1/4
MNEC Applications
Genesis MNEC appliances bring the same high-performance life
safety features and unobtrusive design to mass notification ap-
plications. Available with optional ALERT housing labels, they are
ideal for applications that require differentiation between life safety
and mass notification alerts.
Application Notes - Canada

(Based in part on 1995 Canada National Building Code)
Edwards recommends that these speakers always be installed in
The signal sound pressure level shall not exceed 110 dBA in any accordance with the latest recognized edition of national and local
normally occupied area. The sound pressure level from an audible codes.
signal in a floor area used for occupancies other than residential
occupancies shall not be less than 10 dBA above ambient levels,
and never less than 65 dBA. In sleeping rooms the sound pres- Field Configuration
sure level from an audible signal shall not be less than 75 dBA Genesis ceiling speakers may be set for ¼, ½, 1, or 2 watt opera-
when any intervening doors between the device and the sleeping tion. Wattage may be changed by simply opening the device and
room are closed. sliding the switch to the desired setting. The speaker does not
have to be removed to change the output setting. The setting
remains visible through a small window on the front of the device
after the cover is closed.
Typical Sound Output (dBA) 1 2
Feet From Speaker

1/2
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
90°
82 88 88 82 Wattage switch Indicator
1/4
89 89
83 83
-75° 93 93 75°
84 96 84 Wiring
-60°
5ft (1.5m)
Radius 60° Field wiring terminals accommodate #18 to #12 AWG (0.75 mm²
to 2.5 mm²) wiring.
87 87
-45° 45°
90
10ft (3.05m)
-30° Radius 30°
-15° 15°
0°
Measured at 2 watts setting in anechoic chamber
Dimensions
6.8" dia.
(173 mm)
1.0"
(25 mm)

Sound Level Output *Sound level output notes:
dBA = Decibels, A-weighted
25V 25V 70V 70V
Wattage UL1480: Sound level output at 10 ft (3.05 m) measured in a
UL Rated* Typical UL Rated* Typical
¼W 80 dBA 80.7 dBA 80 dBA 81.1 dBA reverberant room using 400 to 4,000 Hz band limited pink noise.
½W 84 dBA 83.7 dBA 84 dBA 83.5 dBA ULC-S541: Meets or exceeds 85 dBA in an anechoic chamber
1W 87 dBA 87.1 dBA 87 dBA 87.2 dBA at 10 ft (3.05 m).
2W 90 dBA 90.1 dBA 91 dBA 90.2 dBA Directional characteristics: Within 6 dB of on-axis sound level
when measured 90° off-axis (horizontal).
Specifications
Textured UV stabilized, color impregnated engineered plastic. Exceeds 94V-0 UL flammability rating. Red and white models
Housing
available.
Wire connections Screw terminals: polarized inputs for speaker, #18 to #12 AWG (0.75 mm² to 2.5 mm²) wire size
Flush mount to North American 4-inch square electrical box, 2-1/8 (54 mm) inches deep,
Mounting
or 960A-4RF round flush box. No extension ring required. Suitable for indoor wall or ceiling applications.
Operating environment Indoor: 32-120° F (0-49° C) ambient temperature; 0-93% relative humidity.
Agency listings/approvals Meets or exceeds UL1480 Fifth Edition, ULC-S541, and CSFM (FM and MEA pending).
Input/Operating Voltage 25 Vrms (Model S2) or 70 Vrms (Model S7).
Speaker frequency response: 250-13,000 Hz. Optimized for voice intelligibility. 4-inch (102mm) mylar cone, sealed back
Speaker Cone
construction, rated for 8 watts, 8 ohm voice coil.
All speakers include field-selectable ¼, ½, 1, or 2 watt taps
Model Housing Marking Speaker Ship Wt. White Field Configurable
Ceiling Speakers may be
Life safety Appliances (c/w running man icon screen printed on housing) ordered with or without
GC-S2 White None optional FIRE marking.
GCF-S2 White FIRE 25 Volt Red speakers come with
GCFR-S2 Red FIRE 1.62 lb. FIRE marking. MNEC
GC-S7 White None (0.73 kg.) speakers are available with
GCF-S7 White FIRE 70 Volt white housing and optional
GCFR-S7 Red FIRE ALERT marking.
MNEC Appliances (no running man icon on housing)

GCWA-S2 White alert
25 Volt
GCWN-S2 white none 1.62 lb.
GCWA-S7 white alert (0.73 kg.)
70 Volt
GCWN-S7 white none

U.S.
T 888-378-2329
F 866-503-3996
Canada
Chubb Edwards
T 519 376 2430
F 519 376 7258
Southeast Asia
T : +65 6391 9300
F : +65 6391 9306
India
T : +91 80 4344 2000
F : +91 80 4344 2050

Australia
T +61 3 9239 1200
F +61 3 9239 1299
Europe
T +32 2 725 11 20
F +32 2 721 86 13
Latin America
T 305 593 4301
F 305 593 4300

05-18-11

Genesis Speakers
and Strobes
Genesis G4 Series MEA
PENDING
Patents pending

The Genesis line of life safety and mass notification/emergency • Unique low-profile design
communications (ECS/MNS) signals are the smallest, most – The most compact UL/ULC listed speaker-strobe available
compact audible-visible emergency signaling devices in the world. – Ultra-slim, protrudes a mere one inch from the wall
Protruding no more than one inch from the wall, Genesis speakers – Attractive appearance, no visible mounting screws
and speaker-strobes blend with any decor.
• Field configurable – no need to remove the device!
Life safety appliances feature textured housings in architecturally – ¼, ½, 1, or 2 watt operation and selectable candela
neutral white or traditional life safety red. output with convenient switches that remain visible even
after the unit is installed
ECS/MNS appliances offer emergency signaling with clear or
amber lenses, white housings, and optional ALERT housing labels. • ECS/MNS models available
They are ideal for applications that require differentiation between • Unparalleled performance
life safety and mass notification signals. – loud 90 dBA output ensures clear, crisp audio
Thanks to patented breakthrough technology, Genesis strobes do – Exclusive FullLight strobe technology produces the
not require bulky specular reflectors. Instead, an exclusive design industry’s most even light distribution
channels and conditions light to produce a highly controllable – Precision timing electronics meet tough new synchronizing
distribution pattern. standards for strobes when used with compatibile modules
– Optional field-configurable temporal strobe output
Speaker-strobes feature selectable candela output with a conven- – 25 Vrms and 70 Vrms models available, all supplied with a
iently-located switch on the bottom of the device. The candela DC blocking capacitor for audio circuit supervision
setting remains clearly visible even after final installation.
• Easy to install
All Genesis speakers include a DC blocking capacitor to allow – Fits all standard 4” square electrical boxes with plenty of
electrical supervision of the audio distribution circuit. The speaker room behind the signal for extra wire – no extension ring
with its sealed back construction provides extra durability and or trim plate needed
improved audibility. – #18 - #12 AWG terminals – ideal for long runs or using
existing wiring

Speaker Application Strobe Application
The suggested sound pressure level for each signaling zone Genesis clear-lensed strobes are UL 1971-listed for use indoors as
used with alert or alarm signals is a minimum of 15 dB above the wall-mounted public-mode notification appliances for the hearing
average ambient sound level or 5 dB above the maximum sound impaired. Prevailing codes require strobes to be used where ambi-
level having a duration ent noise conditions exceed specified levels, where occupants use
Typical Sound Output
of at least 60 seconds, Distribution dBA
hearing protection, and in areas of public accommodation. UL
whichever is greater. This Measured in anechoic chamber 1638-listed colored-lensed strobe lights are available for ECS/
is measured 5 feet (1.5 m) at two watts MNS applications. Consult with your Authority Having Jurisdiction
above the floor. for details.
Doubling the distance from 96 90 0°
All Genesis strobes meet UL synchronization requirements (within
5ft (1.5m)
the signal to the ear will Radius 10 milliseconds over a two-hour period) when used with a syn-
theoretically cause a 6dB chronization source. Synchronization is important in order to avoid
reduction in the received 93
10ft (3.05m) epileptic sensitivity.
Radius
sound pressure level. The 90
actual effect depends on 88
89
Field Configuration
the acoustic properties Genesis speakers may be set for ¼, ½, 1, or 2 watt operation. The
of materials in the space. 87
wattage setting is visible through a small window on the bottom
Doubling the power output of the device and is changed by simply sliding the switch until the
84
of a device (e.g.: a speaker desired setting appears in the window. The speaker does not have
from 1W to 2W) will in-
83
82
90° 75° 60° 45° to be removed to change the wattage.
crease the sound pressure
Genesis Series Cone Speaker/strobe
level by 3dBA. Genesis speaker-strobes feature selectable candela output. The
output setting is visible through a small window on the bottom of
the device and is changed by simply sliding the switch until the
desired setting appears in the window. The speaker-strobe does
not have to be removed to change the output.
Use the Candela Switch and the To change strobe to temporal

Wattage switch to set desired operation. (private mode) cut JP1
All models are intended for indoor wall mounted applications only.
Speakers and speaker-strobes are flush mounted to a North- JP1
15
American 4” square electrical box, 21/8” (54 mm) deep or a Euro-
1
Bottom View
pean 100 mm square box. Signals may be surface mounted to a Candela switch Wattage switch
Genesis surface-mount box (see ordering information for details).

Two tabs at the top of the signal unlock the cover to facilitate Genesis speaker-strobes may also be configured for temporal
mounting. The shallow depth of Genesis devices leaves room flash. This battery-saving feature is intended for private mode
behind the signal for extra wiring. Once installed with the cover in signaling only. To set the device for temporal flash, snip the circuit
place, no mounting screws are visible. board as shown in the Jumper Locations diagram above.
Standard electric box
2. ECS/MNS Applications
(54 125"
m)
mm
) Genesis ECS/MNS appliances bring the same high-performance life
7m
5"
(12 safety features and unobtrusive design to mass notification appli-
cations. Standard models are available with clear or amber lenses
and optional ALERT housing labels, they are ideal for applications
that require differentiation between life safety and mass notifica-
Grounding plate tion alerts. Appliances with red, green or blue lenses are available.
Contact Edwards Customer Service for details.
6.5" (165 mm)
Optional Color-matched
Surface mount box
Edwards recommends that these speaker-strobes always be in-

stalled in accordance with the latest recognized edition of national
and local codes. Refer to installation sheet for mounting height
information.
WARNING: These devices will not operate without electrical power.

As fires frequently cause power interruptions, we suggest you discuss
further safeguards with your local fire protection specialist.

Light output Lens Switch
Switch Switch Switch
Rating Position Position Position
Per cent of UL rating versus angle Color Position A
B C D
% Of Candela H Spec. Amber UL 1638 110 cd 75 cd 30 cd 15 cd
% Of Candela V Spec.
-15 -10
-5
0
5 10 15
Amber UL 1971* 88 cd 60 cd 24 cd 12 cd
-20 20
-30
-25 25
30 Clear UL 1971 110 cd 75 cd 30 cd 15 cd
-35 35
-40 40
-45 45 * Equivalent Rating
-50 50
Wiring
-55 55
-60 60
-65 65
-70 70
Field wiring is connected to Genesis signals with terminals that ac-
commodate #18 to #12 AWG (0.75 mm² to 2.5 mm²) wiring.
-75 75
-80 80
-85 85
-90 90
0
0
90
90
80
50
50
80
70
40
30
20
10
10
20
30
40
70
100
100
60
60
95
85
75
65
55
45
35
25
15
15
25
35
45
55
65
75
85
95
Minium UL required candela light output
UL name plate maximum operating current (RMS-mA)

“110” or
Cd rating “15” or “A” “30” or “B” “75” or “C”
“D”
16 Vdc 96 130 239 294
16 Vfwr 120 169 329 375
Typical current, milliamps - average (RMS)

“110” or
Cd rating “15” or “A” “30” or “B” “75” or “C”
“D”
20 Vdc 65 (78) 93 (101) 182 (188) 238 (245)
24 Vdc 55 (65) 78 (86) 153 (159) 196 (203)
31 Vdc 45 (53) 63 (69) 120 (124) 151 (157)
20 Vfwr 56 (106) 79 (147) 147 (264) 197 (342)
24 Vfwr 50 (95) 68 (130) 121 (225) 155 (283)
27 Vfwr 44 (84) 60 (115) 107 (200) 137 (251)
Light output switch settings for UL 1971 listed models are selectable by numeric candela
value. ECS/MNS appliances are selectable by A, B, C, or D designations.
Specifications
Genesis Speakers and Speaker-Strobes
Housing Red or white textured UV stabilized, color impregnated engineered plastic.
Dimensions Height: 6.5” (165 mm). Width: 5” (127 mm). Depth to wall: 1” (25 mm).
Mounting Flush: North-American 4” square box, 2 1/8” (54 mm) deep.
(indoor wall mount only) Surface: model G4B (white) or G4RB (red) surface mount box.
Screw terminals: separate polarized inputs for speaker and strobe, #18 to #12 AWG (0.75 mm² to 2.5 mm²) wire
Wire Connections
size
Operating environment 32-120° F (0-49° C) ambient temperature; 0-93% relative humidity.
UL 1971, UL 1638, UL 1480, ULC S526, ULC S541, CSFM, MEA (FM pending)
Agency Listings
(All models comply with ADA Code of Federal Regulation Chapter 28 Part 36 Final Rule.)
Speakers
Input/Operating Volts 25 VRMS or 70 VRMS. See ordering information.
Speaker Taps/Output* 2 W = 89 dBA; 1 W = 86 dBA; ½ W = 83 dBA; ¼ W = 80 dBA
Speaker frequency response: 250 to 5,000 Hz.
Speaker Cone
Optimized for voice intelligibility. 4-inch (102mm) mylar cone, sealed back construction.
Strobes
UL 1971, ULC S526: selectable 15 cd, 30 cd, 75 cd, or 110 cd output
Clear Strobe Output Rating UL 1971: 15 cd (fixed 15/75 cd models)
UL 1638, ULCS526: 75 cd (fixed 15/75 cd models)
Amber Strobe Output Rating UL 1638: 13 (D), 26 (C), 65 (B), 95 (A)
Strobe Operating Voltage 16 - 33 Vdc Regulated, 16-33 V Full wave rectified (UL Voltage Designations “Regulated 24” and “24 fwr”)
Strobe Flash Rate One flash per second.
All strobes: one flash per second (fps) within 200 milliseconds over 30 minutes on common circuit.
Strobe Flash Synchronization All strobes: Synchronization source required to comply with UL 1971 synchronization standard.
Temporal setting (private mode only): synchronized to temporal output on the same circuit.
SIGA-CC1S, SIGA-MCC1S, SIGA-CC2A, SIGA-MCC2A, G1M-RM
Synchronization Sources
BPS6A, BPS10A, APS6A, APS10A, iO64, iO500, Fireshield Plus 3, 5 and 10 zone.
Strobe Lens Material Polycarbonate
* Measured in reverberant room using 400-4,000 Hz band limited pink noise per UL 1480.

Light output switch settings for UL 1971 listed models are selectable by numeric candela value.
ECS/MNS appliances are selectable by A, B, C, or D designations.
All speaker-strobes include field-selectable ¼, ½, 1, or 2 watt taps
Detection & alarm since 1872 Model Housing Marking Lens Strobe Speaker Ship Wt.
U.S. Life safety Appliances (c/w running man icon screen printed on housing)
T 888 378 2329 G4-S2 White None
F 866 503 3996
G4R-S2 Red None
Canada G4F-S2 White FIRE
Selectable
Chubb Edwards G4RF-S2 Red FIRE
T 519 376 2430 15, 30, 75, or 25 Volt
G4-S2VM White None
F 519 376 7258 110 cd
G4R-S2VM Red None
Southeast Asia G4F-S2VM White FIRE
T : +65 6391 9300 G4RF-S2VM Red FIRE
F : +65 6391 9306
G4-S7 White None 1.5 lbs.
Clear
India G4R-S7 Red None (0.68 kg)
T : +91 80 4344 2000 G4F-S7 White FIRE
F : +91 80 4344 2050 Selectable
G4RF-S7 Red FIRE
15, 30, 75, or
G4-S7VM White None
Australia 110 cd 70 Volt
T +61 3 9239 1200 G4R-S7VM Red None
F +61 3 9239 1299 G4F-S7VM White FIRE
G4RF-S7VM Red FIRE
Europe
T +32 2 725 11 20 G4F-S7V1575 White FIRE
15/75 cd¹
F +32 2 721 86 13 G4RF-S7V1575 Red FIRE
Latin America ECS/MNS Appliances (no running man icon on housing)

T 305 593 4301
G4WA-S2VMA Alert Amber
F 305 593 4300
G4WA-S2VMC Alert Clear Selectable
utcfireandsecurity.com G4WN-S2VMA None Amber A, B, C or D
25 Volt
© 2010 UTC Fire & Security. G4WN-S2VMC None Clear
All rights reserved. G4WA-S2 Alert None
Speaker only
G4WN-S2 None None 1.5 lbs.
White
G4WA-S7VMA Alert Amber (0.68 kg)
G4WA-S7VMC Alert Clear Selectable
G4WN-S7VMA None Amber A, B, C or D
70 Volt
G4WN-S7VMC None Clear
G4WA-S7 Alert None
Speaker only
G4WN-S7 None None
Accessories
G1M-RM Synchronization Output Module (1-gang) 0.2 (0.1)
SIGA-CC1S Intelligent Synchronization Output Module (2-gang) 0.5 (0.23)
SIGA-MCC1S Synchronization Output Module (Plug-in UIO) 0.18 (0.08)
G4B Surface mount box, white 0.7 (0.32)
G4RB Surface mount box, red 0.7 (0.32) 05-18-11

Field Configurable
Ceiling Speaker
-strobes
Genesis Series
MEA

Genesis life safety and mass notification/emergency communica- • Field configurable – no need to remove the device!
tions (ECS/MNS) ceiling speaker-strobes are small, compact, and – Select ¼, ½, 1, or 2 watt operation
attractive audible-visible emergency signaling devices. Protruding – 15/30/75/95 cd and 95/115/150/177 cd clear strobe lens
no more than 1.6" (41 mm) from the ceiling, Genesis speaker- models available
strobes blend with any decor. – Switch settings remain visible even after the unit is installed
Life safety appliances feature textured housings in architecturally • ECS/MNS models available
neutral white or eye-catching life safety red. – 13/26/65/82 and 82/100/130/155 (1971 equivalent) amber
lens models available
Genesis ECS/MNS appliances offer emergency signaling with
clear or amber lenses, white housings, and optional ALERT hous- • Unique low-profile design
ing labels. They are ideal for applications that require differentiation – 30 per cent slimmer profile than comparable signals
between life safety and mass notification alerts. – Available with white or red housings
Thanks to patented breakthrough technology, Edwards Gen- • Unparalleled performance

esis strobes do not require bulky specular reflectors and lenses. – loud 90 dBA output ensures clear, crisp audio
Instead, an exclusive cavity design conditions light to produce a – Precision timing electronics meet tough synchronizing
highly controlled distribution pattern. FullLight strobe technology standards for strobes when used with compatible modules
produces a smooth light distribution pattern without the spikes – 25 VRMS and 70 VRMS models available, all supplied with a DC
and voids characteristic of specular reflectors. This ensures the blocking capacitor for audio circuit supervision
entire coverage area receives consistent illumination from the • Easy to install
strobe flash. – Fits all standard 4" square electrical boxes with plenty of
Depending on the model, Genesis clear-lens speaker-strobes room for extra wire – no extension ring or trim plate needed
feature 15 to 95, or 95 to 177 candela output (see ordering infor- – #18 - #12 AWG terminals – ideal for long runs, existing wiring
mation), which is selectable with a conveniently-located switch. The • Approved for public and private mode applications
candela output setting remains clearly visible even after final instal- – UL 1971-listed as signaling devices for the hearing impaired
lation, yet it is locked in place to prevent unauthorized movement – UL 1638-listed as protective visual signaling appliances
after installation. – UL 1480-listed as life safety speaker
– UL/ULC listed for ceiling or wall use

Strobe Application Wiring
Genesis strobes are UL 1971 or 1638 listed for indoor use. Prevailing Field wiring terminals accommodate #18 to #12 AWG (0.75 mm²
codes require strobes to be used where ambient noise conditions to 2.5 mm²) wiring.
exceed specified levels, where occupants use hearing protection,
and in areas of public accommodation. Consult with your Authority
Having Jurisdiction for details.
All Genesis strobes exceed UL synchronization requirements
(within 10 milliseconds over a two-hour period) when used with a
synchronization source. Synchronization for multiple strobe lights
in a single field of view is required.
Speaker Application
The suggested sound pressure level for each signaling zone used
with alert or alarm signals is a minimum of 15 dB above the aver-
age ambient sound level or 5 dB above the maximum sound level
having a duration of at least 60 seconds, whichever is greater. This
is measured 5 feet (1.5 m) above the floor.
Doubling the distance from the signal to the ear will theoretically
cause a 6 dB reduction in the received sound pressure level. The
actual effect depends on the acoustic properties of materials in All models are intended for
the space. Doubling the power output of a device (e.g.: a speaker indoor ceiling or wall applica-
from 1 W to 2 W) will increase the sound pressure level by 3 tions only. Speaker-strobes
dBA. A 3 dBA difference represents a barely noticeable change in are mounted to a flush
volume. North-American 4" square
electrical box, 21/8" (54 mm)
Combination audible/visual signals must be installed in accor- deep.
dance with guidelines established for strobes.
Genesis ceiling speaker-
strobes simply unlatch and
ECS/MNS Applications hinge down to open. This
Genesis ECS/MNS appliances bring the same high-performance life gains access to mounting screws
safety features and unobtrusive design to mass notification applica- and the selectable candela wattage BOX
tions. Available as standard units with clear or amber lenses with tap switches. The shallow depth of
optional ALERT markings, thy are ideal for applications that require Genesis devices leaves ample room 11/16" STROBE
differentiation between life safety and ECS/MNS signals. Units are
Center of Box
behind the signal for extra wir-

also available (special order) with red, blue or green lenses. ing. Once installed with the cover Center of ceiling tile
or speaker/strobe
in place, no mounting screws are

visible.
Installation Note:
Dimensions When installed, these devices are not
8.3" dia. centered on the electrical box. Make
(211 mm) sure boxes are mounted to compensate for this difference. Use the mount-
ing template provided with installation sheet 3100614.
1.0"
(25 mm)
0.60"(15 mm)
Field Configuration Candela switch Wattage switch
Genesis ceiling speaker-
strobes may be set for ¼, ½,
1/4
95
Sound Level Output

75
1, or 2 watt operation. De-

1/2
30
2
15
pending on the model, Gen-

Wattage 25V 25V 70V 70V esis ceiling speaker-strobes Indicator Indicator
have multi-candela output
UL Rated* Typical UL Rated* Typical
(see ordering information).
¼W 80 dBA 80.7 dBA 80 dBA 81.1 dBA Output settings are changed by simply opening the device and
½W 84 dBA 83.7 dBA 84 dBA 83.5 dBA sliding the switches to the desired settings. The speaker-strobe
does not have to be removed to change the output settings. The
1W 87 dBA 87 .1 dBA 87 dBA 87.2 dBA
settings remain visible through small windows on the front of the
2W 90 dBA 90.1 dBA 91 dBA 90.2 dBA device after the cover is closed.
*Sound level output notes: dBA = Decibels, A-weighted. UL1480: Sound level
output at 10 ft (3.05 m) measured in a reverberant room using 400 to 4,000 Hz band
limited pink noise. ULC-S541: Meets or exceeds 85 dBA in an anechoic chamber at
10 ft (3.05 m). Directional characteristics: Within 6 dB of on-axis sound level when
measured 90° off-axis (horizontal).

Typical Sound Output (dBA) Light output - (effective cd)
Feet From Speaker Percentage of rated output
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
82 88 88 82 90° 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
90°
89 89
83 83
-75° 93 93 75°
-75° 75°
84 96 84
5ft (1.5m)
-60° Radius 60°
87 87 -60° 60°
-45° 45°
-45° 45°
Percent of UL
90
rating versus
10ft (3.05m)
-30° Radius 30°
-30° 30°
angle
-15° 15°
0° -15° 15°
0°
Measured at 2 watts setting in anechoic chamber
Angle
Horizontal and vertical outputs reflect the same pattern.
Current Draw
Notes
UL Nameplate Rating UL Nameplate Rating (high cd output mod-
1. Light output switch settings for UL 1971 listed
els)
models are selectable by numeric candela
See "15" or "30" or "75" or "B" "95" or "A" "95" or "115" or "150" or "177" or value. ECS/MNS appliances are selectable by
note 1 "D" "C" "D" "C" "B" "A" A, B, C, or D designations.
RMS RMS RMS RMS RMS RMS RMS RMS 2. Current values are shown in mA.
16 Vdc 109 151 281 318 330 392 502 565

16 Vfwr 131 194 379 437 432 518 643 693
Typical Current Typical Current (high cd output models)

See "15" or "30" or "75" or "B" "95" or "A" 95 cd 115 cd 150 cd 177 cd
note 1 "D" "C"
RMS RMS RMS RMS RMS RMS RMS RMS
16 Vdc 94 140 273 325 333 392 499 551
20 Vdc 74 108 205 244 259 303 378 429
24 Vdc 63 90 168 194 212 245 306 342
33 Vdc 48 70 124 139 155 180 211 236
16 Vfwr 126 187 368 403 484 570 673 724
20 Vfwr 108 156 281 333 380 438 537 604
24 Vfwr 97 139 240 270 318 361 434 484
33 Vfwr 89 119 197 214 245 269 308 338
Specifications
Housing Textured UV stabilized, color impregnated engineered Strobe
plastic. Exceeds 94V-0 UL flammability rating. Red and
Strobe out- UL 1971, UL 1638, ULC S526: selectable 15/30/75/95
white models available.
put rating cd (VM models) and 95/115/150/177 cd (VMH models)
Mounting Flush mount to North American 4-inch square electrical
Strobe GC-S2VM/-S7VM series speaker-strobes: non-coded,
box, 2-1/8 (54 mm) inches deep, or 960A-4RF round
operating filtered 16-33 Vdc or unfiltered 16-33 Vdc FWR
flush box. No extension ring required. Suitable for indoor
voltage
wall or ceiling applications.
Strobe flash GC-S2VM/-S7VM series speaker-strobes: one flash per
Wire con- Screw terminals: polarized inputs for speaker, #18 to #12
rate second synchronized with optional G1M Genesis Signal
nections AWG (0.75 mm² to 2.5 mm²) wire size
Master indefinitely within 10 milliseconds. Temporal set-
Operating Indoor: 32-120° F (0-49° C) ambient temperature; 0-93% ting (private mode only): synchronized to temporal output
environment relative humidity. of Genesis audible signals on same circuit
Agency Meets ULC-S541, year 2004 UL requirements for Synchroni- Meets or exceeds UL 1971 requirements. Maximum
listings/ standards UL1638 and UL1971, FM, MEA, CSFM, and zation allowed resistance between any two devices is 20 Ohms.
approvals complies with UL1480 Fifth Edition. All speaker-strobes Refer to specifications for the synchronization control
comply with ADA Code of Federal Regulation Chapter module, this strobe, and the control panel to determine
28 Part 36 Final Rule. allowed wire resistance.
Speaker SIGA-CC1S, SIGA-MCC1S, SIGA-CC2A, SIGA-MCC2A,
Synchro-
G1M-RM
Input/Oper- 25 Vrms (Model GC-S2VM) or 70 Vrms (Model GC- nization
BPS6A, BPS10A, APS6A, APS10A, iO64, iO500,
ating Volts S7VM). Sources
Fireshield Plus 3, 5 and 10 zone.
Lens Optical grade polycarbonate

Hous- Mark-
Model Lens Strobe Speaker Ship Wt.
Detection & alarm since 1872 ing ing
T 888 378 2329 GC-S2VM White None Selectable
F 866 503 3996
GCF-S2VM White FIRE 15, 30, 75, or 95 cd
Canada GC-S2VMH White None Selectable High Output 25 Volt
Chubb Edwards 95, 115, 150,
GCF-S2VMH White FIRE
T 519 376 2430 or 177 cd
F 519 376 7258 2.25 lb.
GC-S7VM White None Clear
Selectable (1.0 kg.)
Southeast Asia GCF-S7VM White FIRE
15, 30, 75, or 95 cd
T : +65 6391 9300 GCFR-S7VM Red FIRE
70 Volt
F : +65 6391 9306 GC-S7VMH White None Selectable High Output
95, 115, 150,
India GCF-S7VMH White FIRE
or 177 cd
T : +91 80 4344 2000
F : +91 80 4344 2050
ECS/MNS Appliances (no running man icon on housing)
Australia GCWA-S2VMA ALERT Amber
T +61 3 9239 1200 GCWA-S2VMC ALERT Clear Selectable
F +61 3 9239 1299 A, B, C or D
GCWN-S2VMA NONE Amber
Europe GCWN-S2VMC None Clear
25 Volt
T +32 2 725 11 20 GCWA-S2VMHA ALERT Amber
F +32 2 721 86 13 GCWA-S2VMHC ALERT Clear Selectable High Output
GCWN-S2VMHA None Amber A, B, C or D
Latin America
T 305 593 4301 GCWN-S2VMHC None Clear 2.25 lb.
White
F 305 593 4300 GCWA-S7VMA ALERT Amber (1.0 kg.)
GCWA-S7VMC ALERT Clear Selectable
GCWN-S7VMA None Amber A, B, C or D
© 2010 UTC Fire & Security. GCWN-S7VMC None Clear
70 Volt
GCWA-S7VMHA ALERT Amber
GCWA-S7VMHC ALERT Clear Selectable High Output
GCWN-S7VMHA None Amber A, B, C or D
GCWN-S7VMHC None Clear
Accessories WARNING: These devices will not operate

without electrical power. As fires frequently
Synchronization Output 0.2 cause power interruptions, further safe-
G1M-RM
Module (1-gang) (0.1) guards such as backup power supplies
Intelligent Synchronization 0.5 may be required.
SIGA-CC1S
Output Module (2-gang) (0.23)
SIGA- Synchronization Output 0.18 Edwards recommends that these speaker-
MCC1S Module (Plug-in UIO) (0.08) strobes always be installed in accordance
with the latest recognized edition of national
All speaker-strobes include field- and local codes.
selectable ¼, ½, 1, or 2 watt taps
05-18-11

Outdoor Rated
Speakers and
Strobes
Genesis WG4 Series
Patents pending

Genesis WG4 Series speakers and speaker-strobe appliances • Outdoor and indoor rated
are among the most versatile emergency appliances of their kind.
• Low-profile design
Rated for indoor or outdoor use, they are suitable for a wide range
of wet and harsh environments with a listed operating temperature • Wall or ceiling mount
range of as low as -31°F to as high as 151°F (-35°C to 66°C). • Room-side wiring accepts 18 to 12 AWG (0.75 to 2.5 mm2)
Field-configurable light and sound output settings add to their on- • Wide operating temperature range
site flexibility, while optional FIRE or ALERT markings and colored
lenses make them ideal for either emergency communications/ • Field-selectable speaker wattage, voltage, and strobe candela
mass notification (ECS/MNS) or fire alarm applications. settings
These appliances are suitable for indoor and outdoor applications, • Field-configurable temporal strobe output option
and are ideal for challenging conditions such as parking garages • Clear and amber lenses available
and process areas. They are listed for mounting on the ceiling or
the wall, and thanks to an ingenious full backplane sealing gasket, • Fully-compatible with Genesis synchronization protocols
can be installed to recessed (in-the-pour/block) electrical boxes. • Standard and high-output strobe intensities
WG4 signals also mount to suitable surface boxes served by race-
• Speaker only and Speaker/Strobe appliance options
ways. Optional color-matched trim skirts provide a clean, finished
appearance. All appliance wiring is accomplished room-side for
easy installation.
WG4 Series appliances feature highly intelligible and efficient
mylar-cone loudspeakers. These are dual-voltage (25.2V or
70.7V), and have field-selectable output taps ranging from 80.8
dBA to 90.0 dBA. The multi-candela strobes are available with
clear or amber lenses and in two output categories – standard and
high-output. They are precision-timed to meet UL 1971 synchro-
nization standards, and field-configurable for one of four candela
intensities. Wattage and candela settings are viewable even after
installation through an innovative sealed viewport display.

Speaker Application x WG4 signals are rated for
l bo
The suggested sound pressure level for each signaling zone used ica outdoor use and are
l e ctr ket
with alert or alarm signals is a minimum of 15 dB above the aver-
E
Ga
s
ls kirt suitable for indoor or
a
tion te
age ambient sound level or 5 dB above the maximum sound level Op ckpla outdoor applications on
Ba ver
having a duration of at least Typical Sound Output t co walls or ceilings. For
n
60 seconds, whichever is Distribution dBA Fro surface-mounting in
Measured in anechoic chamber
greater. This is measured 5 r 6 ) outdoor or wet applica-
at two watts ve (x
feet (1.5 m) above the floor. Co ews tions, appliances must be
s c r
mounted to an Edwards
Doubling the distance from 96 90 0°
449 electrical box. In dry
the signal to the ear will 5ft (1.5m)
conditions, they are
theoretically cause a 6dB Radius
compatible with standard
reduction in the received 10ft (3.05m) 4-inch by 1½-inch deep
sound pressure level. The 93 Radius
electrical boxes. When
actual effect depends on 90
89 using the optional
the acoustic properties of
88
WG4WTS or WG4RTS trim skirt, a 449 or 2-1/8" deep box must

materials in the space. Dou- 87
be used.
bling the power output of a
device (e.g.: a speaker from 84 The Genesis WG4 Speaker-Strobe may be wall- or ceiling-mount-
1W to 2W) will increase the 83 ed, and may be placed in one of four positions: strobe above,
82
sound pressure level by 90° 75° 60° 45° strobe below, and strobe to either side. The shallow depth of
3dBA. Genesis Series Cone Speaker/strobe Genesis devices leaves room behind the appliance for extra wiring.
Strobe Application Field Configuration

Genesis clear-lensed strobes are UL 1971-listed for use indoors Genesis WG4 speakers may be set to 70- or 25-Volt operation,
as wall- or ceiling-mounted public-mode notification appliances for and for ¼, ½, 1, or 2 watt operation. The wattage setting (repre-
the hearing impaired, and UL 1638-listed for outdoor applications. sented by the letters Z,Y, X, and T) is changed by removing the
Prevailing codes require strobes to be used where ambient noise cover and simply sliding the S1 switch until the desired setting ap-
conditions exceed specified levels, where occupants use hearing pears. The setting remains visible through a small window on the
protection, and in areas of public accommodation. UL 1638-listed front of the device after the cover is installed. The voltage setting
colored lens strobe lights are available for ECS/MNS and outdoor (70V or 25V) is toggled at S3. This setting is not visible after the
applications. cover is replaced.
Visible appliance synchronization is required to avoid causing Genesis WG4 speaker-strobes also feature selectable candela
issues with people who have Photosensitive Epilepsy (PSE). Noti- output. The actual light output for a given selection depends on
fication appliance synchronization is also generally required when the color of the strobe lens and whether it is a high output model
more than one strobe appliance are in the same field of view from or a standard output model. Refer to the specification tables for
any one location. All Genesis strobes meet UL synchronization corresponding settings. The candela setting (represented by the
requirements (within 10 milliseconds over a two-hour period) when letters D, C, B, and A) is changed by removing the cover and
used with a synchronization source. simply sliding the S2 switch until the desired setting appears. The
setting remains visible through a small window on the front of the
device after the cover is installed.
ECS/MNS Application SPKR - SPKR -
Genesis ECS/MNS appliances bring the SPKR + SPKR +
STROBE - STROBE -
same high-performance life safety features STROBE + STROBE +
S3: Speaker
and unobtrusive design to mass notification voltage
applications. Standard models are available
with clear or amber lenses and optional
ALERT housing labels, they are ideal for
applications that require differentiation
between life safety and mass notification
S1:
alerts. Appliances with red, green or blue wattage
lenses are also available. Contact Edwards
Customer Service for details. S2: JP1: Strobe temporal
Candela mode selection
WARNING: These devices will not operate without electrical power.

As fires frequently cause power interruptions, we suggest you discuss
Genesis speaker-strobes may also be configured for temporal
further safeguards with your local fire protection specialist. flash. This power-saving feature is intended for private mode
signaling only. To set the device for temporal flash, snip the jumper
Edwards recommends that these devices always be installed in at JP1.
accordance with the latest recognized edition of national and local
codes. Refer to the appropriate codes and standards for mounting
height information.

Specifications Light output
Operating voltage 0
Speaker 25 VRMS or 70 VRMS, switch selectable -15 -10
-5 5 10 15
-20 20
Default 70 VRMS -25 25
Strobe 24 VDC, 24 VFWR nominal Angle -35

-30 30
35
-40 40
Supervisory voltage 30 V max. -45 45
-50 50
Speaker response 400 to 4,000 Hz -55 55
Wire size 12 to 18 AWG (0.75 to 2.50 mm²) -60 60
-65 65
SIGA-CC1S, SIGA-MCC1S, SIGA-CC2A,
Compatible strobe -70 70
SIGA-MCC2A, G1M-RM, BPS6A, BPS10A,
synchronization -75 75
APS6A, APS10A, 3X-SFS1, iO64, iO500, -80 80
sources
Fireshield Plus 3, 5 and 10 zone. -85 85
-90 90
0
0
90
90
80
50
50
80
100
70
40
30
20
10
10
20
30
40
70
60
60
100
95
85
75
65
55
45
35
25
15
15
25
35
45
55
65
75
85
95
Compatible Wet: Model 449 (WG4 trim skirt recommended)
electrical boxes Dry: 4" square by 1-1/2" deep box when used UL off-axis candela requirements as a percent of the UL rated output
without a trim skirt. When trim skirt is used,
box must be 4" square by 2-1/8" deep.
Operating environment Wet Strobe Switch Position
Temperature -31 to 151 °F (-35 to 66 °C) Indoor rating
Relative humidity 0 to 95% noncondensing per UL 1971 (candela) A B C D
Lens Clear 87 70 29 15
Sound level output (dBA) Standard Color
Output Amber* 62 59 25 13
Wattage Switch Position 25 V 70 V
Models VDC 319 167 144 106
2W T 90.0 89.7
(-SVMx) Current
1W X 87.1 86.9
FWR 386 347 178 120
½W Y 84.0 83.9
¼W Z 80.8 80.8 Lens Clear 161 147 123 102
dBA = Decibels, A-weighted. High Color
Output Amber* 130 125 101 84
UL 1480: Sound level output at 10 ft. (3.05 m) measured in a reverberant
room using 400 to 4,000 Hz band-limited pink noise. Models VDC 495 494 390 324
(-SVMHx) Current
FWR 646 607 487 412
Wiring * UL 1971 Equivalent candela value
Field wiring is connected to Genesis signals with terminals that ac- Strobe Switch Position
commodate #18 to #12 AWG (0.75 mm² to 2.5 mm²) wiring. Outdoor rating
per UL 1638 (candela) A B C D
Standard Color
Models VDC 319 167 144 106
(-SVMx) Current
FWR 386 347 178 120
High Color
Models VDC 495 494 390 324
(-SVMHx) Current
FWR 646 607 487 412
* UL 1971 Equivalent candela value


WG4RF WG4RF WG4WF WG4WF WG4RN WG4RN WG4WN WG4WN WG4WN WG4WA WG4WA
U.S. -S -SVMC -S -SVMC -S -SVMC -S -SVMC -SVMA -SVMA -SVMC
T 888 378 2329
F 866 503 3996 All speakers include field-selectable ¼, ½, 1, or 2 watt taps and selectable 25V or 75V operation.
Canada
Model Housing Marking Lens Strobe Output* Ship Wt.
Chubb Edwards
T 519 376 2430
F 519 376 7258
Life safety Appliances
WG4RF-SVMC Red
Southeast Asia FIRE
WG4WF-SVMC White Selectable
T : +65 6391 9300
F : +65 6391 9306 standard output
WG4RN-SVMC Red 15/29/70/87 cd
None
India WG4WN-SVMC White Clear
T : +91 80 4344 2000
F : +91 80 4344 2050 WG4RF-SVMHC Red
FIRE Selectable
1.5 lbs.
WG4WF-SVMHC White high output
Australia (0.68 kg)
102/123/147/161 cd
T +61 3 9239 1200 WG4RN-SVMHC Red None
F +61 3 9239 1299
WG4RF-S Red
FIRE
Europe WG4WF-S White
T +32 2 725 11 20 Speaker Only
F +32 2 721 86 13 WG4RN-S Red
None
WG4WN-S White
Latin America
T 305 593 4301
F 305 593 4300 ECS/MNS Appliances
utcfireandsecurity.com WG4WA-SVMA ALERT Selectable
Amber standard output
© 2011 UTC Fire & Security. WG4WN-SVMA None 13/25/59/62 cd
WG4WA-SVMC Clear 15/29/70/87 cd
ALERT
WG4WA-SVMHA Selectable high output 1.5 lbs.
White Amber
84/101/125/130 cd (0.68 kg)
WG4WN-SVMHA
None
WG4WN-SVMHC Selectable high output
Clear
WG4WA-SVMHC 102/123/147/161 cd
ALERT
WG4WA-S Speaker Only
* See light output tables for more specific strobe values.
Accessories
WG4WTS Surface Skirt for Genesis WG4 appliance family, white.
WG4RTS Surface Skirt for Genesis WG4 appliance family, red.
WG4GSKT Replacement Mounting Gasket
449 Surface mount box, outdoor rated
08-08-11

EST Catalog u Strobes, Horns, Bells, Chimes
Field Configurable
Ceiling Strobes
Genesis Series
MEA
Pending
One or more patents pending.

Genesis life
��
safety and mass notification/emergency communica- • Field configurable – no need to remove the device!
tions (ECS/MNS) ceiling strobes are small, compact, and attractive – 15/30/75/95 cd and 95/115/150/177 cd clear strobe lens
visible emergency signaling devices. Protruding no more than 1.6” models available
(41 mm) from the ceiling, Genesis strobes blend with any decor. – Switch settings remain visible even after the unit is installed
Thanks to patented breakthrough technology, Edwards Gen- • ECS/MNS models available
esis strobes do not require bulky specular reflectors and lenses. – 13/26/65/82 and 82/100/130/155 (1971 equivalent) amber
Instead, an exclusive cavity design conditions light to produce lens models available
a highly controlled distribution pattern. Significant development • Unique low-profile design
efforts employing this new technology have given rise to a new – 30 per cent slimmer profile than comparable signals
benchmark in strobe performance – FullLight technology. – Attractive appearance
FullLight strobe technology produces a smooth light distribution – No visible mounting screws
pattern without the spikes and voids characteristic of specular – Available with white or red housings
reflectors. This ensures the entire coverage area receives consis- • Easy to install
tent illumination from the strobe flash. As a result, Genesis strobes – Fits all standard 4” square electrical boxes with plenty of
with FullLight technology go well beyond the minimum UL-required room behind the signal for extra wire – no extension ring or
“cross” pattern, significantly exceeding UL-1971 and ULC-S526 trim plate needed
light distribution requirements. – #18 to #12 AWG terminals – ideal for long runs or existing wiring
Depending on the model, clear lens Genesis ceiling strobes fea- • Unparalleled performance
ture 15 to 95, or 95 to 177 candela output (see ordering informa- – Exclusive FullLight strobe technology produces the industry’s
tion), which is selectable with a conveniently-located switch. The most even light distribution
candela output setting remains clearly visible even after final instal- – Precision timing electronics meet tough synchronizing
lation, yet it is locked in place to prevent unauthorized movement standards for strobes
after installation. – Low current draw minimizes system overhead
Genesis ECS/MNS appliances offer emergency signaling with • Approved for public and private mode applications
clear or amber lenses and with optional ALERT housing labels. – UL 1971-listed as signaling devices for the hearing impaired
They are ideal for applications that require differentiation between – UL 1638-listed as protective visual signaling appliances
life safety and mass notification alerts. – UL/ULC listed for ceiling or wall use

Application Dimensions
Genesis strobes are UL 1971 or 1638 listed for indoor use. Prevailing 6.8" dia.
codes require strobes to be used where ambient noise conditions (173 mm)
exceed specified levels, where occupants use hearing protection,
1.0"
and in areas of public accommodation. Consult with your Authority (25 mm)
Having Jurisdiction for details.
All Genesis strobes exceed UL synchronization requirements 0.60"(15 mm)
synchronization source. Synchronization for multiple strobe lights
in a single field of view is required.
ECS/MNS Applications
Genesis ECS/MNS appliances bring the same high-performance life Light output (effective cd)
safety features and unobtrusive design to mass notification applica- Percent of UL rating versus angle
tions. Available as standard units with clear or amber lenses with
optional ALERT markings, thy are ideal for applications that require Percentage of rated output
differentiation between life safety and ECS/MNS signals. Units are

120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
90°
also available (special order) with red, blue or green lenses.
-75° 75°
Installation -60° 60°

All models are intended for indoor applications only. Strobes
mount to any flush North-American 4” square electrical box, 21/8”
(54 mm) deep. -45° 45°
Genesis ceiling strobes simply unlatch and twist to open. This -30° 30°
gains access to mounting screws and the selectable candela -15° 15°
switch. The shallow depth of Genesis devices leaves ample room
0°
Angle
behind the signal for extra wiring. Once installed with the cover in Horizontal and vertical outputs reflect the same pattern.
place, no mounting screws are visible.
Field Configuration
Depending on the model, Genesis ceiling
speaker-strobes have multi-candela output Candela switch
(see ordering information). The output
setting is changed by simply opening the
95
device and sliding the switch to the desired
75
30
setting. The strobe does not have to be 15
removed to change the output setting.

The setting remains visible through a small Indicator
window on the front of the device after the
cover is closed.
Wiring
Field wiring terminals accommodate #18 to #12 AWG (0.75 mm² WARNING: These devices will not operate without electrical power. As fires frequently
cause power interruptions, we suggest you discuss further safeguards with your
to 2.5 mm²) wiring. Strobes are interconnected with a single pair of local fire protection specialist.
wires as shown below.

Current Draw
Light output setting, standard models Light output setting, high output models
UL “15” or ”D” “30” or ”C” “75” or ”B” “95” or ”A” “95” or ”D” “115” or ”C” “150” or ”B” “177” or ”A”
Rating RMS RMS RMS RMS RMS RMS RMS RMS
16 Vdc 109 151 281 318 330 392 502 565
16 Vfwr 131 194 379 437 432 518 643 693
Light output setting, standard models Light output setting, high output models
Typical “15” or ”D” “30” or ”C” “75” or ”B” “95” or ”A” “95” or ”D” “115” or ”C” “150” or ”B” “177” or ”A”
Current RMS RMS RMS RMS RMS RMS RMS RMS
16 Vdc 94 140 273 325 333 392 499 551
20 Vdc 74 108 205 244 259 303 378 429
24 Vdc 63 90 168 194 212 245 306 342
33 Vdc 48 70 124 139 155 180 211 236
16 Vfwr 126 187 368 403 484 570 673 724
20 Vfwr 108 156 281 333 380 438 537 604
24 Vfwr 97 139 240 270 318 361 434 484
33 Vfwr 89 119 197 214 245 269 308 338
Current values are shown in mA.
Specifications
Textured UV stabilized, color impregnated engineered plastic. Exceeds 94V-0 UL flammability rating. Red and white models
Housing
available.
Lens Optical grade polycarbonate (clear).
Flush mount to North American 4-inch square electrical box, 2-1/8 (54 mm) inches deep. No extension ring required.
Mounting
Suitable for indoor wall or ceiling applications.
Wire Connections Screw terminals: #18 to #12 AWG (0.75 mm² to 2.5 mm²) wire size.
Operating Voltage Regulated 16 to 33 Vdc, 16 to 33 Vfwr.
Operating environment Indoor: 32-120° F (0-49° C) ambient temperature; 0-93% relative humidity.
Meets or exceeds year 2004 UL requirements for standards UL1638 and UL1971 and Canadian requirements for
Agency listings/approvals standards CAN/ULC S526-02 and CAN/ULC S524-01. All models comply with ADA Code of Federal Regulation Chapter
28 Part 36 Final Rule. CSFM, MEA. FM pending.
Strobe output rating UL 1971, UL 1638, ULC S526: selectable 15/30/75/95 cd (GC-VM) and 95/115/150/177 cd (GC-VMH)
GC-VM series strobes: non-coded, filtered 16-33 Vdc
Strobe operating voltage
or unfiltered 16-33 Vdc FWR.
GC-VM series strobes: one flash per second synchronized with optional G1M Genesis Signal Master indefinitely within 10
Strobe flash rate milliseconds. Temporal setting (private mode only): synchronized to temporal output of Genesis audible signals on same
circuit.
Meets or exceeds UL 1971 requirements. Maximum allowed resistance between any two devices is 20 Ohms. Refer
Synchronization to specifications for the synchronization control module, this strobe, and the control panel to determine allowed wire
resistance.
Synchronization Sources BPS6A, BPS10A, APS6A, APS10A, iO64, iO500, Fireshield Plus 3, 5 and 10 zone.
Add G1M for G1-CVM &G1-HDVM devices only.

Light output switch settings for UL 1971 listed models are selectable by numeric
candela value.
Detection & alarm since 1872 Model Housing Marking Lens Strobe Ship Wt.
T 888 378 2329
F 866 503 3996 GC-VM White None
Selectable
GCF-VM White “FIRE”
Canada 15, 30, 75, or 95 cd 1.8 lb.
Chubb Edwards
GCFR-VM Red “FIRE” Clear
(0.82 kg.)
T 519 376 2430 GC-VMH White None Selectable high output
F 519 376 7258 GCF-VMH White “FIRE” 95, 115, 150, or 177 cd
Southeast Asia
T : +65 6391 9300
F : +65 6391 9306 GCWA-VMA Amber
“Alert”
GCWA-VMC Clear Selectable
India
T : +91 80 4344 2000 GCWN-VMA Amber A, B, C, D
None
F : +91 80 4344 2050 GCWN-VMC Clear 1.8 lb.
White
GCWA-VMHA Amber (0.82 kg.)
Australia “Alert”
T +61 3 9239 1200 GCWA-VMHC Clear Selectable high output
F +61 3 9239 1299 GCWN-VMHA Amber A, B, C or D
None
Europe GCWN-VMHC Clear
T +32 2 725 11 20 Units with red, blue or green lenses are available as a special order. Contact customer service for
F +32 2 721 86 13
details.
Latin America
T 305 593 4301
F 305 593 4300

05-18-11

EST Catalog u Strobes, Horns, Bells, Chimes
Field Configurable
Horns and
Strobes Pending
Genesis Series ECS/MNS appliances available

with clear or amber lenses.

The Genesis line of fire alarm and mass notification/emergency • Unique low-profile design
communications (ECS/MNS) signals are among the smallest, – The most compact UL-1971/ULC-S526 listed strobe available
most compact audible-visible life safety signaling devices in the – Ultra-slim – protrudes less than one inch
world. About the size of a deck of playing cards, these devices are – Attractive appearance
designed to blend with any decor. – No visible mounting screws
Thanks to patented breakthrough technology, Edwards Gen- • Four field-configurable options in one device
esis strobes do not require bulky specular reflectors and lenses. – Select 15, 30, 75, or 110 cd strobe output
Instead, an exclusive cavity design conditions light to produce – Select high (default) or low dB horn output
a highly controlled distribution pattern. Significant development – Select temporal (default) or steady horn output
efforts employing this new technology have given rise to a new – Select public mode flash rate (default) or private mode
benchmark in strobe performance – FullLight technology. temporal flash
FullLight strobe technology produces a smooth light distribution • Fixed 15/75 cd model available
pattern without the spikes and voids characteristic of specular re- • ECS/MNS models available
flectors. This ensures the entire coverage area receives consistent
illumination from the strobe flash. As a result, Genesis strobes with • Easy to install
FullLight technology go well beyond the UL-1971 and ULC-S526 – Fits standard 1-gang electrical boxes – no trim plate needed
light distribution requirements. – Optional trim plate accommodates oversized openings
– Pre-assembled with captive hardware
Genesis strobes and horn-strobes offer selectable candela output – #12 AWG terminals – ideal for long runs or existing wiring
by means of a conveniently-located switch on the side of the
device. Models are also available that offer fixed 15/75 cd output. • Unparalleled performance
The candela output setting remains clearly visible even after final – Industry’s most even light distribution
installation, yet it stays locked in place to prevent unauthorized – Meets tough synchronizing standards for strobes
tampering. – Single microprocessor controls both horn and strobe
– Independent horn control over a single pair of wires
Genesis ECS/MNS appliances offer emergency signaling with – Highly regulated in-rush current
clear or amber lenses and with optional ALERT housing labels. – Multiple frequency tone improves sound penetration
They are ideal for applications that require differentiation between – Field-programmable temporal strobe output option
fire alarm and mass notification alerts.

Application Installation
Genesis strobes are UL 1971-listed for use indoors as wall-mount- Genesis horns and strobes mount to any standard one-gang sur-
ed public-mode notification appliances for the hearing impaired. face or flush electrical box. Matching optional trim plates are used
Prevailing codes require strobes to be used where ambient noise to cover oversized openings and can accommodate one-gang,
conditions exceed 105 dBA (87dBA in Canada), where occupants two-gang, four-inch square, or octagonal boxes, and European
use hearing protection, and in areas of public accommodation 100 mm square.
as defined in the Americans with Disabilities Act (see application
All Genesis signals come pre-assembled
notes – USA).
with captive mounting screws for easy in-
Combination horn-strobe signals must be installed in accordance stallation. Two tabs at the top of the signal
with guidelines established for strobe devices. Consult with your unlock the cover to reveal the mounting
Authority Having Jurisdiction for details. hardware. The shallow depth of Genesis
devices leaves ample room behind the
All Genesis strobes exceed UL synchronization requirements
signal for extra wiring. Once installed with
the cover in place, no mounting screws
synchronization source. Synchronization is important in order to
are visible.
avoid epileptic sensitivity.
WARNING: These devices will not operate without electrical power. As
fires frequently cause power interruptions, further safeguards such as Field Configuration
Genesis Horn/Strobe
backup power supplies may be required. with optional trim plate
Temporal horn and horn-strobe models
are factory set to sound in a three-pulse
temporal pattern. Units may be con-
figured for use with coded systems by cutting a jumper on the
Horns circuit board. This results in a steady output that can be turned
Genesis horn output reaches as high as 99 dB and features a on and off (coded) as the system applies and removes power to
unique multiple frequency tone that results in excellent sound the signal circuit. A Genesis Signal Master is required when horn-
penetration and an unmistakable warning of danger. Horns may be strobe models are configured for coded systems. Non-temporal,
configured for either coded or non-coded signal circuits. They can horn-only models sound a steady tone.
also be set for low dB output with a jumper cut that reduces horn Genesis clear strobes and horn-strobes are shipped from the fac-
output by about 5 dB. Horn-only models may be ceiling-mounted tory ready for use as UL 1971 compliant signals for public mode
or wall-mounted. operation. These signals may be configured for temporal flash by
The suggested sound pressure level for each signaling zone used with cutting a jumper on the circuit board. This battery-saving feature is
alarm signals is at least 15 dB above the average ambient sound level, intended for private mode signaling only.
or 5 dB above the maximum sound level having a duration of at least Genesis clear strobes and horn-strobes may be set for 15, 30, 75,
60 seconds, whichever is greater, measured 5 feet (1.5 m) above the or 110 candela output. The output setting is changed by simply
floor. The average ambient sound level is, A-weighted sound pressure opening the device and sliding the switch to the desired setting.
measured over a 24-hour period. The device does not have to be removed to change the output
Doubling the distance from the signal to the ear will theoretically result setting. The setting remains visible through a small window on the
in a 6 dB reduction of the received sound pressure level. The actual side of the device after the cover is closed.
effect depends on the acoustic properties of materials in the space. Horns and horn-strobes are factory set for high dB output.
A 3 dBA difference represents a barely noticeable change in volume. Low dB output may be selected by cutting a jumper on the
circuit board. This reduces the output by about 5 dB.
ECS/MNS Applications
Genesis ECS/MNS strobe appliances bring the same high-
performance fire alarm features and unobtrusive design to mass
notification applications. Available with amber lenses and optional Wiring
ALERT housing labels, they are ideal for applications that require Field wiring terminals accommodate #18 to #12 AWG (0.75 mm²
differentiation between fire alarm and mass notification alerts. to 2.5 mm²) wiring. Horns, strobes, and combination horn-strobes
are interconnected with a single pair of wires as shown below.

Current Draw
Strobes, Horn-Strobes Horns
Multi-cd Wall Strobes (G1-VM) Wall or Ceiling Mounted
UL 15 cd* 30 cd* 15/75 cd** 75 cd* 110 cd* Temporal Horns (G1-HD)
Rating RMS RMS RMS RMS RMS UL High dB Low dB
16 Vdc 103 141 152 255 311 Rating (RMS) (RMS)
16 Vfwr 125 179 224 346 392 16 Vdc 26 19
*G1-VM multi-cd; **G1F-V1575 fixed 15/75 cd 24 Vdc 36 27
33 Vdc 41 33
Typical 15 cd 30 cd 15/75 75 cd 110 cd 16 Vfwr 51 37
Current RMS RMS RMS RMS RMS 24 Vfwr 69 52
16 Vdc 85 127 150 245 285 33 Vfwr 76 70
20 Vdc 71 98 123 188 240
24 Vdc 59 82 104 152 191 Typical High dB Low dB
33 Vdc 46 64 84 112 137 Current RMS RMS
16 Vfwr 119 169 223 332 376 16 Vdc 22 17
20 Vfwr 103 143 189 253 331 20 Vdc 24 19
24 Vfwr 94 129 169 218 262 24 Vdc 27 22
33 Vfwr 87 112 148 179 205 33 Vdc 32 26
16 Vfwr 34 30
Wall Temporal Horn-strobes – High dB Setting 20 Vfwr 40 34
15 30 15/75 75 110 *G1-HDVM multi-cd 24 Vfwr 45 38
UL
cd* cd* cd** cd* cd* **G1F-HDV1575 fixed 15/75 cd 33 Vfwr 52 47
Rating
RMS RMS RMS RMS RMS
16 Vdc 129 167 172 281 337 Wall or Ceiling Mounted Horns (G1-P)
16 Vfwr 176 230 269 397 443 Max. Current,
UL Designation Voltage Range
RMS
Typical 15 cd 30 cd 15/75 75 cd 110 cd Regulated 24
16 - 33 Vdc 13 mA
Current RMS RMS RMS RMS RMS Vdc
16 Vdc 102 135 160 246 309 24 fwr 16 - 33 Vfwr 11 mA
20 Vdc 88 109 137 193 248
24 Vdc 81 94 122 161 203 Typical Current RMS
33 Vdc 74 72 106 124 154 24 Vdc 10
16 Vfwr 144 182 247 352 393 24 Vdc 11
20 Vfwr 141 162 220 274 362 31 Vdc 12
24 Vfwr 136 152 203 235 282 20 Vfwr 9
33 Vfwr 125 144 196 201 232 24 Vfwr 10
Current values are shown in mA.

Wall Temporal Horn-strobes – Low dB Setting
15 30 15/75 75 110
UL
cd* cd* cd** cd* cd*
Rating
RMS RMS RMS RMS RMS
16 Vdc 122 160 146 274 330 *G1-HDVM multi-cd
16 Vfwr 162 216 231 383 429 **G1F-HDV1575 fixed 15/75 cd
Typical 15 cd 30 cd 15/75 75 cd 110 cd

Current RMS RMS RMS RMS RMS
16 Vdc 96 130 158 243 302
20 Vdc 79 104 133 189 241
24 Vdc 68 88 119 156 197
33 Vdc 56 71 100 118 146
16 Vfwr 128 180 241 344 389
20 Vfwr 118 157 213 266 343
24 Vfwr 113 144 195 230 279
33 Vfwr 112 137 182 197 226

dBA output Average Sound Output (dBA)
(High dB setting, anechoic, 24V, measured at 10ft)
Temporal Horns, Horn-strobes (G1-HD, G1-HDVM series)
High UL464 Average Peak dBA
120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
dB Temporal/ Temporal/ -90° 90°
Temporal Steady
Setting Steady Steady
16 Vdc 81.4 85.5 91.4 94.2 -75° 75°
24 Vdc 84.4 88.6 94.5 97.6

33 Vdc 86.3 90.4 96.9 99.5 -60° 60°
UL464 Average Peak

Low dB -45° 45°
Temporal/ Temporal/
Setting Temporal Steady
Steady Steady -30° 30°
16 Vdc 76.0 80.1 86.3 89.2 -15°

0°
15°
24 Vdc 79.4 83.5 89.8 92.5

33 Vdc 82.1 86.5 92.5 95.3 Light output - (effective cd)
Percent of UL rating versus angle
Steady Tone Horns (G1-P series)
UL464 Average Peak
16 Vdc 77 dBA, min 85 dBA 91 dBA
Per Cent of UL Rating
120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
90°
16 Vfwr 77 dBA, min 85 dBA 91 dBA
Notes -75° 75°
1. All values shown are dBA measured at 10 feet (3.01m).

2. UL464 values measured in reverberant room. -60° 60°
3. Average and Peak values are measured in anechoic chamber.

-45° 45°
-30° 30°
-15° 15°
0°
Specifications
Housing Red or white textured UV stabilized, color impregnated engineered plastic. Exceeds 94V-0 UL flammability rating.
Lens Optical grade polycarbonate (clear)
Strobes and horn-strobes are for wall-mount installation only. Horn-only models may be ceiling- or wall-mounted.
Mounting Flush mount: 2½ inch (64 mm) deep one-gang box
(indoor only) Surface mount: Model 27193 surface mount box, wiremold box, or equivalent surface-mount box
With optional trim plate: One-gang, two-gang, four-inch square, octagonal, or European single-gang box
Wire connections Screw terminals: single input for both horn and strobe. #18 to #12 AWG (0.75 mm² to 2.5 mm²) wire size
Operating environment Indoor only: 32-120°F (0-49°C) ambient temperature. 93% relative humidity
UL 1971, UL 1638, UL 464, ULC S525, ULC S526, CSFM, CE, FCC, MEA.
Agency listings/approvals
(All models comply with ADA Code of Federal Regulation Chapter 28 Part 36 Final Rule.)
Signal: 4-1/2” x 2-3/4” x 13/16” (113 mm x 68 mm x 21 mm)
Dimensions (HxWxD)
Trimplate: 5” (127 mm); Height – 5-7/8” (149 mm); Depth – ½” (13 mm)
G1-HD series temporal-tone horns: non-coded, filtered 16-33 Vdc or unfiltered 16-33 Vdc FWR (or coded when horn
set to steady tone)
G1-HDVM series temporal-tone horn-strobes: non-coded, filtered 16-33 Vdc or unfiltered 16-33 Vdc FWR (or coded
Operating voltage
(audible NAC only) when used with optional G1M Genesis Signal Master)
G1-VM series strobes: non-coded, filtered 16 - 33 Vdc or unfiltered 16-33 Vdc FWR
G1-P series steady-tone horns: coded or non-coded, filtered 20-31 Vdc or unfiltered 20-27 Vfwr
UL 1971, UL 1638, ULC S526: selectable 15 cd, 30 cd, 75 cd, or 110 cd output
Strobe output rating UL 1971: 15 cd (fixed 15/75 cd models)
UL 1638, ULCS526: 75 cd (fixed 15/75 cd models)
G1-VM strobes and G1-HDVM series temporal-tone horn-strobes: one flash per second synchronized with optional
Strobe flash rate G1M Genesis Signal Master indefinitely within 10 milliseconds. Temporal setting (private mode only): synchronized to
temporal output of horns on same circuit
Synchronization Sources BPS6A, BPS10A, APS6A, APS10A, iO64, iO500, Fireshield Plus 3, 5 and 10 zone.
Add G1M for G1-CVM &G1-HDVM devices only.
G1-HD temporal-tone horns and G1-HDVM series temporal-tone horn-strobes: temporal rate synchronized with optional
Horn pulse rate
G1M Genesis Signal Master indefinitely within 10 milliseconds. G1-P steady-tone horns: continuous, steady tone only
Temporal audible pattern ½ sec ON, ½ sec OFF, ½ sec ON, ½ sec OFF, ½ sec ON, 1½ sec OFF, then repeat cycle

Candela Output Fire appliances available with white or red housings.
Switch Switch Switch

Lens Switch
Rating Position Position Position
Color Position A
B C D
Amber UL 1638 110 cd 75 cd 30 cd 15 cd
Amber UL 1971* 88 cd 60 cd 24 cd 12 cd
Clear UL 1971 110 cd 75 cd 30 cd 15 cd
ECS/MNS appliances available with clear or amber lenses.
* Equivalent Rating
Model Housing Marking Lens Strobe Horn Ship Wt. lbs (kg)
Fire Alarm Appliances (c/w running man icon screen printed on housing)
G1-VM White None Clear Selectable 15, 30, 75, or 110 cd Strobe only 0.25 (0.11)
G1F-HD White FIRE Clear Horn only Selectable high/low dB 0.25 (0.11)
G1F-HDV1575 White FIRE Clear 15/75 cd¹ Temporal hi/lo dB-24V 0.25 (0.11)
G1F-HDVM White FIRE Clear Selectable 15, 30, 75, or 110 cd Selectable high/low dB 0.25 (0.11)
G1F-P White FIRE Clear Steady Horn (not compatible with Genesis Signal Master) 0.25 (0.11)
G1F-V1575 White FIRE Clear 15/75 cd¹ Strobe only 0.25 (0.11)
G1F-VM White FIRE Clear Selectable 15, 30, 75, or 110 cd Strobe only 0.25 (0.11)
G1-HD White None Clear Horn only Selectable high/low dB 0.25 (0.11)
G1-HDVM White None Clear Selectable 15, 30, 75, or 110 cd Selectable high/low dB 0.25 (0.11)
G1-P White None Clear Steady Horn (not compatible with Genesis Signal Master) 0.25 (0.11)
G1RF-HD Red FIRE Clear Horn only Selectable high/low dB 0.25 (0.11)
G1RF-HDV1575 Red FIRE Clear 15/75 cd¹ Temporal hi/lo dB-24V 0.25 (0.11)
G1RF-HDVM Red FIRE Clear Selectable 15, 30, 75, or 110 cd Selectable high/low dB 0.25 (0.11)
G1RF-P Red FIRE Clear Steady Horn (not compatible with Genesis Signal Master) 0.25 (0.11)
G1RF-V1575 Red FIRE Clear 15/75 cd¹ Strobe only 0.25 (0.11)
G1RF-VM Red FIRE Clear Selectable 15, 30, 75, or 110 cd Strobe only 0.25 (0.11)
G1R-HD Red None Clear Horn only Selectable high/low dB 0.25 (0.11)
G1R-HDVM Red None Clear Selectable 15, 30, 75, or 110 cd Selectable high/low dB 0.25 (0.11)
G1R-P Red None Clear Steady Horn (not compatible with Genesis Signal Master) 0.25 (0.11)
G1R-VM Red None Clear Selectable 15, 30, 75, or 110 cd Strobe only 0.25 (0.11)

G1WA-VMA White ALERT Amber Selectable A, B, C or D Strobe only 0.25 (0.11)
G1WA-VMC White ALERT Clear Selectable 15, 30, 75, or 110 cd Strobe only 0.25 (0.11)
G1WN-VMA White None Amber Selectable A, B, C or D Strobe only 0.25 (0.11)
G1WN-VMC White None Clear Selectable 15, 30, 75, or 110 cd Strobe only 0.25 (0.11)
Trim Plates
G1T White None Genesis Trim Plate (for two-gang or 4” square boxes) 0.15 (0.7)
G1RT Red None Genesis Trim Plate (for two-gang or 4” square boxes) 0.15 (0.7)
G1T-FIRE White FIRE Genesis Trim Plate (for two-gang or 4” square boxes) 0.15 (0.7)
G1RT-FIRE Red FIRE Genesis Trim Plate (for two-gang or 4” square boxes) 0.15 (0.7)
G1WT-ALERT White ALERT Genesis Trim Plate (for two-gang or 4” square boxes) 0.15 (0.7)
Surface Boxes
27193-16 White N/A One-gang surface mount box 1 (0.4)
27193-11 Red N/A One-gang surface mount box 1 (0.4)
¹ These 15/75 cd models provide fixed output and are not multi-candela devices. The 15 cd output component complies with UL1971, while the 75 cd
output component complies with UL 1638.

U.S.
T 888 378 2329
F 866 503 3996
Canada
Chubb Edwards
T 519 376 2430
F 519 376 7258
Southeast Asia
T : +65 6391 9300
F : +65 6391 9306
India
T : +91 80 4344 2000
F : +91 80 4344 2050

Australia
T +61 3 9239 1200
F +61 3 9239 1299
Europe
T +32 2 725 11 20
F +32 2 721 86 13
Latin America
T 305 593 4301
F 305 593 4300

05-18-11

Fire Alarm Standard Features
Telephones Floor Warden Station

• Magnetic latch
• Red powdercoat finish
• 28-inch armored cord
• Supervised wiring
• Flush or surface mount models
6830-NY-F4 • Concealed Hinges
6830-NY-S4 • Four-state model available
6830-NY-F
6830-NY-S
Frontplate – Break Glass

• Flush or surface mount models
• Red powdercoat finish
• Locking door, concealed hinges
6831-1
6831-3
• Break glass insert
Overview
Edwards fire alarm telephones are rugged communications de-
vices for emergency use. Enclosed keylocked telephone stations Frontplate – Non-Break Glass
comprise three separately ordered components: the handset • Flush or surface mount models
assembly, the frontplate, and the wallbox. Depending on how the • Red powdercoat finish
phones are wired, they are supervised for three or four state op- • Locking door, concealed hinges
eration. Frontplates are available with either metal or break glass
6831-4 • Metal insert
6831-2
insterts.
MEA approved warden stations feature doors with magnetic Wallbox
latches and one-state handsets with armoured cords. Warden sta- • Red powdercoat finish
tions mount to 6832-1 wallboxes. • Flush or surface mount
• For use with 6831 series front plates
Portable handsets plug into one-gang receptacles. Handsets are
• Flush or surface mount
available in black or red. The TCS-6 cabinet provides storage for
up to six handsets. 6832-1
Handset Assembly
Application • Red ABS plastic handset
Firefighters’ telephones are typically installed in corridors, lob- 6830-1 • 60 inch (1500 mm) coiled cord set
bies, mechanical rooms, stairways, or other stategic locations. 6830-4 • Supervised wiring
6830-5A
When lifted from its cradle, or plugged into a suitable wall jack, the 6830-6A • For use with 6831 series front plates
handset activates audible and visible signals at the control panel. 6830-5A4 • Four-state models available
6830-6A4
There, the operator needs only to lift the handset off the cradle to
respond to the current call. Other firefighters’ telephones may be
selected at the control panel to join the conversation. 6833-4 Portable Handsets and Receptacle
• Black or red ABS plastic handset
• 60 inch (1500 mm) coiled cord set
• Supervised wiring
• Stainless-steel one-gang faceplate
6830-3
TCS-6 Handset Storage Cabinet 6700-0061
• Flush or surface mount receptacle
(handsets not included) • Four-state models available

3½"
10½” (89 mm)
(267 mm)
Mounting Flush Mounting
5¼" ¾” or 1” Conduit
4¼" ¾” or 1” Conduit
(133 mm) (133 mm) Top and/or bottom
Top and/or bottom
TELEPHONE TELEPHONE
FOR EMERGENCY FOR EMERGENCY
USE ONLY USE ONLY
16”
14" 14" 14"
(405 mm)
(356 mm) (356 mm) (356 mm)
Frontplate
Frontplate
1¼" 1¼"
8½" (32 mm) 8½" (32 mm)
(216 mm) (216 mm)
3½" 3½"
10½” (89 mm) (89 mm)
(267 mm)
Surface Mounting
Flush Mounting
Flush Mounting Surface Mounting
Assembly 4¼"
(133 mm)
¾” or 1” Conduit
Top and/or bottom
TELEPHONE
FOR EMERGENCY
USE ONLY
14" 14"
(356 mm) (356 mm)
E
ON CY
PH GEN
LE
TE MERNLY
RE O
FO USE
Wallbox
Frontplate
Telephone
Handset
1¼"
8½" (32 mm)Frontplate
(216 mm)
3½"
(89 mm)
Surface Mounting Edwards recommends that these fire alarm communication devices always
be installed in accordance with the latest recognized editions of national
and local fire alarm codes.

Typical Wiring
Telephone Riser Connections, Stations & Assemblies

Four-state operation Three-state operation
Telephone Printed circuit board Compatible signal Normal Telephone Printed circuit board
Compatible signal riser in cradle assembly module. (on hook) riser in cradle assembly
module. Normal Active
(on hook) (off hook) [1][2][3] [1][2][3]
1 1
2 2
3 3
EOL EOL
4 4
[4] 5
[4] 5
[5] [5]
24 Vdc 6 24 Vdc 6
7 7
24 Vdc 8 24 Vdc 8
UL/ULC listed Control relay module to operate TB1 UL/ULC listed Control relay module to operate TB1
power supply Telephone in Use indicator light. power supply Telephone in Use indicator light.
Notes
[1] Use jacketed, twisted, shielded pair [4] Connect the shields to chassis ground in the control panel
[2] 14 to 22 AWG (2.08 to 0.33 sq mm) [5] Telephone in Use indicator light (NY versions only)
[3] Max. line impedance: 50 Ohms, 25 Ohms per line Three-state operation does not comply with UL 864 ninth edition.
Note that the riser polarities for differ between three-state and four-state operation.
Telephone Riser Connections, Handsets

Four-state operation Three-state operation
Telephone riser 47 kOhm [5] Telephone riser 47 kOhm [5]
Normal Active [1][2][3] Normal [1][2][3]
Signal module. Signal module.
6833-4 Wall plate 6833-4 Wall plate

for portable handset for portable handset
Notes
[1] Use jacketed, twisted, shielded pair [4] Connect the shields to chassis ground in the control panel
[2] 14 to 22 AWG (2.08 to 0.33 sq mm) [5] Install a 47 k Ohm EOL resistor on the last unit only
[3] Max. line impedance: 50 Ohms, 25 Ohms per line Three-state operation does not comply with UL 864 ninth edition.
Note that the riser polarities for differ between three-state and four-state operation.

Catalog Shipping
Description Listings
Number Weight
Warden Stations
Four-state Remote Telephone Warden Station - Flush.
12 lb
6830-NY-F4 Handset station for use with 6832-1 backbox. Hinged flush UL, MEA
(5.4kg)
door with magnetic latch. Handset includes armored cord.
Four-state Remote Telephone Warden Station - Surface.
Handset station for use with 6832-1 backbox. Hinged 12 lb
Detection & alarm since 1872 6830-NY-S4 UL, MEA
surface door with magnetic latch. Handset includes armored (5.4kg)
U.S. cord.
T 888-378-2329
F 866-503-3996 Fixed Telephone Handsets (order frontplates and wallboxes separately)
Four-state Telephone Handset Assembly - Red, 60” 6 lb
Canada 6830-4 UL, MEA
Chubb Edwards (1500mm) Coiled Cord. (2.7kg)
T 519 376 2430 Four-state Telephone Handset Assembly - Red, 60” 6 lb
6830-5A-4 UL, MEA
F 519 376 7258 (1500mm) Coiled Cord, Push-to-talk button. (2.7kg)
Four-state Telephone Handset Assembly - Red, 60” 7 lb
Southeast Asia 6830-6A-4 UL, MEA
(1500mm) Armored Cord, Push-to-talk button. (3.1kg)
T : +65 6391 9300
F : +65 6391 9306
Portable Telephone Handsets
India Four-state Portable Telephone Handset Receptacle 1-gang UL,
T : +91 80 4344 2000 .22 lb
6833-4 Stainless-steel Faceplate for use with 6830-3 or 6700- MEA,
F : +91 80 4344 2050 (0.1kg)

0061. CSFM
Australia UL,
Portable Telephone Handset - Black c/w 60” (1500mm) 1.1 lb
T +61 3 9239 1200 6830-3 MEA,
Coiled Cord. (0.5kg)
F +61 3 9239 1299 CSFM
Portable Telephone Handset - Red c/w 60” (1500mm) 1.1 lb
Europe 6700-0061 UL, MEA
Coiled Cord. (0.5kg)
T +32 2 725 11 20
F +32 2 721 86 13
Frontplates
Latin America Frontplate - Flush Mount, Red Finish, Break Glass Type c/w 1.32 lb
T 305 593 4301 6831-1
2 keys. 16” (405 mm) H x 10-1/2” (267 mm) W. (0.6kg)
F 305 593 4300
Frontplate - Flush Mount, Red Finish, Non-Break Glass Type 1.32 lb
6831-2
utcfireandsecurity.com c/w 2 keys. 16” (405 mm ) H x 10-1/2” (267 mm) W. (0.6kg)
Frontplate - Surface Mount Red Finish, Break Glass Type See 1.1 lb
© 2010 UTC Fire & Security. 6831-3
c/w 2 keys. 14” (356 mm) H x 8-1/2” (216 mm) W. Note 1 (0.5kg)
Frontplate - Surface Mounting Red Finish, Non-Break Glass 1.1 lb
6831-4
Type c/w 2 keys. 14” (356 mm) H x 8-1/2” (216 mm) W. (0.5kg)
PP46137- Replacement Break Glass Insert - for use in 6831-1 and 1.1 lb
0067 6831-3. (0.5kg)
Wallboxes
Wallbox - Flush or Surface mount, Red finish. 14” (356mm) See 1.54 lb
6832-1
H x 8-1/2” (216mm) W x 3½” (89mm) D. Note 1 (0.7kg)
Portable handset storage cabinet. Surface mount c/w
keylock. Red finish with white lettering: “Emergency 12 lb
TCS-6 N/A
Telephone Handsets”. 15½” (394 mm ) H x 24-1/8” (613 mm) (5.4kg)
W x 4”(102) D.
Note 1: Agency listings for these components are included under the handset assemblies or warden stations
they are installed with.
05-18-11

Transformers
AC - Class 2
590 Series
Edwards 590 Series Class 2 Signaling Features and Specifications

Transformers are easy to install, low voltage • Non-regenerative thermal overload
power sources for residential, commercial, and protection
industrial uses. • Grounding wire
Mounts in a standard 1/2" (13mm) knockout or • Pre-stripped primary side pigtails
surface mounts using the provided foot mounts. • Screw terminal connections on secondary
These transformers are suitable for mounting in
both plastic and metal back boxes. May also be
used with the 593 transformer plate for enclosed
mounting in a standard two gang outlet box.
The 591 transformer is suitable for standard
doorbells and chimes in residential and
commercial applications requiring 16 volts AC.
The Edwards 598, 598Y, 599 and 599Y
transformers offer high power for long wire runs
or for applications requiring greater power such
as door openers.
Secondary
Description Cat. No. Primary Voltage1 Volts VA
590 120V AC 10V AC 5
590Y 240V AC 10V AC 5
591 120V AC 16V AC 10
8V AC 10
592 120V AC 16V AC
24V AC
10
20
7
8V AC 10
CHIMES, PUSH BUTTONS AND TRANSFORMERS

592Y 240V AC 16V AC 10
24V AC 20
6V AC 10
Class 2 Transformers
596 120V AC 12V AC 15
18V AC 15
8V AC 20
598 120V AC 16V AC 30
24V AC 30
8V AC 20
598Y 240V AC 16V AC 30
24V AC 30
599 120V AC 24V AC 40
599Y 240V AC 24V AC 40
1AC voltage frequency is 50/60 Hz
AC
7-25
TM
www.edwardssignaling.com
Transformers
AC - Class 2
590 Series
Accessories
Description Cat. No.
Transformer Mounting Plate 593
Weights and Dimensions

Approx. Net Approx. Shipping Dimensions
Cat. No. Weight (lb.) Weight (lb.) A (in.) B (in.) C (in.) D (in.) E (in.)
590 0.32 0.70 2 5/16 3 1/32 2 1/4 2 1/8 2
590Y 0.32 0.70 2 5/16 3 1/32 2 1/4 2 1/8 2
591 0.44 0.80 2 5/16 3 1/32 2 1/4 2 1/8 2
592 0.44 1.00 2 1/2 1 1/8 2 1/4 2 1/8 2
592Y 0.44 0.90 2 1/2 1 1/8 2 1/4 2 1/8 2
596 0.44 1.00 2 1/2 1 1/8 2 1/4 2 1/8 2
598 0.66 1.50 2 15/16 1 5/8 2 1/4 2 1/8 2
598Y 1.00 1.40 2 15/16 1 5/8 2 1/4 2 1/8 2
599 0.95 1.60 2 15/16 1 5/8 2 1/4 2 1/8 2
599Y 0.95 1.65 2 15/16 1 5/8 2 1/4 2 1/8 2
A C
7
CHIMES, PUSH BUTTONS AND TRANSFORMERS
B E
Side View Back View
7-26
TM
www.edwardssignaling.com
Southwire 575624 Honeywell 4513
Belden 6120UL West Penn 60993B
Coleman 81402
General Cable E3522S
SPECIFICATION SHEET
100 Bradley Parkway • Blauvelt, NY 10913 TAPPAN Spec. G60004.1
Phone: 1-800-WIRE-911 • Fax: 1-845-353-9315 Update 1.3 5/11/2012
2C 14 AWG FIRE PROTECTIVE SIGNALING

POWER LIMITED CIRCUIT CABLE 75C 300V PLENUM RATED
CONSTRUCTION: 14 AWG SOLID BARE COPPER 2 CONDUCTORS TWISTED

INSULATION: LS-PVC
COLOR CODE: BLACK, RED
SHIELD/DRAIN: UNSHIELDED
ASSEMBLY: 2 CONDUCTORS TWISTED AND JACKETED
JACKET: LS-PVC RED
DIAMETER: 0.204” Nominal
CABLE WT: 36 Lbs/1000Ft Approx (Net Weight)
PRINT LEGEND: E75610 FPLP/CL3P 14AWG (UL) MADE IN USA RoHS COMPLIANT
NEC: FPLP/CL3P
FOR RISER RATED VERSION GO TO SPEC. NO. F60001
COMPLIANCE: UL 1424 FPLP by (UL) / NEC ARTICLE 760 / RoHS
FLAME TEST: NFPA 262 (UL 910) / CSA FT6
CAPACITANCE: 33 pF/ft Nominal
VEL OF PROP: 55%
IMPEDANCE: 56 OHMS
RESISTANCE: 2.525 OHMS D.C. PER 1000 FT @ 68 DEG. F Maximum
TEMP/VOLTAGE: 75C / 300V
MISC: MADE IN USA
TAPPAN PART No: 1480BB2/FPLP/CL3P
* +/- 10% Manufacturing tolerance

* On non-standard product, customer agrees to accept all lengths manufactured
Tappan Wire & Cable Inc. provides information and specifications on an “as is” basis. Information in specifications described herein are subject to error
and/or omission, and subject to change without notice. Although we make all efforts possible to ensure the accuracy and timeliness of the information,
Tappan Wire & Cable, will not be held liable for any damages whatsoever, even if advised of the possibility of such damages, arising from the use, or
inability to use, the information or specifications herein. Please refer to our “Website Use Policy”, listed on our website, www.tappanwire.com, under the
Sales Support Section for full details, or contact your Tappan Representative. This drawing may contain patented or proprietary information. It is the
property of Tappan Wire and must not be used in any way detrimental to Tappan Wire. Acceptance by signature of this drawing will be considered as an
agreement of and acceptance of the foregoing.
Update 1.3 5/11/2012 Logo & Format.

Belden 6220UL West Penn 60991B
Coleman 81602
General Cable E3512S
SPECIFICATION SHEET
2C 16 AWG FIRE PROTECTIVE SIGNALING


INSULATION: LS-PVC
SHIELD/DRAIN: UNSHIELDED
ASSEMBLY: 2 CONDUCTORS TWISTED AND JACKETED
JACKET: LS-PVC RED
PRINT LEGEND: E75610 FPLP/CMP/CL3P 16AWG (UL) c(UL) MADE IN USA RoHS COMPLIANT
NEC: FPLP/CMP/CL3P
COMPLIANCE: UL 1424 FPLP by (UL) / NEC ARTICLE 760 / CSA C22.2 by c(UL) / RoHS
VEL OF PROP: 55%
IMPEDANCE: 57 OHMS
MISC: MADE IN USA
TAPPAN PART No: 1680BB2/FPLP/CMP


Belden 6220FL West Penn 60990B
Coleman 85602
General E3612S
SPECIFICATION SHEET
2C 16 AWG SHIELDED FIRE PROTECTIVE SIGNALING


INSULATION: LS-PVC
SHIELD/DRAIN: ALUMINUM/POLYESTER FOIL (OUT); 24AWG 7 STRAND TINNED COPPER DRAIN
ASSEMBLY: 2 CONDUCTORS TWISTED, SHIELDED AND JACKETED
JACKET: LS-PVC RED
PRINT LEGEND: E75610 FPLP/CMP/CL3P 16AWG (UL) c(UL) MADE IN USA RoHS COMPLIANT
NEC: FPLP/CMP/CL3P
COMPLIANCE: UL 1424 FPLP by (UL) / NEC ARTICLE 760 / CSA C22.2 by c(UL) / RoHS
VEL OF PROP: 55%
IMPEDANCE: 35 OHMS
MISC: MADE IN USA
TAPPAN PART No: 1680BB2M/FPLP/CMP


Comtran Cable LLC
330A Turner Street
South Attleboro, MA 02703-7714
(P) 508-399-7004
(F) 508-399-7360
www.ComtranCorp.com
UL Listed
2-Hour Fire Resistive (Circuit Integrity)
VITALink® FPLR Cable
Comtran Cable LLC
Design Specification
Part Number: 35787
DESCRIPTION: 14AWG-2Cdr. Shielded 2-Hour Fire Rated VITALink® UL Listed LSZH FPLR cable (300Volt/90°)
ANSI/UL 2196 Certified, FHIT System 40 and UL Fire Resistance Directory R27557
®
VITALink Cable is designed to support Life and Fire Safety. This cable offers “survivability” for 2-Hours in harsh environments while
being fully operational in order for safe evacuation of building occupants. It has achieved riser rating (FPLR) and re-certified under
the new UL 2196 guidelines for 2-hour fire resistive cables for use in FHIT system 40.
Construction:
Conductors: 14 AWG Solid Cu. specially engineered to minimize
embrittlement due to fire exposure
™
Insulation: Proprietary Low Smoke, Zero Halogen Thermoset Fire-Roc Layer
Core Assembly: Color Coded Conductors:
Black and Red
Shield: Copper/polyester tape applied over core
Drain Wire: Stranded bare copper
Jacket: Red Low Smoke, Zero Halogen Polyolefin
(Sequential Footage Marker Provided every two feet)
No. of Nominal Cable Nominal Weight Nominal Capacitance

Part No. AWG
Cdrs. Diameter (inches) (lbs./1000Feet) (pF/ft.)
35787 2 14 .345 76 36
Certifications:
⦁ NEC type FPLR for use in Electrical Circuit Integrity System FHIT.40
⦁ 14AWG 2-Conductor vertical straight-through w/couplings in 1-1/4-inch EMT. 60-inch maximum support spacing (CIC)
⦁ 14AWG 2-Conductor horizontal straight-through w/couplings in 1-1/4-inch EMT. 60-inch maximum support spacing (CIC)
Hardware Certified:
⦁ 3/4-inch, 1-inch, and 1-1/4-inch EMT Conduit “E-Z Pull”– Allied Tube & Conduit Co.
⦁ 3/4-inch, 1-inch, and 1-1/4-inch Steel Compression Couplings – Thomas & Betts
Pulling Lubricant: – Polywater LZ
Compliance:
⦁ UL 1424 Listed FPLR for Power-Limited Fire Alarm Circuits; 300V / 90°C Classified
⦁ UL Certified to ANSI/UL 2196 2-Hour fire rating for use in FHIT system 40. (See UL Fire Resistance Directory R27557)
⦁ Fire certified for power-limited system use at 50V phase-to-phase utilization voltage
⦁ When installing cable(s) in vertical runs, the maximum distance of cable within EMT shall be 33 ft. between terminating points
DRAWING REV. DATE DRWN. APP. REMARKS

35787 .14 05/20/2014
Paul Bruce Sinnott
UL-2196 Re-Certification. FHIT.40 and UL Fire Resistance Directory R27557
35787
Anselmo Joe Barry
2-Hour VITALink®Fire rated cabling supports critical systems such as:
⦁ (EVAC) Emergency Voice-Alarm Communication Smoke and Fire Alarm Systems
⦁ Fireman’s Telephone and Area of Refuge Communication systems
⦁ Visible Notification Appliances
Common Applications:
⦁ Manufacturing, Commercial and Industrial locations
⦁ Colleges, High-rise Buildings, Hotels, Airports and Stadiums
⦁ Health Care Facilities
⦁ Tunnels and Subways for Emergency Communications
Performance Standards:
⦁ Certified to ANSI/UL 2196 (Tests for Fire Resistive Cables) per UL FHJR.R27557
⦁ UL listed Type FPLR per UL 1424
⦁ UL Listed Type CMR per UL 444
⦁ UL Listed Type CL3R per UL 13
⦁ Riser rated per UL 1666
⦁ 300 volts rated per NEC
⦁ Sunlight Resistant and Wet Location Rated
⦁ Low Smoke, Zero Halogen
⦁ California State Fire Marshal Approved
Notes:
⦁ Refer to UL Electrical Circuit Integrity System FHIT.40 for installation requirements
⦁ Refer to FHJR.R27557 Fire-Resistive Cable
⦁ VITALink® Brand Type FPLR/CL3R/CMR for use in System No. FHIT.40 when installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
installation instructions dated May 2014
⦁ Authorities having Jurisdiction should be consulted before installation
ISO 9001 Registered
For more information, please contact Comtran Customer Service:

Telephone: 508-399-7004
Email: sales@comtrancorp.com
Signature:__________________________________________________________________ Date:_______________________
Comtran Cable LLC had made every effort to ensure the technical accuracy of the data and information contained in this release. Technical data, certifications, specifications, industry
applications, weights, dimensions, packaging and part numbers detailed within are subject to change without notice. Comtran Cable LLC is not responsible for any typographical errors or
inaccuracies that may occur.
The Marmon Group, a Berkshire Hathaway company, is an international association of about 140 manufacturing and service businesses that operate independently within 11 diverse, stand-
alone business sectors. Member companies employ more than 16,000 people and operate about 300 manufacturing, distribution and service facilities, primarily in North America, Europe and
China. © 2014 Comtran Cable LLC, a Marmon Wire & Cable/Berkshire Hathaway Company
DRAWING REV. DATE DRWN. APP. REMARKS

35787 .14 05/20/2014
Paul Bruce Sinnott
UL-2196 Re-Certification. FHIT.40 and UL Fire Resistance Directory R27557
35787
Anselmo Joe Barry
8. FIRE ALARM111-124_Layout 1 5/13/15 9:30 AM Page 4
BULK CABLES: Fire Alarm Unshielded FPLR
Stranded Conductor Fire Alarm Cables

Power-Limited Multiple Conductor/
Unshielded
Description: Applications:
• ASTM Stranded bare copper • Polypropylene insulation • Twisted pair or cabled Indoor for:
construction • Overall PVC jacket • Fire Alarm Circuits
• Initiating Devices
• Notification Devices
Rating: • Division 28 05 13.23
• NEC Type FPLR
• (UL) Listed
• Meets 300V requirements as specified in the NEC
• Flame Rating: UL1666
Standard spool size 1000ft.
Catalog No. of Conductor Insulation Type Shielding Jacket Type & Nom. NEC Nom. Jacket
No. Cond. Type & Nom. & Thickness Thickness O.D. Type Capacitance Color
D.C.R Inches Inches
Inches
16 AWG
1 PP* PVC
990S Pair
Strd.
.009
None
.017
.182 FPL R 20 pf/ft* Red
4.1 Ω/Mft
14 AWG
1 PP* PVC
994S Pair
Strd.
.010
None
.017
2.6 Ω/Mft
12 AWG
1 PP* PVC
998S Pair
Strd.
.010
None
.017
1.8 Ω/Mft
Stranded Conductor Fire Alarm Cables

Plenum Power-Limited/ Unshielded
Stranded Conductors Extra Flexible
Description:
Applications:
• ASTM Stranded bare copper • Polymer alloy insulation
• Twisted pair or cabled construction • Flexible plenum jacket
Indoor for:
Rating: • Fire Alarm Circuits
• NEC Type FPLP • Initiating Devices
• (UL) Listed • Notification Devices
• Meets 300V requirements as specified in the NEC • Division 28 05 13.23
• Flame Rating: NFPA-262 Smoke & Flame Test
Standard spool size 1000ft.
Catalog No. of Conductor Insulation Type Shielding Jacket Type & Nom. NEC Nom. Jacket
No. Cond. Type & Nom. & Thickness Thickness O.D. Type Capacitance Color
D.C.R Inches Inches
Inches
16 AWG
1
60991BS Pair
Stranded .008 None .015 .180 FPL P 34 pf/ft* Red
4.1 Ω/Mft
14 AWG
1
60993BS Pair
Standed .010 None .015 .210 FPL P 33 pf/ft* Red
2.6 Ω/Mft
12 AWG
1
60995BS Pair
Stranded .010 None .015 .254 FPL P 40 pf/ft* Red
1.8 Ω/Mft
• Catalog Number with this symbol indicates

special manufacturing runs. Minimum Quantities apply.
114 www.westpenn-wpw.com | 800-245-4964 | Specifications subject to change

EST3
System Operation
Manual
P/N 270382 • REV 9.0 • ISS 13APR12
DEVELOPED BY UTC Fire & Security
8985 Town Center Parkway
Bradenton, FL 34202
(941) 739-4300
COPYRIGHT NOTICE © 2011 UTC Fire & Security. All rights reserved.
This manual is copyrighted by UTC Fire & Security (UTCFS).
You may not reproduce, translate, transcribe, or transmit any
part of this manual without express, written permission from
UTCFS.
This manual contains proprietary information intended for
distribution to authorized persons or companies for the sole
purpose of conducting business with UTCFS. Unauthorized
distribution of the information contained in this manual may
violate the terms of the distribution agreement.
TRADEMARKS Microsoft, Microsoft Mouse, and Windows are all trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation.
Content
About this manual • iii

The EST3 library • iv
Important information • v
Chapter 1 Introduction • 1.1

Introduction • 1.2
Display operation • 1.5
Message processing • 1.11
Optional features • 1.13
Entering logical addresses • 1.17
Chapter 2 3-LCD and 3-LCDXL1 operating instructions • 2.1

Controls and indicators • 2.2
Creating a status report • 2.9
Disabling groups • 2.10
Enabling groups • 2.11
Disabling hardware components • 2.12
Enabling hardware components • 2.13
Arming security partitions • 2.14
Disarming security partitions • 2.16
Resetting security partitions • 2.17
Bypassing security devices • 2.18
Removing bypasses from security devices • 2.19
Guard patrol groups • 2.20
Changing the smoke detector sensitivity level • 2.21
Changing event message routing • 2.22
Changing the output state of a relay or LED • 2.23
Creating reports • 2.24
Setting the system time and date • 2.27
Changing user access level passwords • 2.28
Restarting a panel • 2.29
Scheduling holidays • 2.30
Clearing the panel history file • 2.31
Testing alarm input devices • 2.32
Testing security input devices • 2.33
Testing Signature devices • 2.34
Testing the panel lamps and panel sounder • 2.35
Chapter 3 3-ASU operating instructions • 3.1

Operation the Audio Source Unit • 3.4
Optional audio zone controls • 3.7
Chapter 4 3-FTCU operating instructions • 4.1

Operation • 4.4
Appendix A System addresses • A.1

Address format • A.2
EST3 System Operation Manual i

Content
LRM addresses • A.4

Control / display module addresses • A.8
Device addresses • A.10
Appendix B Operation sequence charts • B.1
Z Index • Z.1
ii EST3 System Operation Manual

Content
About this manual

This manual provides information on how to operate an EST3
integrated system. The information presented here is of a general
nature, since each site and system is unique. The EST3 system at
your site has been designed by professionals to meet the specific
requirements of the fire and security codes in your location.
Please refer to the site-specific instructions, provided by your
UTCFS representative, to determine the exact operation of your
system.
Model number JB-TBZL-EST3, used to describe the EST3 life
safety system in the Chinese marketplace, carries the same UL
listings and approvals as EST3 when installed and configured
using the subcomponents and methodologies described in this
manual.
Organization
The manual contains the following chapters:
• Chapter 1: Introduction: gives you a general description of
system functions and operations.
• Chapter 2: 3-LCD and 3-LCDXL1 operating instructions:
provides detailed operating instructions for the primary
control module, the 3-LCD(XL1) module.
• Chapter 3: 3-ASU operating instructions: provides detailed
operating instructions for the 3-ASU audio source unit.
• Chapter 4: 3-FTCU operating instructions: provides
detailed operating instructions for the 3-FTCU firefighter
telephone control unit.
• Appendix A: System addresses: contains figures that show
you how to determine various device addresses.
• Appendix B: Operation sequence charts: contains tables or
charts that show the sequence of events, actions, and
displays for the most common panel operations.
EST3 System Operation Manual iii

Content
The EST3 library

EST3 documents
A library of documents and multi-media presentations supports
the EST3 life safety system. A brief description of each is
provided below.
EST3 Installation and Service Manual (P/N 270380): Gives
complete information on how to install and service the EST3
hardware. The manual also includes installation information on
selected Signature Series components.
SDU Online Help (P/N 180653): Provides full online support for
configuring and programming a system using the EST3 System
Definition Utility program.
EST3 System Operation Manual (P/N 270382): Provides detailed
information on how to operate the system and system
components.
EST3 Smoke Management Application Manual (P/N 270913):
Provides information for designing, programming, and testing an
EST3 smoke control system
EST3 Users Self-Study Course (P/N 270684): Contains a self-
paced manual and accompanying video. The course is designed
for building personal, security guards, firefighters, and other
individuals that may be required to operate the system.
Other documents
In addition to documents in the EST3 library, you may find the
following documents useful.
Signature Series Intelligent Smoke and Heat Detectors
Applications Bulletin (P/N 270145): Provides additional
applications information on the Signature series smoke and heat
detector applications.
Signature Series Component Installation Manual (P/N 270497):
Contains detailed mounting and wiring information for all
Signature series devices.
Speaker Application Guide (P/N 85000-0033): Provides
information on the placement and layout of speakers for fire
alarm signaling and emergency voice communications.
Strobe Applications Guide (P/N 85000-0049): Provides
information on the placement and layout of strobes for fire alarm
signaling.
iv EST3 System Operation Manual

Content
Important information
Limitation of liability
This product has been designed to meet the requirements of
NFPA Standard 72; Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Standard
864; and Underwriters Laboratories of Canada, Inc., Standard
ULC S527. Installation in accordance with this manual,
applicable codes, and the instructions of the Authority Having
Jurisdiction is mandatory. UTCFS shall not, under any
circumstances, be liable for any incidental or consequential
damages arising from loss of property or other damages or losses
owing to the failure of UTCFS products beyond the cost of
repair or replacement of any defective products. UTCFS reserves
the right to make product improvements and change product
specifications at any time.
While every precaution has been taken during the preparation of
this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents, UTCFS
assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions.
FCC warning
This equipment can generate and radiate radio frequency energy.
If this equipment is not installed in accordance with this manual,
it may cause interference to radio communications. This
equipment has been tested and found to comply within the limits
for Class A computing devices pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15
of the FCC Rules. These rules are designed to provide
reasonable protection against such interference when this
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. Operation
of this equipment is likely to cause interference, in which case
the user at his own expense, will be required to take whatever
measures may be required to correct the interference.
Industry Canada information

Note: The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment.
This certification means that the equipment meets certain
telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety
requirements. Industry Canada does not guarantee the equipment
will operate to the user’s satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is
permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local
telecommunications company. The equipment must also be
installed using an acceptable method of connection. The
customer should be aware that compliance with the above
conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some
situations.
EST3 System Operation Manual v

Content
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized

Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any
repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or
equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications
company cause to request the user disconnect the equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical
ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and
internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected
together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural
areas.
Caution: Users should not attempt to make such connections

themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection
authority, or electrician, as appropriate
Note: The Load Number (LN) assigned to each terminal device

denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a
telephone loop which is used by the device, to prevent
overloading. The termination on a loop may consist of any
combination of devices subject only to the requirements that the
sum of the Load Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 100.
vi EST3 System Operation Manual

Chapter 1
Introduction
Summary
This chapter provides a general description of system functions
and their operation.
Content
Introduction • 1.2
Password protection • 1.2
Feature and function domains • 1.3
Display operation • 1.5
Normal state • 1.5
Off-normal state • 1.6
Message details • 1.8
Display priorities • 1.10
Message processing • 1.11
Common event LEDs and queue buttons • 1.11
Optional features • 1.13
Guard patrol • 1.13
System timers • 1.14
Time controls • 1.15
Control/display module buttons • 1.15
Entering logical addresses • 1.17
Panels • 1.17
Local rail modules • 1.17
Devices • 1.17
EST3 System Operation Manual 1.1

Introduction
Introduction
System operating requirements can be configured based on
geographic location and protected premises ownership.
In North America, systems can be configured as protected
premises (local) systems or as proprietary systems, both in
compliance with NFPA 72.
In the local mode, there is no requirement to acknowledge each
individual event. Each event message can be reviewed using the
Previous and Next buttons. System events that automatically
restore will automatically be removed from the message queue,
without requiring the operator to view a restored message.
In the proprietary mode, each event must be individually
acknowledged by pressing the respective message acknowledge
button. The Previous and Next button functions are not available
in the proprietary mode. Operators are required to acknowledge
both an event and its restoration to remove it from a message
queue.
Note: Alarm and supervisory events do not automatically
restore. They remain in their respective message queues until the
system is manually reset.
Password protection
Certain front-panel controls and command menu functions are
password-protected and have a user access level that is
determined by the marketplace setting. The four user access
levels are detailed in Table 1-1.
Each access level is given a default password that should be
changed once the panel is put into service. See Chapter 2:
Changing user access level passwords for more information.
Table 1-1: Password privileges

Password Level Privileges
Default • Status
No password required • Revision level report
• Output selection
• Display/printer selection
• Printer selection
• Reset function
• Alarm silence function
• Drill function
User access level 1 All default privileges, plus:
• Sensitivity reports
• Guard patrol routes
(activate/restore)
1.2 EST3 System Operation Manual

Introduction
Table 1-1: Password privileges

Password Level Privileges
User access level 2 All default and User 1 privileges, plus:
• History reports
• Devices (enable/disable)
• Zone groups (enable/disable)
• Alternate sensitivity (activate)
• Alternate message route (activate)
• Primary sensitivity (restore)
• Primary message route (restore)
• Change time (program)
• Change date (program)
• Security devices (bypass/unbypass)
• Partitions (arm/disarm)
• Change password for level 1
User access level 3 All default, User 1 and 2 privileges,
plus:
• AND group (enable/disable)
• Matrix group (enable/disable)
• Service group (enable/disable)
• Guard patrol group (enable/disable)
• Instruction text (enable/disable)
• Time control (enable/disable)
• Switch (enable/disable)
• LED (enable/disable)
• Relay (activate/restore)
• LED (activate/restore)
• Audio amp (activate/restore)
• Audio message (activate/restore)
• Holiday list (program)
Service access level 4 All default, User 1, 2, and 3 privileges,
plus:
• Security functions: NONE
• Output: Primary printer select
• Card (LRM)(enable/disable)
• Restart by panel (program)
• Restart all panels (program)
• Clear history (program)
• Test (start/cancel)
• Signature Device Test
Feature and function domains

The domain of a feature or function is the group of cabinets on
the network that are affected when the feature or function is
activated. Three domains are available:

Introduction
• Local: The feature/function affects only the cabinet on which

the 3-LCD or 3-LCDXL1 display module is installed
• Group: The feature/function affects a pre-defined group of
cabinets on the network
• Global: The feature/function affects all the cabinets on the
network
A network cabinet may be a part of one or more groups. Multiple
control locations are permitted for any group.
Group #3
Group #1 Group #2
1 2 3 4 5 6
The configuration of features and functions varies with each

installation. Please consult your site-specific documentation to
determine if any custom features or functions have been
designed into your system.

Introduction
Display operation
The information presented on the main display depends on the
operating condition of the panel: normal state (no events present)
or off-normal state (at least one event).
Normal state
Figure 1-1 shows the information presented on the main display
when the panel is in a normal operating condition.
Time
11:03:12 01-25-2001 Date
ACME CORPORATE
Custom banner
HEADQUARTERS BUILDING
Alarm History 0002 Alarm history
Time
11:03:12 03/25/2004 Date
System Title Custom

(22 characters on 2 lines) banner
Alarm History Count: 0000 Alarm history
Figure 1-1: Main 3-LCD (top) and 3-LCDXL1 (bottom) display

screens when the panel is in a normal state
• The top of the screen displays the system time and date. The
time is in 24-hour format. The project configuration settings
determine the date format.

Introduction
• The middle of the screen displays an optional custom banner

message, if programmed into the system. Otherwise, this
area is left blank.
• The bottom of the screen displays the total number of times
that the panel has gone into alarm since the last time the
alarm history was cleared.
Off-normal state
Figure 1-2 and Figure 1-3 show the information presented on the
main display when the panel is in an off-normal operating
condition.
Number of active points Number of disabled points
System time 14:19:32 A0004 D0000

Oldest, highest priority
0001 PULL STN ACTIVE event or last reviewed
PULL, ADMIN BLDG, event in selected event
1ST FLR WEST queue
0003 PULL STN ACTIVE
PULL, ADMIN BLDG, Most recent, highest
1ST FLR NORTH priority event
A003 S000 T001 M000 |
Alarm event queue Monitor event queue

Supervisory event queue Trouble event queue
14:19:32 A0004 D0000

Event number 0001 PULL STN ACTIVE Event type
PULL, ADMIN BLDG,
Device message
1ST FLR WEST
0003 PULL STN ACTIVE
PULL, ADMIN BLDG,
1ST FLR NORTH
A003 S000 T001 M000 |
Total number of Highlight shows which event

events in the queue queue is displayed in the
shaded area of the display
Figure 1-2: Main 3-LCD display screen when the panel is in an off-normal state

Introduction
Number of disabled points

Number of active points
System time and date 11:03:12 03/25/2004 ACT:0001 DIS:0000 Oldest, highest priority
Event number and -– SELECTED ALARM -- event or last reviewed
event type 0001 ZONE ACTIVE
event in selected event
Device message Zone 1 40 characters location text
queue
-– ALARM QUEUE --
0001 ZONE ACTIVE
0002 PULL ACTIVE
Event queue
Total number of
events in the queue -– MOST RECENT ALARM --
0002 PULL ACTIVE Most recent, highest
Highlight shows which priority event
event queue is Zone 2 40 characters location text
displayed in the ALARM SUPERVISORY TROUBLE MONITOR
shaded area of 0001 0000 0000 0000
the display
Alarm event queue Monitor event queue
Supervisory event queue Trouble event queue
Figure 1-3: Main 3-LCDXL1 display screen when the panel is in an off-normal state
• The top line of the screen displays the system time in 24-
hour format, the number of active points in the system, and
the number of disabled points.
• The shaded area displays the oldest, highest priority, event
received by the panel, or the last reviewed event in the
selected event queue, depending on whether the display is in
unattended mode (regular off-normal operation) or in
attended mode. In either case, the display shows the event
number, the event type, and the active device's message.
Note: Pressing any one of the queue select buttons places the
display in the attended mode for reviewing or
acknowledging events and prevents the shaded area from
being updated by an event with a higher priority. The display
automatically returns to the unattended mode after the user
timeout period has expired.
• The area immediately below the shaded area on the 3-LCD
always displays the most recent, highest priority event in an
event queue. This area on the 3-LCDXL1 displays the event
queue and the area below the event queue displays the most
recent, highest priority event in an event queue.
Note: Cabinet configuration option settings determine which
events are routed to the main display and placed in an event
queue.

Introduction
• The bottom line of the display shows the number of events in

each event queue. The highlight around the event counter
indicates which event queue is displayed in the shaded area.
Note: The event counter stops at 999. It is possible for an
event queue to hold more than 999 events. If an event queue
holds more than 999 events, “***” is displayed.
Message details
Pressing the Details button displays additional information about
the event displayed on the LCD. Different detail information is
displayed for each of the following:
• Device
• Group
• Guard patrol
• Instruction text
Device details
DETAILS
P:01 C:02 D:0004 Device's logical address
STATE ONE
STATE TWO
A001 S000 T000 M000
If a device activation causes the event, pressing Details displays

the active device’s logical address in the following format:
P:99 C:99 D:9999
Where:
• P:99 = panel address
• C:99 = rail module address
• D:9999 = device address
Lines below the device address list the off-normal states the
device is currently in.
Group details
If a group activation causes the event, pressing Details displays a
series of descriptions, one for each device in the group.

Introduction
DETAILS
EVENT MESSAGE Event message
DEVICE MESSAGE LINE 1 Device message
DEVICE MESSAGE LINE 2
A003 S000 T000 M000 Scrolling indicator
Each device panel shows the event message or state of the

device, the device address, and the device message (usually the
device location) which can be one or two lines long.
Guard patrol details

When a guard patrol route goes active, pressing Details displays
information about the station (device) that is in alarm.
DETAILS
EVENT MESSAGE Event message
PATROL: 999 Patrol or route number
STATION: 99 Device or station number
A001 S000 T000 M000
The Details panel shows the event or state of the off-normal

station, as well as the logical address, patrol or route number,
and station number of the device.
Instruction text details

Your system may be programmed to include detailed instructions
for certain events. When specific devices go into alarm, the
system generates a related monitor event. If you select the
monitor event, then press Details, the instruction text is
displayed.
DETAILS
LOREM IPSUM DOLOR SIT Instruction text
AMET, CONSECTETUER AD
IPISCING ELIT, SEDIAM
NONEQAM NIBH EUISMOD
TINCIDUNT UT LAOREET
DOLORE MAGNA ALIQUAM
A002 S000 T000 M001 Scrolling indicator
Normally, systems are designed so that instruction text is sent

directly to a printer. While accessible, instruction text is not
formatted for the display.

Introduction
Display priorities
The panel controller places all events into one of five categories:
• Fire alarms - life safety related events, e.g. smoke detector,
sprinkler system waterflow, manual pull station, etc.
• Security alarms - include burglar and holdup alarms, as
generated by security devices
• Supervisory events - off normal conditions of a related fire
protection system, e.g. sprinkler system valve closed.
• Trouble events - faults within the system
• Monitor events - changes in the status of an ancillary system
Because events can happen at random, the system prioritizes
which event is the most critical and displays its information first.
Alarm events have the highest priority and monitor events have
the lowest priority.
In the U.S. Local and Proprietary market place, security events
have a higher priority than monitor events and are stored in the
supervisory queue. For all market place settings other than the
U.S. (except the Middle East and Asia, which is the same as the
U.S.) Local and Proprietary, security events, and monitor events
have equal priority and are stored in the monitor queue.

Introduction
Message processing
When an event occurs, the system categorizes the event as a fire
alarm, security alarm, supervisory event, trouble event, or
monitor event. Information about the event is added to a
corresponding message queue on the 3-LCD or 3-LCDXL1
display module. The information available in each queue is
displayed using the event queue buttons on the front of the LCD.
Note that for display purposes, security alarms and supervisory
events are both stored in the supervisory queue.
A panel can store up to 2,000 event messages.
Common event LEDs and queue buttons

The event queue LEDs act as a common event indicator, flashing
any time a new event is added to the queue.
Flashing LED indicates that an

event is in the queue that has
not been reviewed or
acknowledged
Alarm Supvr Trouble Monitor
LED on steady indicates that all
events in the queue have been
reviewed or acknowledged
Previous
LED off indicates that no events
are in the queue Message
Next
When an event is received, the respective event queue LED

flashes, indicating that the event has not been reviewed or
acknowledged.
1. Select the highest priority active queue by pressing the
respective queue button.
2. Scroll through all available event messages using
Previous/Next buttons.
You may use the Previous and Next Message or the queue
buttons to scroll through the activation messages at any time
after a queue is selected.

Introduction
1
Flashing LED indicates that an
event is in the queue that has
not been reviewed or
acknowledged
LED on steady indicates that all
events in the queue have been
reviewed or acknowledged
Previous
LED off indicates that no events
are in the queue Message
Next
Previous
Message
Next

Introduction
Optional features
The EST3 system can be configured with many optional features
that provide additional capabilities. Your system may include
some or all of these options, depending on the needs of your
facility. See the site-specific information provided by your
system installer to determine which options are installed.
Guard patrol
The guard patrol feature is used to monitor the activities of
security guards. Guards are required to walk any one of a
number of predetermined routes called tours. During each tour,
the guard must activate guard patrol stations that are strategically
located along the route. Should a guard activate a station too
early, too late, or out of sequence, an active guard patrol message
will be displayed on the panel LCD.
2 4 2 4
s
8
e
s
to
ut
e
ut
in
10
m
in
m
m
18
10 to 15 minutes
14 to 18 minutes
in
7 to 10 minutes
18
7 to 10 minutes
ut
to
to
es
12
12
3 3
3 to 5 minutes
1 5 1 5
Tour #1 Tour #2
25 to 30 minutes
2 4 2 7
4
to
10
m
10 to 15 minutes
in
7 to 10 minutes
ut
es
3 3
tes
inu
8
to
0m
10
to 4
m
in
ut
35
es
1 3 to 5 minutes
5 1 3 to 5 minutes
5
Tour #3 Tour #4
2 4
es
11
ut
Patrol Group Notes

in
to
m
14
1 Any station activated early, late, or out

18
7 to 10 minutes
14 to 18 minutes
m
to
in
of sequence will generate a guard

ut
12
es
3 patrol alarm.
2 If a guard patrol alarm is generated,
the guard patrol must be restored to
clear the alarm.
1 5
Tour #5
Figure 1-4: Sample guard patrol route assignments

Introduction
Figure 1-4 shows five guard patrol routes consisting of five

stations. The system designer has assigned a minimum and
maximum time allowance for the guard to go between any two
guard stations. If the guard arrives too early, too late or at the
wrong station, an active guard patrol event is generated.
Starting a tour
There are three ways to start a guard patrol tour:
• Activate the first guard patrol station on the route
• Enable the Guard Patrol group from the LCD module (either
3-LCD or 3-LCDXL1)
• Press a control/display panel button programmed to turn on
the Guard Patrol group
Note: A guard patrol station designated as the first station in one
guard patrol route cannot be the first station in another route.
Ending a tour
A guard patrol tour is automatically ended when all stations on
the route have been successfully operated within the allowable
time period and in the proper sequence.
Should a tour end with an active guard patrol response, the
system must be reset to clear the guard patrol response.
Press the Details button to reveal the stations reporting in.
Clearing a guard patrol alarm

When a guard patrol alarm is generated, you must restore the
guard patrol route to clear the alarm. The steps are detailed later
in this manual.
System timers
The system has a number of optional timers that are required by
certain jurisdictions to comply with fire codes. Most of these
timer functions do not require operator action, however,
understanding the function of these optional timers (if enabled)
will improve your understanding of why the system functions as
it does.
Alarm silence/reset inhibit timer

The alarm silence/reset inhibit timer is used to guarantee that the
notification appliances will sound for the minimum specified
period. This timer effectively disables the alarm silence and reset
buttons for a predetermined period. While the timers are active,
pressing the alarm silence and reset buttons has no effect.
Notes

Introduction
• Your system may be equipped with notification appliances

associated with the fire sprinkler system, which cannot be
silenced.
• Visual notification appliances can be configured not to turn
off when the audible notification appliances are silenced.
Automatic alarm silence timer

The automatic alarm silence timer is used to automatically
silence the notification appliances after a preset period, if they
have not been silenced using the alarm silence button. Typical
timer settings silence the signals from 5 to 30 minutes after
operation.
Automatic general alarm (GA) timer

Some systems can be used to implement a positive alarm
sequence. They are designed to permit a short investigation
period between the detection of a fire and sending a general
alarm to the entire facility. The automatic general alarm timer is
used to initiate the general alarm after a predetermined time
period, if no action has been taken by the operator to prevent the
general alarm from being sent.
Time controls
Time controls provide for the automatic starting and stopping of
system events based on time and date. Time controls run in the
background and do not require any operator action.
Setting holidays
The system provides for special time controls, referred to as
holiday time controls. Holiday time controls supersede the
normal time controls on dates that are designated as holidays.
The list of dates that are defined as holidays is entered into the
system from the 3-LCD or 3-LCDXL1 display module.
Control/display module buttons

The buttons on a control/display module use one of three
available operating modes.
• Toggle - The state of the button changes each time the button
is pushed, i.e. “off” to “on” or “on” to “off.”
• Interlocked - Three adjacent toggle buttons that operate as a
group. Pushing any button in the group turns the output of
the other two buttons “off” and turns its own output “on.”
• Momentary - The button is “on” only while pressed by the
operator.

Introduction
You may find multiple button modes on a single control/display

module. Consult your site-specific documentation for additional
information.
Toggle buttons
Toggle buttons are commonly used to control two state
operations such as on/off, open/close, speaker select, telephone
select, etc. The output of an “on” button remains “on” during
panel reset, and must be manually turned “off” when no longer
required.
Interlocked buttons
The interlocked mode is commonly used for hands-off auto
control of HVAC systems. An interlocked button in the “on”
state can be turned “off” without activating a second button by
pressing the “on” button a second time. The output of the “on”
button remains on, during panel reset, and must be manually
returned to “Auto” when no longer required.
Momentary buttons
Momentary buttons are typically to issue brief commands.
Example uses for momentary buttons: lamp tests, function reset,
and test sequences. The command is issued only while the button
is pressed.

Introduction
Entering logical addresses

Each addressable device or circuit in the system has a logical
address. This includes panels, local rail modules, and devices.
Depending on the operation you are performing, you will be
prompted to enter a logical address in one of several formats.
Tip: Get an SDU Objects report for your system and keep it with
this documentation. The SDU Objects report lists all of the
addressable devices or circuits in the system and shows their
logical addresses.
Panels
The logical address format for a panel is PP, where PP is the
cabinet number (01 to 64). For example, enter 01 for the panel
designated as Cabinet 1.
(System-wide events that are not related to a particular cabinet
use panel number 00.)
To determine a cabinet's panel number, use the Command Menus
to request a Status report. Choose any type of list. The system
displays the cabinet's panel number as the default panel number.
Once you’ve noted the panel number, press the Backspace key to
exit from the function.
Local rail modules

Local rail modules include the rail modules that connect to the
local rail bus and the control/display modules. The logical
address format for a local rail module is PPCC, where:
• PP is the cabinet number of the panel containing the rail
module
• CC is the address of the rail module
• CC+32 is the address of the control/display module
connected to the rail module at slot address CC
For example, enter 0102 for the rail module installed in chassis
rail 1, slot 4 of Cabinet 1. Enter 0134 for the control/display
module connected to the rail module installed in chassis rail 1,
slot 4 of Cabinet 1.
Note: The rail-slot number and the slot address are not the same.
Slot addresses vary with the cabinet configuration. Refer to
Appendix A: System addresses.
Devices
Devices include the circuits, buttons, or LEDs that exist on the
local rail module and all addressable devices connected by the

Introduction
field wiring. The address format for a device is PPCCDDDD,

where:
• PP is the cabinet number of the panel containing the rail
module
• CC is the address of the rail module responsible for the
device
• DDDD is the address of the individual component or circuit
For example, Enter 01340129 for the first LED on the
control/display module connected to the rail module installed in
chassis rail 1, slot 4 of Cabinet 1.
The CRC Card Reader Controller and KPDISP Keypad Display
are devices supported by a 3-SAC module. However, they also
act as independent processors, and have their own points and
pseudo points. For this reason, their device numbers are further
subdivided.
You can think of a SAC device as having this address format:
PPCCSSDD: SS is the CRC or KPDISP device number, as
assigned during LRM configuration. DD is a point or pseudo
point within the device.

Chapter 2
3-LCD and 3-LCDXL1 operating instructions
Summary
This chapter provides a functional description of the controls and
indicators provided on the 3-LCD and 3-LCDXL1 display
modules.
Content
Creating a status report • 2.9
Disabling groups • 2.10
Enabling groups • 2.11
Disabling hardware components • 2.12
Enabling hardware components • 2.13
Arming security partitions • 2.14
Resetting security partitions • 2.17
Removing bypasses from security devices • 2.19
Guard patrol groups • 2.20
Starting a guard patrol • 2.20
Restoring a guard patrol • 2.20
Changing event message routing • 2.22
Activating event alternate message routing • 2.22
Restoring event primary message routing • 2.22
Changing the output state of a relay or LED • 2.23
Creating reports • 2.24
Testing alarm input devices • 2.32
Testing security input devices • 2.33
Testing Signature devices • 2.34
Testing the panel lamps and panel sounder • 2.35

Controls and indicators

1 2 3 4 5
Power Test CPU Gnd Disable

Fail Fault
Reset Alarm Panel Drill

Silence Silence
21 6
20 7
19 9
18 10

11
Previous
1 2 3 Message
Next
17 4 5 6
12
7 8 9 Details
Command
0 Menus
16 15 14 13
Figure 2-1: 3-LCD controls and indicators

1 2 3 4 5
Power Test CPU Gnd Disable

Fail Fault
Reset Alarm Panel Drill

Silence Silence
21 6
20 7
8
14
Details
13
Command
Menus
11
Previous
Message
Next
12
19 9
18 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
16 17 15
Figure 2-2: 3-LCDXL1 controls and indicators

3-LCD and 3-LCDXL1 controls and indicators (see Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-2)
Control or
Index indicator Functional description
1 Power LED The Power LED indicates that mains AC is applied to the panel.
2 Test LED The Test LED indicates that a part of the system is in test mode.
A programmable timer automatically exits the test mode after a
period of system inactivity.
3 CPU Fail LED The CPU Fail LED indicates the CPU module has detected a
processor failure. Processor failures must be reset manually.
4 Gnd Fault LED The Gnd Fault LED indicates that the CPU module has detected
a ground fault.
5 Disable LED The Disable LED indicates that a point or zone has been
disabled using the Disable command.
6 Drill Button / LED Pressing the Drill button activates the Drill command function.
The Drill LED, when lit, indicates that the Drill command function
is active.
7 Panel Silence For U.S. Local and Canadian Local systems, pressing the Panel
Button / LED Silence button turns the CPU buzzer off. The Panel Silence LED,
when lit, indicates the panel is in an off-normal condition and the
panel has been placed in Panel Silence mode.
For U.S. Proprietary and Canadian Proprietary systems, the
Panel Silence button is not operational. The panel buzzer only
silences after all events have been acknowledged.
Note: The CPU buzzer can be configured to resound at a
regular interval to remind the operator that the panel has been
silenced.
8 Liquid crystal 168 character, backlit alphanumeric display of system status.
display screen
9 Trouble Button / Pressing the Trouble button places the contents of the Trouble
LED queue onto the display screen for review. Active trouble events
are displayed in the order in which they are received. When a
trouble event is highlighted on the display, pressing the Trouble
button acknowledges the event and advances the display to the
next event.
The Trouble LED serves as a common trouble event indicator.
The LED, when flashing, indicates that there is an event in the
queue that has not been reviewed (local systems) or
acknowledged (proprietary systems). When on steady, the LED
indicates that all events in the queue have been reviewed or
acknowledged.

Control or
10 Monitor Button / Pressing the Monitor button places the contents of the Monitor
LED queue onto the display screen for review. Active monitor events
are displayed in the order in which they are received. When a
monitor event is highlighted on the display, pressing the Monitor
next event.
The Monitor LED serves as a common monitor event indicator.
The LED, when flashing, indicates that there is an event in the
queue that has not been reviewed (local systems) or
acknowledged.
11 Previous Message For U.S. Local and Canadian Local systems, pressing the
Button Previous Message button scrolls the display to show the
preceding event in the selected event queue. Reviewing events
using the Previous Message button does not acknowledge the
event.
Previous event button is not operational. Events must be
acknowledged in order of their occurrence.
Note: Press and hold for auto-scroll.
12 Next Message For U.S. Local and Canadian Local systems, pressing the Next
Button Message button scrolls the display to show the following event in
the selected event queue. Reviewing events using the Next
Message button does not acknowledge the event.
Next Message button is not operational. Events must be
acknowledged in order of their occurrence.
Note: Press and hold for auto-scroll.
13 Command Menus Pressing the Command Menus button displays the system
Button command menu to access the following system functions:
Status, Enable, Disable, Activate, Restore, Control Output,
Reports, Program, and Test
Pressing the button a second time returns the user to the current
event window.

Control or
14 Details Button Pressing the Details button displays additional information about
the event highlighted on the display screen.
• For Zone Groups, pressing the Details button displays a list of
the active devices in the zone group.
• For Instruction Text Groups, pressing the Details button
displays the entire instruction text.
• For Maintenance Alerts, pressing the Details button displays a
list of the dirty devices.
• For Common Troubles, pressing the Details button displays a
list of the specific troubles for the selected device.
• For Guard Patrols, pressing the Details button displays the
offending station and indicates whether the activation was
caused because of an early, late, or out of sequence
condition.
15 Enter key Pressing the Enter key selects the highlighted menu option or
causes the system to start processing the information shown in
the display.
16 Delete / Backspace Pressing the Delete / Backspace key moves the cursor to the left
key of the current position and removes the character from the
display. The Delete / Backspace key is also used to cancel
functions and move the operator back through the menus.
17 Numeric Keypad Pressing any number key selects the menu item or enters the
respective number into the system for use in conjunction with
other system functions.
18 Alarm Button / LED Pressing the Alarm button places the contents of the Alarm
queue onto the display screen for review. Active alarm events
are displayed in the order in which they are received. When an
alarm event is highlighted on the display, pressing the Alarm
next event.
The Alarm LED serves as a common alarm event indicator. The
LED, when flashing, indicates that there is an event in the queue
that has not been reviewed (local systems) or acknowledged
(proprietary systems). When on steady, the LED indicates that
all events in the queue have been reviewed or acknowledged.

Control or
19 Supvr Button / LED Pressing the Supervisory button places the contents of the
Supervisory queue onto the display screen for review. Active
supervisory events are displayed in the order in which they are
received. When a supervisory event is highlighted on the display,
pressing the Supervisory button acknowledges the event and
advances the display to the next event.
The Supervisory LED serves as a common supervisory event
indicator. The LED, when flashing, indicates that there is an
event in the queue that has not been reviewed (local systems) or
acknowledged.
Note: Security events allow for multiple activations from the
same point. It is not uncommon for this to happen.
20 Alarm Silence Pressing the Alarm Silence button turns off the EVAC and
Button / LED ALERT channels, and all active audible and visible notification
appliance circuits. Pushing the button a second time turns the
notification appliance circuits back on. This button may be used
to cancel the drill signal.
The Alarm silence LED, when lit, indicates that the active
notification appliance circuits have been silenced.
Note: Project configuration settings affect the operation of the
Alarm Silence function
21 Reset Button / LED Pressing the Reset button activates the system’s reset sequence
to restore the system to normal.
The Reset LED flashes quickly during the smoke power-down
phase, flashes slowly during the power-up phase, is on steady
during the restoral phase, and is off when the system has reset.
Notes
• The Reset button is disabled as long as the alarm silence
inhibit timer is running
• The Reset button does not affect disabled points or manually
overridden functions
• The Reset button may not affect security or access control
devices. These points may be included in the supervisory or
monitor display queues.

Control or
n/a Buzzer The buzzer on the CPU sounds to alert the operator to off-
normal system conditions, such as:
• Active alarms
• Active test or disabled zones
• Active fault conditions
• Active monitor conditions
The buzzer sounds a pattern associated with each event as
determined by the market place settings.
Alarm: 3-3-3 pattern
Supervisory: 2-2 pattern
Trouble: 15 pulses per minute
Monitor: 3-3-3 pattern

Creating a status report

Use the Status command to create reports of off-normal points,
or to determine the status of points in a security partition. The
Status command generates a list that you can view on the LCD
module or print on a local printer.
The Status Menu lets you choose the following reports:
• All active points
• Alarm points
• Supervisory points
• Trouble points
• Monitor points
• Test points
• Disabled points
• Output points
• Security points
On the Security Status Menu, you can choose between Partition
and Holdup status reports.
To create a status report:
1. Press the Command Menus button, then choose Status.

2. Choose the type of list you want to generate.
3. Enter the target panel’s 2-digit address (PP).
—or—
Choose a partition from the Partition List.
4. Do one of the following:
Choose Display if you want to view the list on the LCD
module (either 3-LCD or 3-LCDXL1).
Choose Print Locally, then select a printer, if you want to
send the list to a printer connected to the local panel.

Disabling groups
A group is an object created during system programming.
Groups are required in order to execute certain system functions,
but groups bear no physical relationship to the system.
For example, smoke detectors can be assigned to the same zone
group even though they are not attached to the same wire run.
Disabling a group isolates the group from the system just as if it
were a hardware component. Disabling a zone group disables
each of the devices in the group individually. Disabling other
groups only disables the group response.
There are several types of group:
• And group
• Matrix group
• Service group
• Guard patrol group
• Zone group
• Instruction text group
When you disable a group, the CPU lights the Disable LED on
the LCD module and places a Disabled Active event in the
trouble queue.
Note: Before disabling a group, you need to know which devices
are included in the group. You should be able to get a list of
logical groups and their members from the company that
installed the system.
To disable a group:
1. Press the Command Menus button, then choose Disable.

2. Choose Group.
3. Choose the group type.
4. Select the group from the list.
5. If prompted, enter a valid user access level password.

Enabling groups
A group is an object created during system programming.
Groups are required in order to execute certain system functions,
but groups bear no physical relationship to the system.
For example, smoke detectors can be assigned to the same zone
group even though they are not attached to the same wire run.
Enabling a group establishes the group as part of the system just
as if it were a hardware component. When enabled, any changes
in state that occurred while the group was disabled are
processed. Enabling a zone group enables each of the devices in
the group individually. Enabling other groups only enables their
group response.
There are several types of group:
• And group
• Matrix group
• Service group
• Guard patrol group
• Zone group
• Instruction text group
To enable a group:
1. Press the Command Menus button, then choose Enable.

2. Choose Group.
3. Choose the group type.
4. Select the group from the list.

Disabling hardware components

Disabling a hardware component isolates the component from
the system. While disabled, a component’s state changes are not
processed. For example, if a disabled smoke detector changes to
the alarm state, the panel will not go into alarm. The panel will
go into alarm if you enable the disabled smoke detector and the
smoke detector is still in the alarm state.
Hardware components include:
• Devices (input and output circuits, detectors, and modules)
• Rail modules
• Buttons
• LEDs
When you disable a hardware component, the CPU lights the
Disable LED on the LCD module and places a Disabled Active
event in the trouble queue.
Note: To disable a component you need the component’s logical
address. You can get component’s logical addresses from an
SDU Objects report.
To disable a hardware component:
1. Press the Command Menus button, then choose Disable.

• Choose Device to disable: input circuits, output circuits,
detectors, or modules
• Choose Card to disable: rail modules or control / display
modules
• Choose Button to disable: control / display module buttons
• Choose LED to disable: control / display module LEDs
3. Enter the target component’s logical address.

Enabling hardware components

Enabling a hardware component re-establishes a disabled
component as part of the system. When enabled, any changes in
state that occurred while the component was disabled are
processed. For example, if you enable a smoke detector that
changed to the alarm state while it was disabled the panel will go
into alarm.
Hardware components consist of:
• Devices (input and output circuits, detectors, and modules)
• Rail modules
• Buttons
• LEDs
To enable a disabled component you need the component’s
logical address. You can get a disabled component’s logical
address from the disabled points list.
Note: All components are enabled at startup, unless programmed
otherwise. The LCD module does not indicate a trouble for any
points disabled at startup and points disabled at startup are not
listed on the disabled points list.
To enable a hardware component:
1. Press the Command Menus button, then choose Enable.

• Choose Device to enable: input circuits, output circuits,
detectors, or modules
• Choose Card to enable: rail modules or control / display
modules
• Choose Button to enable: control / display module buttons
• Choose LED to enable: control / display module LEDs
3. Enter the component’s logical address.

Arming security partitions

A ‘Partition’ can comprise A security partition is a group of devices intended to secure a
any combination of physical area. When you arm a partition, you instruct the system
security, fire, supervisory, to monitor those devices for armed alarm events.
and monitor device types
as well as system pseudo Partitions can be armed for two states: Stay and Away. Arming to
points. Note that only Stay causes the system to monitor only those devices on the
security device types will perimeter of the protected area. This leaves you free to move
generate security alarm about inside the partition. Arming to Away causes the system to
events. Partition alarm monitor all devices, both perimeter and interior.
events are not annunciated
on the 3-LCD, they only get Before arming the partition, the system checks all the devices in
annunciated in FireWorks, the partition to ensure that they’re in the normal state. Typically,
Keypad Display units, or as if a device is off-normal it may prevent the partition from being
activated LEDs on 3-ANNs armed. However, you can elect to disable the off-normal device
and Envoy. Non-security and arm the remaining devices in the partition.
device types will not trigger
Partition Alarm events. When commanded to conditionally arm, the partition may arm
There is virtually no limit on directly or may generate an error or warning under the following
the number of ‘objects’ that conditions:
can be assigned to a single
partition. • The Partition is configured to issue a warning (not error) for
non-security objects that are “off-normal”. If non-security
objects are configured to issue an error on Partition arming,
then the Partition will always issue an error message and will
not arm conditionally when any one single error device is
“off-normal”. When this occurs, the Partition can only be
‘forced’ into an arm state.
• The total number of “off-normal” non-security devices plus
the total number of bypassed or disabled regular security
devices do not exceed the maximum number of
bypassed/disabled devices (as set in the 3-SDU.)
• When security devices are in a “Test” condition (see Testing
Security Devices), the Partition will arm with no warning
even if the number of devices in “Test” exceed the 3-SDU
setting for maximum number of bypassed/disabled devices.
Partitions can be commanded to arm unconditionally (i.e., forced
arm) irrespective of the error or warning conditions presented,
via the following methods:
• An SDU Rule activated by a switch on an EST3 panel.
• An unconditional arm command is issued via FireWorks.
This also requires the proper user access level.
Note: Issuing an unconditional forced arm command to a
Partition may result in undesirable false security alarm events.
After choosing to arm the partition, the system displays a list of
partitions. Scroll through this list and select the partition you
wish to arm.

Note: 3-LCD and 3-LCDXL1 security commands are optional.

Cabinet configuration settings determine whether security
commands appear on the panel menus.
To arm a security partition:
1. Press the Command Menus button, then choose Security.

2. Choose Partition.
3. Choose the type of arming you want: Partition Away or
Partition Stay.
4. Scroll through the Partition List and choose the partition you
want to arm.

Disarming security partitions

A security partition is a group of devices intended to secure a
physical area. When you disarm a partition, you instruct the
system to stop monitoring those devices for armed alarm events.
When a partition is disarmed the system generates disarmed
alarm events, except for 24Hour security devices which always
generate armed alarm events.
When you choose the disarm command, the system checks all
the devices in the partition to ensure that they’re in a normal
state. If a device is in an off-normal condition while the partition
is armed, the panel will restore the armed event and activate the
disarmed event.
After you choose the disarm command, the system displays a list
of partitions. You scroll through this list and select the partition
you wish to disarm.
Note: Security commands are optional. Project configuration
settings determine whether security commands appear on the
panel menus.
To disarm a security partition:

3. Choose Partition Disarm.
want to disarm.

Resetting security partitions

A security partition is a group of devices intended to secure a
physical area. When you reset a partition, you instruct the system
to update the status of the devices, then update the event
messages in all annunciator message queues.
When you choose the reset command, the system checks all the
devices in the partition to determine their current state. Event
messages previously stored in message queues are deleted, and
new event messages are added as required by the current state of
the devices.
After you choose the reset command, the system displays a list
of partitions. Only disarmed partitions can be reset. You scroll
through this list and select the partition you wish to reset.
Note: Security commands are optional. Cabinet configuration
and card access settings determine whether security commands
appear on the panel menus. The Partition Reset command has no
effect on fire alarm devices.
To restore a security partition:

3. Choose Partition Reset.
want to reset.

Bypassing security devices

When you bypass a security device, the system suppresses the
device’s security alarm events, but continues to process all other
events (e.g. Tamper, Fault, and Maintenance). For example, say
a loading bay door is damaged so that the door contact cannot be
closed. This prevents arming of the partition. As a temporary
measure you can bypass the door contact to make it possible to
arm the partition.
Devices can only be bypassed and unbypassed while the
partition is disarmed. When armed, you cannot bypass or remove
bypasses.
While bypassed, the device’s alarm events are not processed.
The panel will go into alarm if you unbypass the device while it
is still in an alarm state.
Security points may be bypassed and disabled at the same time.
In this state, the disable takes priority and only the disable state
is annunciated. When the point becomes enabled, the bypass
indication will once again be displayed.
Note: To bypass a device you need the device’s logical address.
You can get device’s logical addresses from an SDU Objects
report. In addition, the SDU includes a setting that defines how
many points in a partition can be bypassed and still allow arming
of that partition.
To bypass a security device:

2. Choose Device.
3. Choose Bypass.
4. Enter the logical address of the device.

Removing bypasses from security devices

When you remove a bypass from a security device, the system
resumes processing the device’s alarm events. The panel will go
into alarm if you remove a bypass from a device while it is in an
active state (i.e., in its otherwise alarm position).
To unbypass a device, you need the device’s logical address.
You can get the logical address from the Disabled Points list.
To remove a bypass from a security device:

2. Choose Device.
3. Choose Remove Bypass.
4. Enter the logical address of the device.

Guard patrol groups

Guard patrol groups are used to monitor the activities of security
guards. A security guard can be required to walk any one of a
number of predetermined tours. During each tour, the guard must
activate guard patrol stations that are located along the tour.
When a guard activates a station too early, too late, or out of
sequence, the LCD module displays a Guard Patrol Active
message in the alarm message queue. The operator can press the
Details button to determine which station reported in.
Starting a guard patrol

Activating a guard patrol group starts the system’s early, late,
and out of sequence sensing mechanisms. If a station reports in
early, late, or out of sequence, the guard patrol sensing
mechanisms stop and the tour is ended.
To activate a guard patrol:
1. Press the Command Menus button, then choose Activate.

2. Choose Guard Patrol Route.
3. Select the guard patrol route from the list.
Restoring a guard patrol

When a guard patrol tour ends because a guard patrol station was
not activated at the proper time, you must restore the Guard
Patrol group to which the station belonged.
To restore a guard patrol:
1. Press the Command Menus button then choose Restore.

2. Choose Guard Patrol Route.
3. Select the guard patrol route from the list.

Changing the smoke detector sensitivity level

Smoke detectors can operate using two levels of sensitivity,
called primary sensitivity and alternate sensitivity. The system
configures smoke detectors to use their primary sensitivity level
(typically, less sensitive) during normal business hours. A time
control then reconfigures the smoke detectors to use their
alternate sensitivity level (typically, more sensitive) after hours
when the premises are unoccupied.
You can use menu commands to manually switch between
sensitivity levels as required. To change to the alternate
sensitivity level, you activate alternate sensitivity. To change to
primary sensitivity level, you restore primary sensitivity.
Note: You should be able to get a list of the primary and
alternate sensitivity setting for each smoke detector from the
company that installed the system.
To change to alternate sensitivity level:

2. Choose Alt. Sensitivity.
To change to primary sensitivity level:
1. Press the Command Menus button, then choose Restore.

2. Choose Primary Sensitivity.

Changing event message routing

Each device in the system is configured with a primary and
alternate message routing. When a device in the system changes
state, the panel connected to the device produces an event. The
panel distributes the event according to the active message
routing setting that is active at the time.
Activating event alternate message routing

Activating the alternate event message routing directs the panel
to use the alternate routing destinations for any device that
changes state.
To activate event alternate message routing:

2. Choose Alt Message Route
Restoring event primary message routing

Restoring the primary message directs the panel to use the
primary routing destinations for any device that changes state.
To restore event primary message routing:
1. Press the Command Menus button, then choose Restore.

2. Choose Primary Msg Route

Changing the output state of a relay or LED

Use the Control Output command to change the output state of a
relay or LED.
• A relay module can be On (energized) or Off (deenergized).
In the energized state, the relay module’s normally-open
contacts are held closed and the normally-closed contacts are
held open.
• An LED can be off, on, blink slow, or blink fast. The fast
and slow blinking rate is determined by the marketplace.
Changing the output state of a relay or LED requires entering a
command priority level.
Priority Description
Set This priority overrides low, medium, and high
priority instructions and forces the device to the
desired state. The set priority does not reset the
device’s priority counters.
Latch This priority overrides low, medium, and high
priority instructions and forces the device to the
desired state. The latch priority does reset the
device’s priority counters.
Low This priority forces the device to the desired state
and adjusts the low priority counter accordingly.
Medium This priority forces a device to the desired state
and adjusts the medium priority counter
accordingly.
High This priority forces a device to the desired state
and adjusts the high priority counter accordingly.
To change the output state of a relay or LED:

2. Choose the device type.
3. Select the desired output state.
4. Select the priority this command has over other commands
affecting the same device.
5. Enter the target device’s 8-digit logical address
(PPCCDDDD).

Creating reports
The Reports command generates a report that you can view on
the LCD module (either 3-LCD or 3-LCDXL1) or print on the
local printer. Three types of report are available:
• Device Maintenance
• History
• Revisions
• Modcom Compliance
Device Maintenance: a list of detectors and the amount of
environmental compensation they have used. You can choose to
list devices in several ways.
History: a chronological list of events that have occurred on a
panel since the panel was placed into service or since the last
time the history was cleared.
Two versions of the History report are available: History With
Text, and History Without Text. History With Text only includes
devices for the targeted panel in the report. History Without Text
includes devices for all panels in the report.
Revisions: a list of all the hardware and software components
installed in a panel and their revision levels.
Modcom Compliance: lists the NFPA 72 compliance level of
all 3-MODCOM modules in a given panel.
To create a Device Maintenance report:
1. Press the Command Menus button, then choose Report.

2. Choose device maintenance.
• Choose Dirty Devices >80% then enter the target panel
address (PP).
• Choose Dirty Devices >20% then enter the target panel
address (PP).
• Choose Single Device then enter the target device address
(PPCCDDDD).
• Choose Devices On A Card to get the compensation level for
all the detectors on a single loop then enter the target loop’s
logical address (PPCCL).
4. Send the list to the display or to the printer. If you choose to
send the list to the printer, choose Printer 1 if the printer is
connected to port 1 or Printer 2 if connected to port 2.

Note: If the device maintenance report is being run on a

Addressable Analog Driver Controller, use the following table to
determine sensitivity levels.
Addressable Analog Driver Controller device maintenance report sensitivity levels

Alarm Alarm Alarm Trouble
Type Trouble Normal
level 1 level 2 level 3 short
Photo 400 520 - 1610 1710 2050 2390 N/A
Ion 400 600 - 1710 1810 1960 2110 N/A
Thermal 400 500 - 1900 N/A N/A 2000 N/A
Monitor 600 750 - 1300 N/A N/A 1400 1800
Control 600 750 - 1300 N/A N/A N/A 1400
For additional information, refer to the device’s installation

sheet.

To create a History report:

2. Choose History.
3. Choose History With Text or History Without Text.
To create a Revisions report:

2. Choose Revision Levels.
To create a Modcom Compliance report:

2. Choose Modcom Compliance.

Setting the system time and date

Set the system time and date to configure the panel’s time of day
and date reference. Set the system time and date when the panel
is first placed in service.
The system time of day is set in 24-hour format (HHMMSS),
where: HH is the hour, MM is the minutes, and SS is the
seconds.
For example:
Enter this value

(HHMMSS) To set this time
000000 12 midnight
010000 1 a.m.
115900 11:59 a.m.
120000 12 noon
130000 1 p.m.
235930 11:59:30 p.m.
To set the system time of day reference:
1. Press the Command Menus button, then choose Program.

2. Choose Change Time.
3. Enter the time in 24-hour format (HHMMSS)
The system date is set in a month/date/year format
(MMDDYYYY), where: MM is the month number, DD is the
date, and YYYY is the year. For example, to set the date for
January 1, 1999, enter 01011999.
To change the system date reference:

2. Choose Change Date.
3. Enter the date (MMDDYYYY).

Changing user access level passwords

You should change the access level passwords from their default
values to prevent unauthorized access to system. You may not
use the same password for more than one access level. The
system default passwords are as follows:
Access Default Access level

Level password required to change
Level 1 1111 Level 2
Caution: Before changing a password, be sure to write it down

on a sheet of paper and store it in a safe place.
To change a user access level password:

2. Choose Edit Password.
3. Select the user access level password you want to change.
4. Enter the new 4-digit password.

Restarting a panel
Restarting a panel initiates the panel’s start up processes without
first turning off the operating power.
To restart a panel:

2. Choose Restart.
3. Choose whether to restart a single panel or all panels on the
network. If you choose to restart a single panel, then enter
the target panel’s 2-digit address (PP).

Scheduling holidays
Holidays vary from installation to installation and may change
from year to year. By scheduling holidays, a panel can activate a
time-controlled event based on whether the day is a scheduled
holiday.
Note: Each panel can store up to 255 holidays.
To schedule a holiday:

2. Choose Edit Holiday List.
3. Choose Add Holiday.
4. Enter the holiday’s month and date (MMDD).
To delete a holiday from the list:

3. Select Delete Holiday.
4. Select the holiday from the list.
To change a holiday:

3. Choose Edit Holiday.
4. Select a holiday from the list.
5. Enter the new month and date (MMDD).

Clearing the panel history file

Clearing the panel’s history file:
• Resets the alarm history counter on the LCD module
• Erases the list of events that occurred on the panel since the
panel was placed into service or the last time the history file
was cleared.
Caution: Clearing the panel history file means that all history
data for the panel is permanently deleted. Entering panel 99
clears history on all panels in the network. This command
requires a level 4 password, and is for use by an authorized
service technician only.
To clear the alarm history:
1. Press the Command Menus button.

2. Choose Program, then choose Clear History.
3. Enter the panel number.

Testing alarm input devices

In order to test an alarm input device, the device must be part of
a service group. Service groups allow alarm input devices to be
activated without placing the system into alarm. The protected
premises may be divided into more than one service group to
make testing possible without leaving the entire premises
unprotected.
Without any additional programming, you can test alarm input
devices by:
• Putting the service group into test
• Activating each of the devices in the service group
• Verifying each of the devices show up on the active points
list
• Canceling the test
Note: Putting a service group into test introduces a Service
Group Active event in the trouble queue. You can press the
Details button to verify which service group is in test.
To put a service group into test:
1. Press the Command Menus button, then choose Test.

2. Choose Start Test.
3. Select the service group.
To cancel the test:

2. Choose Cancel Test.
3. Select the service group that is in test.
Note: A service group will automatically time-out and cancel
after approximately 1 hour of inactivity.

Testing security input devices

The information provided in section “Testing alarm input
devices” applies equally to all security input devices. However,
there are certain nuances that apply to security devices only.
With the service group activated, security devices will generate
Test Events only in accordance with their expected operation
relative to their armed conditions.
The following example applies equally for all security device
types:
For Security Interior devices, if the partition is disarmed or
armed stay, Test Events will not be generated on the activation
of the device. If the partition is armed away, Test Events will be
generated on the activation of the device. However, there is a
slight exception. If, after activating the Service Group, the
Security Interior device is activated (and not restored) while the
partition is disarmed, a Test Event will be generated immediately
when the partition is armed even if the armed state is stay.
The exception in the above example happens as a result of a
status update that occurs for all partition devices when partitions
are armed. On evaluating the results of the status update, EST3
generates the Test Events after recognizing the active state of the
security device with respect to the active state of the Service
Group irrespective of the device type and armed conditions. This
applies to all security device types.
Another rule that applies for security devices is that partitions
must be disarmed and reset in order to clear all security Test
Events from the Monitor queues in both EST3 and FireWorks.
Canceling the service group test is not sufficient.

Testing Signature devices

From the LCD module you can place a Signature device into the
alarm, prealarm, or trouble condition for testing. Signature
devices include all sensors, modules, and security devices. To
test a Signature device, the device must be connected to a 3-
SSDC1 or 3-SDDC1.
For latching devices, you must reset the panel to restore the
tested device to its normal state. Nonlatching devices restore
automatically without resetting the panel.
WARNING: The AlarmTest command puts the device into alarm

condition and activates its programmed alarm responses.
To test a Signature device:

2. Choose Signature Device Test.
3. Choose Alarm, etc, Prealarm, etc, or Trouble.
4. Enter the device address and press the enter button.
5. When prompted, enter a valid user access level password.

Testing the panel lamps and panel sounder

From the LCD module you can test all the LEDs on the panel
and the panel sounder. Performing a lamp test lights all LEDs on
the panel and turns on the panel sounder for 10 seconds. After
the test is finished, the LCD returns to its normal state display.
To perform a lamp teat:

2. Choose Lamp Test.


Chapter 3
3-ASU operating instructions
Summary
indicators provided on the 3-ASU Audio Source Unit. The
3-ASU is the control point for all the audio signals distributed by
the system.
Content
Operation the Audio Source Unit • 3.4
Event signaling • 3.4
Basic response tasks • 3.5
Paging sequence • 3.5
Phone page • 3.5
Paging with the remote microphone • 3.6
Optional audio zone controls • 3.7

1 2
3
Paging
4
Ready to
Page
5
All Call
6
All Call
Minus
7
Phone
Page
8
EVAC
9
Alert
Figure 3-1: 3-ASU controls and indicators

3-ASU controls and indicators (see Figure 3-1)

Control or
Index Indicator Functional Description
1 Push-To-Talk Push the PTT switch and wait for the Ready to Page LED
(PTT) Switch (item 4) to light steadily before making an announcement.
2 Paging Speak into the microphone to make an announcement.
Microphone
3 Page Level Meter Indicates paging volume. When paging, speak at a level that
causes the far right LED to only flicker occasionally.
4 Ready to Page Green LED flashes during pre-announcement tone, then is on
LED steady when the system is ready to page.
5 All Call Green LED on indicates the 3-ASU is in the All Call mode.
Switch/LED Pressing the All Call switch directs the page to all areas of the
facility. To exit the All Call mode, press the switch a second
time or press the All Call Minus, EVAC, or Alert switches.
6 All Call Minus Green LED on indicates the 3-ASU is in the All Call Minus
Switch/LED mode. Pressing the All Call Minus switch directs the page to
the areas of the facility which have not been automatically
selected to receive the EVAC or Alert tone/message. To exit
the All Call Minus mode, press the switch a second time or
press the All Call, EVAC, or Alert switches.
7 Phone Page Green LED on indicates the 3-ASU is in the Phone Page
Switch/LED mode. Pressing the Phone Page switch replaces the paging
microphone (item 2) with the firefighter’s telephone system.
Individuals in remote areas of the facility can then issue a
page via the firefighter’s telephone system. All phone paging
is under the direct control of the 3-ASU operator. Press the
switch a second time to disconnect the Phone Page mode.
8 EVAC Switch/LED Green LED on indicates the 3-ASU is in the EVAC mode.
Pressing the EVAC switch directs the page to areas of the
facility which are automatically receiving the evacuation
tone/message. To exit the EVAC mode, press the switch a
second time or press the All Call, All Call Minus, or Alert
switches.
9 Alert Switch/LED Green LED on indicates the 3-ASU is in the Alert mode.
Pressing the Alert switch directs the page to areas of the
facility which are automatically receiving the Alert
tone/message. To exit the Alert mode, press the switch a
second time or press the All Call, All Call Minus, or EVAC
switches.

Operation the Audio Source Unit

The function of a life safety system is to alert people occupying a
facility of an emergency. The Audio Source Unit is designed to
permit rapid selection and paging to the affected areas of the
facility. For example, the page signal automatically overrides
any other signals.
Event signaling
In large facilities, the people most effected by an emergency
should be instructed to evacuate the area immediately, and
people not in immediate danger should receive an alert signal.
Since most large facilities have a significant number of transient
occupants, the most effective signaling is a combination of
attention getting tones, followed by instructional messages.
The information provided here is general in nature. Each facility
is unique. The life safety system in your facility has been
designed by fire safety professionals to meet the specific
requirements of the fire codes in your location. Please refer to
the site-specific instructions provider by the installer to
determine the exact operation of your system.
Evacuation (EVAC) Signaling

The evacuation signal notifies facility occupants that they are in
immediate danger, and must evacuate the area. Evacuation
signals can take the form of bells, horns, tones, and audio
messages. Accompanying the audio message is a visual
notification appliance, typically a flashing strobe light.
The system automatically activates all the evacuation signals in
the affected areas of the facility.
Alert Signaling (optional)

The alert signal notifies the occupants of a facility that: an
emergency event is in progress; they are not in immediate
danger; and they should prepare to evacuate, but not to evacuate
at this time. Alert signals are typically tones or audio messages.
The system automatically activates the alert signals (if
programmed in your system) in the affected areas of the facility.
Page Messages
The most reliable source of information about an emergency
event comes from the individual who is in charge of the facility
during the emergency. This individual is typically the fire chief
or facility manager. The page function permits the individual in
charge to make announcements to selected portions of the

building, advising occupants of what actions to take for safe

egress, etc.
Basic response tasks

The basic tasks in responding to an emergency event are:
1. Use the All Call function to announce the arrival of the fire
department, making any necessary announcements.
2. Use the Page to Evac function to reinforce the evacuation of
the occupants in areas receiving the evacuation signal. As an
example, occupants may be directed to follow the evacuation
plan, not to use the elevators, etc.
3. Use the Page to Alert function to notify the areas not in
immediate danger to prepare to evacuate, or that people in
the evacuation area may be entering their area as an area of
refuge.
4. Use the All Call Minus switch to make announcements to
areas of the facility not receiving the Evac or Alert signals,
as required. Stairwells are typical areas accessed using the
All Call Minus page function.
5. The zone page controls may be used to manually select
paging areas.
Paging sequence
Select the areas to receive the page by pressing the appropriate
page function switch(s). The switch’s integral LED will be on
steady when the system is ready to receive the page.
Press the PTT switch on the microphone. The Ready to Page
LED will flash while the pre-announcement tone is sounding.
Begin the announcement once the Ready to Page LED is on
steady. Adjust your voice level so that the far right LED on the
volume meter only flickers occasionally. Release the PTT switch
when the announcement is finished. The system will turn off the
page, and return to its pre-page condition after a short delay.
Note: The local microphone has priority over a telephone page,
which has priority over a remote microphone page.
Each installation is customized. Please refer to your site-specific
documentation to determine which areas of your facility
automatically receives the page, or how to select the areas to
receive the page.
Phone page
If your system is equipped with a firefighter’s telephone circuit,
you can connect the telephone circuit to the page function by

pressing the Phone Page switch. This permits an individual

talking on the firefighter’s telephone system to make
announcements over the paging system.
Establish the phone connection over the Firefighter’s Telephone
Control Unit. Select the areas to receive the page the same way
as if it were to be originated using the microphone. Instruct the
individual who is remote paging to begin speaking after the pre-
announcement tone has finished. Press the Phone Page Switch
and begin the phone page. The phone page is under complete
control of the 3-ASU/FT, and may be interrupted at any time by
pressing the Phone Page switch a second time.
Paging with the remote microphone

If your system is equipped with the remote paging microphone,
it may be used to issue pages throughout the facility. The remote
microphone page is automatically overridden by any pages
issued by the local microphone in the Audio Source Unit or a
phone page.
Each remote microphone installation is customized. Please refer
to your site-specific documentation to determine which areas of
your facility automatically receives the page, or how to select the
areas to receive the page.

Optional audio zone controls

The system can provide total manual control of the paging
signals. This permits the individual in charge to extend the
coverage area of the page beyond the pre-programmed areas.
Your system may have the option of manually directing the page
message using one of the types of control/display modules
shown in Figure 3-2. The specific type and location of these
displays will vary, however the basic functions are similar.
Figure 3-2: Control/display module options
Pressing a zone select switch on the displays shown in Figure

3-2A and Figure 3-2B adds that zone to any zones selected by
the page function switches on the Audio Source Unit. The LED
in the upper left corner of each floor’s control/display module is
on when the floor is selected. The LED in the lower left corner
on display B is used to annunciate trouble on an amplifier or
notification appliance circuit associated with the zone.
The control/display module shown in Figure 3-2C is used to
manually direct the Evac and Alert signals as well as the page

message to individual areas of the facility. The LEDs can be

programmed to follow any automatic system responses as well
as manual audio zone selections.
The control/display module shown in Figure 3-2D is used to
manually direct the Evac signal and pages to individual areas of
the facility. The center switch is inoperative. This configuration
is typically used in facilities where the alert signal is
automatically sent to all areas not receiving the evacuation
signal. The LEDs follow any automatic system responses as well
as manual audio zone selections. The Status LED can be
programmed to indicate the trouble state of the zone amplifier.

Chapter 4
3-FTCU operating instructions
Summary
indicators provided on the 3-FTCU Firefighter Telephone
Control Unit.
Content
Operation • 4.4
Normal condition • 4.4
Trouble condition • 4.4
Answering incoming calls • 4.5
Disconnecting calls • 4.7
Paging by phone • 4.7

1 2 3 4
5
CO NNEC T R EV IEW P END IN G A CK
0 Calls Pend ing
6
Unit: ok
D IS CO NNE CT R EV IE W CO NNE C TED

7
8
To Answe r ca ll, L IFT PHON E HANDSET a nd ,
P ressCONNECT to se lectca ll pend ing
P ressREV IEW PEND ING to scro llpend ing for connection
P ressACK to silence phone ca ll-in buzzer
P ressD ISCONNECT to term inate a ca ll
P ressREV IEW CONNECTED to se lectac tive ca lls for d isco nn ect
Figure 4-1: 3-FTCU controls and indicators

3-FTCU controls and indicators (see Figure 4-1)

Control or
1 Master telephone The master telephone handset permits the operators to
handset communicate with dedicated firefighter telephone stations
which are strategically located throughout the facility.
2 Connect switch The connect switch connects the incoming calls to the master
telephone handset.
3 Review pending The review pending switch scrolls the list of pending incoming
switch calls.
4 ACKnowledge The acknowledge switch silences the call-in buzzer.
switch
5 LCD display The LCD display shows the status of the firefighter telephone
system. The display is backlit in the alarm mode and when an
incoming call is received.
6 Disconnect switch The disconnect switch is used to remove the connected phone
which is shown in reversed text on the bottom of the display.
7 Review connected The review connected switch scrolls the list of connected calls
switch on the bottom of the display.
8 Instruction placard This card is a set of phone operating instructions.

Operation
The operational status of the phone system can be determined by
using the 3-FTCU LCD display.
Normal condition
When there is no activity on the system the screen appears as
shown in Figure 4-2. The top line indicates that there are no
incoming calls pending.
0 Calls Pending Pending calls counter
Emergency Telephone Title block
Unit: OK Phone system status
Figure 4-2: Normal display
The bottom line indicates the 3-FTCU unit status. “OK” means
that there are no troubles with the phone system.
Trouble condition
When there is a fault on the firefighter telephone system, a fault
indication will appear on the bottom of the display, as shown in
Figure 4-3. Local faults may appear on the second line of the
display. Circuit faults require the use of a 3-LCD or 3-LCDXL1
module to find the specific cause of the problem.

Handset Off Hook Local trouble indicator
Emergency Telephone Title block
Unit: Trouble Phone system status
Figure 4-3: Trouble display

Answering incoming calls

An incoming call is initiated when a firefighter telephone is
taken off-hook or plugged into a remote telephone jack. The
caller hears a tone, indicating the connection is good, and the
call-in buzzer is activated at the 3-FTCU.
Display
The number of incoming calls is always listed on the top line of
the display. The identification of the incoming call appears in
reversed text on the second line of the display, as shown in
Figure 4-4. Should multiple calls be pending, the reversed text
display will slowly sequence through the incoming calls.
First FL stairwell Pending calls list (multiple calls

are displayed sequentially)
0 Calls Connected Connected calls counter
Figure 4-4: Incoming call display
To answer an incoming call
1. Silence the call-in buzzer by pressing the ACK

(acknowledge) switch. The buzzer will re-sound each time a
new incoming call is received.
2. If multiple calls are shown in the display, stop the call
identifier sequencing by pressing the Review Pending switch
once. Each additional activation of the Review Pending
switch manually steps the display through the list of
incoming calls. When the desired call appears on the
pending calls identification line, stop stepping through the
calls.
3. To answer the selected call, press the Connect switch. The
call identifier will move from the pending calls identification
line of the display to the connected call list at the bottom of
the display, as shown in Figure 4-5. Once connected, you
may begin your conversation.

Second FL stairwell Pending calls list
First FL stairwell Connected calls list
Figure 4-5: One connected call and one pending call
Notice in Figure 4-5 that the calls connected counter

indicates one call connected, the first floor stairwell phone,
and the pending call counter decremented to show the one
remaining incoming call from the second floor stairwell
phone.
4. To add the second floor stairwell phone to the conversation,
press the Connect switch again. Because there is only one
call pending, there is no need to scroll through incoming
calls.

Second FL stairwell
First FL stairwell Connected calls list (reverse
text shows the selected call)
Figure 4-6: Two connected calls
The connected calls counter indicates that two phone circuits are
connected, and both calls now appear in the connected calls
identification list. The two stairwell phones and the 3-FTCU
master handset are connected together in a party line connection,
and may communicate with each other.
Up to five phone circuits can be connected in a party line
connection. A full complement of connected circuits is shown in
Figure 4-7.


Second FL stairwell
First FL stairwell
Engineering office Connected calls list (reverse
Penthouse text shows the selected call)
First FL stairwell
Figure 4-7: Five connected calls
Disconnecting calls
When a calling party is ready to hang up or remove a phone from
its jack, the operator should disconnect the call as described
below.
To disconnect a call
1. Press the Review Connected switch until the call to be

disconnected is displayed in reversed text. In Figure 4-7, the
Penthouse phone is selected.
2. Press the Disconnect switch. The call will be removed from
the connected calls list and added to the pending calls list as
shown in Figure 4-8 below. When the remote phone is hung
up or removed from the phone jack, it will be removed from
the calls pending list.

Penthouse Pending calls list
Second FL stairwell
First FL stairwell
Engineering office Connected calls list (reverse
text indicates the selected call)
First FL stairwell
Figure 4-8: One pending call and four connected calls
3. Hanging up the master handset in the 3-FTCU transfers all

connected calls to the calls pending list. If the remote phones
have not been hung-up within 20 seconds, the call in buzzer
will resound.
Paging by phone
The phone page feature of the 3-ASU audio source unit permits
individuals with access to a remote firefighter telephone to make
announcements over the emergency voice/alarm

communications system, under the supervision of the Audio

Source Unit operator.
1. Establish a phone connection with the remote phone which is
to issue the page.
2. Set up the areas to receive the page using one of the ASU
page area functions and/or manual switch selection of
additional audio zones.
3. When ready to begin the paging sequence, the ASU operator
should press the Phone Page switch.
4. Begin the announcement. The 3-ASU operator can monitor
the page using the master handset.

Appendix A
System addresses
Summary
This appendix provides a quick reference for interpreting the
mapping of system addresses.
Content
Address format • A.2
LRM addresses • A.4
Control / display module addresses • A.8
Device addresses • A.10
EST3 System Operation Manual A.1

System addresses
Address format
Tip: To determine a local The system derives the addresses it assigns from the panel’s
panel's cabinet number, use cabinet number and the LRM’s location within the panel (see
the 3-LCD command menu Figure A-1). The basic address format is PPCCDDDD, where:
to get the status on all the
active points on the panel. PP is the panel’s cabinet number. The cabinet number is
When prompted for a panel assigned when the installer downloads the CPU database into the
number, enter 00. The panel panel.
returns the startup response
point's logical address. The CC is the LRM’s slot address. The cabinet number and the slot
first two numbers of the address make up the LRM’s logical address.
logical address is the cabinet DDDD is the device’s point address. The LRM’s logical address
number.
and device’s point address make up the device or circuit’s logical
address.
The CRC Card Reader Controller and KPDISP Keypad Display
are devices supported by a 3-SAC module. However, they also
act as independent processors, and have their own points and
pseudo points. For this reason, their device numbers are further
subdivided.
You can think of a SAC device as having this address format:
PPCCSSDD: SS is the CRC or KPDISP device number, as
assigned during LRM configuration. DD is a point or pseudo
point within the device.
A.2 EST3 System Operation Manual

System addresses
Signature detectors Signature modules

01020001 - 01020125 01020126 - 01020250
Cabinet #1 0102 01360129 01370001
B B S A A SP B B
+ - H + - MW + -
KR
SIGA1 SIGA1 1 SIGA1
O UTPUT MOD ULE
SIGA2 2 SIGA2 SIGA2

SP
B B MW A A S B B
- + KR - + H - +
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7
01360152 01370012
Figure A-1: Addressing example

System addresses
LRM addresses
Figure A-2, Figure A-3, and Figure A-4 show the logical
addresses that the system assigns to LRMs based on the panel
configurations.

System addresses
PP00 PP01 PP02 PP03 PP04 PP05
N C N N C N
- N N C N
O C O A C O C
TROUB LE ALARM SU P
TB1
Rail 1
Available in
1-, 2-, and 3-rail J1
cabinets
R C R C AUXIL IARY PO WER

NE TW ORK AU DIO AU DIO AU DIO AU DIO
OUT B IN R T T O R T T O 1 2
A A B IN B A IN A OUT B OU T
X X S M X X S M
+ - + - + - + - + - + - 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2

PP07 PP06
Rail 2
Available in
2- and 3-rail
cabinets
PP08 PP09 PP10 PP11 PP12 PP13 PP14
Rail 3
Available only
in 3-rail cabinets
Figure A-2: LRM addresses for 3-CHAS7, 3-ASU/FT, 3-CHAS7 configuration

System addresses
N C N N C N
- N N C N
O C O A C O C
TROUB LE ALARM SU P
TB1
Rail 1
Available in
1-, 2-, and 3-rail J1
cabinets
NE TW ORK R C R C AUXIL IARY PO WER

AU DIO AU DIO AU DIO AU DIO
X X S M X X S M
+ - + - + - + - + - + - 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2

PP06 PP07 PP08 PP09 PP10
Rail 2
Available in
2- and 3-rail
cabinets
PP39 PP40 PP41 PP42
Rail 3
Available only
in 3-rail cabinets
Figure A-3: LRM addresses for 3-CHAS7, 3-ASU/CHAS4, 3-CHAS7 configuration

System addresses
N C N N C N
- N N C N
O C O A C O C
TROUB LE ALARM SU P
TB1
Rail 1
Available in
1-, 2-, and 3-rail J1
cabinets
NE TW ORK R C R C AUXIL IARY PO WER

AU DIO AU DIO AU DIO AU DIO
X X S M X X S M
+ - + - + - + - + - + - 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
Rail 2
Available in
2- and 3-rail
cabinets
Rail 3
Available only
in 3-rail cabinets
Figure A-4: LRM addresses for 3-CHAS7, 3-CHAS7, 3-CHAS7 configuration

System addresses
Control / display module addresses

Figure A-5 shows the device logical addresses that the system
assigns the control/display modules.

System addresses
PPCC0129 PPCC0129 PPCC0001

PPCC0131
PPCC0131 PPCC0003
PPCC0132
PPCC0136
PPCC0140
PPCC0141
PPCC0145
PPCC0149
24 LEDs 6 groups of 3 switches

and 3 LEDs
PPCC0129 PPCC0129
PPCC0001 PPCC0001
PPCC0130
PPCC0131 PPCC0002 PPCC0130 PPCC0002
PPCC0132
PPCC0133 PPCC0131
PPCC0003 PPCC0003
PPCC0134
PPCC0135 PPCC0132
PPCC0004 PPCC0004
PPCC0136
PPCC0137 PPCC0133
PPCC0005 PPCC0005
PPCC0138
PPCC0139 PPCC0134
PPCC0006 PPCC0006
PPCC0140
PPCC0141 PPCC0135
PPCC0007 PPCC0007
PPCC0142
PPCC0143 PPCC0136
PPCC0008 PPCC0008
PPCC0144
PPCC0145 PPCC0009 PPCC0137 PPCC0009
PPCC0146
PPCC0147 PPCC0138
PPCC0010 PPCC0010
PPCC0148
PPCC0149 PPCC0139
PPCC0151 PPCC0140
12 switches and 12 switches and

24 LEDs 12 LEDs
Figure A-5: Control/display module switch and LED device addresses

System addresses
Device addresses
Figure A-6 shows the device logical addresses that the system
assigns to various rail modules.

System addresses
PPCC0002 PPCC0003
24VD C IDC /NAC IDC /NAC IDC IDC NAC IN

UN USED UN USED UN USED NAC /B UN USED 1 2 3 4 1/2
+ -
T B1 T B1
JP2
JP1
J4
J3 J1
JP4
JP3
JP1
1
JP2
1
T B2 T B2
BACK- UP NAC /A NAC /B IDC /NAC IDC /NAC IDC IDC NAC IN
5 6 7 8 5/6
- + - + S - + S - +
PPCC0005 PPCC0008
Zoned amplifier PPCC0006 PPCC0007
modules
Initiating device circuit
module
Sensors
PPCC0001 - PPCC0099
B B S
H
A A SP B B
MW
KR
Signature detectors B B S
H
A A N/C B B N/C
PPCC0001 - PPCC0125
SIGA1 SIGA1 1 SIGA1 LOOP1 LOOP1 LOOP1
O U TPU T MO DU LE
O U TPUT MO DU LE
Signature modules
PPCC0126 - PPCC0250 Modules
PPCC0101 - PPCC0199
Signature modules
PPCC0376 - PPCC0500
SIG A2 2 SIG A2 SIG A2

SP
B B MW A A S B B
KR H
Signature detectors
PPCC0251 - PPCC0375 Addressable analog
controller module
Signature controller
module
Figure A-6: Rail module device addresses

System addresses

Appendix B
Operation sequence charts
Summary
This appendix summarizes the operation of the system in a series
of convenient charts.
Content
Table B-1: Fire alarm sequence - LCD response • B.2
Table B-2: Fire alarm sequence - common feature
response • B.2
Table B-3: Fire alarm sequence - zone annunciation • B.3
Table B-4: Fire alarm sequence - notification appliance circuits
(default operation) • B.3
Table B-5: Fire alarm sequence - off premises connection • B.3
Table B-6: Trouble sequence - LCD response [1] • B.4
Table B-7: Trouble sequence - common feature response • B.4
Table B-8: Trouble sequence - annunciation • B.4
Table B-9: Trouble sequence - annunciation • B.5
EST3 System Operation Manual B.1

Table B-1: Fire alarm sequence - LCD response

Event► Normal First Subsequent Alarm
LCD display▼ alarm alarm restore Reset
Power LED On On On On On
Alarm LED Off Flashing Flashing Flashing Off
Trouble LED Off Off Off Off Off
Panel buzzer Off On On Off Off
LCD text display Title Current event Updates last No change Title
screen and last event window event latched screen
window until reset
Alarm counter on LCD 0000 0001 0002 0002 0000
Alarm history counter 0000 0000 0000 0000 0001
on LCD
Reset switch Enabled Disabled for Enabled after No change Disabled
silence Inhibit Inhibit period
period expires
Table B-2: Fire alarm sequence - common feature response

Alarm silence inhibit Off Timer starts Runs until No change Off
timer expired
Alarm silence LED Off Yellow after Yellow after No change Off
silence silenced
Alarm silence timer Off Timer starts, Restarts, No change Off
alarm alarm silenced
silenced if if timer expires
timer expires
Page inhibit timer Off Timer starts, No change No change Off
prohibits
paging until
timer expires
Auto general alarm Off Timer starts, No change No change Off
signal timer (recycle) total EVAC if unless
timer expires canceled by
user
B.2 EST3 System Operation Manual

Table B-3: Fire alarm sequence - zone annunciation

Panel annunciator Off On red On red No change Off
Printers Ready Prints event Prints event Prints on Off
restoration
History logger Ready Logs event Logs event Logs Ready
restoration
Table B-4: Fire alarm sequence - notification appliance circuits (default operation)
General alarm audible Off Sounds alarm No change, No change Off
notification circuits resounds
alarm if
silenced
General alarm visual Off Displays Displays alarm Displays alarm Off
notification circuits alarm indication indication
indication
Table B-5: Fire alarm sequence - off premises connection

Reverse polarity alarm Off Reverses No change No change Reverses
output polarity polarity
back to
normal
Common alarm relay Off On No change No change Off
Auxiliary control relays Off On as On as No change Off
programmed programmed

Table B-6: Trouble sequence - LCD response [1]

Event► Normal First trouble - First alarm Notes
LCD display▼ trouble queue w/active trouble -
alarm queue
Current event window Off Trouble message Alarm message Alarm has priority
Last event window Off Trouble message Alarm message Alarm has priority
Queue LED Off Flashes yellow Flashes red
[1] 3-LCD and 3-LCDXL1 modules
Table B-7: Trouble sequence - common feature response

Event► Normal First First alarm Notes
LCD display▼ trouble w/active trouble
Panel buzzer Off Sounds trouble Sounds alarm Alarm has priority
Panel Silenced LED Off Off Off Yellow when local
buzzer silenced
3-CPU3 Trouble Relay On Off Off Relay powered in
normal state
3-CPU3 Alarm Relay Off Off On Remains on until
panel reset
Table B-8: Trouble sequence - annunciation

Event► Normal First First Alarm Notes
LCD Display▼ trouble w/Active trouble
Panel zone LED Off On yellow On red
Remote annunciator Off On yellow Steady red Alarm has priority if
alarm zone LED same LED is also
used to annunciate
trouble
Printers Ready Prints trouble Prints alarm Time, date, event
message message message, & device
data
History logger Ready Logs event Logs event Time, date, event
message, & device
data

Table B-9: Trouble sequence - annunciation

Event► Normal First First Alarm Notes
LCD display▼ trouble w/active trouble
Off premises module All Trouble circuit Alarm and trouble
(3-OPS) circuits reverses polarity, circuits reverse
3 circuit configuration normal module trouble polarity
polarity relay operates
Off premises module Normal Circuit opens, Circuit reverses Alarm has priority
1 circuit configuration polarity (module trouble polarity (trouble
relay operates) relay restores)
Auxiliary control relays Off On as On as programmed
programmed


Z
Index
3 Devices
disabling • 2.12
3-ASU enabling • 2.13
controls and indicators • 3.2 Dirty head report
operating • 3.4 creating • 2.24
3-FTCU Disabled points
controls and indicators • 4.2 identifying • 2.9
operation • 4.4 Disabling hardware components • 2.12
3-LCD controls and indicators • 2.2 Disabling logical devices • 2.10
A
E
Active points
identifying • 2.9 Enabling hardware components • 2.13
Alarm silence/reset inhibit timer • 1.14 Enabling logical devices • 2.11
Alternate message routing
activating • 2.22
Alternate sensitivity G
changing to primary • 2.21 Guard patrol • 1.13
And groups Guard Patrol groups
disabling • 2.10 disabling • 2.10
enabling • 2.11 enabling • 2.11
Arming security partitions • 2.14 Guard patrols
Audio Source Unit activating • 2.20
paging sequence • 3.5 restoring • 2.20
paging with remote microphone • 3.6
phone page • 3.5
Automatic alarm silence timer • 1.15 H
Automatic general alarm (GA) timer • 1.15
Hardware components
disabling • 2.12
B enabling • 2.13
High priority
Button description • 2.23
operation • 1.15 History report
Buttons creating • 2.24
disabling • 2.12 Holidays • 1.15
enabling • 2.13 scheduling • 2.30
I
C
Identifying active or disabled points • 2.9
Canceling the test • 2.32, 2.34
Changing holidays • 2.30
Changing the output state of a relay or LED • 2.23 L
Lamp test • 2.35
Latch priority
description • 2.23
LEDs
D changing the state of • 2.23
disabling • 2.12
Date enabling • 2.13
entering • 2.27 Logical devices
Default passwords • 2.28 disabling • 2.10
Deleting holidays • 2.30 enabling • 2.11
Device Maintenance report Low priority
creating • 2.24 description • 2.23
description • 2.24
EST3 System Operation Manual Z.1

Index
M Security devices
bypassing • 2.18
Matrix groups removing bypass • 2.19
disabling • 2.10 Security partitions
enabling • 2.11 arming • 2.14
Medium priority disarming • 2.16
description • 2.23 restoring • 2.17
Modcom Compliance report Service groups
creating • 2.24 disabling • 2.10
description • 2.24 enabling • 2.11
Set priority
P description • 2.23
Panel sounder test • 2.35 Signature devices, testing • 2.34
Password protection • 1.2 Smoke detector sensitivity
Passwords description • 2.21
changing • 2.28 Smoke detector sensitivity level
default • 2.28 changing • 2.21
Primary message routing System timers • 1.14
restoring • 2.22
Primary sensitivity T
changing to alternate • 2.21
Putting a service group into test • 2.32 Testing alarm input devices • 2.32
Putting a Signature device into test • 2.34 Testing Signature devices • 2.34
Testing, lamp • 2.35
R Testing, LEDs • 2.35
Testing, panel sounder • 2.35
Rail modules Time controls • 1.15
disabling • 2.12 holidays • 1.15
enabling • 2.13 Time Controls
Relays disabling • 2.10
changing the state of • 2.23 enabling • 2.11
Removing bypasses from security devices • 2.19 Time of day
Reports • 2.24 entering • 2.27
Restoring security partitions • 2.17 Z
Revisions report
creating • 2.24 Zone groups
description • 2.24 disabling • 2.10
enabling • 2.11
S
Z.2 EST3 System Operation Manual

Chapter 7
Preventive maintenance
Summary
This chapter provides a listing of required scheduled
maintenance items and procedures.
Content
General • 7.2
Preventive maintenance schedule • 7.3
Signature device routine maintenance tips • 7.8
Detectors • 7.8
CO maintenance alert • 7.8
CO maintenance report • 7.8
Modules • 7.9
Signature detector cleaning procedure • 7.10
SIGA2 replacement procedures • 7.13
Smoke chamber • 7.13
CO sensor module • 7.13
System trouble and maintenance log • 7.14
EST3 Installation and Service Manual 7.1

General
Before commencing testing, notify all areas where the alarm
sounds and off premises locations that receive alarm and trouble
transmissions that testing is in progress.
Records of all testing and maintenance shall be kept on the
protected premises for a period of at least five (5) years.
Required Tools:
• Slotted Screwdriver, Insulated
• Digital multimeter
• 1.1 k 1 W resistor
• 12 inch (30.5 cm) jumper lead with alligator clips
• Panel Door Key
In addition, make sure you have the required system passwords.
If the system includes access control applications, you'll need a
construction card, or other valid access card.
A complete check of installed field wiring and devices should be
made at regular intervals, in accordance with NFPA 72 and ULC
524 requirements. This includes testing all alarm and supervisory
alarm initiating devices and circuits, and any off premises
connections.
Panel operation should be verified in the alarm, supervisory, and
trouble modes.
To ensure that the panel can be powered when primary power is
lost, the batteries should be periodically inspected, tested, and
replaced (as a minimum) every 4 years.
7.2 EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Preventive maintenance schedule

To ensure proper operation, plan maintenance (regular or
selected) in accordance with the requirements of the authority
having jurisdiction. Refer to NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm and
Signaling Code, CAN/ULC-S536, Standard for the Inspection
and Testing of Fire Alarm Systems, and CAN/ULC-S537
Standard for the Verification of Fire Alarm Systems.
Use the table below to determine when to perform testing and
preventative maintenance procedures.

Testing
Component Interval Test Procedure
Manual Semiannually 1. Make a visual inspection.
stations
2. Put the zone in test mode.
3. Activate the mechanism.
4. Verify the proper IDC zone response.
Non-restorable Semiannually 1. Make a visual inspection.
heat detectors
3. Test the detector mechanically and/or electrically.
4. Verify the proper IDC zone response.
Restorable Semiannually 1. Make a visual inspection.
heat detectors
3. Activate at least one detector on each IDC. All detectors on
each IDC must be tested within five years.
SIGA2 heat Semiannually 1. Visually inspect the detector. Verify that the green LED is
detectors flashing.
2. Put the detector/zone in test mode.
3. Activate the heat sensor using a hair dryer and maintaining a
distance of three inches or using the Testifire Multi-Stimulus
Detector Tester [2] per manufacturer’s instructions.
Caution: Do not apply excessive heat when using a hair
dryer. Excessive heat may damage the outer cover.
4. Verify that a detector activation indication is on the FACU per
the system design.


Testing
Smoke Annually 1. Make a visual inspection.
detectors
3. Conduct a functional test to verify the proper IDC zone
response.
4. Check the detector sensitivity.
5. Clean the detector as required.
SIGA2 smoke Annually 1. Visually inspect the detector. Verify that the green LED is
detectors flashing.
3. Activate the smoke sensor using No Climb Products model
CHEK02-xxx [1] smoke aerosol spray, smoke generator, or
the Testifire Multi-Stimulus Detector Tester [2] per
manufacturer’s instructions.
4. Verify that a detector activation indication is listed on the
printer.
5. Run a detector sensitivity and compensation report.
SIGA2 smoke Annually 1. Visually inspect the detector. Verify that the green LED is
and heat flashing.
detectors
CHEK02-xxx smoke aerosol spray, smoke generator, or the
Testifire Multi-Stimulus Detector Tester per manufacturer’s
instructions.
Detector Tester per manufacturer’s instructions.
printer.
CO sensors Monthly [3] 1. Visually inspect the detector. Verify that the green LED is
flashing.
2. Perform a CO sensor function test.
CO sensors 6 years after 1. Replace the CO sensor.
date of
manufacture


Testing
SIGA2 smoke, Annually 1. Visually inspect the detector. Verify that the green LED is
heat, and CO flashing.
detectors
2. Put the detector/zone in TEST mode.
CHEK02-xxx [1] smoke aerosol spray, smoke generator, or
the Testifire Multi-Stimulus Detector Tester [2] per
Detector Tester per manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Place the CO sensor in the accelerated response mode.
a. At the panel, select Command Menus.
b. Select Option 4) Activate.
c. Select Option 9) Gas Accel Response.
d. Enter the device number for the sensor to be tested.
Format: PPCCDDDD where PP = panel number, CC =
card number, and DDDD = device address.
Refer to the SDU Help version 11.0 or later for information
on programming for the accelerated response mode.
6. Activate the CO sensor using SDI LLC model Solo C6-xxx
[1] CO aerosol spray without covering the head or with the
Testifire Multi-Stimulus Detector Tester [2] per
Note: If the CO sensor is programmed as the alarm point, it
must comply with the requirements of NFPA 720.
printer.
Waterflow Every two 1. Put the zone in test mode.
switches months
2. Activate the sprinkler test valve. Refer to the sprinkler system
test procedure.


Testing
All initiating Annually 1. Put the IDC zone in test mode.
device circuits
2. Activate the IDC zone. Appropriate NACs should activate
and zone information should be annunciated.
3. Restore the test device and reset the zone.
4. Open the IDC field wiring. A trouble message should be
annunciated.
5. Reset and lock the panel at the conclusion of all testing.
Remote Annually 1. Verify that all indicators are operating properly.
annunciators
Notification Annually 1. Make a visual inspection.
appliances
2. Put the panel in alarm, drill, or test mode. Verify that all
indicating appliances are operating properly.
Panel LEDs Annually 1. Illuminate all LEDs by pressing the Panel Silence and
and trouble Trouble Silence switches at the same time.
buzzer
Panel primary Acceptance 1. Remove the primary AC power.
power and
2. Verify that the panel operates from the battery.
reacceptance
tests 3. Verify that the panel goes into trouble (after a 6 second
delay).
4. Restore the AC power at the end of the test.
Panel Acceptance 1. Remove the primary AC power.
secondary and
2. Measure the standby and alarm currents, and compare
power reacceptance
these with the battery calculations to verify adequate battery
tests
capacity.
3. Test the system under full load for 5 minutes.
4. Measure the battery voltage under full load. (The acceptable
range is 20.4 to 27.3 VDC.)
5. Restore the AC power at the end of test.
Panel trouble Annually 1. Verify operation of system Trouble LED and trouble buzzer.
signals
LCD clock Each visit 1. Verify that the displayed time is correct. Reset the clock if the
time is incorrect.


Testing
Supervisory Semiannually 1. Put the zone in test mode.
signal initiating
2. Operate the test valve.
devices
3. Test the pressure, temperature, and water level sensors per
the sprinkler system test procedure.
Auxiliary Monthly 1. Coordinate the test with the receiving location.
system off-
2. Verify the receipt of all transmitted signals.
premises fire
alarm signal 3. Reset and lock the panel at the conclusion of all testing.
transmission
Remote Every two 1. Coordinate the test with the receiving location.
system off- months
2. Verify the receipt of all transmitted signals.
premises
waterflow 3. Reset and lock the panel at the conclusion of all testing.
signal
transmission
[1] xxx indicates a variable related only to marketplace.
[2] For more Testifire information, visit www.testifire.com
[3] Monthly until January, 2012, when it becomes an annual test.

Signature device routine maintenance tips
Detectors
When removing one detector at a time, wait 1 minute after
replacing the first detector before removing the next detector.
This gives the system time to recognize and re-map the first
detector before generating a trouble condition caused by
removing the second detector.
CO maintenance alert
In addition to displaying a maintenance alert when the photo
element dirtiness is at or above 80%, the loop controller displays
a maintenance alert when the CO sensor module is at or below 6
months until end of life. If both elements are at or above these
thresholds, there is only one maintenance alert. Once the
dirtiness threshold is at 100%, a dirty detector trouble displays
for the photo element. Once there are 0 months until end of life,
the panel displays the CO end-of-life trouble message.
CO maintenance report
The CO sensor module has a life span of 6 years. After 6 years,
the detector sends out an end-of-life trouble message. When this
trouble message is transmitted, replace the CO sensor module.
To determine the months until end of life, request a Maintenance
Report.
Figure 7-1: Maintenance report

Modules
Signature modules should be visually inspected to insure the
physical installation is secure. Functional testing of the module
should be done regularly as required by the AHJ.

Signature detector cleaning procedure

There are two cleaning procedures.
• SIGA detectors require using a conventional vacuum cleaner
equipped with the detector cleaning tool from the Signature
Series Tool Kit (P/N SIGA-ST). The tool is installed on the
end of the suction hose (nominal 1.5 in. or 3.8 cm ID). This
creates a high velocity vortex scrubbing action around the
detector, removing loose dust and debris which is
subsequently drawn into the vacuum.
• SIGA2 detectors require opening the detector and cleaning
the interior using a vacuum cleaner and a soft brush as
instructed below.
Note: In order to avoid false alarms, disable the detector being
cleaned before cleaning.
To clean SIGA detectors:
1. Disable the detector to prevent false alarms.

2. Use the conventional vacuum cleaner brush attachment to
remove any visible cobwebs etc. from the immediate area of
the detector.
3. Connect the detector cleaning tool to the suction hose.
4. Place the detector cleaning tool over the detector head for
approximately 10 seconds.
5. After the detector has been cleaned, restore it to proper
operation.
6. Run the detector sensitivity routine to print a list of detector
sensitivity and compensation readings and to verify the
effectiveness of the cleaning.
Note: Without using the detector cleaning tool to clean the
detectors, it is not possible to verify the dirtiness levels after
cleaning. In this case, clean the detector per instructions above
and operate for a minimum of two hours, then restart the loop
controller. If the detectors are cleaned properly, the maintenance
indicators return to normal condition.

Place cleaning tool

over detector.
Detector
Cleaning
Tool
Connect to vacuum
[ACLEAN1.CDR]
cleaner hose.
Figure 7-2: Detector Cleaning Tool
To clean SIGA2 detectors:
1. Disable the detector or zone to prevent false alarms.

2. Use a conventional vacuum cleaner brush to remove visible
cobwebs, etc. from the immediate area of the detector.
3. Remove the detector from the detector base, by inserting a
small screwdriver into the tamper-resist access slot while
rotating the detector counterclockwise.
4. Push the locking tab on the bottom of the detector toward the
center then twist and pull to remove the cover.
5. Using a soft brush and vacuum, carefully remove any dust or
dirt from around the sensor chambers. See Figure 3.
6. After the detector has been cleaned, reassemble and restore it
to proper operation.
7. Check and record the detector’s dirty level reading to verify
the effectiveness of cleaning.
8. If cleaning is unsuccessful, return the detector to the factory
and replace it with a new detector.

8 3
7
5
6
1. Mounting base
2. Detector base
3. CO sensor module (on CO detectors only)
4. Smoke chamber: to remove.
5. Detector cover: twist and pull to remove
6. LED indicator
7. Access slot for tamper-resist mechanism
8. Optics box
Figure 3: SIGA2 smoke detector with CO sensor
To properly judge the effectiveness of the detector cleaning

process, observe the effect cleaning had on the detector’s
dirtiness level. If the detectors are cleaned properly, the
maintenance indicators return to normal condition.

SIGA2 replacement procedures
Smoke chamber
The SIGA2 smoke detectors have replaceable smoke chambers.
Replace the smoke chamber of these detectors when, after
cleaning the detector, the control panel still indicates a dirty
detector.
There are two replacement smoke chambers. Replace the smoke
chamber as described on its installation sheet.
Table 1: Replaceable smoke chambers.

Model Replaces smoke chamber on
2-SPRC1 SIGA2 -PS, SIGA2-PHS
2-SPRC2 SIGA2-PCOS, SIGA2-PHCOS
CO sensor module
2-CORPL is the replacement sensor for the Signature Series CO
detectors. Replace the CO sensor module every six years or
when the control panel indicates a sensor end-of-life condition.
Refer to installation sheet P/N 3101589.
Note: For proper operation, never replace the CO sensor itself
without the PCB as each board has calibration data specific to
the CO sensor.

System trouble and maintenance log
Date Time Event Initial

Frame these instructions and mount them adjacent to the control panel.
EST3 Fire Alarm Control Panel Operating Instructions

These operating instructions are for the following control panels: EST3, Resetting the panel
EST3R, EST3-230, EST3R-230, and JB-TBZL-EST3. They are
intended for users who are trained and authorized to operate the Reset returns the panel to normal operation provided there are no
control panel in the event of an emergency. active initiating devices (smoke detectors, manual pull stations, panel
switches, etc.). Make sure all initiating devices are restored to normal
For additional information, see the EST3 System Operation Manual, before resetting the panel.
P/N 270382.
Panel programming may temporarily inhibit Reset after alarm signals
Operation are activated.
Normal (no events): Power LED is on (AC power) or off (DC power). To reset the panel:
All other LEDs are off. 1. Press Reset. The LED flashes at different intervals while the
control panel is resetting, and then turns off.
Alarm events: Alarm LED is flashing, the panel buzzer is on, and the
event message is displayed in the alarm queue.
Activating a drill
Supervisory events: Supervisory (Supvr) LED is flashing, the panel
Drill turns on all notification appliances. Drill does not activate any
buzzer is on, and the event message is displayed in the supervisory
alarm responses. Pressing Drill again cancels the drill and turns all
queue.
notification appliances back off. Always notify the fire department
Trouble events: Trouble LED is flashing, the panel buzzer is on, and before activating a drill.
the event message is displayed in the trouble queue. Depending on
the trouble, the CPU Fault, Gnd Fault, or Disable LED may also be on. To activate a drill:
1. Press Drill. The LED indicates that Drill is active.
Monitor events: Monitor LED is flashing, the panel buzzer is on, and
the event message is displayed in the monitor queue. Activating mass notification mode
Silencing alarm signals To activate mass notification mode:
Alarm Silence turns off all active audible notification appliances. A new 1. Press the MNEC ON button.
alarm event or pressing Alarm Silence again turns the notification 2. To broadcast live-voice instructions, press the Page All Call
appliances back on. button on the 3-ASU, press the push-to-talk switch then speak
clearly into the microphone.
Panel programming may temporarily inhibit Alarm Silence after alarm
signals are activated, may prevent Alarm Silence from turning off
visible notification appliances, and may not silence alarm signals
Maintenance recommendations
activated by a waterflow switch. Inspect and test the fire alarm system in accordance with NFPA 72 and
other applicable standards, and the local authority having jurisdiction.
WARNING: The protected premises may be occupied. Do not silence Batteries: Replace the batteries every five years or sooner as
alarm signals or reset the panel unless you are authorized to do so and required.
only after all occupants have been evacuated.
To silence alarm signals:

1. Press Alarm Silence. The LED indicates that Alarm Silence is For service contact:
active.
Name: Firetrol Protection Systems

Silencing the panel
Panel Silence turns the panel buzzer off. New events will turn the Address: 4616 W. Howard Lane, Bldg. 7 - Suite 700
panel buzzer back on. If there are no new events, the panel buzzer
automatically re-sounds within 24 hours. Austin, Texas 78728
WARNING: Trouble conditions may affect the panel's ability to provide Phone: (512)687-0115
early detection and indication of a fire. Identify the source of the trouble
and notify authorized service personnel immediately.
Other contact:
To silence the panel:
1. Press Panel Silence. The LED indicates that Panel Silence is (512)974-0130
Austin Fire Department:
active.
© 2011 UTC Fire & Security. All rights reserved. 1/1 P/N 270411 • REV 3.0 • ISS 14NOV11
IMPORTANT
This drawing and the information and
design application herein contained is the
property of Firetrol Protection Systems, inc.
and/or its subsidiaries and is loaned under
the expressed conditions that the same be
NEW FIRE ALARM SYSTEM : returned to Firetrol Protection Systems, Inc.

upon request; all information herein
contained shall be treated as secret and
confidential; no reproduction of this
drawing or any part thereof shall be made
without the expressed written consent of
CITY OF AUSTIN Firetrol Protection Systems, Inc.
NEW CENTRAL LIBRARY REV.

1
2
REVISIONS DATE
710 WEST CESAR CHAVEZ BLVD. 3

4
AUSTIN, TEXAS 78701 5
6
CODES IBC 2009 NFPA 72 2013 FOR SUBMITTAL RECORD DRAWINGS

I have reviewed these plans and
certify that they comply with the applicable codes and standards.
Or
certify they were copied from sealed engineering plans and any
violations of the applicable codes or standards are specifically
noted on these plans.
Firetrol Protection Systems, Inc.

4616 W. Howard Lane, Suite 700
Austin, Texas 78728
Phone: 512-687-0115 ACR-175116
APS-0519
APS Licensee Signature - License #
MARK McMILLAN 8-4-2017
SYMBOL LEGEND DRAWING INDEX GENERAL NOTES

APS Printed name Date:
NOTE: "EX" NEXT TO ANY SYMBOL ON DRAWING DESIGNATES AN EXISTING SIMILAR TYPE DEVICE
PHOENIX • SALT LAKE CITY • DENVER • LUBBOCK • SAN ANTONIO • AUSTIN • DALLAS • TYLER • HOUSTON • SULPHUR
SHEET # SHEET DESCRIPTION
fire protection and life safety specialists

PART 1. ALL DEVICES LOCATIONS SHOWN ARE BASED ON NFPA 72 OR ARE
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION BACK BOX BACK BOX SUPPLIER MOUNTING HEIGHT #0 COVER SHEET - SYMBOL LEGEND, GENERAL NOTES THE DESIGN CONCEPT OF THE ENGINEER OF RECORD. DO NOT
NUMBER
DEVIATE FROM LOCATIONS SHOWN WITHOUT WRITTEN DIRECTION
FACP EST-3 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL SUPPLIED FIRETROL PROTECTION SYSTEMS APROX. 66" A.F.F. TO TOP #1 PARKING GARAGE LEVEL 2 FROM FIRETROL DEVIATION. ANY DEVIATION WITHOUT WRITTEN
DIRECTION MAY CAUSE THE SYSTEM TO BE NON-COMPLIANT.
call (512) 687-0115 • fax (512) 687-0120

ANN 3-LCDANN REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR PANEL RLCM/B FIRETROL PROTECTION SYSTEMS APROX. 60" A.F.F. TO TOP
#2 PARKING GARAGE LEVEL 1
FATC N/A FIRE ALARM TERMINAL CABINET SUPPLIED FIRETROL PROTECTION SYSTEMS APPROX. 66" TO TOP 2. 120VAC DEDICATED BRANCH CIRCUIT(S) AND CONNECTIONS SHALL
#3 LEVEL 1 BE PROTECTED AGAINST PHYSICAL DAMAGE. CIRCUIT DISCONNECT
ACR-1751168
SCP KIRKLAND SMOKE CONTROL PANEL SUPPLIED FIRETROL PROTECTION SYSTEMS APROX. 66" A.F.F. TO TOP SHALL HAVE A RED MARKING, SHALL BE ACCESSIBLE ONLY TO
400 Parker Drive Suite 1130

#4 LEVEL 2 AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL, AND SHALL BE IDENTIFIED AS "FIRE
RFCP EST-3 REMOTE FIRE CONTROL PANEL SUPPLIED FIRETROL PROTECTION SYSTEMS APROX. 66" A.F.F. TO TOP
ALARM CIRCUIT" (NFPA 72, 2013) DEDICATED BRANCH CIRCUIT
Austin, Texas 78728

AUSTIN OFFICE
BPS-XX* BPS6A or (*)=BPS10A BOOSTER POWER SUPPLY SUPPLIED FIRETROL PROTECTION SYSTEMS APROX. 66" A.F.F. TO TOP #5 LEVEL 3 REQUIRED AT FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL AND BOOSTER PANELS.
PHOTOELECTRIC SMOKE DETECTOR #6 LEVEL 4 3. SYSTEMS REQUIRING OFF-SITE SHALL COMPLY WITH THE
www.firetrol.net
A=ATRIUM SMOKE DETECTOR
(A) E=ELEVATOR LOBBY SMOKE DETECTOR REQUIREMENTS OF NFPA 72, SECT. 26.6 (2013ED).
SIGA2-PS 4" OCTAGON 2-1/8" DEEP ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR CEILING (AS REQUIRED) #7 LEVEL 5
S=STAIR PRESSURIZATION SMOKE DETECTOR
4. ALL FIRE ALARM CIRCUITS ARE TO BE FREE OF GROUNDS AND
BEAM SMOKE DETECTOR
FE-5000 B/T=TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER UNIT 4" SQ. W/ SINGLE GANG RING ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR WALL (AS REQUIRED) #8 LEVEL 6 SHORTS.
T B
B/R=REFLECTOR
#9 MEZZANINE DEVICE LAYOUT, FIRE ALARM MATRIX 5. APPROPRIATE END OF LINE VALUE SHOULD BE READ PER CIRCUIT
SIGA2-HRS FIXED TEMP/RATE-OF-RISE HEAT DETECTOR 4" OCTAGON 2-1/8" DEEP ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR CEILING AT FACP.
SCR-0292
SIGA-278 MANUAL PULL STATION 4" SQ. W/ SINGLE GANG RING ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR 48" A.F.F. TO CENTER #10 RISER DIAGRAM
6. USE NFPA 70 ARTICLE 760 FOR ALL FIRE ALARM WIRING.
(R) DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR INSTALLED BY #11 MOUNTING & WIRING DETAILS
SIGA-SD SUPPLIED FIRETROL PROTECTION SYSTEMS
S=SUPPLY R=RETURN ELEC. OR MECH. CONTRACTOR (REF SPECS) 7. FOLLOW ALL NATIONAL AND LOCAL CODES FOR MOUNTING AND
#12 MOUNTING & WIRING DETAILS INSTALLING DEVICES.
N1
S
SIGA-CC1S SYNCHRONIZATION OUTPUT MODULE 4" SQUARE W/ TWO-GANG RING ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR AS REQUIRED
VT MODEL 592 120/24 VAC POWER TRANSFORMER 4" SQ. 2-1/2" DEEP ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR AS REQUIRED #13 PANEL DETAILS 8. WHERE DETECTORS ARE INSTALLED FOR SIGNAL INITIATION
DURING CONSTRUCTION, THEY SHALL BE CLEANED AND VERIFIED
C SIGA-CR PROGRAMMABLE CONTROL RELAY 4" SQ. W/ SINGLE GANG RING ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR AS REQUIRED #14 SYSTEM CALCULATIONS TO BE OPERATING IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LISTED SENSITIVITY,
OR THEY SHALL BE REPLACED PRIOR TO THE FINAL
N1 SIGA-CC1 SINGLE INPUT SIGNAL MODULE 4" SQUARE W/ TWO-GANG RING ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR AS REQUIRED
#15 SYSTEM CALCULATIONS COMMISSIONING OF THE SYSTEM - NFPA 72, 2013 EDITION,
M1 SIGA-CT1 SINGLE MONITOR MODULE 4" SQ. W/ SINGLE GANG RING ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR AS REQUIRED SECTION 17.7.1.11.1
#16 SYSTEM CALCULATIONS
M2 SIGA-CT2 DUAL MONITOR MODULE 4" SQ. W/ SINGLE GANG RING ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR AS REQUIRED 9. WHERE DETECTORS ARE INSTALLED BUT NOT OPERATIONAL
#17 SYSTEM CALCULATIONS DURING CONSTRUCTION, THEY SHALL BE PROTECTED FROM
R1 MR-101/C MULTI-VOLTAGE CONTROL RELAY PROVIDED FIRETROL PROTECTION SYSTEMS VARIES
CONSTRUCTION DEBRIS, DUST, DIRT AND DAMAGE IN
P1 PAM-1 MULTI-VOLTAGE CONTROL RELAY 4" SQUARE 2-1/8" DEEP BOX ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR VARIES #18 SMOKE CONTROL PANEL ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS
AND VERIFIED TO BE OPERATING IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
6833-4 TELEPHONE HANDSET RECEPTACLE 4" SQ. W/SINGLE GANG RING ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR 48" A.F.F. LISTED SENSITIVITY, OR THEY SHALL BE REPLACED PRIOR TO THE
F
FINAL COMMISSIONING OF THE SYSTEM - NFPA 72, 2013 EDITION,
IM SIGA-IM ISOLATION MODULE FOR SLC CIRCUIT 4" SQ. 2-1/2" DP W/ 2 GANG RING ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR AS REQUIRED
SECTION 17.7.1.11.2
WP
G4-S7VM
WG4 SERIES
WALL MOUNT SPEAKER STROBE
WALL MOUNT SPEAKER STROBE - OUTDOOR/

IN DOOR WEATHERPROOF
4" SQUARE 2-1/2" DEEP BOX
WEATHERPROOF BELL BOX

ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR
ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR
82" A.F.F. TO BOTTOM
82" A.F.F. TO BOTTOM

CIRCUIT NOTATION 10. "DETECTORS SHOULD NOT BE LOCATED IN A DIRECT AIRFLOW OR
CLOSER THAN 36 in (910 mm) FROM AN AIR SUPPLY DIFFUSER OR
RETURN AIR OPENING." - NFPA 72, 2013 EDITION, SECTION
GC-S7VM CEILING MOUNT SPEAKER STROBE 4" SQUARE 2-1/2" DEEP BOX ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR CEILING
SPEAKER STROBE STROBE SPEAKER A.17.7.4.1
SP
G1-VM WALL MOUNT STROBE 4" SQ. W/SINGLE GANG RING ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR 80" A.F.F. TO BOTTOM 11. AUXILIARY RELAYS TO INITIATE CONTROL OF FIRE SAFETY
FUNCTIONS SHALL BE LOCATED WITHIN 3 FEET OF THE
COA NEW CENTRAL LIBRARY

GC-VM CEILING MOUNT STROBE 4" SQUARE 2-1/8" DEEP BOX ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR CEILING XYZ-# XYZ-# A (S)F C - #
CONTROLLED CIRCUIT OR DEVICE.
##cd ##cd #w
SP GC-S7 CEILING MOUNT SPEAKER 4" SQUARE 2-1/2" DEEP BOX ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR CEILING A (S)F C - #
#w
12. ALL CONDUIT AND CONDUIT STUBS MUST BE 3/4" UNLESS
G4-S7 WALL MOUNT SPEAKER 4" SQUARE 2-1/8" DEEP BOX ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR 80" A.F.F. TO CENTER DENOTES DEVICE CANDELA RATING OTHERWISE NOTED ON DRAWINGS.
710 WEST CESAR CHAVEZ BLVD.

DENOTES DEVICE SPEAKER WATT
4509 FREIDRICH LANE SUITE 105

xxK
RESISTOR EOL RESISTOR - xx DESIGNATES OHM RATING N/A N/A ON THE BACK OF THE END OF LINE DEVICE
A = AMP NUMBER 13. ALL CEILING HEIGHTS WHERE CEILING MOUNTED DEVICES ARE
BERGELECTRIC CORP.
WF BY OTHERS WATERFLOW - BY SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR N/A N/A N/A F = FLOOR SERVED BY CIRCUIT SHOWN, ARE 10 FEET ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR OR LESS UNLESS
C = AMP CIRCUIT NUMBER OTHERWISE NOTED ON DRAWINGS.
BY OTHERS TAMPER - BY SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR N/A N/A N/A # = DEVICE NUMBER
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

TS
DENOTES DEVICE CANDELA RATING 14. DUCT DETECTOR TUBES SHALL EXTEND ACROSS THE WIDTH OF THE
BY OTHERS HI / LO - BY SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR N/A N/A N/A
X = FLOOR LOCATION OF POWER SUPPLY
DUCT AND PROTRUDE THROUGH THE OPPOSITE SIDE; AND BE
BC S. AGE (FE-5000) BEAM DETECTOR CONTROL PANEL SUPPLIED FIRETROL PROTECTION SYSTEMS APROX. 66" A.F.F. TO TOP Y = POWER SUPPLY DESIGNATION PROVIDED WITH A REMOVABLE PLUG AT THE END OF THE
Z = POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT NUMBER SAMPLING TUBE.
AUSTIN, TEXAS 78744

AUSTIN, TEXAS 78701
# = DEVICE NUMBER
15. CONCEALED DUCT DETECTORS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH A
PERMANENT LABEL LOCATED ON THE CEILING BELOW THE
DETECTOR OR ON THE FLOOR ABOVE THE DETECTOR. THE LABEL
WIRE LEGEND RISER LEGEND

SHALL HAVE THE DEVICE DESCRIPTION AND IDENTIFICATION
ADDRESS.
"A" = RED FPLP 16AWG 2COND. SIGNALING LINE CIRCUIT
16. CONDUIT TO BE INSTALLED IN AREAS WHERE HARD DECK CEILING IS
"F" = RED FPLP 16AWG 2COND. SHLD. FIRE PHONE CIRCUIT, " * " INDICATES 2-HOUR RATED CABLE
"R" = WHITE FPLP 14AWG 2COND. NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE CIRCUIT
RISER UP CIRCUIT NOTATION INSTALLED AND IN OPEN CEILING AREAS.
CONTRACT WITH:
RISER DOWN
DRAWING TITLE:
SENSOR MODULE
"R*" = WHITE FPLP 12AWG 2COND. NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE CIRCUIT
"P" = BLUE FPLP 16AWG 2COND. SPEAKER CIRCUIT, " * " INDICATES 2-HOUR RATED CABLE RISER UP AND DOWN
PROJECT:
"V" = BLACK FPLP 16AWG 2COND. AUX POWER 0A0B0### 0A0B0###
"D" = RED FPLP 18 AWG 2COND. SHIELDED RS485 DATA CIRCUIT
3/4" CONDUIT UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON DRAWINGS (TYPICAL)
CONTRACT NUMBER: PERMIT NUMBER:
# = DEVICE NUMBER
2" RISER CONDUIT UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON DRAWINGS B = LOOP NUMBER (CARD SLOT WITHIN PANEL)
"X" = RED FPLP 16AWG, 2COND. BEAM DETECTOR MONITOR

A = PANEL NUMBER
42-000682 2014-109170 BP
"Z" = BLUE FPLP 14 AWG 2COND. 24 VDC RELAY POWER CIRCUIT TYPICAL EST3 ADDRESSING
DATE: DRAWN BY:
(1ST CARD SLOT BEGINS WITH 03)
NOTE: THIS BUILDING WILL FOLLOW A GENERAL ALARM VOICE EVACUATION SEQUENCE
SSDC
SENSORS - 01030001
SDDC
SENSORS - 01030001 01030251
6/6/2017 BJM
01030125 01030125 01030376
MODULES - 01030126 MODULES - 01030126 01030377
01030250 01030250 01030502 SCALE: CHECKED BY:
1/8" = 1'-0"
Sheet Number
0 of 18
Sheet Name
SYMBOL LEGEND
RECORD DRAWINGS: NOTES
8-4-2017
EOL
WP WP P2B1-2 ELEV 6 P2B1-3
161cd WP 161cd
P2B1-1 1SP2-19 E6-P2 1SP2-20
1/4w 1/4w
147cd
1SP2-18
1/4w STORAGE
VENILATION EOL
P203
AREAWAY 01020003
P2B3-5 EOL
P206 WP
87cd
1SP2-21
1/4w
WP
P2B3-4
70cd
1SP2-22
1/4w
STORAGE
P202
WP
P2B3-3
147cd
1SP2-23
1/4w
WP P2B3-2
70cd
1SP2-24
1/4w
EOL spkr.
1SP2-28
1/4w WP
EOL
P2B2-3
70cd
TELCOM 1SP2-27
1/4w
P205 WP
P2B2-2
70cd
1SP2-26
1/4w
WP
P2B3-1
RAMP UP EAST 15cd
1SP2-25
TO PARKING PLANTER 1/4w
LEVEL 1 SERVICE
P209
STORAGE
P204
EOL
P2A2-5
WP 70cd
1SP2-13
1/4w
P2B2-1
87cd
1SP2-09
1/4w
WP
P2A2-2 P2A3-2
147cd 147cd
1SP2-16 P2A2-4 1SP2-11
1/4w 147cd WP 1/4w
1SP2-14
WP 1/4w WP
P2A3-3
147cd
1SP2-10
WP 1/4w
WP WP WP
P2A2-1 P2A2-3
147cd P2A3-1
147cd 1SP2-15 147cd
1SP2-17
1/4w 1/4w 1SP2-12
1/4w
PARKING P2
P200
P2A1-1
15cd
1SP2-01
1/4w P2A3-4
29cd
WP 1SP2-08
1/4w
WP
STORAGE
P201
01020001
01020004
N1 01020126
S
IM BPS-P2B
BPS-P2A*
ELEV 2
E2-P2
2A
01020002
EOL
P2A3-5
29cd
1SP2-07
1/4w
WP
P2A1-2
70cd
1SP2-02
1/4w
WP
P
2 2A
1 9c 1-
1 SP d 3
/4 2-
w 03
SW
PLANTER
SERVICE
P208
P2A1-4 P2A1-5 EOL P2A1-6
147cd 147cd 147cd VENILATION
1SP2-04 1SP2-05 1SP2-06
1/4w 1/4w 1/4w AREAWAY
WP WP P207
WP
RECORD DRAWINGS:
8-4-2017
CR 01020146 01020016
WP
P1B1-2
CR 01020147
ELEV 6 P1B1-3 EOL
WP 161cd WP 161cd
OPEN TO VENILATION 1SP1-18
1/4w CR 01020148 01020015 E6-P1 1SP1-19 IRRIGATION
P1B1-1 1/4w
BELOW AREAWAY 147cd VT R1 CR 01020149 SP 1SE6-1
1/4w
EOL PUMP
1SP1-17
P1 M1 01020150
P105 1/4w EOL ROOM
VENILATION P103
01020017 EOL EOL P1B2-4
AREAWAY 70cd
P106 ELEV 6 1SP1-20
1/4w
CTRL CL WP
P110
P1B2-3 WP
70cd
1SP1-21
1/4w
STORAGE
P104
CR
010
ELEV 5
201 CTRL CL
EOL 52
01020014 P111
SP ELEV 5
E5-P1
WP
1SE5-1
1/4w
EOL 01020018 CR 01020141
CR 01020142
01020019
14 2-2
CR 01020143
1/4P1-22
1S 7cd
P1B
VT R1 CR01020144
w
P1 M1 01020145 WP
P1B2-1
70cd
EOL 1SP1-23
1SP1-16 1/4w
1/4w
TELCOM
P191
RAMP DOWN TO RAMP UP

PARKING 2 TO WEST
AVE. UP
EOL UP
P1A3-5
70cd
1SP1-09
1/4w
WP
EOL
P1A2-5 P1A3-4
147cd 87cd
1SP1-11 1SP1-08 M1 01020223
1/4w 1/4w
TS
P1A2-2 P1A2-4
147cd WP WP
WP 123cd WP
1SP1-14 1SP1-12
1/4w 1/4w
WP
WP WP P1A3-3
WP 29cd
P1A2-3 1SP1-07
P1A2-1 P1A3-1 1/4w
123cd 147cd 147cd
1SP1-15 1SP1-13 1SP1-10
1/4w 1/4w 1/4w
PARKING P1
P100
P1A3-2
87cd
1SP1-06
1/4w
ELEC
P1A1-1 WP
15cd P190
CR01020136
01020010 CR01020137
01020011 CR01020138
01020135 N1 VT R1 CR 01020139
S
BPS-P1A* P1 M1 01020140
BPS-P1B
01020012
ELEV 2
ELEV 2
CTRL CL
E2-P1
EOL 1SE2-1 P109
SP 1/4w
EOL
01020013 SP = DENOTES FOR STAIR PRESSURIZATION

P1A1-5 SC = DENOTES FOR SMOKE CONTROL INTERFACE
29cd EOL
1SP1-05
1/4w FA = DENOTES FOR FIRE ALARM
TS
M1
01020208
UP
UP
VENILATION
AREAWAY
VENILATION P108
P1A1-2 P1A1-3 P1A1-4
147cd 147cd 147cd
1SP1-02 1SP1-03 1SP1-04
1/4w 1/4w 1/4w
WP WP WP
RECORD DRAWINGS:
8-4-2017
1S1B-26 1B4-07 EOL
1/4w 30cd
ELEV 6 1S1A-27
E6-1
1B4-05
110cd
LIFE GENERATOR 1/4w
1S1A-25 SAFETY 1B4-06

199
SAFETY/ 1/4w 15cd
ROOM 1S1A-26
MECHANICAL EOL
SECURITY 1/4w
AHU 2-2
198
CR 01020169 194 136
SP
1S1B-21 OAHU-2
1/4w 01020043
CR 01020132 1B4-03
1B2-06 15cd
75cd 1B4-01 1S1A-23
1S1B-29 1/4w
SWITCH S S
1/4w
75cd
1S1A-21
MECHANICAL
1/4w
GEAR 197 DAMPER OPEN
01020044 01020006 DAMPER CLSD M2 01020202
193 01020203
EOL FAN ON STATUS 01020225
EOL 1B2-07 FAN OFF STATUS M2 01020170
1C1-10 30cd W LOCKERS 01020171 CR FBU
110cd M LOCKERS 1S1B-30
VFD FAULT STATUS M2
01020172 EO
1B4-L
1S1B-20 SORTING 1/4w 138 S VFD NORMAL STATUS
01020173 15c 08
1/4w 134 EOL AUTO CMD CR 01020174 BIKE 1S1Ad
ROOM/CENTRAL 1B4-02
01020041 ON CMD CR 01020175 VENDOR 1/4w -28
1B2-05 15cd EOL
STORAGE 1B2-04 15cd 1S1A-22 OFF CMD CR 01020176 145
15cd 1S1B-28 1/4w
129 1S1B-27 1/4w
1B4-04
110cd
1/4w
01020224 CIRC 1S1A-24
1/4w
FBU S
135
CR 01020042
1B3-03 BIKE
15cd
1B2-03
75cd
1B3-01 1S1A-18 CORRAL
15cd 1/4w
1S1B-25
1/4w
1S1A-20
1/4w
144
01020040
KH
01020039
S S
M1
SP 1S1B-22 01020045 01020167

1/4w
01020021
IM
ELEC 01020168 ELEV 5 1B3-04
CR SMK CURTAIN
ACFS 15cd
TS M2 01020213
196 E5-1 WORKROOM 1S1A-16 01020214
1/4w M1
010 0102
WF M1 01020222
/ STORAGE WF 201
51 0245
RISER AHU 2-1
3/4"C-4A
1B3-02
75cd
137 CR
1C1-09 1S1A-19 TS TS AHU 1-1/
1/4w CR OAHU-1
75cd
01020048
M2
0 1 STAIR C
010020165 P,F
1S1B-19 010 EOL
1/4w 201 STC-1 2 024 1B3-06
66 6 110cd
1B
LOCK RELEASE CR 1S1A-17
BPS
01020227 CATERING 1/4w
KITCHEN 2P
3P* M1 M2 139 1B3-
75c 05 1SSC
01020157 01020155 1S1Ad 1/4w -01
SE
01020156 1/4w -15
RISER 1"C
CHA
ALIS 1B2-01 1B2-02 2P,4A,F
STAGING 75cd 30cd DEMARC
1S1B-23 1S1B-24
1/4w 1/4w 195
132
1A3-
15c 02 DEMO
d
KITCHEN
CUST W/D AREA
128 EVENT
1C1-08 STORAGE 151
15cd
1S1B-18 140
1/4w
PARKING RAMP 1A3- OPEN TO OPEN TO GARAGE

15c 03
DOWN d ABOVE BELOW
01020038
1C1-07
UIO MODULE IN MFC CABINET
15cd
1S1B-17 3P*
1/4w
1A3-
01020163 15c 04
M2 01020164 d EOL
01020234
STORAGE
M2 01020235
01020236
127
M2 01020237 01020035
01020238
M2 01020239
1A3-01
15cd
1S1A-09
CR 01020240 1/4w
CR 01020241
CR 01020242
EOL
CIRC
3/4"-C
PRE-FUNCTION BOOK DROP

126 SP
1A2-08 1A2-09 107 152 1A3-07 CREEK 1A3-13
1C1-06 1S1B-10 110cd 15cd
15cd 1/4w 15cd
1S1B-09
15cd
01020034 1S1A-11 LOBBY
1S1B-16
1/4w 1/4w ELEV 1 1A3-05
1/4w
150
01020036
E1-1 15cd
1S1A-10
1/4w
1C1-05
1A2-10 EOL
1A3-06
VEST
75cd CIRC 15cd 1A2-11
95cd SMK CURTAIN 15cd 149
DAMPER OPEN STATUS 01020200 1S1B-15 1S1B-08 CR 01020158
DAMPER CLSD STATUS M2 01020201 1/4w 126 1/4w
1A3-08
15cd S
FAN ON STATUS 01020177 1S1A-12
FAN OFF STATUS M2 01020178 1C1-03 1A2-07 1/4w 0102008
AHU 1-2 1A3-9
VFD FAULT STATUS
VFD NORMAL STATUS M2 01020179 CR 01020244
30cd 75cd W TLT 75cd
01020180 1S1B-11 1S1B-07 BOOK DROP
CR 01020243 1/4w 1/4w 121 BACKSTAGE
AUTO CMD CR 01020181 S OAHU - 3 CH 6 152
ON CMD CR 01020182 1A1-12 109 1A3-10
01020052 15cd 110 15cd
OFF CMD CR
01020183
1C1-04
GREEN EOL
1S1A-13 1A3-12
15cd
1/4w
MECHANICAL 75cd 1C1-02 ROOM
1S1B-14 15cd FBU CR
192 1/4w 1S1B-12 122 1SSB-01
STAIR B
1/4w 01020153
1/4w STB-1
UP
AHU 2-3
PRE-FUNCTION LIGHTING
01020007 S CR 01020247 107 1A1-10 1A1-11
CONTROL 1A3-11
15cd 110cd
110cd
STAIR A 1S1A-08 114 1S1A-14
1/4w
1A2-06 1/4w TS
STA-1 M TLT 75cd
1S1B-06
1/4w
M1 01020159
1SSA-01 120 SP M2 01020127
1/4w TS WF 1S1A-07 01020128
1/4w M2 01020129
01020055 M2 01020161 01020130
S 01020162
CUST COAT M2 01020211
CHECK EVENT 01020212
3P*
118 CR 01020131
FORUM
1-1/4"-C
112 CR 01020133
1A2-01
S 15cd 01020031 108 CR 01020134
1S1B-01 1A2-05
WF WF M2 01020217 01020054
1/4w 1A2-02 15cd VEST
15cd 1S1B-05
01020218 1S1B-02 1/4w 117
01020219 1/4w
WF WF M2 1A2-04
01020220 15cd
1S1B-04
01020206 FIRE PUMP 1/4w
F
TS TS M2 01020207 01020020
TS TS M2 01030192 EOL 191 1C1-01 IM
EVENTS &
01030193 30cd
FACILITIES ELEV 2
01030194 1S1B-13
HALL
TS TS M2
01030195 1/4w
OFFICE/STOR. E2-1
01030196 01020215 111 STORAGE
1A
TS TS M2 M2 PUMP PHASE
1C
01030197 01020216 EMER. PWR 115

SP = DENOTES FOR STAIR PRESSURIZATION
BPS
BPS
01030198 M1 01020209 1A2-03

TS TS M2
01030199
PUMP RUN
15cd 113 1A1-08
15cd OPEN TO
M1 01020210 01020419
PWR LOSS 1S1B-03
SC = DENOTES FOR SMOKE CONTROL INTERFACE
P
01020204 N1
RFC
TS TS M2 1/4w
NAC TRIGGER
ABOVE
SCP
01020205 S
01020030
TS WF M2 01020248
01020249 01020053
1A1-02
30cd BOOK DROP 1A1-09
95cd 1A1-07 FA = DENOTES FOR FIRE ALARM
P
1S1A-06
FAC
01020154 1S1A-02 110cd

TS M2 01020184 1/4w 119 1/4w 1S1A-05
01020185 24V BELL N1 1/4w
01020186 1C2
TS M2 FIRE
01020187 01020160 EOL UP
1A1-01
TS M2 01020188 CONTROL 15cd
1S1A-01
01020189 CENTER 1/4w LOBBY
01020032 01020033
TS M2 01020190 105
01020191 190
UIO MODULE-1
1A1-03 1A1-05
LVL P2 PHONE N1 01020439 15cd 15cd
1S1A-03
LVL P1 PHONE N1 01020440 UIO MODULE-3 1/4w
E2,5,6 CAB PHONE N1 01020450 FLOOR SPEAKERS 1S1A N1 01020464
ELEV 5-6 LOBBY 1ST FL N1 01020459 FLOOR SPEAKERS 1S1B N1 01020435
ELEV VEST
ELEV 1-2 LOBBY 1ST FL N1 01020462 STAIR A SPEAKER N1 01020436 104 ANN
1A1-06
UIO MODULE-2 STAIR B SPEAKER N1 01020437 75cd
STAIR C SPEAKER N1 01020438 1S1A-04
GENERATOR PHONE N1 01020463 1/4w
FIRE PUMP PHONE N1 01020451 VEST
STAIR A PHONE N1 01020460 1A1-04
STAIR B PHONE N1 01020461 106 15cd
UIO MODULE-4
STAIR C PHONE N1 01020458
LVL P2 SPKR N1 01020433
LVL P1 SPKR N1 01020434
ELEV 2,5,6 SPKR N1 01020432
UP
RECORD DRAWINGS:
8-4-2017
METAL CANOPY
CHANGE SMOKE TO
HEAT RATED FOR
OUTDOORS PENDING
ENGINEER APPROVAL . INSTALL WP
COVER
01020267
EOL
2A2-06 2A2-07
SWITCHGEAR 15cd 110cd
1S2A-12
CUTOFF 1/4w
225B
01020422
ELEV 6 M1
BOOK DROP 2A3-02
87cd
E6-2
2A2-05 201 1S2A-14
VEST 15cd 1/4w
RECYCLING 200
ELECTRICAL
225 VAULT OUTDOOR
TRASH 2A1-02
226 CAFE
224 87cd
1S2A-07
2A2-02 SEATING
95cd
1/4w 1S2A-09
1/4w
2A2-03
BOOKSTORE 30cd CAFE
1S2A-10
270 1/4w 280
HALL 2A3-01 2A3-03

HOMERUN TO 95cd 87cd
CR FCU 202 1S2A-13 1S2A-15
M1 M1 BPS 2A 1/4w 1/4w
01020430
2A2-04 01020429 01020431
01020289 75cd
1S2A-11
1/4w
2A2-01
15cd
M1
010 MECH 01020415
01020291 204
18 CHASE
M1
T CR
0102
ELEC B 0376 1S2A-20
01020413 1/4w
2A1-03 2A1-01 293 M2 01020414 EOL EOL
75cd 2A3-
102cd 1S2A-08 BC BEAM CONTROL M1 ELEC W TLT 15c 07
1S2A-06 1/4w PANEL 2A4 01020425 1S2Ad
1/4w 24VDC 283 1/4w -19
SHIPPING/ RISER DN 281 2A3-04
01020281 1SSC-02 70cd
LOADING RECEIVING 3/4"C-4A 1/4w 1S2A-16
01020292 1/4w
DOCK 222
223 BPS-2A 01020261 TS WF
01020282 2A3-
BPS-2B 01020252 M2 01020407 15c 06
S
01020408 d
N1 01020377 IM 01020263 ELEV 4 M TLT 1S2A
1/4w -18
DN
LVL 2 SPEAKERS N1 01020378
E4-2 282 2A3-05
75cd
LVL 2 SPEAKERS N1 01020379 1S2A-17
RISER 1"C UP 1/4w
ELEV 1 CAB SPKR. N1 01020380 2B2-01 M1
2P,4A,F 110cd
ELEV 1 CAB PHONE N1 01020406 01020260 01020427
1S2A-01
M2 01020384
SE
LVL 2 PHONES N1 01020405 1/4w
LVL 2 DOOR RELAY N1 01020383 01020385 01020262
CHA
R1
M1 01020396 ELEV 3
RISER 1"C E3-2 INFORMATION
2P,4A,F RESOURCE
01020280 AREA
203
2A1-04
15cd
1S2A-05 2A1-05
1/4w 75cd
1S2A-02
1/4w
DEL/ MTRLS
TELCOM
STAFF HANDLING
RAMP DOWN TO 291
RESTROOM STAFF
LEVEL P1
DEL / 219 217
MTRLS
HANDLING
DN
MANAGER
220
EOL 2A1-06
2A1-09 15cd
15cd 1S2A-03
1S2A-04 1/4w
1/4w SECURITY
2A1-08 2A1-07 ROOM
15cd 15cd
WINDOW OPEN CTRL CR 01020381 216
WINDOW OPEN MON
M2 01020390
WINDOW CLOSE MON 01020391 01020279
LARGE 2B1-01 LACTATION
HALL 75cd ELEV 1
OPERABLE 1S2B-01
218
WINDOW FOR 213 1/4w E1-2
01020266
SMOKE
CONTROL 01020255 01020254 SP EOL
R
EOL 1SE1-1 B
EOL 1/4w
2B2-02
WINDOW OPEN CTRL 110cd
CR 01020382 2B1-04
WINDOW OPEN MON 1S2B-02
WINDOW CLOSE MON M2 01020392 75cd 1/4w 2B3-01
CR 01020388
01020393 1S2B-05 15cd
1/4w 1S2B-20 EOL
01020257 1/4w 2B3-02
HOMERUN TO EOL ELEV 1 MECH 95cd
CR 01020226
01020277 1S2B-19
01020256 LOBBY BPS 2B 01020275 CTRL CL 290 1/4w
S
2B1-03 204 IM E1-0
30cd W TLT 01020251 S
M TLT 1S2B-04 VENDING
1/4w UP
211 212 215 01020278 TS WF
4 SMALL 01020276
M2 01020423
OPERABLE 1SSB-02 01020424
WINDOWS 1/4w STAIR B
FOR SMOKE 01020274 UP
CONTROL
01020397
CR STB-2
01020398
CR
TS WF CR 01020399
M2 01020409 2B1-02
VT R1 CR 01020400
01020410 F
STAIR A 75cd
1S2B-03
P1 M1 01020401
STA-2 1/4w
1SSA-02
GALLERY 1/4w
208
1SSA-03
1/4w 01020273
SP SP
VEST
M1 01020421 SHARED 1S2B-13
1/4w
SP
1S2B-16
1S2B-17
1/4w
209 M2 01020386 LEARNING 1/4w
01020387 01020416
LARGE M1
205 CR 01020461
CUST 2B2-03 01020272
OPERABLE M1 01020403
WINDOW FOR 2B1-05 210
75cd
1S2B-09
SMOKE 01020258
75cd MECH 1/4w
EOL
2B2-06
CONTROL
1S2B-06
1/4w CHASE
M1
01020403 15cd
1S2B-12
EVENT
01020389
M1 01020419
1/4w
FORUM
FA = DENOTES FOR FIRE ALARM
WINDOW OPEN CTRL CR
WINDOW OPEN MON
WINDOW CLOSE MON
M2 01020394
01020395
M1
EOL 2B2-05 108
01020402 2B1-07 15cd
ELEV 2 01020265 1S2B-11
30cd 1/4w
1S2B-08
E2-2 1/4w
SHARED
01020270 01020271 LEARNING
UP SP
206 1S2B-14
SP SP
1S2B-15 1S2B-18
1/4w 1/4w 1/4w
2B2-04
FIRE RATED BOX 15cd
1S2B-10
01020264 1/4w
2B1-06
95cd
1S2B-07
1/4w
01020269 SHARED
LEARNING
207
01020268
DETECTORS 251-292
MODULES 376-414
RECORD DRAWINGS:
8-4-2017
ALIS
MANAGER CIRCULATION
343 SUPPORT
2S3A-10 345
1/4w
CIRCULATION 3A3-02
30cd
SUPPORT 2S3A-02
2S3A-09 1/4w
1/4w MANAGER
ALIS ASSIST 346
MANAGER 3A3-03
75cd
342 2S3A-03
1/4w 3A1-
95cd01
2S3A 3A1-
1/4w -19 75cd02
CIRCULATION 3A3-01 2S3A
1/4w -20
15cd
SUPPORT 2S3A-01
STORAGE
1/4w TEEN'S
3A3-07
TEEN'S
EOL AREA
3A3-08
15cd 347 STORAGE
95cd
2S3A-08 348 3A1-
2S3A-11
1/4w 355 95cd03
2S3A
1/4w
ALIS 1/4w -21
EOL
2S3A-04 3A2-03 3A2-
STORAGE 1/4w
15cd 95cd06
2S3A-15 2S3A
1/4w 1/4w -18
341
LIFE
3A3-06
3A3-04
15cd
SAFETY 3A2-02
M1 01020457
15cd 2S3A-05 30cd 3A2-04 CR
2S3A-07 1/4w 393 2S3A-14 15cd
1/4w 1/4w 2S3A-16
1/4w MECH 3A1-04 MECHANICAL 0AH10U 23-10453
CHASE 15cd 392
3A3-05 2S3A-22
1/4w
30cd 01020316
2S3A-06 BPS 3A*
1/4w BPS 3B* CR 01020458
NAC TRIGGER N1 01020441 01020317 ELEV 5
S VEST ELEC
S
SP FLOOR SPEAKERS N1 01020442 E5-3
2S3A-12
1/4w
FLOOR SPEAKERS N1 01020443
344 395 01020314
FLOOR FIREPHONE N1 01020444
OPEN SERVER FLOOR DOOR RELAY N1 01020445 TS WF
OFFICE 3BX 24VDC
RISER STAIR C
396 R1 3/4"C-4A 01020318 M2
STC-3
SUITE 3RD FLOOR 01020411
340 3A2-05
ATRIUM 01020412 VEST
110cd 01030312
3A2-01
01020253 2S3A-17
300 303
IM 1/4w
30cd 3A1-
2S3A-13 1SSC-03 75cd05
1/4w DOWN TO 1/4w 2S3A
1/4w -23
2ND SC23-4
01020315 UP 1/4w
3A4-01 CHASE ELEV 4
30cd HOMERUN TO RISER 1"C EOL
2S3B-01 SPKR CC2
CR S
M1 01020455 2P,3A,F E4-3
1/4w 01020452 01020296
AHU 3-2 RISER 1"C
3A4-02
MECHANICAL 2P,4A,F
95cd 394
2S3B-02 ELEV 3 EOL
3A1-
1/4w
E3-3 75c 06
d
2S3A
1/4w -24
EOL
HOMERUN TO
BPS-3B
3RD FLOOR
ATRIUM
OPEN 300
OFFICE 3A4-03
SUITE 75cd
01020304 UP TO
2S3B-04
4TH
334 1/4w
SP
2S3B-03
1/4w
UP
STAFF AREA
319
3B4-01
75cd
3A4-04 2S3B-34
95cd 1/4w
2S3B-05 01020303 EOL
1/4w 3B1-02
3B1-01 75cd 01020308
15cd 3B1-04 F
2S3B-21 110cd
1/4w 2S3B-22
1/4w
01020310 1SSB-03
1/4w
3A4-05 01020306 01020307
15cd
2S3B-06
1/4w M TLT 3B1-03 3B2-09 UP STAIR B
EOL 15cd VEST
318 15cd
2S3B-20 2S3B-19 1SSB-04 STB-3
1/4w 1/4w 302 1/4w
TLT CRAFT
333 AREA
SP 307 01020309
2S3B-07 TS WF
1/4w UP TS WF
W TLT
M2 01020448
OPEN M2 01020446
317 01020449
1SSA-04 3B3-01
01020447 CL
OFFICE 1/4w 75cd
2S3B-25
SUITE STAIR A 3B1-05
EOL
3B1-06
1/4w 307A
UP 75cd
334 STA-3 2S3B-23 75cd
2S3B-24
1/4w 1/4w 3B4-02
75cd
3B2-08 2S3B-33
1/4w
15cd
2S3B-18
1/4w
FAMILY TLT 3B4-03
1SSA-05 15cd
1/4w 3B2-07 316 2S3B-32
15cd 1/4w
VEST 01020302
310 CIRC
WP
3A4-06 01030297
315
95cd
2S3B-08
1/4w
CUST M1 01020465
CHASE M1 01020404 FAMILY TLT
320 314
3B2-05
EOL
3A4-07
30cd
M1 01020456
3B2-06
15cd
2S3B-16
15cd CHILDRENS
2S3B-09 1/4w 2S3B-17
1/4w SC = DENOTES FOR SMOKE CONTROL INTERFACE
1/4w 306
TELECOM
391
S
SP CR
2S3B-10
2S3B-11 01020454 01030299
1/4w 1/4w 3B4-04
AHU 3-2 MECH 95cd
3B4-05
2S3B-31
BRANCH 390 1/4w 70cd
2S3B-30
ACCS SERVICES 3B3-02 1/4w
95cd
MANAGER MANAGER EOL 2S3B-26
3B3-03 1/4w
329 326 YOUTH 95cd WP
2S3B-27
1/4w
SERVICES
STORAGE 3B2-04
30cd
324 2S3B-15
1/4w
3B2-01
OPEN 95cd
2S3B-12 3B2-03
OFFICE 1/4w 15cd
2S3B-14
SUITE 1/4w
321 3B2-02
15cd YOUTH
2S3B-13
1/4w PROGRAM EOL
SPECIALIST 3B4-07
87cd WP
3B4-06
87cd
WP
323 2S3B-28
1/4w
2S3B-29
1/4w
YOUTH
SERVICES
READING
PORCH
309
RECORD DRAWINGS:
8-4-2017
4 SMALL OPERABLE WINDOWS
FOR SMOKE CONTROL
DIVISION
MANAGER WINDOW OPEN CTRL CR 01030149
SP 449 STAFF WINDOW OPEN MON M2 01030145
2S4A-04 BREAKROOM WINDOW CLOSE MON 01030146
1/4w
451
01030016
01030015
4A3-01
75cd
2S4A-07
1/4w
4A1-04
110cd
4A1-03 2S4A-19
75cd 1/4w
2S4A-18
1/4w
4A3-02
95cd 4A1-02
2S4A-06
1/4w 95cd
4A3-03 2S4A-17
95cd 4A2-07 1/4w
30cd
01030014
2S4A-05
1/4w 2S4A-13
COPY/PRINT 1/4w 01030017 READING
468 ROOM
OPEN PERIODICALS
OFFICE 472
4A2-04 470
SUITE 30cd
441 M TLT T
B
4A2-06
442 15cd
2S4A-12
1/4w
4A2-05
15cd W TLT 01030013 M1 01030130
2S4A-11
1/4w 443 M1 01030127 CR
01030134 AHU 4-1

CENTRAL 01030133
CR 4A2-08
75cd
MECH S
STORAGE 2S4A-14 CHASE
TELCOM 1/4w 01030034
456 492 01030002
4A2-02 ELEV 5 4A1-05
4A2-03 30cd 4A1-06
CENTRAL 15cd 30cd E5-4 30cd
2S4A-09
1/4w
2S4A-10 ELEC 2S4A-20
1/4w 2S4A-21
STORAGE 1/4w M2
01030155 MECHANICAL 1/4w
494 01030156 4A1-01
457 4A3-05
BC BEAM CONTROL
15cd
2S4A-16 TS WF 495
PANEL 24VDC
75cd 6C4 1/4w
2S4A-02 M2 1SSC-05
4A3-04 1/4w STAIR C 1/4w
75cd 01030001 01030143
2S4A-03
1/4w CR
SHARED 01030144 STC-4
CENTRAL LEARNING
01030131 VEST
STORAGE AHU 4-2 4A2-01 010 471
1SSC-04
TRAINING 30cd IM 300
3 ELEV 4 1/4w 403
458 2S4A-08 5
01030004
ROOM 1/4w E4-4
455 S EOL
01030003
IT CLOSET 4A2-09
01030033 75cd
459 MECHANICAL 2S4A-15
M1 01030128 1/4w
CHASE
BPS 4A* 4A1-
493 75c 07
BPS 4B*
2S4Ad EOL
01020470
ELEV 3 1/4w -22
NAC TRIGGER N1
EOL FLOOR SPEAKERS N1
S
01030135
E3-4 EOL
4A3-06 R
75cd FLOOR SPEAKERS N1 01030136
2S4A-01 B
1/4w FLOOR FIREPHONE N1 01030137
FLOOR DOOR RELAY N1 01030138
4BX
R1 24VDC
UP TO DOWN TO
5TH 3RD
BOV KWAY
E
STAFF
L
OPE FL WA
CEILING
CONFERENCE EDGE
NA
420 01030006
4TH
4A4-01
75cd
2S4B-01
1/4w
4A4-02
75cd
CEILING
2S4B-02
1/4w
STAFF AREA 4B1-01 EDGE
419 30cd
2S4B-28
1/4w 4TH FLOOR
ATRIUM
400
TLT 01030007
437
R
B
B
4B1-02
T 75cd
2S4B-27
1/4w 2S4B-29
4B3-01 4B3-06
30cd 1/4w 01030011 1SSB-05
30cd
4B2-01 SP 2S4B-32 1/4w
30cd 4A4-05 1/4w
2S4B-6 4A4-03 4A4-04 15cd 01030012
1/4w 15cd 30cd
2S4B-4
M TLT 2S4B-5
TS WF
2S4B-3 1/4w 4B1-03
1/4w 1/4w 418 30cd M2 01030139
2S4B-26
1/4w 1SSB-06 01030140
W TLT 1/4w
STAIR
417 SHARED SHARED B
01030005
LEARNING LEARNING
408 409 FICTION
MARKETING TS WF 4B3-03
405
4B3-02
STORAGE M2 01030141 30cd
30cd
EOL
435 1SSA-06
01030142 4B3-05
4B3-07
75cd
95cd
01030008 1/4w STAIR A 2S4B-31
2S4B-33
1/4w
1/4w
EOL STA-4 4B3-04
4A4-06 30cd
95cd 4B1-04
75cd 2S4B-30
2S4B-7 1/4w
1/4w 2S4B-25
1/4w
EOL
4B4-05
OPEN 15cd
4B1-05
OFFICE 30cd
2S4B-34
VEST 01030009 1/4w
SUITE 1SSA-07
401 1/4w 01030021 01030018
421 01030036 IM VEST 01030023 01030022
S
413
CHASE 01030041
CUST
4B2-04
30cd
4B2-03
30cd 416
2S4B-10
1/4w
2S4B-9
1/4w
M1
01030126 SP = DENOTES FOR STAIR PRESSURIZATION
4B2-02
15cd
2S4B-8
1/4w 01030025 FA = DENOTES FOR FIRE ALARM
SECURE
FILE S
MECH EOL
4B1-07
STORAGE 01030032 EOL
95cd 4B4-04
490 2S4B-41 2S4B-40 95cd
431 TELCOM 1/4w 1/4w 2S4B-35
1/4w
AHU 4-3 491 SP SP
4B4-03
CR 01030132 2S4B-39 87cd
2S4B-13 2S4B-12 2S4B-11 1/4w 2S4B-36
1/4w 1/4w 1/4w 1/4w
SECURE
FILE 4B1-06
95cd WP
01030028
CLOSET 2S4B-24
HDR 2S4B-22
1/4w 01030019
MANAGER FINANCE FINANCE 1/4w 422 EOL
4B2-05 4B2-07 01030027
75cd 429 428 15cd
2S4B-14 430 2S4B-23 4 OPERABLE
1/4w 1/4w DOORS FOR
SMOKE
4B2-06 DOOR OPEN CTRL CONTROL
SP 2S4B-15 01030024 01030026 CR 01030150
1/4w 30cd
2S4B-16 01030153
1/4w DOOR OPEN MON M2
DOOR CLOSE MON 01030154
DOOR OPEN CTRL
CR 01030151
DOOR OPEN MON
DOOR CLOSE MON M2 01030147
01030148
2S4B-17 4B4-01 6 OPERABLE

1/4w WP
2S4B-20
FINANCE 2S4B-21 FINANCE 87cd
2S4B-38
DOORS FOR
SP
2S4B-18 2S4B-19 ASST. MANAGER 1/4w
1/4w
SMOKE
ASST. 1/4w
1/4w 427 CONTROL
LIBRARY 1/4w DIRECTOR 426
DIRECTOR
DIRECTOR 425 4B4-02
424 87cd
WP 2S4B-37
423 1/4w
READING
PORCH
412
RECORD DRAWINGS:
8-4-2017
CEILING
OFFSET
CEILING
OFFSET
3S5A-12
1/4w
5A1-05
5A3-01 SP
5A2-06 SP 95cd
95cd 95cd SP 3S5A-14
3S5A-06 5A1-04
3S5B-02 3S5B-01 5A2-07 95cd 1/4w
1/4w 1/4w 3S5A-07
1/4w 1/4w 95cd 3S5A-13
CEILING 3S5A-08 1/4w CEILING
1/4w
OFFSET OFFSET
LIFE
SP SAFETY M1 01030166
3S5B-03 595
1/4w 01030160
CR
MECHANICAL
596 AHU 5-1
SERVICE MECH
TELCOM VESTIBULE
5A1-02
75cd
S
592 01030031 3S5A-10 CHASE 01030040

527 1/4w
5A1-06
5A2-04
01030049 30cd
SHARED 15cd
3S5A-04 ELEV 5 3S5A-15
5A2-05 5A2-03 1/4w
LEARNING 15cd
1/4w
F
15cd E5-5
TS W
3S5A-05
522 1/4w 3S5A-03
1/4w 1SSC-07
5A1-03
M2 0103 1/4w
75cd 0103 0171
01030047 3S5A-11 0172
UP
SHARED 1/4w
5A3-02 5A1-01 STAIR C
95cd
ELEC 75cd LEARNING 1SSC
VEST
01030045
1/4w -06
3S5B-04
1/4w 010
3S5A-09 STC-5
594 IM
300 AREA
37 IS WITHIN THE1/4w 531 533 5A1-07 EOL
S 75cd
OPEN TO ABOVE 3S5A-16
1/4w EOL
SHARED AHU 5-2 01030038 01030048
LEARNING 5A2-02
SECTION AND IS
30cd ELEV 4
COVERED BY BEAM CORRIDOR
523 3S5A-02
E4-5
CEILING 1/4w M1 01030164 SMOKE DETECTORS; 532
CHASE
OFFSET
5A2-01
REFERENCE LEVEL 6
15cd
3S5A-01
MECHANICAL DRAWING.ELEV 3
1/4w 593 E3-5
SP
BPS-5A*
3S5B-05
1/4w BPS-5B
NAC TRIGGER N1 01020471 01030053
S
FLOOR SPEAKERS N1 01030152
UP TO FLOOR SPEAKERS N1 01030157
6TH FLOOR FIREPHONE
FLOOR DOOR RELAY
01030054 R1 5B4
24VDC
CEILING
EDGE
5TH FL WALKWA
Y CEILING
OPEN TO ABO
AREA IS WITHIN THE OPEN TO VE EDGE
5A3-03 ABOVE SECTION AND IS
95cd CEILING
3S5B-06 COVERED BY BEAM SMOKE
1/4w EDGE
DETECTORS; REFERENCE
LEVEL 6 DRAWING.
01030050
5TH FLOOR
01030055 AREA IS WITHIN THE OPEN TO ABOVE SECTION AND IS COVERED
ATRIUM
BY BEAM SMOKE DETECTORS; REFERENCE LEVEL 6 DRAWING.
500 DOWN TO
5A4-01 010300051
4TH
110cd
3S5B-27 5A4- CEILING
1/4w 75c 04 5TH FLOOR
SP EOL 3S5B d EDGE
1/4w -25
010300052 ATRIUM 1SSB
3S5B-07
1/4w 1/4w -07
500 5B3-05
75cd
3S5B-21
5A4-03 1/4w
30cd EOL
TS WF
M TLT 5A4-05
UP
30cd VEST 1SSB-08 EOL
M2 01030168
519 3S5B-24 01030169
5A4-02
1/4w 512 1/4w
15cd
3S5B-26 010300029 STAIR B
1/4w
SHARED SHARED 010300046 STB-5
TS WF
LEARNING LEARNING
010300030
UP M2 01030167 508 509 EOL
01030168
5B3-02 5B3-04
1SSA-08 30cd 30cd
EOL
5A3-04 1/4w W TLT 5B2-01
5B3-01
95cd STAIR A 75cd
3S5B-15 75cd
3S5B-08 518 1/4w 3S5B-23
1/4w CEILING STA-5 CEILING 1/4w
EOL
OFFSET OFFSET 5B2-04
75cd
3S5B-20
1/4w
VEST 5B3-03
30cd
1SSA-09
515 3S5B-22
EOL 1/4w
01030044 1/4w 01030043 5A4-06
VEST 30cd
516
01030042
S
CHASE CUST
SP
517
3S5B-09 01030165
1/4w M1
01030039 AHU 5-3

5B1-01 MECH
15cd 590 TELCOM SC = DENOTES FOR SMOKE CONTROL INTERFACE
3S5B-10
591 SP SP
1/4w
3S5B-16 5B2-02 3S5B-18
1/4w
5B2-03 FA = DENOTES FOR FIRE ALARM
1/4w 95cd 95cd
3S5B-17 3S5B-19
1/4w 1/4w
EOL CEILING
5B1-03 5B1-05
95cd
OFFSET
15cd 3S5B-14
3S5B-12 1/4w
1/4w BOOKS ON
DEMAND
5B1-02
511
95cd
3S5B-11
1/4w
CEILING
OFFSET
5B1-04
30cd
3S5B-13
1/4w
RECORD DRAWINGS:
8-4-2017
M2
02040177
02040176
M2
02040178
UIO MODULE IN MFC CABINET 02040179 UIO MODULE IN MFC CABINET
M2
02040180 02040183
02040171 02040181 M2
UIO MODULE IN MFC CABINET M2 02040170 02040182
02040172 CR 02040146 M2
02040184
M2
02040153 M2
02040173 02040185
02040152 CR 02040147 02040186
02040174 M2
M2
02040154 M2 02040175 CR 02040148 02040187
02040155 CR 02040143 CR 02040149
M2
02040156
02040157 CR 02040144 CR 02040150
CR 02040134 CR 02040145 CR 02040151
CR 02040135
CR 02040136
02040005 IM
FLOOR SPEAKERS 02040189 N1
M2
02040159
02040158 TS
M2
02040160
02040161 M1 M2
02040162
M2
02040163 02040209 02040199
M2 M2 02040200
M2 CR 02040137
M2 6B4-02 M2
02040201 02040203 CR 02040138 0204000615cd MFC MFC MFC 02040197
02040202 02040204 02040193 IM
02040195 02040198
CR 02040139 02040196
02040194
6B4-01
MFC
NW MECH 110cd NE MECH EOL
3SM-01
MEZZ 1/4w UIO MODULE IN MFC CABINET MEZZ 6B4-03
75cd
MFC
792 M2
02040165 791 3SM-02
1/4w
02040164
02040166 EOL
TS M1 02040211 M2 02040167 WF
MFC
TS
M2
02040168
02040169 M2
0 20
CR 02040140 020440205
0206 TS
CR 02040141
M1
CR 02040142 02040207

RECORD DRAWINGS:
8-4-2017
SP 3SE4-1 SP 3SE3-1
1/4w 1/4w
EOL
EOL
CR01030400 CR 01030396
CR 01030401 CR 01030397
CR 01030402 CR 01030398
VT R1 CR 01030175 VT R1 CR 01030170
P1 M1 01030404 P1 M1 01030403
01030255
01030311
LOCATE WITHIN 2FT OF

SPRINKLER HEAD
NON-FICTION
FBU 620 FBU
R1 R1
6C1 6C1
01030296 01030307
6A1-02
95cd
01030282 3S6A-13
1/4w
6A1-06 6A2-01
6C1 R1 01030298 95cd 95cd
01030297 01030284 01030281 01030303 01030299 3S6A-17 3S6A-19 01030306
6A1-03 1/4w 6A1-07 EOL 1/4w
FBU 15cd 15cd
3S6A-14 3S6A-18 FBU
1/4w 1/4w
SP SP R1
S1-1 6C1
6A3-06 3S6A-06 6A3-05 6A3-04 1/4w
95cd FBU 1/4w 95cd 95cd
3S6A-05 3S6A-07 3S6A-08
1/4w R1 1/4w 1/4w
6C1
01030305
01030300
6A2-02
01030288 29cd
01030301 01030295 01030302 3S6A-20
SP
1/4w
3S6A-15
01030304 1/4w
6C1
M1 01030389 R1
01030292 01030290 6A2-03
01030310IM FBU 95cd
NON-FICTION
6C1 MECH MECHANICAL 3S6A-21
1/4w
EOL R1
6C1 R1
SHARED TELCOM SERVICE 620 CHASE 695
01030286 01030283 FBU
FBU LEARNING VESTIBULE 6A1-04 AHU 6-1
692 CR 01020382 30cd 6A2-04
613 619 01030293
S
15cd
01030394 3S6A-22
SP
01030395ELEV 1/4w 6A2-05
3S6A-04
6A3-07
15cd
M2 501030314 01030254 70cd
6A3-03 BEAM CONTROL 3S6A-23
1/4w 3S6A-03 30cd E5-6
BC PANEL 24VDC 01030289
1/8w 1/4w
6A3-02
15cd
3S6A-09
1/8w 6BX SHARED
3S6A-10
1/4w ELEC LEARNING
6A1-05
SHARED 694 621 30cd STAIR C 01030287
3S6A-16 UP
LEARNING 6A1-01 1/4w 01030390STC-6
6C1 R1 75cd M2 01030391 6A2-06
R1 614 01030294 3S6A-12 T B
TS WF
30cd
3S6A-24
FBU 6C1
AHU 6-2 0103 ELEV01030313
4
1/4w VEST EOL 1/4w
FBU 6A3-08 6A3-01 0251 1SSC-09
15cd
3S6A-02
30cd IM E4-6 DN 601 1/4w
1/8w 3S6A-11 UP
1/4w
01030291 1SSC-08 01030308
1/4w
M1 01030383
6A3-09 EOL S
6A4-01 15cd
01030285 75cd 3S6A-01
3S6B-01 01030281 1/8w 01030252
ELEV 3
01030312
EOL EOL
1/4w
SHARED E3-6
LEARNING
FBU MECHANICAL MECH BPS 6A
615 R1 6C2 693 CHASE BPS-6B BPS-6C
R1
6C2 N1 01020472 NAC TRIGGER
T S
FBU N1 01030377 FLOOR SPEAKERS
B
N1 01030378 FLOOR SPEAKERS
FLOOR FIREPHONE
24VDC
FL. FAN RELAYS 6C1
FL. FAN RELAYS 24VDC

6C2
FL. DOOR RELAY
N1 01030407 ELEV 3 SPEAKER
N1 01030408 ELEV 4 SPEAKER

NON-FICTION EOL
N1 01030405 ELEV 3 FIREPHONE
6A4-02 620 N1 01030406
95cd ELEV 4 FIREPHONE 6A2-07
EOL 87cd
01030276 3S6B-02 01030280
1/4w 3S6A-25
WP 1/4w
B
DOWN TO
5TH
01030278 01030279
6B3-01
15cd
3S6B-18
1/4w
6C2 R1
FBU 6A4-03
95cd
01030268
3S6B-03 WF
1/4w 6B2-02
15cd 6A2-08 EOL
M1 01030176
3S6B-16 29cd M2 01030174
1/4w 3S6A-26 EOL TS 01030173
M TLT R
1/4w UP
6B2-01 610 B UP
15cd WP
3S6B-17
01030256 1/4w
W TLT
WP
STAIR A
609 6B3-03 EOL UP
01030277 87cd
STA-6 01030267 3S6B-21 EOL
UP
01030266 1/4w
6B2-03
TS 30cd
6A4-04 1SSA-10 M2 3S6B-15 OPEN STAIRWELL. 3FT
95cd
1/4w WF 1/4w FBU RAILING SURROUND
3S6B-04 01030387 6B2-05 6B2-06 EOL
1/4w 6C2 R1
01030388 95cd EOL 95cd
3S6B-13 3S6B-19
1/4w 1/4w
EOL
1SSA-11 6B2-04
1/4w 15cd
3S6B-14
1/4w
EOL
01030265
VEST SC = DENOTES FOR SMOKE CONTROL INTERFACE
01030273 01030257 602 01030258 VEST FA = DENOTES FOR FIRE ALARM
CUST 603
MECH 608
CHASE
SEATING
604
AHU 6-3
SP 3S6B-05
1/4w
MECH 01030263 6B1-05 EOL 01030264

6B1-01 15cd
3S6B-12
30cd 690 1/4w
3S6B-08
1/4w FBU
01040258
01030275 01030270
S 6C2
R1 TELCOM
FBU
691
6C2 R1 FBU
FBU R1 6C2
WP
01030309 6C2 R1 6B3-02
IM 87cd
FBU 3S6B-20
01030271 1/4w
R1 R1
6C2 6C2
6B1-02
FBU 15cd
FBU 3S6B-09 ROOF DECK
R1 1/4w 6B1-03 6B1-04
6C2 FBU 95cd 75cd 627
3S6B-10 3S6B-11
6A4-05 R1 1/4w
95cd 1/4w
01030274 6C2
3S6B-06
1/4w
NON-FICTION
620
6A4-06 EOL
15cd
3S6B-07
1/4w
01030259 01030260 01030261 01030262

SHARED
LEARNING
605
01030272 01030269
RECORD DRAWINGS:
8-4-2017
FIRE ALARM AND EMERGENCY COMMUNICATION SYSTEM RECORD OF COMPLETION
To be completed by the system installation contractor at the time of system acceptance and approval.
It shall be permitted to modify this form as needed to provide a more complete and/or clear record.
Insert N/A in all unused lines.
Attach additional sheets, data, or calculations as necessary to provide a complete record.
1. PROPERTY INFORMATION
Name of property: CITY OF AUSTIN PUBLIC LIBRARY
Address: 710 WEST CEASER CHAVEZ
Description of property:
Occupancy type:
Name of property representative:
Address:
Phone: Fax: E-mail:
Authority having jurisdiction over this property: AUSTIN FIRE DEPARTMENT
Phone: Fax: E-mail:
2. INSTALLATION, SERVICE, AND TESTING CONTRACTOR INFORMATION
Installation contractor for this equipment: FIRETROL
Address: 4616 WEST HOWARD LANE , STE. 7-700
License or certification number: ACR-1751168
Phone: 512-687-0115 Fax: 512-687-0120 E-mail:

Service organization for this equipment: STANELY
Address:
License or certification number:
Phone: Fax: E-mail:
A contract for test and inspection in accordance with NFPA standards is in effect as of:
Contracted testing company: STANLEY
Address:
Phone: Fax: E-mail:
Contract expires: Contract number: Frequency of routine inspections:
3. DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM OR SERVICE
Fire alarm system (nonvoice)

Fire alarm with in-building fire emergency voice alarm communication system (EVACS)
Mass notification system (MNS)
Combination system, with the following components:
Fire alarm EVACS MNS Two-way, in-building, emergency communication system
Other (specify):
NFPA 72, Fig. 10.18.2.1.1 (p. 1 of 12)
Copyright © 2009 National Fire Protection Association. This form may be copied for individual use other than for resale. It may not be copied for commercial sale or distribution.
3. DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM OR SERVICE (continued)
NFPA 72 edition: 2013 Additional description of system(s):
3.1 Control Unit

Manufacturer: EDWARDS Model number: EST-3
3.2 Mass Notification System This system does not incorporate an MNS
3.2.1 System Type:

In-building MNS—combination
In-building MNS—stand-alone Wide-area MNS Distributed recipient MNS
Other (specify):
3.2.2 System Features:

Combination fire alarm/MNS MNS autonomous control unit Wide-area MNS to regional national
alerting interface
Local operating console (LOC) Direct recipient MNS (DRMNS) Wide-area MNS to DRMNS interface
Wide-area MNS to high-power speaker array (HPSA) interface In-building MNS to wide-area MNS interface
Other (specify):
3.3 System Documentation

An owner’s manual, a copy of the manufacturer’s instructions, a written sequence of operation, and a copy of
the numbered record drawings are stored on site. Location: FIRE COMMAND
3.4 System Software This system does not have alterable site-specific software.
Operating system (executive) software revision level: V 5.31
Site-specific software revision date: 7/28/2017 Revision completed by: FIRETROL
A copy of the site-specific software is stored on site. Location: DOCUMENT CABINET
3.5 Off-Premises Signal Transmission This system does not have off-premises transmission.
Name of organization receiving alarm signals with phone numbers:
Alarm: STANLEY Phone: 1-877-476-2368
Supervisory: STANLEY Phone: 1-877-476-2368
Trouble: STANLEY Phone: 1-877-476-2368
Entity to which alarms are retransmitted: Phone:

Method of retransmission:
If Chapter 26, specify the means of transmission from the protected premises to the supervising station:
If Chapter 27, specify the type of auxiliary alarm system: Local energy Shunt Wired Wireless
NFPA 72, Fig. 10.18.2.1.1 (p. 2 of 12)
4. CIRCUITS AND PATHWAYS
4.1 Signaling Line Pathways
4.1.1 Pathways Class Designations and Survivability

Pathways class: A Survivability level: Quantity: 5
(See NFPA 72, Sections 12.3 and 12.4)
4.1.2 Pathways Utilizing Two or More Media

Quantity: Description:
4.1.3 Device Power Pathways

No separate power pathways from the signaling line pathway
Power pathways are separate but of the same pathway classification as the signaling line pathway
Power pathways are separate and different classification from the signaling line pathway
4.1.4 Isolation Modules

Quantity: 13
4.2 Alarm Initiating Device Pathways

Pathways class: Survivability level: Quantity:

4.2.3 Device Power Pathways

No separate power pathways from the initiating device pathway
Power pathways are separate but of the same pathway classification as the initiating device pathway
Power pathways are separate and different classification from the initiating device pathway
4.3 Non-Voice Audible System Pathways

Pathways class: Survivability level: Quantity:

4.3.3 Appliance Power Pathways

No separate power pathways from the notification appliance pathway
Power pathways are separate but of the same pathway classification as the notification appliance pathway
Power pathways are separate and different classification from the notification appliance pathway
NFPA 72, Fig. 10.18.2.1.1 (p. 3 of 12)
5. ALARM INITIATING DEVICES
5.1 Manual Initiating Devices
5.1.1 Manual Fire Alarm Boxes This system does not have manual fire alarm boxes.
Type and number of devices: Addressable: 1 Conventional: Coded: Transmitter:
Other (specify): SIGA-278
5.1.2 Other Alarm Boxes This system does not have other alarm boxes.
Description:
Type and number of devices: Addressable: Conventional: Coded: Transmitter:
Other (specify):
5.2 Automatic Initiating Devices
5.2.1 Smoke Detectors This system does not have smoke detectors.
Type and number of devices: Addressable: 159 Conventional:
Other (specify): SIGA-PS
Type of coverage: Complete area Partial area Nonrequired partial area

Other (specify):
Type of smoke detector sensing technology: Ionization Photoelectric Multicriteria Aspirating Beam
Other (specify):
5.2.2 Duct Smoke Detectors This system does not have alarm-causing duct smoke detectors.
Other (specify): SIGA-SD
Type of coverage: AHU
Type of smoke detector sensing technology: Ionization Photoelectric Aspirating Beam
5.2.3 Radiant Energy (Flame) Detectors This system does not have radiant energy detectors.
Type and number of devices: Addressable: Conventional:
Other (specify):
Type of coverage:
5.2.4 Gas Detectors This system does not have gas detectors.
Type of detector(s):
Number of devices: Addressable: Conventional:
Type of coverage:
5.2.5 Heat Detectors This system does not have heat detectors.
Type of coverage: Complete area Partial area Nonrequired partial area Linear Spot
Type of heat detector sensing technology: Fixed temperature Rate-of-rise Rate compensated
NFPA 72, Fig. 10.18.2.1.1 (p. 4 of 12)
5. ALARM INITIATING DEVICES (continued)
5.2.6 Addressable Monitoring Modules This system does not have monitoring modules.
Number of devices: 26
5.2.7 Waterflow Alarm Devices This system does not have waterflow alarm devices.
5.2.8 Alarm Verification This system does not incorporate alarm verification.
Number of devices subject to alarm verification: Alarm verification set for seconds
5.2.9 Presignal This system does not incorporate pre-signal.

Number of devices subject to presignal:
Describe presignal functions:
5.2.10 Positive Alarm Sequence (PAS) This system does not incorporate PAS.
Describe PAS:
5.2.11 Other Initiating Devices This system does not have other initiating devices.
Describe:
6. SUPERVISORY SIGNAL-INITIATING DEVICES
6.1 Sprinkler System Supervisory Devices This system does not have sprinkler supervisory devices.
Other (specify): SIGA-CT
6.2 Fire Pump Description and Supervisory Devices This system does not have a fire pump.
Type fire pump: Electric pump Engine
6.2.1 Fire Pump Functions Supervised

Power Running Phase reversal Selector switch not in auto Engine or control panel trouble Low fuel
Other (specify): EMERGENCY POWER
6.3 Duct Smoke Detectors (DSDs) This system does not have DSDs causing supervisory signals.
Type of coverage: F.S.D.
Type of smoke detector sensing technology: Ionization Photoelectric Aspirating Beam
6.4 Other Supervisory Devices This system does not have other supervisory devices.
Describe: VFD-FAULT, FAN-FAULT
NFPA 72, Fig. 10.18.2.1.1 (p. 5 of 12)
7. MONITORED SYSTEMS
7.1 Engine-Driven Generator This system does not have a generator.
7.1.1 Generator Functions Supervised

Engine or control panel trouble Generator running Selector switch not in auto Low fuel
Other (specify):
7.2 Special Hazard Suppression Systems This system does not monitor special hazard systems.
Description of special hazard system(s):
7.3 Other Monitoring Systems This system does not monitor other systems.
Description of special hazard system(s): SMOKE CONTROL- BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM
8. ANNUNCIATORS This system does not have annunciators.
8.1 Location and Description of Annunciators
Location 1: 1ST FLOOR MAIN ENTRY
Location 2:
Location 3:
9. ALARM NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
9.1 In-Building Fire Emergency Voice Alarm Communication System This system does not have an EVACS.
Number of single voice alarm channels: 4 Number of multiple voice alarm channels: 0
Number of speakers: 80 Number of speaker circuits: 27
Location of amplification and sound-processing equipment: FIRE COMMAND
Location of paging microphone stations:

Location 1: FIRE COMMAND
Location 2:
Location 3:
9.2 Nonvoice Notification Appliances This system does not have nonvoice notification appliances.
Horns: With visible: Bells: 1 With visible:
Chimes: With visible:
Visible only: 32 Other (describe):
9.3 Notification Appliance Power Extender Panels This system does not have power extender panels.
Quantity: 19
Locations:
NFPA 72, Fig. 10.18.2.1.1 (p. 6 of 12)
10. MASS NOTIFICATION CONTROLS, APPLIANCES, AND CIRCUITS This system does not have an MNS.
10.1 MNS Local Operating Consoles

Location 1:
Location 2:
Location 3:
10.2 High-Power Speaker Arrays

Number of HPSA speaker initiation zones:
Location 1:
Location 2:
Location 3:
10.3 Mass Notification Devices

Combination fire alarm/MNS visible appliances: MNS-only visible appliances:
Textual signs: Other (describe):
Supervision class:
10.3.1 Special Hazard Notification

This system does not have special suppression predischarge notification.
MNS systems DO NOT override notification appliances required to provide special suppression
predischarge notification.
11. TWO-WAY EMERGENCY COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
11.1 Telephone System This system does not have a two-way telephone system.
Number of telephone jacks installed: 47 Number of warden stations installed:
Number of telephone handsets stored on site: 5
Type of telephone system installed: Electrically powered Sound powered
11.2 Two-Way Radio Communications Enhancement System

This system does not have a two-way radio communications enhancement system.
Percentage of area covered by two-way radio service: Critical areas: % General building areas: %
Amplification component locations:
Inbound signal strength: dBm Outbound signal strength: dBm
Donor antenna isolation is: dB above the signal booster gain
Radio frequencies covered:
Radio system monitor panel location:
NFPA 72, Fig. 10.18.2.1.1 (p. 7 of 12)
11. TWO-WAY EMERGENCY COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS (continued)
11.3 Area of Refuge (Area of Rescue Assistance) Emergency Communications Systems

This system does not have an area of refuge (area of rescue assistance) emergency communications system.
Number of stations: Location of central control point:
Days and hours when central control point is attended:
Location of alternate control point:
Days and hours when alternate control point is attended:
11.4 Elevator Emergency Communications Systems

This system does not have an elevator emergency communications system.
Number of elevators with stations: Location of central control point:
Days and hours when central control point is attended:
Location of alternate control point:
Days and hours when alternate control point is attended:
11.5 Other Two-Way Communication Systems

Describe: FIRE PHONE
12. CONTROL FUNCTIONS
This system activates the following control fuctions:

Hold-open door releasing devices Smoke management HVAC shutdown F/S dampers
Door unlocking Elevator recall Fuel source shutdown Extinguishing agent release
Elevator shunt trip Mass notification system override of fire alarm notification appliances
Other (specify):
12.1 Addressable Control Modules This system does not have control modules.
Number of devices: 82
Other (specify): SIGA-CR
13. SYSTEM POWER
13.1 Control Unit
13.1.1 Primary Power

Input voltage of control panel: Control panel amps:
Overcurrent protection: Type: Amps:
Location (of primary supply panel board):
Disconnecting means location:
13.1.2 Engine-Driven Generator This system does not have a generator.

Location of generator:
Location of fuel storage: Type of fuel:
NFPA 72, Fig. 10.18.2.1.1 (p. 8 of 12)
13. SYSTEM POWER (continued)
13.1.3 Uninterruptible Power System This system does not have a UPS.
Equipment powered by a UPS system:
Location of UPS system:
Calculated capacity of UPS batteries to drive the system components connected to it:
In standby mode (hours): In alarm mode (minutes):
13.1.4 Batteries
Location: Type: Nominal voltage: Amp/hour rating:
Calculated capacity of batteries to drive the system:
Batteries are marked with date of manufacture Battery calculations are attached
13.2 In-Building Fire Emergency Voice Alarm Communication System or Mass Notification System
This system does not have an EVACS or MNS system.

Input voltage of EVACS or MNS panel: EVACS or MNS panel amps:

13.2.4 Batteries
Location: Type: Nominal voltage: Amp/hour rating:
NFPA 72, Fig. 10.18.2.1.1 (p. 9 of 12)
13. SYSTEM POWER (continued)
13.3 Notification Appliance Power Extender Panels This system does not have power extender panels.

Input voltage of power extender panel(s): Power extender panel amps:

13.3.4 Batteries
Location: Type: Nominal voltage: Amp/hour rating: 7

14. RECORD OF SYSTEM INSTALLATION
Fill out after all installation is complete and wiring has been checked for opens, shorts, ground faults, and improper
branching, but before conducting operational acceptance tests.
This is a: New system Modification to an existing system Permit number: 2014-109170 BP
The system has been installed in accordance with the following requirements: (Note any or all that apply.)
NFPA 72, Edition: 2013
NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, Article 760, Edition:

Manufacturer’s published instructions
Other (specify):
System deviations from referenced NFPA standards:
Signed: Printed name: Date:

Organization: Title: Phone:
NFPA 72, Fig. 10.18.2.1.1 (p. 10 of 12)
15. RECORD OF SYSTEM OPERATIONAL ACCEPTANCE TEST
New system
All operational features and functions of this system were tested by, or in the presence of, the signer shown
below, on the date shown below, and were found to be operating properly in accordance with the requirements
for the following:
Modifications to an existing system
All newly modified operational features and functions of the system were tested by, or in the presence of, the
signer shown below, on the date shown below, and were found to be operating properly in accordance with the
requirements of the following:
NFPA 72, Edition: 2013
NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, Article 760, Edition:

Manufacturer’s published instructions
Other (specify):
Individual device testing documentation [Inspection and Testing Form (Figure 14.6.2.4) is attached]

16. CERTIFICATIONS AND APPROVALS
16.1 System Installation Contractor:

This system, as specified herein, has been installed and tested according to all NFPA standards cited herein.

16.2 System Service Contractor:

The undersigned has a service contract for this system in effect as of the date shown below.

16.3 Supervising Station:

This system, as specified herein, will be monitored according to all NFPA standards cited herein.

NFPA 72, Fig. 10.18.2.1.1 (p. 11 of 12)
16. CERTIFICATIONS AND APPROVALS (continued)
16.4 Property or Owner Representative:

I accept this system as having been installed and tested to its specifications and all NFPA standards cited herein.

16.5 Authority Having Jurisdiction:

I have witnessed a satisfactory acceptance test of this system and find it to be installed and operating properly
in accordance with its approved plans and specifications, with its approved sequence of operations, and with all
NFPA standards cited herein.

not signed
NFPA 72, Fig. 10.18.2.1.1 (p. 12 of 12)
Texas Department of Insurance FIRE ALARM INSTALLATION CERTIFICATE
State Fire Marshal’s Office, Mail Code 112-FM After completion of an installation, modification, or addition of a system or single station detector (excluding a one
333 Guadalupe • P. O. Box 149221, Austin, Texas 78714-9221 or two family residence) the licensee shall complete and present this certificate to the owner or their representative
512-305-7900 • 512-305-7910 fax • www.tdi.state.tx.us or post the certificate near the main control panel according to the Fire Alarm Rules 28TAC§34.617
DISTRIBUTION: Original to owner or posted on site at control panel. Copy 1 to main authority having
jurisdiction. Copy 2 Certifying firm to retain in their office for access by SFMO.
Property Name: CITY OF AUSTIN LIBRARY Type of Installation: The system complies with the following codes and standards.
Bldg. or Floor No.: X New Code or Std. Year/Edition Code or Std. Year/Edition
Street: 710 WEST CEASER CHAVEZ BLVD. Modification NFPA 72 2013 IBC / IFC 2012
City / Zip: AUSTIN, TEXAS 78701 Addition NFPA 70
Name of CERTIFYING firm: Firetrol Protection Systems NFPA 101
Austin, Tx 78728
City / State / Zip: Name of nearest Fire Department: AUSTIN FIRE DEPARTMENT
Phone Number: 512.687.0115 Fire Department (non-emergency) Phone: 512-974-0130
ACR- 1751168 Emergency Phone Number: 911
SYSTEM INFORMATION
Control Panel Manufacturer: EDWARDS Model # EST - 3 Other:
Check all the applicable system types below that were installed by the above certifying firm or the system type(s) in which the firm made modifications or additions.
x Fire Alarm/Evacuation x Fire Detection Smoke Damper Control x Sprinkler System Supervision X
x Voice Notification x Elevator Control x HVAC Control/Shutdown x Magnetic Door Holder/Release X
INITIATING DEVICES INITIATING DEVICES NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES SUPERVISORY DEVICES CIRCUIT STYLE CIRCUIT STYLE/CLASS
Type Quantity Type Quantity Type Quantity Type Quantity Quantity Quantity
Smoke Detectors 159 UV/IR 0 Bell, Horn or Chime 1 Valve Tamper Switches 46 SLC 4 NAC Y or B 55
Heat Detectors 13 Isolation Modules 14 Strobe 32 High / Low Air Pressure 6 SLC 6 5 NAC Z or A
Duct Smoke Detectors 63 Kitchen Suppression 1 Speaker 80 Fire Pump 4 SLC 7
Beam Smoke Detectors 5 Sprinkler Flow Switch 26 Horn/Chime/Strobe 0 IDC A
Fire Alarm Boxes 1 Gas Fire Protection Syst. 0 Speaker Strobe 315 IDC B
Fire Phones 58
Annunciation Panel 1
RECORD DRAWINGS Record Drawings (One with original planner’s signature.)

Company FIRETROL Instructions describing, operation, test & maintenance I hereby certify, on behalf of the
City / State AUSTIN, TEXAS Information to aid in establishing an Emergency Evacuation Plan registered certifying firm, that
Planner's Name MARK MCMILLAN The above required documents were supplied to: this fire alarm system has been
License Num. PE or APS APS-0519 Person's name: tested and complies
Date on Plan 6-6-17 Company’s name: with the requirements of Texas
Revision number/date 6 Date: Insurance Code, Art 5.43-2, the
Fire Alarm Rules, the applicable
codes and standards
and the manufacturer's installation requirements.
Signature of Licensee: License Number:

Printed name of Licensee: Date signed:
SF035 Rev. 01/06 FML-009A
not signed

EST Automatic Fire Detection and Alarm

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

EST Automatic Fire Detection and Alarm

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

AUSTIN CENTRAL LIBRARY O & M MANUALS

28 31 00 – FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR:

AUSTIN PUBLIC LIBRARY

Austin, Dallas, Denver, Houston, Lake Charles, Lubbock, Phoenix, Salt

Update the table of contents to include the following:

Project: COA Austin Public Library

Address: 710 W. Cesar Chavez Blvd. – Austin, Texas 78744

Job No.: 47- 000682

THE EXPRESS WARRANTIES CONTAINEDHEREIN ARE FOR A PERIOD OF

Steven White / Operations Manager

QTY. VENDOR MODEL # DESCRIPTION

EQUIPMENT LIST CONTINUED….

QTY. VENDOR MODEL # DESCRIPTION

AREA SMOKE DETECTORS

AREA HEAT DETECTORS

MANUAL PULL STATIONS

CONTROL RELAY MODULE

EQUIPMENT LIST CONTINUED….

QTY. VENDOR MODEL # DESCRIPTION

EQUIPMENT LIST CONTINUED….

QTY. VENDOR MODEL # DESCRIPTION

SPARE PARTS LIST

QTY. VENDOR MODEL # DESCRIPTION

SPARE PARTS LIST

QTY. VENDOR MODEL # DESCRIPTION

AREA HEAT DETECTORS

MANUAL PULL STATIONS

EST3 Base Platform

Overview Standard Features

Page 1 of 4 D ATA S H E E T 85010-0145

Page 2 of 4 D ATA S H E E T 85010-0145

lation costs, provides enhanced supervi- DAMPER S MM LEVEL

Enhanced Reliability & Survivability 1 Pr &

The EST3 uses distributed technology,

Simple-to-install kits provide internal hard-

On the initiating side, intelligent Signature

other system components in this important SI J S S SR J

based systems. With EST3, a panel CPU 1 Pr &

failure does not disable a panel’s ability to 2 Tw/Sh Pr.

provide protection. In the event of a CPU

configuration, a single break or short on Primary Central

Page 3 of 4 D ATA S H E E T 85010-0145

Page 4 of 4 D ATA S H E E T 85010-0145

Overview Standard Features

Page 1 of 4 D ATA S H E E T 85010-0133

ring protocol network.

equal among peers, there is no master on the network. This gives

The 3-RS232 Communication Card mounts to the back of the

Page 2 of 4 D ATA S H E E T 85010-0133

TROUBLE ALARM SUP

Connect to TB1 on 3-CPU3 Module

CENTRAL 3. Class A network data requires one pair

UNIT MODULE 4. Class A audio data requires two pairs

Network Audio Riser PORT #2(isolated)

Page 3 of 4 D ATA S H E E T 85010-0133

Page 4 of 4 D ATA S H E E T 85010-0133

Eight Event Liquid

Standard Features Application

Page 1 of 4 D ATA S H E E T 85010-0135

Page 2 of 4 D ATA S H E E T 85010-0135

The common controls may be easily expanded beyond the Main

13:35:07 02/17/2003 ACT:0020 DIS:0000

ALARM SUPERVISORY TROUBLE MONITOR